Home

MOTOTRBO System Planner

1. System Components and Topologies y s O N ssayojedsig ajowiay pue 2907 YIM 1 M UO0NLIOT 1 M S abessayy X L y m POW 1942 d Y Je1Iq JO S OM 245 q ul SoI pPeY OGULOLOW GZ wnbiy T pow jey 61p Jeujwue pow jey61p UOHE S O1UCD Od SIGOW NS O LOLOW OguLOLON yeulwue Od OWL Jayeaday ey 61q MYOMLAN w eBessayy p yojedsiq uoye007 jeulwue Od epow jey6ip pow jey61p MILOLOW u Jonu i pa oaslaion MYOMLAN Janiag uoneojddy yoiedsiq oabessayy po L sao yoyedsiq uo y2007 es jeulwue Od g Q JaNag UO e907 L 101S C A XY 3 qm 2 yoyedsiq yoredsiq JEN 9 abessay x L 2 MYOMLAN e a JOYNON 80U S Jd uo e007 epow jey 61p epow jey61p uoNe g joUOD NS OPULOLON OguLOLON jeulwue Od yoyedsiq s29 oabessay x nu Z 101IS Jayeaday jeza MYOMLAN 34 Xu OgYLOIOW yoyedsiq Y XL uopeoo7 pow jey6p epow jey6ip ujua NS OSYLOLON wone S JONUOD Od eIGOW AYOMLIN lo 0 lt S OWL NX a19 ebessayy peL oO Q ice 178 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 1 4 GPS Revert in Repeater Mode With the addition of the GPS Revert feature it is now possible to transmit Location Update messages on channels other than the Selected Channel See GPS Revert Channel on page 50 for configuration information The diagram in Figure 3 26 illustrates this concept in its simplest form while opera
2. Figure 3 3 MOTOTRBO Portable Non Display Model The primary buttons of the MOTOTRBO portable offer the user the ability to initiate most system features These buttons and switches should be very familiar to radio users 68007024085 April 2011 148 System Components and Topologies Push to Talk Button The large round Push To Talk button or PTT button is the primary button used to initiate voice transmissions Its location is on the left side of the portable but is still easy to reach for both right handed or left handed users The button is raised from the side and has a raised pattern so that it is easily found even under low light conditions Pressing the PTT button starts a voice transmission on the selected channel This enables the user to simply push and talk Channel Selector Knob The MOTOTRBO portable user chooses his communication environment by twisting the 16 position channel knob on the top of the portable radio This Channel Selector Knob is the main way a user uses to access the system It also has a raised pattern so it too is easy to find under low light conditions Although easy to find it is designed to require some force to turn it so as not to be accidentally rotated through normal user activities Each knob position can be programmed to access a different channel within the radio s programming This allows the user to quickly switch between analog and digital channels and even different groups But
3. Site A Site B Y WAC 1 WAC 1 Al WAC 2 WAC 2 Radio 2 Radio 3 Radio 1 Radio 4 Figure 2 21 One APP Box Supporting Two Wide Area Channels in IP Site Connect Site A Site B Y WAC 1 WAC 1 Radio 2 WAGE WAC Radio 3 Radio 1 Radio 4 Figure 2 22 Two APP Boxes Supporting Two Wide Area Channels in IP Site Connect April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 113 Site A Site B Y WAC 1 WAC 1 Radio 2 Laca LAGS Radio 3 Radio 1 Radio 4 Figure 2 23 APP Boxes Supporting Wide Area Channels and Local Area Channels in IP Site Connect 68007024085 April 2011 114 System Feature Overview 2 14 4 3 Phone Patch in Capacity Plus In Capacity Plus because a repeater can only be connected to one APP box the system can support one phone call per repeater The phone call only uses one channel the other channel can be used for other voice or data services Any voice repeater can be used for phone calls hence the maximum number of APP boxes that can be supported in a Capacity Plus system is equal to the number of voice repeaters in the system The target ID includes the call type and the radio or talkgroup identifier The channel ID is not required because the sys
4. 00 ccccccccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 281 4 11 4 3 Identifying Group IDS 222 okn ten Pceetiet ancl nt ectentieloniee ele 282 4 11 4 4 Assigning Group AliaSes eee eececcseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneaas 282 4 11 5 Determining Which Channel Operates in Repeater Mode or Direct Mode cccccccceccccecceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaenees 283 4 11 6 Determining Feature Assignments cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnaaeeees 283 4 11 6 1 Determining Supervisor Radios 22 ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeees 283 4 11 6 2 Private Callsenter dete sender Aces 283 zie Pro a2 Oe EE ee nee mne a a e STR ee Ee eer EE 284 4 11 6 4 Radio DIS ADC ale sne au suse seecace e ence ae e ee taiea aaee erde 284 4 11 6 5 Remote MoOnintor 2 5 2 ctea li tacit hens at eceetee eres ae cen tenls 284 4 11 6 6 Radio Check cook tet clr Seth ce ted iad ie eatin ie vata etre aes 285 4 1V6 COA Alen nenne ven ase ene ces ee E EE CEEE aE ERES 285 ArT OO RX ONY ae ie detest E e ee Ee E E Sees Eaa tesesteeet 285 4 11 6 9 Remote Voice Dekey 2 ii sscciicsscclne ce aiien niece vere eels 285 4 11 7 Emergency Handling Configuration cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenaeeees 286 4 11 7 1 Emergency Handling User Roles ccc ceeececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 286 4 11 7 2 Emergency Handling Strategies 2 0 0 cceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 287 4 11 7 3 Acknowledging Supervisors in Emergency c
5. cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetaeeeeees 60 2 4 4 2 Telemetry Examples 2 2 c0e0cececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneseusseeecccuccnenteees 60 2 4 5 Data Precedence and Data Over Voice Interrupt cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 Zgd DCAN sie nei leadina e a oh tuan Wa ea a e e ea a a beet d ea a 62 2 5 1 Priority Sampling zasao aa eaea e Amines elect DEEE DEEE EEO EEEE ht 63 2 5 2 Channel Marking sesecsonceltocntecats sie e a a a aa 64 2 5 3 Scan Considerations 2 o5u 5 20 re mac anay ours cleeea Saath ence OSs alewesaaanes Peat peaenaiemsenecpacealeets 65 2 5 3 1 Scanning and Preamble Ai2 5 0s2cs ne onda anetac tics ele 66 2 5 3 2 Channel Scan and Last Landed Channel c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 67 2 5 3 3 Scan Members with Similar Receive Parameters 0 00eee 68 2 5 4 Transmit Interrupt ANd SCAN ccccceeeeeecececeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 70 2 6 Site ROAMING e crete e aa Aea Orn E EE e hie Niles A eE Ee E oats hea heaton 71 2 6 1 Passive Site Searching 2 22 6 c ccccccceccndeetecdeesetecedsesucdeqcbecdeaenedsnceeneceeeceeeeeees 71 2 6 2 Active Site Searching x 22 2 cesta Sabeteen ease itn Siete Nee 72 2 6 3 Roaming Considerations c ccceeccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaeeeeees 74 2 6 3 1 Configuring a Roam List icasscscsct tec scgeacainecetd ates naeeecieeeinnel 74 2 6 39 2 SCAM ION ROAM sos eects ol fal sachet nt luton adie ncn Ea
6. Master Non Master Uplink Downlink Bandwith Kbps Uplink Downlink Bandwith Kbps Number of Repeaters Number of Repeaters The following parameters should be used in the previous equation to calculate the bandwidth requirements of each device in the system when secure VPN in the routers is enabled and repeater authentication is disabled BWVC 23 kbps Bandwidth required to support Wide Area Voice or Data with Secure VPN BWLM 5 kbps Bandwidth required to support Link Management without authentication BWIR 4 kbps Bandwidth required to support Master Messaging BWRD 64 kbps Bandwidth required to support RDAC commands NOTE The preceding data was compiled using the Linksys EtherFast Cable DSL VPN Router with four port switch Model BEFVP41 Other routers using different algorithms may yield different results 68007024085 April 2011 240 System Design Considerations 4 6 4 Flow of Voice Data Control Messages The flow of voice data control messages from a radio to its repeater for an IP Site Connect configuration is the same as that of single site configuration of MOTOTRBO system The major changes in the flow of messages between single site operations and multiple site operations are in the processing of a message in the repeaters and the additional delays introduced due to reasons such as serialization propagation arbitration and the nonalignment of slots be
7. Each unit ships with a power supply and manual The MC1000 ships with a 110V 60Hz unit while the MC2000 MC2500 ship with an 110 220V 50 60Hz unit The MOTOTRBO mobile can be interfaced with the MC1000 MC2000 and MC2500 Desktop Consoles These consoles allow for remote and local access to the MOTOTRBO Control Station The interface to the console uses a 26 pin MAP connector The console interface to the control station consists of TX_Audio RX_Audio PTT Monitor and Channel Activity Additionally channel steering is provided by the mobile radio through the GPIO pins which are configurable using the CPS Advanced MDC commands are only supported in analog mode and a not in digital mode April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 145 Please refer to the analog console installation manual for more details on analog console configurations 3 1 2 Mobile Components Most users of the MOTOTRBO system will be utilizing mobile devices non fixed to access the system Below are the devices currently available in the following frequency ranges and power levels The MOTOTRBO portable is currently available in the following frequency ranges and power levels Freq Band Frequency Range Power Level UHF 1 403 470 MHz 1 4 Watts UHF 2 450 512 MHz 1 4 Watts VHF 136 174 MHz 1 5 Watts 800 MHz 806 824 MHz 1 2 5 Watts 851 869 MHz 900 MHz 896 902 MHz 1 2 5 Watts 935
8. Router 1 IPSC Repeater Intermediary Peer Figure 2 26 IP Site Connect System with IP based ADP Application In an IP Site Connect wide area slot configuration two or more repeaters are connected to provide wider coverage A call sourced from one repeater slot can be routed over the IP interface and transmitted over the air on another remote repeater slot enabling wide system coverage On the contrary an IP Site Connect local area slot configuration similar to a conventional provides only local coverage over the air for a single active call Additionally a wide or local area slot configuration can also be supported on a single repeater depending on the system configuration 68007024085 April 2011 132 System Feature Overview 2 16 2 2 ADP Interface with Capacity Plus Figure 2 27 illustrates an IP based ADP application interfacing with a Capacity Plus system Capacity Plus CapPlus Repeater IP14 10 1 2 5 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel CapPlus Repeater IP14 10 1 2 4 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel Application voice data csbk Router 5 CapPlus Repeater CapPlus Repeater IP41 10 1 2 3 Primary Master Peer IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel IP1 10 1 2 2 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel Figure 2 27 Capacity Plus System with IP based ADP Application A Capacity Plus repeater manages system level channel access and assignment schema defined as Rest
9. lt DISC Audio A Figure 2 25 DR 3000 Cable Schematic for Zetron Controllers 68007024085 System Feature Overview 125 Schematic Notes e On the Zetron connector pin 6 is PTT Common this must be jumpered to one of the grounds This is the common pin of the PTT relay Without this the unit will not key up e Use a shielded cable for Discriminator Audio e The two 3 3k ohm resistors need to be mounted at the MOTOTRBO end of the cable e Large arrows indicate signal function flow e Please note that Pin 17 PTT and Pin 22 Squelch CSQ Detect need to be provisioned in the CPS To set up the MTR3000 with Zetron controllers see the MTR3000 Repeater Basic Service Manual 68007024096 Appendix D for more information The following table lists the jumper switch settings for trunking tone panel controllers Zetron Model 42 Trunking Controller Jumper Settings JP1 set to B Flat JP2 set to A Tone Flat JP3 set to A Sub Out High JP4 set to A 20dB Receive Audio Gain JP6 set to A TX Audio Level High JP7 set to Ext Sq pins 5 7 and 6 8 jumpered NOTE If you have an older Zetron controller that will be used in a 12 5 kHz system for the first time make sure it has first been modified for 12 5 kHz operation See Zetron s supplemental publication 011 0509 for instructions on making this modification 68007024085 April 2011 126 System Feature Overview connector
10. 4 4 3 User Experience System Design Considerations Estimating Loading Single Repeater and IP Site Connect The following chart indicates the user experience level the impact on the network that the number of active users using combinations of the defined profiles of Voice and Data Traffic Profile above will experience Each line in the chart has a combination of Voice GPS and Text Message at different usage levels For example the blue line identified as Low Usage Voice GPS Text represents a channel where each user transmits 1 Group Call an hour 0 5 text messages an hour and has a GPS Update Period Cadence of 10 minutes If the defined profiles do not exactly match the estimated usage the reader will need to extrapolate between two trend lines There are two levels shown in the graph to describe user experience good to fair The good level means that the system is supporting this level well and if the customer is operating in this level the majority of the time then the system is adequately provisioned This means that the fair level may be reached for short periods of time as long as the system returns to supporting a lower level of traffic for the majority of the time It is advised to avoid operating in the fair level when possible If the customer experiences issues with reliability and or call denial this could indicate that the system is operating in the fair level for longer periods of time If this
11. Repeat Path has priority over the transmitter when Disable Repeat Path is disabled A priority of None implies the transmitter will be granted on a first come first served basis This feature is not supported for digital transmissions in Dynamic Mixed Mode priority is on a first come first served basis Disable Repeat Path Some applications do not want the repeater to perform in cabinet repeat they warrant that the external PTT be the only input that can trigger the repeater to transmit This setting configures the repeater to only transmit when the PTT is asserted This feature is not supported for digital transmissions in Dynamic Mixed Mode digital transmissions from the radio are repeated regardless of Disable Repeat Path configuration April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 119 2 15 5 1 2 Rear Accessory Port CPS Programmable Pins The rear accessory also has some pins that can be programmed to specific input output functions These pins can be programmed to either active high or low CPS Programmable Description Pins PTT PTT can be programmed to any programmable pin on the rear accessory connector In Dynamic Mixed Mode if channel is busy when PTT is asserted on the repeater accessory port then an audible channel busy alert tone is generated on speaker and Rx audio accessory pins CSQ Detect Squelch detect will toggle this output pin on Loss of squelch will
12. UMO S UOHeINBYUOD NYY System Design Considerations N OSZOSZOSZ ZL rl Sol z eL rOSZ EL HO OSZ OSZ OSZ EI FUCI Z ver z6r paldesiq Od 01 penoa la R oszoszosz zb osz osz 0sz el di SNL Jajeaday aseg OSZ OSZ OSZ EL di SUV UONE S joguog O SSZ SSZ SSZ ner oped Z 01 891 261 dl Aiosseooy FOr 891 261 di oped eat BAMA A O SSZ SGZ SSZ YSEUON dl OIPEY 001 dlopey i T EVBIVZEL dl lossaooy TE V EIS9V ZEL di o1pey OSZ8rr9l AI Opey uoe suel ssosppy YOMjaN Forestzer ooroozi UOHEISUBLL SOAP RON OSZOSZ OSZ EL Z EVBILZ6L Tal OSZ OSZ OSZ ZL VFEN8ILZ6L vorsorzer ooroozt OSZ OSZ OSZ EL A SHO VeleorzeL Zeb eoL 261 i osz osz osz zi asn OIPEY OPYLOLOW uoneys jonuog ee eer rwn JOM N SS8D0V Olpe 0 SSZ 99Z SSZ YSEUJ N dl OPEN ALOMON v oipey 7TZL 891 Z6 dl iosseooy V2 891 Z6L di O1ped oszerral aloipey J uone sues sseuppy omen Paqeuz Od 9 psenuoy OSZ OSZOSZ EL ZZF8IVZ6L esc ome Dae oh dln Jejeadey eseg OSZOSZOSZZL ZL S9lZ6L ee OSZ OSZ OSZ EL di SUV VOl 891 z64 emaye neja osszsse sz auan dopey Z 01 891 261 dl Kiosseooy oszoszosz er FOV 891 264 di opey mo ae veveoresr gsq Z ee9rzer S OZL AI OPey h OSZ OSZ OSZ ZL uoge suel Sseuppy HOMAN SS 1l HOREIS AQUOS zorssres erzroer
13. Zetron Model 49 Trunking Controller Jumper Settings JP1 set to A Flat Audio JP2 set to A Tone Flat JP7 set to A COR as input JP9 set to A 20dB Receive Audio Gain JP10 set to A TX Audio Level High JP12 set to Ext Sq pins 5 7 and 6 8 jumpered JP13 set to B HP Filter IN JP23 set to A Sub In from Disc pins 1 2 and 3 4 jumpered grounds pin 4 on rear JP24 set to A Sub Out DC coupling JP25 set to A Sub Out High JP26 set to A Sub Out analog WARNING Pin 4 of the rear connector is listed as a ground But it will not be grounded unless JP23 is set for it This pin also acts as an input for the receive LTR data path See jumper table below NOTE The jumpers do not follow standard positioning Some may be vertical some may have position A on the left some may have position B on the left Take extra care when making these settings NOTE If you have an older Zetron controller that will be used in a 12 5 kHz system for the first time make sure it has first been modified for 12 5 kHz operation See Zetron s supplemental publication 011 0509 for instructions on making this modification NOTE For transmit audio alignment the Zetron Model 49 manual calls for setting the Tone Generator at TP4 for 1 4Vp p 495mv RMS then adjusting the TX audio for 2 kHz deviation 40 of full system deviation This is for a 25 kHz BW system For 12 5 kHz BW this
14. amp 102 00 Window 5 y H D Window 7 9 100 00 B Window 8 beer Window 9 S 98 00 Window 10 97 00 96 00 95 00 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Radios Figure 4 9 Four Minute Update Rate with a 10 second Call per Minute at 75 Loading April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 223 The curves in Figure 4 10 illustrates the average location update success rate against the number of subscribers for a 1 minute update rate per subscriber a 20 second call for the talkgroup per minute and 75 repeater loading In this situation the call duration is very long an update rate of 0 3 and many subscribers miss their assigned update window As the number of subscribers approaches the maximum number of reserved windows a large number of retries will be unsuccessful and the average success rate drops 95 00 90 00 85 00 80 00 75 00 70 00 Average Success Rate 65 00 60 00 One minute update rate one 20 sec call per minute with 75 loading e Window 5 a Window 6 Window 7 lt Window 8 k Window 9 Window 10 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Radios Figure 4 10 One Minute Update Rate with a 20 second Call per Minute at 75 Loading 68007024085 April 2011 224 System Design Considerations In Figure 4 11 the repeater loading is decreased to 45 A co
15. 941 MHz The MOTOTRBO mobile is currently available in the following frequency ranges and power levels Freq Band Frequency Range Power Level 1 25 Watts UHF 1 403 470 MHz 25 40 Watts 1 40 Watts E for 450 512 MHz UHF 2 450 527 MHz 1 OB Wells for 512 527 MHz 1 25 Watts VHF 136 174 MHz 25 45 Watts 806 824 MHz 800 MHz 851 869 MHz oe eee 896 902 MHz 901 902 MHz 1 7 Watts 300 Miz 935 941 MHz 1 30 Watts 940 941 MHz 68007024085 April 2011 146 3 1 2 1 MOTOTRBO Portable System Components and Topologies The MOTOTRBO portable is a durable but lightweight radio that offers many ways to access the system s features It is designed to allow users to take it with them anywhere and yet remain connected to the system The following table lists the average battery life for conventional operation at 5 5 90 duty cycle with battery saver enabled GPS options disabled no option board no attached accessories performing with carrier squelch for analog mode ETSI DMR Tier 2 standard for digital mode and transmitting at high power Actual performance may vary by band and usage characteristics Battery Type Battery Life NiMH 1300 mAh Battery IMPRES FM Li ion 1400 mAh Battery Analog 8 Hours Digital 11 2 Hours Analog 8 7 Hours Digital 12 1 Hours IMPRES Li ion 1500 mAh Slim Battery A
16. Any follow up PTT initiates an Emergency Call and includes the embedded emergency indication The user remains in the emergency mode until he manually clears his emergency The only way to reinitiate the emergency alarm and the hot microphone is to re initiate the emergency It is important to note that when configured for Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow the radio will continue to transmit voice for the duration of the provisioned hot microphone timer Since voice has priority over data any data is queued while voice is transmitting including the GPS update that was triggered by the emergency The GPS data cannot be delivered until after the radio stops transmitting voice and after the repeater hangtime has expired The GPS data has no additional priority over other data queued in the radios or over any traffic on the channel Therefore its delivery may be delayed if the radio in emergency has pending data queued or if the channel is busy processing other traffic It is recommended when utilizing Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow and GPS that the hot microphone timer be at maximum 30 seconds There are a few reasons for this First of all data messages will not stay in the queue for ever 30 seconds is short enough so to give the GPS data a chance to be transmitted without timing out Second if the hot microphone timer is longer than 30 seconds and the GPS update rate is around the same value then other GPS messages may start to fill
17. Construction Construction John John 1873 Security Transport construction ctb Construction Bob Bob 1835 COnN Security Transport Construction Construction Rick Rick 542 Security Transport Security Sealy al ee Administrative i security ctb Security Security Joe Joe 4762 Administrative Administrative Frank Frank 6654 Administrative Security administrative ctb Administrative Mike Mike 19172 Administrative Security Administrative Steve Steve 78378 Administrative Security Transport Lenn Lenn 23 anspor Securit p y y Construction y transport ctb Transport Transport Carl Carl 2 C nstr ctio Security April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 279 4 11 3 Organizing Radio Users into Groups Once you have identified all of the individual users associate them with groups The communication requirements for one group may differ with the requirements of another group Certain groups may need to communicate with multiple groups in addition to their primary group Therefore you will need to identify the individual radios and the corresponding groups that they need to communicate with Also note that the group organization may be different from the organization s formal reporting structure You will also need to determine the traffic patterns of the individual users and functional groups so that channel slot and group assignments can be
18. System Feature Overview 133 2 16 2 3 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus Figure 2 28 illustrates an IP based ADP application interfacing with the Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect system concurrently Capacity Plus CapPlus Repeater LAN 2 IP1 10 1 2 5 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel CapPlus Repeater IP1 10 1 2 4 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel IPSC Repeater Local Slot 1 Multisite Slot 2 IPSC Repeater Multisite Slot 1 amp 2 CapPlus Repeater CapPlus Repeater ETE Ales Master Peer IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel IP1 10 1 2 2 Primary IP2 10 1 2 1 Rest Channel IPSC Repeater Intermediary Peer Application voice data csbk Figure 2 28 Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect System with IP based ADP Application The ADP methods to support accessing a concurrent system from a single application requires the application to communicate with two Masters thereafter establish and handle routing to both systems based on the map information provided by the independent system intermediary Through the defined ADP methods it is possible that a single application can also communicate with both the IP Site Connect wide area slot and local area slot configurations 68007024085 April 2011 134 System Feature Overview 2 16 3 MOTOTRBO Documents Available via the Third Party Application Partner Program Each of the interfaces mention in
19. Upon completion of an emergency the radio then initiates the password authentication if this feature is enabled If a user presses the test mode series button when the radio is locked or in password input state the radio skips the password authentication and enters test mode 68007024085 April 2011 106 System Feature Overview 2 14 Digital Telephone Patch DTP The MOTOTRBO Digital Telephone Patch is a Motorola proprietary feature that supports two types of phone patch calls Individual Phone Patch Call This allows a half duplex voice communication between a radio user and a phone user This communication can be initiated from either party e Talkgroup Phone Patch Call This allows a half duplex voice communication between a phone user and a group of radio users This type of communication can be initiated only by the phone user This feature is supported in Single Site IPSC LACs IPSC WACs and Capacity Plus configurations This feature is supported in display and non display radios However for non display models phone numbers over dial or access de access codes need to be configured manually to the programmable buttons because the radios do not have a keypad The DTP feature utilizes Commercial Off the Shelf COTS Analog Phone Patch APP boxes and is compatible with any DTMF based APP box that supports the 4 wire interface and can communicate in half duplex mode The Zetron 30 Worldpatch and PL 1877A MRTI2000 a
20. and configures them for Enhanced Privacy The control stations acting as the data gateway should also be upgraded The System Installer instructs all the radio users to enable the Privacy feature The radio users enable the Privacy feature using the radio front panel The control stations also enable privacy All the messages are transmitted using Enhanced Privacy 68007024085 April 2011 94 System Feature Overview 2 8 Repeater Diagnostics and Control RDAC Repeater Diagnostics and Control RDAC allows a system administrator the ability to monitor and control repeaters within the system The following services are provided 1 Repeater Diagnostics e Read Enabled Disabled Status e Read Analog Digital Status e Read Wide or Local Area Status e Read Transmit Power High or Low Status e Read Available Channels including Currently Selected e Read Inbound RSSI e Read IPv4 Address and UDP Port required for connectivity 2 Repeater Alarm Reporting Detect and Report Receiver Lock Detect Failure e Detect and Report Transmitter Lock Detect Failure e Detect and Report AC Power Failure e Detect and Report RF PA System Overheating e Detect and Report RF Power Out e Detect and Report High VSWR Detection e Detect and Report RF PA Fan Failure Alarm only on the MTR3000 e Detect and Report EEPROM Corruption only on the MTR3000 e Detect and Report Low and High RF PA Voltage only on the MTR3000 e Detect and Report SCM Reference Incompati
21. bursts defined as windows This allows subscribers to make reservations for these windows in which GPS data can be transmitted This is a slot wide configuration The windowed data structure consists of an eight minute data superframe Within the eight minute data superframe there are 16 data frames each 30 second in duration This data superframe is repeated over and over again Both the data frame and superframe always have the same size for every windowed GPS Revert channel Within a 30 second data frame there are windows that can be reserved by subscribers for GPS data transmission The number of windows within a 30 second data frame depends on the size of each window A window consists of an announcement slot in the beginning followed by bursts of GPS data The diagram below illustrates the windowed data structure for a window size of six one announcement five bursts of GPS data 68007024085 April 2011 52 System Feature Overview On Slot Off Slot B B A B B B B B H B B lt Single Site encrypted example Announcement Data Proprietary Rate Rate Rate CSBK Header Header Data Data Data Frame MO 1 E gt ooo E o Eee 2 30 seconds gt oon coe o E s 8 min Data Superframe Figure 2 10 Windowed Data Structure for a Window Size of Six The window size is dependent on the amount of GPS data to be sent the privacy mode and header compression usage Based on window size the number of windows in a 3
22. but those that do share frequencies need to have different color codes if they need to be distinguished while roaming A radio will only be within coverage of one to two sites at a time The time it takes a radio user to move from the coverage of one site to another is in the range of an hour 4 Multi Floor Coverage This type of coverage consists of dense extremely close sites with short range coverage and generous overlap This coverage type is often used for covering tall buildings or deep tunnels Frequency re use is not common due to the small coverage footprint usually implemented with in building radiax antenna systems This coverage type also often encounters quick signal strength drop offs due to the nature of in building coverage Non overlapping sites may share frequencies but those that do share frequencies need to have different color codes if they need to be distinguished while roaming A radio will only be within coverage of one to two sites at a time The time it takes a radio user to move from the coverage of one site to another is in the range of one minute Reference the following diagrams April 2011 Figure 2 15 Dense Overlapping Coverage Urban 68007024085 System Feature Overview 79 Figure 2 16 Isolated No Overlapping Coverage Rural Figure 2 17 Corridor Coverage 68007024085 April 2011 80 System Feature Overview Figure 2 18 Multi Floor Coverage The site configuration should be taken un
23. but those that do share frequencies need to have different color codes if they need to be distinguished while roaming This type of coverage is highly likely to encountered shared use on one or all of its sites A radio user may be within coverage of three to four sites at a time The time it takes a radio user to move from the coverage of one site to another is in the range of 10 minutes 68007024085 April 2011 78 System Feature Overview 2 lsolated No Overlapping Coverage Rural This type of coverage consists of isolated sites with little to no overlap This coverage type is often used for isolated sites in rural areas although could be used to cover a single part of a small city Non overlapping sites may share frequencies but those that do share frequencies need to have different color codes if they need to be distinguished while roaming This type of coverage is less likely to encountered shared use although possible A radio user will only be within coverage of one site at any time The time it takes a radio user to move from the coverage of one site to another is in the range of multiple hours 3 Corridor Coverage This type of coverage consists of in series slightly overlapping sites This coverage type is often used for covering highways train tracks shore lines or rivers Frequency re use is common in this configuration since one site only overlaps with its two adjacent sites Non overlapping sites may share frequencies
24. must remain on a single channel in order to receive the inbound data it is recommended that they only contain one channel in their channel list The Trunked Control Stations must have a list of all Trunked Channels Control stations should not have scan enabled This will guarantee that the Application Server is always monitoring the correct channel Since the control stations will only be used for data there is no need to program any receive or transmit April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 267 Groups on the channel In other words the Contact Name and the Group List can both be set to a value of None Similarly it is not necessary to provision any emergency settings either It is important to set the TX Preamble duration of the control station to be the same as the other radios in the system Since most data will be targeted towards these control stations the proper preamble must be utilized Use the same guidelines for setting this duration in the control stations as was used in the fielded radios The admit criteria of the control station should match the settings which the other radios on the channel are provisioned for The suggested setting is Color Code Free unless there are analog signals on the channel that the data needs to avoid If there are analog signals on the channel that the data needs to avoid then choose Channel Free instead When considering other CPS options of the control station it is a good rule of t
25. or e all retries are exhausted The radio still remains in an emergency state Any follow up PTT initiates an Emergency Call and the call includes an embedded emergency indication If the user presses the PTT before the radio sends an emergency alarm the radio stops sending the alarm and starts the Emergency Call While in the emergency mode all subsequent voice transmissions are Emergency Calls The user remains in emergency mode until he manually clears emergency The only way to reinitiate the emergency alarm process is to reinitiate the emergency April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 39 2 3 4 3 Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow When configured for Emergency Alarm and with Voice to Follow the emergency consists of sending a single emergency alarm and followed by an automatic transmission of an Emergency Call This is referred to as hot microphone The radio only sends one emergency alarm regardless if there is channel activity and then without waiting for an acknowledgement the radio immediately activates the microphone and initiates an Emergency Call without the need of the user pressing the PTT The duration of the hot microphone state is configurable through the CPS in the Digital Emergency Systems settings This transmission is considered an Emergency Call and therefore includes the embedded emergency indication Once this hot microphone duration expires the radio stops transmitting but remains in the emergency mode
26. pe qeus Od 0 premuos oresrs erzvozi o ssz ggz sgz ASLUJAN dl O1peY ZLLS9L Z6L dl Aiossecoy aT ELE 89b 261 dl opey eb Lvoet OSZ8pP9l AI oIped zorsarzel ges roresrz6 J erzvozt A U uopejsues ssuppy HOMO OSZ OSZOSZ EL Z LL Sol ZL Ode uo warn aNGOW ope OBMLOLON F NI OSZ OSZOSZZL LLL SOL Z6L UW VU LHO OSZ OSZOSZ EL V LIB91Z6L Z Lr89VZ6L W osz oszosz zb asn uoners joguog 270 OSZ OSZ OSZ W4V4W4 0978v9 L UBld di W IS S OGULOLOW ldwexq GZ p anbig p lqeug d 0 piemio4 0 SSZ 99Z SSZ YSeUNON di OIPeY TYV8B9LZ6L dI iosseooy FYVS9VZ6L di oped oszeprol aloipey uogeisuel Ssesppy OMEN OSZOSZOSZ EL vl solzeL Jamg uojeayddy jdwex ue juo s umoys uogeJnfiyuog NAO Zeysjedsiq uoneoiddy geyojedsiq uoneoiddy 68007024085 April 2011 System Design Considerations 271 4 10 1 9 Application Server Network Connection Considerations Besides being connected to the radio network via the control station s the Application Server may also be connected to another network such as the Internet When operating under these conditions it is important to consider the following e Disable all protocol support
27. traditional FDMA one channel conventional system will have the ability to split users into two slots For example if a high usage voice only customer is currently supporting 30 40 users on a single channel they are most likely operating in a fair or stressed environment and will likely need to expand their system If they switch to a MOTOTRBO system they can divide their users into the two available channels This means a single channel now has only 15 20 users which would bring the customer back to a good user experience level Subsequently adding on low usage data services on both channels will cause minimal impact to performance 4 4 4 Estimating Loading For Capacity Plus The following charts see Figure 4 2 and Figure 4 3 indicate the number of Trunked Channels i e slots a Capacity Plus system requires for a given user experience for a given number of active users and for different combinations of the Voice and Data Traffic profiles as defined in 4 4 2 It is assumed here that the number of groups are more than the number of channels The charts represent a radio user s experience in making a call in terms of Grade of Service GoS GoS is directly related to the probability of a call getting blocked i e probability of all the Trunked Channels being busy For example a GoS of 2 means that 2 of the calls made by the radio users will be either denied or will need to wait for a channel to become available The ch
28. user s request for transmission Therefore when a user or a group of users utilizes a channel time slot the repeater announces that the channel is being used and who is using it Only radios that are part of that group are allowed to transmit The repeater additionally allows a short duration of reserved time after a transmission This allows other users in the group to respond to the originator This reserved hang time greatly improves the continuity of calls because new calls cannot start until the previous call ends Without this feature users may experience delays in responses that is between transmissions of calls due to other calls taking over the channel in between their transmissions After this reserved hang time the repeater continues to monitor for a short period If no user transmits on the channel for a duration of time the repeater stops transmitting When the next radio transmission occurs the repeater begins repeating again In Dynamic Mixed Mode the repeater dynamically switches between analog and digital calls When a repeater repeats a new digital call that starts on one of the logical channels the repeater does not qualify any analog call including an Emergency Call until the digital call both the transmission and call hang time is over and the corresponding channel hang time has expired Upon the expiry of channel hang time only then does the repeater start qualifying both analog and digital calls simultaneously
29. 10 S U 7 L2 Source CSy L2 Source CSz E 7 IP Source 192 P C 8 L2 Dest SU7 L2 Dest SU66 IP Dest 10 8 U 66 A SU from set 2 Trunked CS4 10 C S 0 10 S U 66 f Ree An IP msg from Server Source 11 C S 0 a NAT Dest 10 S U 66 b 11 C S 0 192 P C 8 192 P C 4 192 P C 8 USB4 Figure 4 26 An example showing IPv4 addresses in a Capacity Plus configuration with Data Revert 68007024085 April 2011 276 System Design Considerations 4 10 2 Mobile Terminal and Application Server Power Management Considerations There are some considerations that have to be taken with regards to the Power Management settings on a PC being used for either a Mobile Terminal or Application Server It is recommended that the power management settings of the Application Server and Mobile Client be disabled Specifically the System Standby and System Hibernation settings should be set to Never It is crucial that the Application Server and Mobile Terminal always be active so that they can transmit and receive data messages If the Application Server or Mobile Client is allowed to enter System Standby or System Hibernation it will not respond to received data messages The radio s connected to the Application Server or Mobile Client will then queue the data until messages fail to be delivered It will be the responsibility of the sending device to retry the failed message A user will need to awaken the Application Server or Mobil
30. 14 1 1 Call Initiation by a Radio User When a radio user initiates a phone call the channel access is always polite even if configured as impolite regardless of the radio s programmed admit criteria This is analogous to sending CSBK or data signaling which is sent politely When a radio enters a phone call a phone call text string and icon shows up on the display screen to alert the radio user Buffer dial is supported for access de access code phone number and over dial digits Buffer Dial means that the radio user enters the digits from the radio keypad then presses the OK button to send out the digits as in band audio The phone number can be 22 digits long or less Before calling a phone user the radio user switches to the channel that is capable of a phone patch call and uses one of the following dialing methods e Manual Dial Enter the phone number from the radio keypad manually This option can be enabled or disabled on the radio via CPS Phone Address Book Select a phone number from the radio s Phone Address Book e One Touch Button Push a programmable button of the radio The one touch button is associated with a phone number from the Phone Address Book If an access code is required for phone calls it could be configured in the radio or entered by the radio user manually When the access code is not configured in the radio the radio user is prompted to manually enter the access code after
31. 1920 1680 1920 1920 1920 1920 2160 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 N wo BR a The preamble duration should be increased when Scan List members tend to carry lots of traffic or long transmissions If no radios in the system will use the scan feature then the amount of preamble may be set to zero The preamble duration also should be increased when priority scan is being used Since the preamble signaling is used in conjunction with data and digital signaling messages and direct mode and since digital only Scan Lists support both priority scan and data and digital signaling messages the following table suggests guidelines for the amount of preamble duration to use with direct mode digital only Scan Lists using priority April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 67 Number of Priority Members 0 1 2 0 P 5 1 z z 2 480 960 1200 p 3 720 1440 1920 4 960 1920 2640 5 960 1920 2640 v 6 1200 2400 3360 z 7 1200 2400 3360 i 8 1440 2880 4080 9 1680 3360 4800 5 10 1680 3360 4800 11 1920 3840 5520 12 1920 3840 5520 E 13 2160 4320 6240 14 2400 4800 6960 15 2400 4800 6960 16 2640 5280 7680 If data and digital signaling is not carried on any of the non priority channels and is only carried on one of the priority chann
32. 2011 System Feature Overview 2 4 3 4 GPS Revert Channel The GPS Revert Channel feature allows system operators a configurable option to off load radio transmitted location updates onto a programmed digital channel that differs from the digital Selected Channel This feature effectively removes Location Update traffic from the Selected Channel in order to free up that channel to accommodate increased voice loads and or to enhance the user experience by reducing the number of channel busies during voice call requests This feature also allows a large group to communicate on a single voice channel while sending location updates on multiple GPS Revert Channels to accommodate larger Location Update loads This increases the Location Update throughput associated with radios belonging to a single group Each channel programmed into the radio has a configurable CPS option to designate the GPS transmission channel on which it transmits Location Update messages The CPS options for the GPS transmission channel are Selected All and None Choosing Selected means that the GPS updates are transmitted on the current channel In the case of All a single channel must be chosen from the list of all channels This chosen channel is known as the GPS Revert Channel and this is where GPS updates are transmitted on It is understood that there may be instances when the radio is known to be out of range of any control station accepting location updates In order to exte
33. 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 MOTOTRBO Digital Features Digital Voice Features 1 Group Calls The digital group is a way of enabling groups to share a channel without distracting and disrupting one another Because two way radios are well suited for one to many types of calls the Group Call is the most common call ina MOTOTRBO system Hence the majority of conversations takes place within a group The Capacity Plus system allows a radio user to leave a Group Call and start another voice or emergency or control call e g Call Alert Radio Check Radio Inhibit Uninhibit etc while the radio is busy listening in to a Group Call The radio moves to the current Rest Channel and starts a new call on the Rest Channel If a user starts a non Emergency Call when all channels are busy then the call fails and the radio stays on the channel Individual radios that need to communicate with one another are grouped together and configured to be members of a group A transmitting radio can be heard by all the radios within the same group and on the same logical channel frequency and time slot Two radios cannot hear each other if they are on the same logical channel frequency and time slot but on different groups Two radios on different logical channels cannot hear each other even if they are placed in the same group In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for Group Calls are configured with the portable and mobile radio CPS The repeater does not re
34. 8948A JPUULYSRINN Text Message Location Dispatch Server Application Server Dispatch MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Multi Channel Device Driver MCDD MOTOTRBO Location Digital Repeater Dispatch Application Server WAC Wide Area Channel C TM Local Channel Text Messaging Figure 3 34 Wide and Local Area System with Distributed Data Application Servers The data messages sent over local channel 1 are not delivered to the Application Server 1 and therefore if required each geographical location should have their own Application Server with their own Presence Notifier When a radio manually roams i e changes dial positions between a local area channel and a wide area channel the radio registers with its respective Presence Notifier To facilitate this the radio ID of the control stations should be configured to be the same If a customer requires more local capacity at a location then it is possible to add more repeaters working in Single Site configuration and all the local slots of all the repeaters can share the same Application Server In that case the radios on the local channel will not be able to communicate with the wide area channels Application Server April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 189 3 2 3 1 3 Multiple Wide Area Systems with Centrali
35. Alert Radio Check Radio Enable Disable Remote Monitor and Emergency 3 2 1 1 1 Text Messaging in Direct Mode fi TX fi digital gt TX f RX ft ba RX fi 1 TM TM MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 7 MOTOTRBO Radios in digital mode Text Messaging In Direct Mode In direct mode the MOTOTRBO radios are capable of sending text messages to other radios Radio to radio text messaging is accomplished by a text messaging application that is built into the radio From the front keypad the radio user can select the target radio and type a text message 68007024085 April 2011 158 System Components and Topologies In order for the text message to be sent successfully to the target radio both radios need to be on the same frequency Similar to voice if multiple direct mode frequencies are being used the user must choose the channel his target is on before sending his text message The radios do not have to be on the same group Text messaging and the previously discussed voice services operate on the same frequency Since data operates in a polite manner the radio avoids transmitting text messages while any voice service is active If operating with only field radios text messages are limited to radio to radio communications Text messages can also be sent from radio to radio using a PC attached to the radio A software based text messaging client will be i
36. Application Server Figure 4 28 Emergency Alarm and Call and GPS Interaction Diagram Figure 4 28 illustrates the channels used when an emergency is initiated and the radio is configured for Emergency Alarm and Call with an Emergency Revert Channel and the Emergency Revert Channel is configured with a GPS Revert Channel Note The channels are defined in the table in the previous section The following describes the sequence of events 1 April 2011 The radio switches from the Selected Channel f1 to the Emergency Revert Channel f3 From here the radio transmits the Emergency Alarm and waits for the acknowledgement While waiting for the acknowledgement the Emergency Location Update is held in queue Once the acknowledgement is received the radio switches to the Emergency Revert s GPS Revert Channel f4 and then transmits the Emergency Location Update After this transmission the radio switches to the Emergency Revert Channel f3 and while not being involved in voice calls it registers Note This requires the Emergency Revert Channel to be ARS enabled After registration periodic location updates are sent on the Emergency Revert s GPS Revert Channel f4 until the emergency is cleared 68007024085 System Design Considerations 293 This configuration in Figure 4 28 is useful when a system needs to simultaneously support multiple Emergency Calls from multiple groups on a single Emergency Revert Channel The placement of
37. April 2011 System Feature Overview Channels Channels General Zone1 Zone1 Result Settings GPS Channel1 Channel1 ARS GPS Revert GPS Chip Enabled Enabled Enabled None Presence Enabled Location Disabled GPS Chip Enabled Selected Channel Presence Enabled Location TX on Channel1 Enabled Enabled GPS Chip Enabled GPS1 Presence Enabled Location TX on GPS1 Note Not Selectable means the setting cannot be configured as the option is grayed out 2 4 3 5 Enhanced GPS Revert Channel 51 The Enhanced GPS Revert channel is an enhancement of the GPS Revert channel functionality that supports higher throughput and increased reliability Similar to the former feature a subscriber offloads location responses routed to a server to a revert channel The primary difference lies in the method a subscriber accesses the channel In the GPS Revert channel feature subscribers access a channel in a desynchronized manner and may therefore cause transmission collisions The probability of collision increases with the number of transmissions made over the channel and collisions adversely affect the reliability of transmissions This enhanced feature enables subscribers to access a channel in a synchronized manner which eliminate collisions and allow them to use the channel efficiently The synchronization between subscribers is achieved by a repeater that divides a logical channel into groups of contiguous
38. Emergency Calls on the Emergency Revert Channel and the location updates on a different channel significantly increases both emergency voice throughput and Location Update throughput while in the emergency state It should be noted that changing the Emergency s GPS Transmission Channel to either the Selected Channel f1 or the Emergency Revert Channel f3 removes one control station from the system The actual configuration selected depends on actual customer requirements 4 11 7 5 3 Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow TX f V eee RX f4 gee Presence Emg s RX f Location a crs Location on Reet Emg USB USB Cor SPA MOTOTRBO kae eg Op MOTOTRBO Control Station 9 ey Control Station digital mode g Piy digital mode es 2 y S 4 S m a V S VY EE RX f2 WP aje RX f x D E Ww MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Control Station digital mode digital mode MCDD Presence Notifier Application Server Figure 4 29 Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow and GPS Revert Interaction Diagram Figure 4 29 illustrates the channels used when an emergency is initiated and the radio is configured for Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow with an Emergency Revert Channel and the Emergency Revert Channel is configured with a GPS Revert Channel Note The channels are defined in the table in the previous section The following describes the sequence of events 1 The radio switches
39. For existing 12 5 kHz license s the user needs to file an update to the emission designators indicating 7K60FXE for voice and 7K60FXD for data for all applicable frequencies e Ifthe user has existing 25 kHz licenses s they need to file an update to the emission designators to include 7K60FXE for voice and 7K60FXD for data for all applicable frequencies Typically the user will then be allowed to transmit a 12 5 kHz signal bandwidth at the same center frequency as the original 25 kHz license Please note that it is not a straightforward process to convert an existing 25 kHz license into a pair of 12 5 kHz channels Users are generally NOT allowed to split their 25 kHz channel into two 12 5 kHz sub channels that would operate off center from the original license and adjacent to one another 4 3 3 Repeater Continuous Wave Identification CWID The repeater can be configured to transmit the CWID if required by the region The CWID is also known as the Base Station ID The CWID is an analog transmission of the station in Morse code that takes place every 15 minutes This identification as well as the transmit interval can be configured in the repeater using the CPS To ensure proper Dynamic Mixed Mode operation only exclusive CWID transmission is supported in MOTOTRBO repeater operating in Dynamic Mixed Mode Mixed CWID is not supported in order to be compliant with the digital mode of operation Furthermore the exclusive CWID transmiss
40. IP Site Connect packets have priority over other traffic on the system Not doing this could cause audio performance degradation or lost transmissions when other devices on the system are excessively utilizing the network There are various methods routers use to provide QoS It is commonly performed by configuring a range of UDP ports or IP Addresses a specific amount of upstream and downstream bandwidth The default UDP port for IP Site Connect is 50000 For details on calculating the required bandwidth see section Required Bandwidth Calculations on page 235 Verify that the customer network equipment is not blocking the IP Addresses or UDP Ports default 50000 utilized by the IP Site Connect system This is commonly done by a firewall or other security device Consult the customer s Network Administrator or Internet Service Provider Inquire with the Internet Service Provider if there are any caps on bandwidth usage per month Some ISPs do not allow the customer to exceed a particular upload or download limit per month Since IP Site Connect systems stream voice over the internet it may be possible to surpass this limit on extremely high usage systems As a reference point a five site system under nominal load could use around 20GB per month where as a 15 site system under nominal load could use around 65GB per month For most ISPs this will not be an issue When configuring routers with VPN links it is wise to increase the IPSec Key
41. IP link protocol provides a clean migration methodology between repeater software versions there are limitations associated with this feature Repeaters support the current and previous two releases Hence repeater operations and interoperability beyond the previous two releases would result in incompatibility between repeaters In such abnormal scenarios customers are required to upgrade the system such that all repeaters operating on the system remain compatible meets the requirement of the current and previous two releases A service degradation is expected in scenarios that include multiple repeater firmware versions running in the system Therefore usage of the same repeater firmware version throughout the system and only allow usage of different firmware versions during the upgrade period is preferred The IP Site Connect repeaters discover each other through the Master repeater configurable via the CPS which is a centralized entity of the system The recommendation is to have the Master repeater upgraded first to minimize system downtime optimize IP link connectivity and improve system access time across the backend IP network 68007024085 April 2011 246 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 System Design Considerations Multiple Digital Repeaters in Capacity Plus The main problem with the standalone configuration of multiple digital repeaters is that a radio can only use one channel of a repeater at any instance of time Capacity Plus reso
42. IPSC LACs IPSC WACs and GPS Data Revert Channel However ECA is built into Capacity Plus Trunked Channels and not configurable by the user This feature is disabled and not required when the Enhanced GPS feature is enabled on the channel because each radio transmits during an assigned time window When enabled in the radio the repeater supports ECA on conventional digital channels IPSC LACs IPSC WACs and Capacity Plus Data Revert Channels However the repeater does not support this feature on Enhanced GPS and DMM channels When enabled ECA is applicable only to polite transmissions initiated by the radio user If the Admit Criteria in the radio is configured as Channel Free or Color Code Free the radio applies the ECA procedure when a voice call is initiated If the Admit Criteria is configured as Always the ECA procedure is not applied Data and CSBK calls are always polite transmissions regardless of the configured Admit Criteria Therefore ECA is applied during call transmission if the feature is enabled However this slightly increases the system voice access times for voice calls and latency for data CSBK calls When a radio auto roams to a new site in an IPSC system configuration the radio applies the ECA configuration from the roamed channel and the Admit Criteria from the selected channel For phone calls occurring in all system configurations ECA is enabled by default to achieve optimum performance It is also recommended to
43. Interrupt Capable There are several considerations when upgrading a deployed system that presently do not support the Transmit Interrupt feature to become Transmit Interrupt capable Firstly for systems that use a DR 3000 repeater the repeater software version must be upgraded to RO1 06 00 or later Secondly for systems that use a MTR3000 repeater Transmit Interrupt is not supported For systems that do not use privacy exclusively See Voice and Data Privacy on page 85 radio transmissions with privacy disabled and interruptible voice enabled cannot be received by radios using software versions prior to RO1 06 00 For systems that use privacy exclusively there are no major concerns with software versions prior to RO1 06 00 receiving radio transmissions with both privacy and interruptible voice enabled provided the older release supports the type of privacy being used by the radio provisioned with software version RO1 06 00 or later To minimize service disruption during the upgrade period systems that do not use privacy exclusively may be upgraded using the following approach e Provision new radios with software version RO1 06 00 or later Configure two channels one channel with Transmit Interrupt features enabled and the other channel with all Transmit Interrupt features disabled During the upgrade the channel with all Transmit Interrupt features disabled is used e Individually upgrade previously deployed radios using s
44. Life Time KLT Timers to around 13 to 24 hours It is recommended to set Phase 1 KLT to 24 hours and Phase 2 KLT to 13 hours Some low end routers cause a disruption to ongoing voice and data when renegotiating keys after the Key Life Time Timer expires This is especially noticeable when multiple VPNs are configured with identical Key Life Time Timers since the router will need to re calculate numerous keys at the same time It is best practice to offset each VPN s Key Life Time Timers by 10 minutes 68007024085 System Design Considerations 243 4 6 7 Considerations for Shared Use of a Channel To take care of shared use of a physical channel a repeater e g green repeater of an IP Site Connect system always monitor its Rx frequency and does not transmit if the Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI from radio s of some other radio system is greater than a configurable threshold This ensures that an IP Site Connect system will not use a channel if another repeater in vicinity is currently using the channel The RSSI threshold is CPS programmable in the range of 40 dB to 130 dB The threshold should be chosen wisely otherwise interference from background noise may inhibit a repeater from transmitting The RDAC application can be used to measure the inbound RSSI of an interfering signal if required The figure below shows the transmission of red radio interfering with the green repeater Figure 4 20 An Example of Interference at R
45. Location Server on the Selected Channel This Periodic Location Request instructs the radio to send location updates at a specific rate while the Emergency Location Request instructs the radio to send a single Emergency Location Update when an emergency is initiated The radio spends the most time on the Selected Channel The radio only switches to the GPS Revert Channel when a Location Update needs to be transmitted Since voice transmissions have priority over data transmissions when the radio is involved in a call on the Selected Channel the Location Update is queued until after the call is completed In order to minimize the amount of time spent away from the Selected Channel while on the GPS Revert Channel the radio will not attempt to qualify traffic on the GPS Revert Channel Therefore all voice data and control messages transmitted to a radio should never be transmitted on the GPS Revert Channel as they will not reach their destination April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 165 The example in Figure 3 16 illustrates only one GPS Revert Channel However depending on the GPS data load more than one GPS Revert Channel may be needed For example a single large group that generates significant Location Update traffic must be sub divided across several GPS Revert Channels Each GPS Revert Channel requires a control station which must be connected to the Application Server PC The maximum number of control stations
46. Personality CPS Channel Alias Alias 1 SITE 1TGA 1 WAS1 CH1 5 SITE 2 TGA 2 SITE 1 TGB 2 WAS1 CH2 6 SITE 2 TGB As can be seen there are 4 roam lists required for the 4 wide area channels Each roam list contains only one personality that references the desired logical channel at each site Although not necessary personalities that correspond to a site can be placed together in their own zone or folder This will help further remove the concept of site from the radio user and allow the site roaming feature to choose the appropriate site If they must manually choose a site they can change zones Using the actual name of the site as the zone alias will help clarify this to the end user but it is not required Since the same group is mapped to the same dial position in each zone the user will have the same group selected as they change through the sites zones In this example the personalities are aliased with the group names but other aliases that define Site Channel or Group name can be used If there are more than one group per wide area channel a roam list can be created for each group to utilize 68007024085 April 2011 76 System Feature Overview It is important to understand that when the radio determines a new home site to be one of the roam list members it will only utilize the logical channel attributes of the roam list member The remaining attributes will be used from the selected per
47. SU Analog SU Analog Repeater analog mode amp digital mode digital mode changed via mode choice Figure 3 32 MOTOTRBO Digital Radios on a Two Slot MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater with Analog Legacy Repeater Support 3 2 2 2 1 Summary of Features in Repeater Mode All features listed in Analog Features on page 114 are supported in analog repeater mode 3 2 3 IP Site Connect Mode In IP Site Connect mode repeaters across dispersed locations exchange voice data and control packets over an IPv4 based backend network The potential applications of this mode include e Connecting two or more dispersed locations for day to day communications For example a customer s manufacturing facility and a distribution facility across towns can be connected using MOTOTRBO repeaters in IP Site Connect mode 68007024085 April 2011 186 3 2 3 1 System Components and Topologies Building a larger or more effective RF coverage area For example multiple repeaters installed in an amusement park or a high rise building can be connected to provide a contiguous area of RF coverage The need for multiple repeaters may stem from any combination of geography distance or topographical interference problems and in building or cross building RF penetration issues Broadcasting announcements to all sites This is useful in case of emergency or special events Connecting repeaters operating in different RF bands For example repeaters operating
48. Similarly if an analog call is being repeated the repeater does not qualify any digital call including digital data and Emergency Calls on any of the two logical channels until the analog call is over and the corresponding hang time has expired The repeater 4 wire interface and over the air digital calls are polite to each other If the PTT button or knockdown GPIO pin is asserted on the repeater 4 wire interface while a digital transmission is ongoing then an audible channel busy alert tone is generated on the speaker pin of the 4 wire interface The PTT button press or pin knockdown operation is denied In IP Site Connect mode and in Capacity Plus mode the repeaters perform the following additional duties e Each repeater ensures that their communication links with other repeaters are open all the time April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 139 e They inform their operating status e g mode IPv4 UDP address to each other In Capacity Plus repeaters also inform the status of their logical channels to each other Based on these status a repeater selects the next Rest Channel e In IP Site Connect repeaters ensure that in cases of multiple calls starting within a short period only one call prevails at all the sites and all of them except those that detect interference repeat the selected call e They inform their alarm conditions and provide diagnostic information to the RDAC IP application The RDAC IP appli
49. Station radio ID The suggested Radio ID for the Control Stations is 16448250 which converts to an easy to remember IP address of 12 250 250 250 and 13 250 250 250 Since this Radio ID is so large it is unlikely to be duplicated on other radios It is important to note that every MOTOTRBO radio in the system that is intended to communicate with the Application Server must be programmed with the Application Server control station IP This value must be entered for both the Automatic Registration Service ARS IP and the Text Message Server IP which can be found in the Network settings of the MOTOTRBO radio CPS Because the Application Server is the target for these messages the 13 250 250 250 IP address should be programmed into every field radio For radios that will use the Mobile Text Messaging Client application installed on a PC connected to the radio the 13 250 250 250 IP address should also be programmed into the application 68007024085 April 2011 266 System Design Considerations Application Server Control Station USB 12 250 250 250 192 168 11 2 192 168 11 13 250 250 250 CH1 192 168 11 1 12 250 250 250 192 168 11 2 13 250 250 250 Network Address Translation Radio ID 16448250 Radio IP 192 168 11 1 Accessory IP 192 168 11 2 Radio IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Forward to PC Enabled Control Station 12 250 250 250 192 168 12 2 USB 192 168 12 1 13 2
50. System Design Considerations 235 4 6 3 2 4 Network Bandwidth Considerations Bandwidth is the amount of data transferred to and from a network device often referred to as the bit rate Bandwidth is measured in bits per second or kilo bits per second kbps When designing an IP Site Connect system it is important to understand the needs of each IP Site Connect device so that the appropriately rated network connection for each site can be chosen If a customer has high speed network connections between sites these calculations may not be as important but if they are working on lower speed public Internet Service Providers ISPs it is good practice to understand these values and plan accordingly If the minimum amount of bandwidth is not available the end user may experience audio holes or even dropped calls Radio to Radio Data messaging or RDAC commands may not be successful on the first attempt or may be dropped all together In general the quality of service may suffer if substantial bandwidth is not available Note that for most Internet Service Providers the uplink bandwidth is the limiting factor The downlink bandwidth is usually multiple factors above the uplink bandwidth Therefore if the uplink requirements are met the downlink requirements are almost always acceptable Some ISPs may state they provide a particular bandwidth but it is important to verify the promised bandwidth is available once the system is installed and througho
51. Tx Squelch Configure this to CSQ for community repeater operation Received audio will not be repeated out The audio is instead sent over the Rx audio accessory pin Strip PL Check this box to ensure that PL is not added to CWID Radio ee Description Configuration This duration depends on the number of scan members in the Scan List Refer TX Preamble to Scanning and Preamble on page 66 for more details Duration If the radios are required to scan analog channels then it is recommended that the digital channels scan as few in number of analog channels as possible Configure this to TPL or DPL Rx Squelch Type If configured for CSQ the radios unmute to all digital transmissions and play digital noise Tx Squelch Type Configure this to TPL or DPL q yp Repeater does not repeat if there is no PL in its received signal April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 307 Radio Configuration Description Admit Criteria Configure Analog channel Admit Criteria to Correct PL Refer to Polite to Other Analog System Operation Admit Criteria of Correct PL on page 22 for more details Configure Digital channel Admit Criteria to Channel Free Refer to Polite to All Operation Admit Criteria of Channel Free on page 22 for more details Priority Scanning Disable priority scanning on all scan members in the Scan List PL Type in Scan List It is recommended
52. a 12 5 25 kHz channel e Private Line PL and Digital Private Line DPL coded squelch control e MDC signaling Emergency PTT ID and Call Alert 3 1 2 2 5 Integrated GPS Antenna and Receiver The MOTOTRBO Mobile can also be purchased to contain an internal GPS receiver that works with the Location services tracking data application The location application and radio can be configured so that the radio will transmit its location to a centralized application The GPS antenna is an external antenna that will have to be mounted on the vehicle In the LCD display on the radio an icon will display whether or not the radio is in range of satellites 3 1 2 2 6 Text Messaging The MOTOTRBO Mobile can receive and transmit text messages Through the menu the user can access an inbox that contains all the messages he has received When composing a message the user can generate a free form text message or choose from a list of Quick Text pre defined messages The MOTOTRBO radio allows a user to send a text message to an individual April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 155 a dispatcher or a group of radios He can even reply to and forward text messages to other radios If the MOTOTRBO mobile is not configured with the Enhanced Keypad Microphone then text messaging can be accomplished through a mobile computer running the text messaging client connected to the mobile Using CPS the radio can be configured to support text messa
53. a radio may not join an ongoing call of interest A Channel Scan will scan a list of different channels within a system analog or digital A Channel Scan is different from a Group Scan since the radio must change frequencies and sometimes even modulations analog to digital in order to scan for activity Unlike a Group Scan where only one call occurs at any given time when scanning different channels analog or multiple digital slots there can be calls taking place on any or all of the channels Because the radio cannot be everywhere at once there is a possibility that the radio will miss a transmission of interest Because of this it is recommended that the number of channels in a Channel Scan List is kept toa minimum The larger the Scan List the more likely a user will miss or join late a transmission of interest during busy times 68007024085 April 2011 Number of Digital Scan List Members 66 System Feature Overview 2 5 3 1 Scanning and Preamble Since data and digital signaling messages are typically shorter in duration than voice transmissions it can be difficult for a scanning radio to detect such messages This is especially true as the number of Scan List members increases because the amount of time between a scanning radio s repeated visits to a particular Scan List member increases making it less likely to be on the channel at the exact moment that the data or digital signaling message begins Another factor is the
54. adjustment is 1 kHz deviation Zetron Model 38 Tone Panel Switch Settings SW2 set to off up Audio Output Gain high SWS set to off up PL DPL output Gain high SW4 set to off up Flat De emphasis Flat SW6 set to off up Internal External Squelch External SW7 set to on Down COR Positive Negative Negative It may be necessary to set the generated DPL DCS signal to Invert from the tone panel to be recognized by the user radios These DTMF commands are 3750 for normal and 3751 for inverted signal generation Tone Panel Programming Note Once the above cable and jumper switch settings have been achieved you should now be able to refer to the specific controller product manual to complete installation 2 15 5 3 3 Trident Controllers April 2011 Trident MicroSystems manufactures a cable that interfaces Trident Controllers with MOTOTRBO repeaters and provides jumper settings for Trident Controllers 68007024085 System Feature Overview 2 15 6 Comparison Chart 127 Below is the table that summarizes the features supported by the MOTOTRBO Display Portable with GPS DM 3601 DP4801 Feature Name DM 3601 Talkaround Repeater Mode Operation x 12 5 25 kHz Configurable Bandwidth x PL DPL Codes X Squelch X Monitor X Time Out Timer xX Channel Access Control x Option Board Expandability xX Analog Signalin
55. amount of activity on each Scan List member basically the more active each Scan List member is the more likely that the radio is suspending its scan operations to receive on each of those Scan List members further increasing the likelihood that the radio will not receive the data or digital signaling on another Scan List member To improve the likelihood of receiving data and digital signaling messages the duration of these message types can be extended by preceding the message with special preamble signaling The amount of preamble signaling to use can be configured into the initiating radio and the amount of preamble to use is dependent upon the number of Scan List members in the target radios Scan List and whether priority scan is being used Since this added signaling increases the amount of airtime used for data and digital signaling messages there is a trade off between increased channel loading and increased likelihood of receiving data and digital signaling messages while scanning Suggested guidelines for the amount of preamble duration to use with Scan Lists not using priority is provided in the following table Scan preambles are not required for Capacity Plus Number of Analog Scan List Members 6 7 8 9 10 720 720 960 960 960 960 960 960 1200 1200 960 1200 1200 1200 1440 1200 1200 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1680 1680 1440 1680 1680 1680 1680 1680 1680 1680
56. amp GPS Data S2 gt Location Response Wide Area Network Location Response Y Enhanced GPS Enhanced GPS Revert Slot Revert Slot amp GPS Data S2 Voice Text Voice Text amp ARS Channel amp ARS Channel Enhanced GPS Enhanced GPS Y Revert Slot Revert Slot e e YU e L Figure 3 28 IP Site Connect System with an Enhanced GPS Revert Channel 68007024085 April 2011 182 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 1 5 3 Capacity Plus Mode In Capacity Plus mode one or both slots of a Data Revert repeater can be configured as Enhanced GPS Revert channels Text and server data are routed on the slot configured for Data Revert whereas GPS and ARS registration data is routed on the slot configured for Enhanced GPS Revert The location requests are sent on the Trunked Channel while the location responses are sent on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel f3 f4 Y getlsZ epet Location Trunked Control Presence Notifier Station Trunked Repeater Voice Channels Conventional Control Station Y XM tig Sy 87 4 EGPS Control 7 i t Stati ation x h A Oy M5 Mo N lt M N Text amp Server Data R Enhanced GPS Revert ARS also Dat
57. an unbalanced system can cause radios not to roam even though they can no longer reach the repeater This can lead to radio transmissions that do not reach the repeater and are therefore not repeated April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 81 One method to rectify this problem is to lower the output power of the repeater This decreases the outbound coverage area but ensures that if a subscriber can hear the repeater well it can respond successfully If lowering the output power is not desirable the Roaming RSSI Threshold needs to be raised higher less negative than the recommended values This forces the radios to roam to another site within very good RF coverage of another This value may be different for portables and mobiles since they have different output power and therefore different inbound coverage Portables may need a higher less negative Roaming RSSI Threshold than mobiles Also note that there is one Roaming RSSI Threshold per roam list This means that if one site has an inbound outbound imbalance and another does not it may be difficult to find the correct Roaming RSSI Threshold to exactly accommodate both sites In other words if you set the threshold to roam correctly on the imbalanced site it may end up roaming too early on a balanced site 2 6 3 4 Setting Beacon Duration and Beacon Interval If there is no activity on a system the repeaters will hibernate and the radio s Passive Site Search are not able to
58. and Local Area Network Configuration Most network topologies are a combination of both Local and Wide Area network configurations For example there may be a need to link two or more sites with existing local networks together over a public ISP or maybe link one or more remote mountain RF site into a corporate network When doing this there are a few extra precautions to consider that are not covered in the previous sections The number of IP Site Connect devices connected together behind a single wide area connection i e behind one router can have a large effect on the required bandwidth of the wide area link The bandwidth requirements of a wide area link are the summation of the bandwidth requirements of all IP devices behind the router In other words if there are three IP Site Connect devices utilizing a single ISP link it must have enough bandwidth to support all three Recall that the traffic from one repeater is sent to every repeater therefore the required bandwidth of the ISP link at one 68007024085 April 2011 194 System Components and Topologies site is a function of the amount of other sites in the system Adding a repeater at one site increases the required bandwidth at all sites Similar to the Wide Area Network configurations the repeaters acting as the Master will require a publicly accessible static IPv4 address from the Internet Service Provider The other IP Site Connect devices utilize this publicly accessible stati
59. and Local RDAC This configuration is the most basic of the Capacity Plus topologies It does not support a remote RDAC or data messages to or from a Server One of the repeaters has an additional role of Master a broker for discovering repeaters The Master has a static address i e IPv4 address and UDP port number which is configured in all the repeaters and RDAC Static address is an address that does not change with time If the address April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 197 of the Master changes then all the repeaters and RDAC must be reconfigured with the new address Host PC A busy channel Figure 3 39 Capacity Plus Devices with Local RDAC and no Data Application Server A minimal configuration of the above figure can have just one repeater without RDAC In this case the system behaves as a two channel trunked system A busy a g we Trunked ral channels channel Figure 3 40 Two channel Capacity Plus System without Data Application Server 3 2 4 1 2 A System with No Data Application Server and Remote RDAC If RDAC is on a different IPv4 network then the backend network of Capacity Plus should be connected to the external IP network using a router In this case use the static address of the Master as seen from the other side of the router to configure the repeaters and RDAC Note that the router may be required to do port based network address translation for each repeater
60. and Topologies 3 2 1 1 5 GPS Revert in Direct Mode With the addition of the GPS Revert feature it is now possible to transmit Location Update messages on channels other than the Selected Channel See GPS Revert Channel on page 50 for configuration information The diagram in Figure 3 16 illustrates this concept in its simplest form while operating in direct mode In this example Channel f1 is the Selected Channel and Channel f2 is the GPS Revert Channel Communications such as presence location requests Application Server to radio text and voice occur on the Selected Channel while all location responses radio to Application Server including location updates occur on the GPS Revert Channel Therefore a minimum of 2 control stations are required to support GPS Revert fi Presence fa SELETED Location Request TX f RX f fi d GPS REVERT F Eia RX f2 N MCDD MOTOTRBO g MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode 7 digital mode S HE F SELETED TX f Location Response 1 RX f Application Server f2 GPS REVERT TX f2 RX f2 MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode digital mode Figure 3 16 MOTOTRBO Radios in Two Channel Direct Mode GPS Revert Configuration Under a typical scenario the radio is powered on and then registers on the Selected Channel with the Presence Notifier and the Location Server The radio receives a Periodic Location Request and an Emergency Location Request from the
61. and the MOTOTRBO radio Note that because these IP addresses are private and only used between the radio and the Mobile Client it is recommended that they be duplicated on all Radio Mobile Client configurations in the system Mobile Client on a PC MOTOTRBO Radio 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 2 Radio IP 192 168 10 1 Accessory IP 192 168 10 2 Radio IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 10 1 Figure 4 22 Connectivity between the Mobile Client and the MOTOTRBO Radio 4 10 1 2 Radio to Air Interface Network Connectivity The MOTOTRBO radio must have an IP address to communicate with the MOTOTRBO network and other radios The radio and the system uses the Individual Radio ID and CAI Network Address to construct its Radio Network IP to ensure uniqueness The Individual Radio ID is found in the General Settings section of the radio CPS and the CAI Network Address is found in the Network Settings section A Radio ID in MOTOTRBO is a 24 bit number that can range from 1 to 16776415 and is written in decimal format in the CPS In Capacity Plus the Radio ID is a 16 bit number from 1 to 65535 which can be treated as a 24 bit number where the most significant 8 bits are zero For example the Radio ID 16776415 is represented by a hexadecimal 24 bit number as FFFCDF When broken into three 8 bits sections this becomes FF FC and DF This in decimal is 255 252 and 223 Therefore a radio that is configured with an Individu
62. as the transmitting radio the receiving radio cannot unprotect the transmission correctly For voice transmissions this results in unintelligible audio sometimes referred to as digital warbles being played through the target s speaker For data transmissions this results in an unsuccessful data message transmission This is because the IP UDP headers of a data message when unprotected using a wrong key fail to CRC check On failure of the checksum the data message is not delivered to the application In case of Enhanced Privacy the key identifier is sent with the message and if the receiving radio does not have the key then it either remains muted in case of voice message or discards the data message If the key value associated with the key identifier is different in the sender and receiver due to a miss configuration then the voice transmissions will result in unintelligible audio and the data transmissions will be unsuccessful 2 8 Keys and Key Management In case of Basic Privacy a radio is capable of holding only one Privacy Key The same key is used to protect and unprotect voice and data transmissions over all the channels and for all call types Group Call Private Call All Call or Emergency Call In case of Enhanced Privacy a radio is capable of holding up to sixteen Privacy Keys where keys are associated with channels The relationship between keys and channels is 1 0 n in other words 1 to O or 1 to many 0 mean
63. at the application level Layer 7 therefore the use of the Unconfirmed data bearer service does not require that messages are unconfirmed by the receiving radio Unconfirmed Data When Unconfirmed data is transmitted it is transmitted to the receiver once The receiver checks the integrity of the entire data message CRC check and either passes this up to the application CRC check passes through the IP layer or discards the data CRC check fails Below is an example to highlight the roles played by the control stations For example a text message is sent from a text message server to an individual radio in a Capacity Plus system Here the text message is routed from the server to a Trunked Control Station When the control station is allowed to transmit the data on the Rest channel it is transmitted once The receiving radio then checks the integrity of the message and if the CRC check passes the data is passed up to the application Upon receipt of the text message the radio s application is required to send an application layer acknowledgement to the server for confirmation Here the radio moves to a Data Revert Channel and when allowed transmits the data once to a Revert Control Station The receiving control station checks the integrity of the message and if the CRC check passes the data is passed up to the application If the confirmation is not received by the application on the server it will attempt to retry the message with th
64. back home button and an OK button for selection users can easily navigate through the following additional features The Menu includes e Contacts Scan 68007024085 April 2011 154 System Components and Topologies e Messages e Call Logs e Utilities For further details on these menus please see the MOTOTRBO mobile user manual Full Keypad As an option the MOTOTRBO Mobile offers an Enhanced Keypad Microphone so that users can manually enter target addresses for system features Text messaging from the mobile will be available to the end user if the MOTOTRBO mobile is configured with an Enhanced Keypad Microphone The Enhanced Keypad Microphone has a keypad that also doubles as a keyboard for text messaging 3 1 2 2 2 Voice Feature Support With use of the MOTOTRBO Mobile interface the user has access to all the voice features the MOTOTRBO system as to offer These features include Group Calls Private Calls All Calls and Emergency Calls 3 1 2 2 3 Command and Control Feature Support Command and control system features like Radio Check Call Alert Remote Monitor and Radio Enable Disable are all accessible from the MOTOTRBO Mobile s user interface 3 1 2 2 4 Analog Compatibility The radios can be programmed to be backwards compatible and can support many current analog system features These analog channels can be accessed through the Channel Rocker Supported analog features include e Analog communications on
65. be set up completely When answering is not required the phone user can talk immediately after the first ring When answering is required the phone user is not permitted to talk until one of the target radio users answers the call by pushing the PTT Otherwise the phone user is not heard by the radio users When answering is required but the call is unanswered during the configured response period the repeater sends a de access code to the APP box and the call ends automatically Phone All Call an exclusive phone talkgroup call is supported in the DTP feature as well The phone user can follow the same phone talkgroup call setup procedure to set up the phone call by using the All Call ID or Os as the Target ID In a Phone All Call the phone user can start to talk after the first ring before any radio user answers the call During a Phone All Call not all radio users are able to respond to the phone user Only radio users with radios configured with All Call announcement capability are able to respond to the landline phone user and heard by all the other radio users These users are able to end the Phone All Call by sending the de access code Hence when a phone user makes a Phone All Call it is recommended to provide contact information so that the receiving radio users have means to contact the phone user if needed Phone All Call can be enabled disabled in the repeater via CPS 2 14 2 During a Phone Call During a phone patch call the rad
66. because the receiving radios are on this channel In RO1 05 00 and Is an Emergency Call for the RO1 06 00 it is transmitted same Talkgroup active impolitely In RO1 07 00 or later Transmit Interrupt is used to stop the ongoing call Emergency Call is transmitted is Rest Channel idle over the idle Rest Channel No In RO1 05 00 RO1 06 00 R01 07 00 Emergency Call is transmitted impolitely over Is call on busy Rest Channe the busy Rest Channel interruptible Transmit Interrupt is used to stop the ongoing call Emergency Call is then transmitted on the idle Rest Channel NOTE A radio does not provide any audible indication to the user when the radio switches channels However the group display on the radio changes NOTE In software version R01 05 00 an Emergency Call may not be serviced if ALL of the following scenarios occur All Trunked Channels are busy e A call for the emergency talkgroup is active on a channel 68007024085 April 2011 38 System Feature Overview e A radio powers on or joins the system after a long fade and the radio initiates an Emergency Call In this instance there is no radio to service the Emergency Call on the busy Rest Channel There are three major methods to process the emergency alarm and the Emergency Call all are configurable through the CPS They are Emergency Alarm Only Emergency Alarm and Call and Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow 2 3 4 1 Emerg
67. call to transmit impolitely Always to automatically clear the channel using the Voice Interrupt feature prior to beginning the voice transmission Voice Interrupt or to follow the previously configured channel access Follow Admit Criteria If configured for an In Call Criteria of Always the user will receive a Talk Permit Tone when they press the PTT while receiving a transmission for them In other words a radio has the ability to transmit over another user while listening to their transmission However when this happens the other party does not stop transmitting and therefore RF contention can occur which may corrupt both transmissions The In Call Criteria of Voice Interrupt is an alternative to the In Call Criteria of Impolite The Voice Interrupt option has advantages including the ability to avoid the previously described RF contention issue by clearing the channel prior to beginning a transmission which yields a higher probability of successfully communicating with the intended target radio s as compared with the RF contention encountered with impolite transmissions However Voice Interrupt has disadvantages including a longer channel access time when an interruption is necessary due to the signaling having to complete the interruption and handoff If configured for an In Call Criteria of Voice Interrupt the radio user receives a Talk Permit Tone when PTT is pressed while receiving an interruptible voice transmission and the channe
68. cause further congestion of the data channels An example of a use case where a set of mobile radios are powered on within a short period is a Bus Depot Buses have mobiles to facilitate the tracking of buses from a central location The MOTOTRBO mobiles have built in GPS receivers that send the location of a bus periodically Generally the buses leave the depot within a short period of each other All the mobiles in the buses may power up within this period jamming the channels and hence delaying the registration of mobiles In this case the locations of buses are not available at the central location until the registration process completes successfully MOTOTRBO provides two mechanisms to reduce the number of data messages triggered by powering a radio The total reduction is up to one fourth of the original number of messages exchanged between a radio and the Server i e the number of data messages reduces to two The two mechanisms are described below The presence of a radio triggers a Text Messaging application to send a message to the radio This message is called the Service Availability message and it contains the IP address of the Text Messaging application and the services offered To reduce the number of Service Availability messages a customer should do the following e Pre configure the radio with the IP address as seen by the radio of the Text Messaging Server using CPS 68007024085 April 2011 272 System Design Consi
69. configured per group and slot otherwise there may be contention between the acknowledgements The supervisors retain a list of received emergency alarms so that they can keep track of multiple emergencies Once cleared the emergency alarm is removed from the list and the next one is displayed These emergencies are displayed in a last in first out sequence The supervisor has the ability to hide the emergency alarm list so he can contact service personnel to attend to the received emergency situation The channel where the emergency alarm was received is displayed to aid the supervisor when changing channels If the user follows up the Emergency Alarm with a voice call while in the emergency mode his transmission contains an embedded emergency indication Any radio user can be configured to display this embedded emergency indication Emergency Calls are always processed with an admit criteria of Always This allows the Emergency Call to transmit regardless of the current channel activity If there is another radio currently transmitting contention may occur The initiating radio supports a feature that is tied to silent emergency and the Emergency Call The Unmute Option prevents the radio from receiving voice traffic after initiation of a Silent Emergency In situations where an indication of an emergency state is not desirable it is important to be able to mute incoming voice that may give away the initiators emergency state Once the u
70. create complex control systems that initiates a large door to close and then announces when the door physically closes April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 173 The third basic configuration is a mobile configured on the first time slot connected to customer supplied external telemetry hardware detecting a closure that signifies a door has been opened shown by door in upper right corner Upon detecting the GPIO pin as active it sends a telemetry toggle command to another mobile radio on the first time slot This mobile radio is configured to toggle an output pin which is connected to telemetry hardware that sounds an alarm shown by alarm on upper left corner Similar to the other configurations this method can be extended to a myriad of other solutions such as only opening doors when other doors have been closed or turning on water pumps when water levels reach a particular level This configuration can be used automate the environment of two remote locations together The possibilities are only limited by the designer s imagination 3 2 2 1 3 Server Based Data Applications in Repeater Mode MOTOTRBO also supports server based data applications in repeater mode This configuration consists of a PC referred to as the Application Server running the server software connected to the radio infrastructure via a mobile radio The mobile radio is usually AC powered The mobile is configured as a control station therefore i
71. determine the signal strength and therefore which site is best since repeaters are not transmitting Because of this the repeater can be configured to transmit a beacon when not active and there is no other interfering signal During times of no activity the subscriber utilizes the signal strength of the beacon to determine when it should roam and which site it should roam to If the subscriber does not receive a beacon in the expected duration it assumes it is out of range of the repeater or the repeater has failed and attempts to roam to another site Both the beacon duration and the interval are programmable via CPS The beacon duration is only configured in the repeater but the beacon interval is programmed in both the repeater and the radio The duration and interval of the beacon is a function of the over the air shared use rules in the customer s region The beacon duration is dependant on the number of sites in the IP Site Connect system and therefore in the roam list The beacon interval is dependant on how quickly the radio is expected to roam to and from a site when there is no activity The minimal duration and interval need to be met while keeping within the shared use guidelines of the region The ratio of the beacon duration and beacon interval equate to how often the repeaters transmit while there is no inbound radio activity i e the beacon transmit ratio This ratio is not directly programmed into the system but is rather a
72. door to close and then announces when the door physically closes fi TX f1 digital gt TX ft RX f1 o RX fi 1 GPIO GPIO Output Input Telemetry Device Telemetry Device Customer Provided MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU Customer Provided digital mode digital mode Figure 3 11 Send Telemetry Command to Toggle an Output Pin from MOTOTRBO Radio to Another MOTOTRBO Radio when Input Pin State Changes 68007024085 April 2011 160 System Components and Topologies The third basic configuration is a mobile that is connected to customer supplied external telemetry hardware which sends an event to one of the mobile s GPIO pins when it detects that a particular door has been opened Upon detecting the GPIO pin as active it sends a telemetry toggle command to another mobile radio This mobile radio is configured to toggle an output pin which is connected to telemetry hardware that sounds an alarm Similar to the other configurations this method can be extended to a myriad of other solutions such as only opening doors when other doors have been closed or turning on water pumps when water levels reach a particular level This configuration can be used automate the environment of two remote locations The possibilities are only limited by the designer s imagination 3 2 1 1 3 Server Based Data Applications in Direct Mode MOTOTRBO also supports server based data applications in direct mode This configuratio
73. encoded for a Frequency Modulation FM transmission The bits contained in the digital packets are encoded as symbols representing the amplitude and phase of the modulated carrier frequency amplified and then transmitted TDMA Time Division Multiple Access organizes a channel into 2 time slots a given radio s transmitter is active only for short bursts which provides longer battery life By transmitting only on their alternating time slots two calls can share the same channel at the same time without interfering with one another thereby doubling spectrum efficiency Using TDMA a radio transmits only during its time slot i e it transmits a burst of information then waits then transmits the next burst of information 2 1 1 5 Standards Compliance The digital protocols employed in MOTOTRBO from vocoding and forward error correction to framing transmission encoding and transmission via two slot TDMA are fully specified by the ETSI DMR Tier 2 Standard which is an internationally recognized standard with agreements among its supporting members Although formal interoperability testing and verification processes for this standard have yet to fully mature Motorola anticipates that MOTOTRBO radio systems will be interoperable with other solutions that comply to the ETSI DMR Tier 2 standard European Telecommunications Standards Institute 2 Digital Mobile Radio 3 Tier 2 indicates full power conventional operation in lice
74. for voice to leave the source repeater and reach the destination repeater Three types of delay are inherent in the backend networks propagation delay e serialization delay e handling delay Propagation delay is caused by the distance a signal must travel via light in fiber or as electrical impulses in copper based networks A fiber network stretching halfway around the world 13 000 miles induces a one way delay of about 70 milliseconds Serialization delay is the amount of time it takes the source repeater to actually place a packet byte by byte onto the backend network interface Generally the effect of serialization delay on total delay is relatively minimal but since IP Site Connect system sends a voice packet one by one to all the repeaters the serialization delay for the last destination repeater is of repeaters 1 times the serialization delay for the first destination repeater Handling delay defines many different types of delay caused by the devices e g secure routers that forward the packet through the backend network A significant component of the handling delay is the queuing delay which occurs when more packets are sent out to a network device than the device can handle at a given interval The CPS allows setting the Total Delay i e sum of propagation delay serialization delay and handling delay to be High 90 ms or Normal 60 ms in both the repeaters and the radios Note that radios also support higher valu
75. frequency DTMF These DTMF tones enable the user to communicate with a device connected to a control station using the numeric keypad 68007024085 April 2011 28 2 3 2 System Feature Overview This feature is supported in single site conventional IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus sys tem configurations This feature is also supported by radios in analog mode WARNING Because a phone patch call needs other call processing requirements in addition to DTMF tones simply connecting an APP box to the control station does not enable the phone patch call capability If phone patch calls need to be supported please use the configurations defined in the DTP feature See Digital Telephone Patch DTP on page 250 Transmit Interrupt The Transmit Interrupt feature is a suite of features proprietary to Motorola This feature generally allows a radio to shut down an ongoing clear basic privacy or enhanced privacy interruptible voice transmission and potentially initiate a new transmission Transmit Interrupt is independent of call type therefore it applies to Group Calls Individual Calls Emergency Calls and All Calls This feature also applies to Individual Calls that are initiated via remote monitor command and Group Calls that are initiated via emergency remote monitor For software version R01 06 00 this feature is supported on digital direct channels digital repeater channels and IP Site Connect local channels For software vers
76. guideline for setting the Beacon Duration and Interval If on a shared use frequency the beacon transmit ratio should be kept low The target ratio is between 5 and 10 In other words if there is a need to increase the beacon duration the beacon interval must also increase in order to keep the correct ratio If the beacon duration is configured too short it can be difficult for a roaming radio to detect it This is especially true as the number of sites increases As the amount of time between a roaming radio s repeated roam attempts to a particular site increases it is less likely to be inspecting the site at the exact moment that the beacon is transmitted Recall that the home site is sampled in between other sites which increases the overall cycle time A user is typically within the coverage of no more than 4 sites at any given time therefore even with a large roam list most of the sites have no activity and can be inspected very quickly If numerous sites have shared use frequencies i e interference the radio takes longer to get through its roam list and this increases the time between inspections of one particular site Note that because the roam list is sorted by signal strength the nearer sites are inspected first Alternatively if a user is transitioning to a site that they have not visited lately the first roam may take slightly longer but once it is has been detected this site moves to the front of the roam list To improve the li
77. he has selected He may be an Acknowledging Supervisor for one Group but only an Emergency Initiator on another Note that the selected Digital System references a group of parameters used when a user initiates an emergency A radio programmed with a Digital Emergency System of None will not be able to initiate an emergency on that channel The parameters contained within the digital system will be discussed in detail later CPS Option per Channel Digital Emergen Emergenc Emergency ia aoe Emergency aon Handling Role Emergency Alarm Alarm Ack a g System Indication Indication E Initiat Selected Disabled Disabled optionally mergency Initiator electe Isadle S e Enabled Monitoring Supervisor ar or Enabled Disabled Enabled Rekowledging PRE Enabled Enabled Enabled Supervisor None By identifying the roles in the customer s organization it should start to become clear how they handle emergencies at a high level If there are numerous supervisors it is important to note which groups these supervisors monitor as there may be more than one supervisor that monitors multiple or all the groups This will be the key to deciding on an emergency handling strategy 4 11 7 2 Emergency Handling Strategies 68007024085 There are two major strategies to handle emergency situations Tactical or Centralized A Tactical emergency handling strategy is when the Emergency Initiators transmit their emergency alarm and call on the c
78. i e the radio in the emergency condition is not receiving the other radio s voice transmission e The radio user in the emergency condition requests an Emergency Voice Transmission The Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Voice feature is not used when the radio belongs to the voice call is being interrupted Instead when the radio belongs to the call on the channel i e the radio that is receiving the voice transmission the In Call Criteria is used rather than the Emergency Voice Interrupt feature This is because some systems may disallow radios to interrupt any call to which they belong In this case the user must wait until the receiving transmission has finished before beginning their Emergency Voice transmission The Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Voice feature is also capable of interrupting an All Call provided the All Call is transmitting interruptible voice NOTE For this feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted However not all need to be provisioned with the Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Voice capability If the radio succeeds at interrupting the voice transmission the radio uses the established procedures for Emergency Voice Transmissions once the channel has been cleared The radio user whose transmission was interrupted receives a Talk Prohibit Tone until the PTT is released If the radio fails to interrupt the
79. in UHF UHF 1 and UHF 2 or VHF frequencies can be combined so that voice or data from one system flows into another Connecting to IP based applications IP Site Connect mode allows the customers to connect to third party IP based dispatch consoles or call logging and recording applications or routing calls to from IP based phones Topologies of IP Site Connect System 3 2 3 1 1 Wide Area System with Centralized Data Application Server This basic topology as shown in Figure 3 33 is a single wide area system that consists of multiple single repeater systems operating in digital mode and zero or more Application Servers connected over a back end network that supports IPv4 where April 2011 A repeater system consists of a fixed digital repeater digital radios with or without an accessory or a data terminal and two conventional physical channels Only one of the repeaters which is called the Master has an additional role in the IP Site Connect mode This additional role involves brokering of UDP IP address and states of repeaters A radio uses one slot of a pair of frequencies i e inbound and outbound to communicate with its repeater The pair of frequencies and or the color code used by repeaters are not necessarily the same Their frequencies may be in different frequency bands The geographically adjacent repeaters have different frequencies Two repeaters with the same frequency must be separated by a suitable distance to minim
80. in most conventional systems if the repeater coverage does not overlap the user needs to know his location and switch to the other channel when required Even just having one MOTOTRBO repeater provides increased user capacity The digital repeater operates in TDMA which essentially divides one channel into two virtual channels in digital mode therefore the user capacity doubles Without the repeater this TDMA synchronization is not possible The repeater utilizes embedded signaling to inform the field radios of the status of each channel time slot It informs the field radios of each channel s busy idle status the type of traffic and even the source and destination information Another advantage during digital operation is error detection and correction The further a transmission travels the more interference it encounters and inevitably more errors are introduced The receiving MOTOTRBO radio operating in digital mode utilizes built in error detection and correction algorithms native to the protocol to correct these problems The MOTOTRBO repeater uses the same algorithms to correct the errors prior to retransmission thus repairing any errors that occur on the uplink it then transmits the repaired signal on the downlink This greatly increases the reliability and audio quality in the system which increases the customer s coverage area In digital mode the repeater only retransmits digital signals from radios configured with the
81. inadvertently pressed for an extended period of time and occupying the radio channel e Data Over Voice Interrupt This feature allows a third party data application on an option board or attached PC to control the radio in order to stop any ongoing interruptible voice transmission and initiate its own data message transmission The application can also specify in the data message an option to discard itself if an ongoing voice transmission is not interruptible This feature is useful in situations where data traffic is more important than voice traffic Data Over Voice Interrupt is not used by any data applications native to the radio e g Text Message Location and Telemetry do not use Data Over Voice Interrupt April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 29 While receiving a Direct Mode transmission a radio may use the Transmit Interrupt feature to remotely dekey the transmitting radio and begin its own Direct Mode or Repeater Mode transmission Similarly while receiving a Repeater Mode transmission a radio may use the Transmit Interrupt feature to remotely dekey the transmitting radio and begin its own Repeater Mode transmission However the radio may not use the Transmit Interrupt feature to remotely dekey the transmitting radio s Repeater Mode transmission and begin its own Direct Mode transmission This scenario is not supported because Transmit Interrupt dekeys only the radio s transmission within a channel timeslot but
82. informs the Location Server that this radio is now on the system The Location Server then sends out a service availability message through the control station to the radio informing it how often to send in its periodic updates and what to do if an emergency is initiated Location Dispatch applications request a radio s location information from the Location Server application and display the radio s location on a map A Location Dispatch application can reside on the Application Server as well Text messaging also uses a server based configuration Similar to the Location Server the Text Message Server application can be installed on the Application Server machine with the Presence Notifier When a radio registers with the Presence Notifier it informs the Text Message Server that the radio is now on the system The Text Message Server then sends out a service availability message through the control station to the radio informing it how it can communicate with the Text Message Server Text Message Dispatch applications communicate with the Text Message Server in order to send and receive messages to and from the radio network via the connected control April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 175 station Like the Location Dispatch the Text Message Dispatch application can reside on the Application Server too As previously described radios can send text messages to each other without communicating through the Text Messa
83. is connected to external hardware that detects this change at the GPIO pin and turns on a light This configuration can be extended to other applications like remotely opening door locks turning on pumps or switching on sprinklers Another application might be to combine the voice from the radio s external audio lines a relay closure and a public announcement system to remotely make announcements over the intercom from your portable radio f 1X f digital gt 1X f RX fi lt _ RX fi 1 Door Open GPIO Input Telemetry Device Customer Provided MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 10 Send Telemetry Message from MOTOTRBO Radio to Another MOTOTRBO Radio when Input Pin State Changes This second basic configuration is a mobile that is connected to a customer supplied external telemetry hardware which sends an event to one of the mobile s GPIO pins when it detects that a particular door has been opened Upon detecting the GPIO pin as active it sends a pre configured Text Status Message to a particular portable radio The portable radio displays Door Opened to the user as a popup alert This basic configuration can be used at remote locations to detect a variety of sensors such as water levels door and window intrusions or even motion sensors Combining the first and second configuration the user can create complex control systems that initiates a large
84. is highly recommended to assign radios to separate groups and or channels This classifies radios provisioned with Transmit Interrupt capability from the radios that are not provisioned with the capability In Direct Mode Transmit Interrupt can typically clear an interruptible voice transmission from the channel in Jess than two seconds In Single Site Repeater Mode Transmit Interrupt can typically clear an interruptible voice transmission from the channel in Jess than three seconds The Transmit Interrupt feature provides one automatic retry in the event that the first interrupt attempt fails due to corrupt signaling e g RF coverage degradation signaling collisions with other radios etc The retry essentially doubles the times shown above If the radio user still needs to interrupt after the failed retry the user needs to initiate another service request e VOX is not compatible with the Transmit Interrupt feature Therefore VOX is prevented from operating when any of the Transmit Interrupt features are enabled NOTE For the Transmit Interrupt feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted If some radios are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g normally desirable for a supervisor s radio then those radios transmissions cannot be interrupted 68007024085 April 2011 30 System Feature Overview 2 3 2 1 Upgrading a System to be Transmit
85. key s from one radio s archive into another radio s archive without the user needing to retype the key for each radio A customer may need to change one or more keys in the case of Enhanced Privacy with a set of new keys into a set of radios Some of the reasons for changing keys are e Compromise of keys April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 91 e Security policy of the customer requires periodic update of keys e Loss of a radio resulting in a concern that this may lead to compromise of keys or eavesdropping The easiest way to implement a key switchover is to gather all radios and re program them at one go But it may not always be possible to gather all the radios without seriously affecting day to day operations An alternate method is to create two zones where one zone is set to unprotected while the other is set to protected The key can be changed on the protected zone and the users shall use the unprotected zone until all radios have been updated Once all radios have been updated the dispatcher informs the fielded radios to switch zones This allows users to communicate in clear until the all radios are provisioned and then all the users switch keys at the same time A similar zone strategy can be used to perform periodic key set changeovers For example when one zone has January s keys and another duplicate zone has February s keys On the first of February the users switch to the February zone Through
86. larger update period is being used On the contrary the channel supports fewer radios if a higher update rate i e smaller update period is being used The following chart illustrates the relationship between the location update period and number of radios assigned to a particular GPS Revert Channel Example 1 No more than 20 radios should be assigned to a particular GPS Revert Channel if an update period of 60 seconds i e 60 updates per hour is desired 68007024085 April 2011 220 System Design Considerations Example 2 If 120 radios are assigned to use a GPS Revert Channel the minimum recommended update period is 360 seconds i e 10 updates per hour Hence some flexibility is provided as to whether a large number of radios with a slow update rate or a small number of radios with a fast update rate is used on a GPS Revert Channel Alternatively depending on whether having a large number of radios assigned to a GPS Revert Channel or having a fast update rate is more desirable for a particular system the system can be provisioned to accommodate either scenario A higher GPS update rate can impact the service voice control and or data presented on the channel selected by the radio user because the radio spends a longer time transmitting its GPS location on the GPS Revert Channel The recommended rate is to not exceed 60 GPS updates per hour per radio i e 60 second GPS update period 360 Above the Line is Recom
87. later Additionally the radios are capable of automatically roaming from one site to another The IP Site Connect configuration of MOTOTRBO does not require any new hardware besides backend network devices such as routers If a customer has multiple MOTOTRBO systems working in digital repeater mode at dispersed sites and wants to convert them into an IP Site Connect system then the repeaters and the radios should be updated with new software and the repeaters need to be connected to an IPv4 based backend network It is possible to configure a repeater such that e Both logical channels work in IP Site Connect mode i e over wide area e Both logical channels work in digital repeater mode i e single site over local area e One of its logical channels works in IP Site Connect mode i e over wide area and the other logical channel works in digital repeater mode i e single site over local area MOTOTRBO has three security features in the IP Site Connect configuration e Provides the confidentiality of voice and data payloads by extending the privacy feature whether Basic or Enhanced to cover the communication over the backend network Ensures that all the messages between repeaters are authentic e Supports Secure VPN Virtual Private Network based communication between the repeaters for customers needing higher level of security protection against replay attack The IP Site Connect configuration of MOTOTRBO provides a mecha
88. location application server to periodically get the location of a radio user by sending a single location request that contains the time interval between updates The radio continues to update its location periodically at the specified time interval until the request is cancelled by the location application server The location tracking application can configure the radio to provide updates as frequently as once every 10 seconds The default value is once every 10 minutes The rate of update is configurable in increments of 1 second and must be matched with the resource capabilities of the radio system and the needs of the end user This is discussed further in System Design Considerations on page 203 e On Emergency A radio will send its location after the user triggers an emergency alarm or an emergency alarm and call request The location update is sent only to the April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 49 68007024085 location application server which had previously sent an active location request for location updates from that radio upon an emergency event This location update is sent by the radio only after the processing of emergency is completed For example for Emergency Alarm with Call the location data is only sent after the emergency alarm is acknowledged and the initial Emergency Call is completed This happens because the location data is sent as a data burst which has lower priority than the voice call April
89. messages and therefore this feature should be enabled in a control station only if all the radios in the system are MOTOTRBO radios with software versions RO1 05 00 or later This feature can be enabled in a control station or a radio selectively for data messages transmitted to one or more applications i e based on the destination UDP port The feature reduces the 28 byte UDP IPv4 headers into 4 or 8 byte but it requires an extra Layer 2 header The net effect is the saving of 60 milliseconds in confirmed mode or 120 milliseconds in unconfirmed mode in transmission time over the air For a typical location message this approximately reduces the transmission time by 10 to 20 MOTOTRBO provides an option to transmit a data message transmitted to a radio i e not toa group of radios either as a confirmed or as an unconfirmed data message If the message size is less than 144 bytes in repeater mode or 48 bytes in Talkaround mode then the unconfirmed data message has lower transmission time over the air Sending of a confirmed data message improves the reliability of the transmission Additionally if there are radios with software versions prior to RO1 05 00 in the system and they receive individual data messages from the new radios April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 273 the new radios shall be configured to use confirmed individual data message only to avoid interoperability issues NOTE GPS data in IP Site Conne
90. new Rest Channel If the current Rest Channel is the last idle channel i e all the other available channels are in use the current Rest Channel remains as the Rest Channel The call starts on the channel and non participating radios stay on the channel In this condition non participating radios indicate that the channel is busy via its yellow LED If all channels are busy and a radio user initiates a call then the radio generates a distinct tone to indicate that the system is busy As soon as a channel becomes free in the Capacity Plus system the non participating radios are informed and move to the free channel At the end of the call i e after the call hang time the repeater also broadcasts the status of all other available channels This triggers any radio on the channel to move to the current Rest Channel or to a channel where a Group Call of interest is active The Capacity Plus system has no central controller to manage the Rest Channel The Rest Channel is managed collectively by all the trunked repeaters A trunked repeater periodically informs the status of its channels to other trunked repeaters whenever the status of its channels change When a new Rest Channel is selected the selecting repeater informs all the other repeaters The new Rest Channel is selected based on the following conditions Atthe start of a call the repeater of the current Rest Channel selects the new Rest Channel e On detection of interference
91. noise and static Digital Sounds Different The vocoding process is designed to deliver optimum audio quality with a very small number of bits Some listeners find the resulting tonal qualities of digital speech somewhat different from what they have experienced with analog speech Because the vocoding process is highly specialized for reproducing human speech other sounds like music and tones are not reproduced accurately Additionally digital audio can introduce end to end audio delays When overwhelming errors or dropouts are encountered digital radios can generate some unique sounding audio artifacts Background Noise Reduction The advanced vocoding capabilities in MOTOTRBO also include background noise reduction Regardless of what is happening in the environment of the transmitting radio only voice is reconstructed at the receiving radio background noise like machine noise wind noise and traffic noise is not reconstructed and thus not heard This is a key advantage of the MOTOTRBO digital voice solution over typical analog solutions because noisy environments like factories stores work sites and windy locations do NOT significantly degrade communication intelligibility What End Users will NOT Experience with Digital Audio April 2011 Digital radio is not CD Quality MOTOTRBO is the first radio in the industry to use the AMBE 2 low bit rate vocoder to deliver communications grade voice quality End users
92. noticeable that larger talkgroups more subscribers decreases the average success rate This is because there are not enough unreserved windows to support all the missed reserved data transmissions One minute update rate one 10 sec call per minute with 75 loading 104 00 102 00 o PTT Window 5 m Window 6 2 98 00 Window 7 oO 9 ne gt lt Window 8 A 96 00 Window 9 D a 5 94 00 YN e Window 10 z 92 00 90 00 T T T T T T T 1 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Radios Figure 4 8 One Minute Update Rate with a 10 second Call per Minute at 75 Loading 1 Loading here refers to percentage of periodic window reservation 68007024085 April 2011 222 System Design Considerations In Figure 4 9 the update rate is increased to 4 minutes A quick evaluation of the situation might cause the assumption that increasing the update rate by 4 times would lead to the same average success rate with 4 times as many subscribers However the success rate is much higher than expected for 4 times the number of subscribers Such an improvement is triggered because the number of subscribers that miss their reserved window at any one time is decreased This leads to an overall increase in success rate Four minute update rate one 10 sec call per minute with 75 loading 105 00 104 00 g 103 00
93. occurs the customer may require additional repeaters to support their traffic load A system that operates in the fair level for the majority of the time results in longer wait times and having a significant number of unsuccessful attempts to acquire the channel on the user s first attempt These conditions would result in an unsatisfactory level of performance for the end users even though the system itself is capable of operating in this region Fair __ _High Usage Voice GPS Text oh Voice High GPS Low Text exer Low Voice High GPS Low Text _ _high Voice Low GPS Low Text High Voice Only Low Usage Voice GPS Text Low Voice Only of Users per Slot Figure 4 1 Number of Users per Slot versus User Experience There are trends indicated in the chart that are worth noting One is the impact in going from a Low Voice usage traffic environment to a High Voice usage traffic environment The chart shows that a customer using the system for voice services only should be capable of supporting approximately 45 users on the channel if the user traffic falls into the Low Voice usage traffic profile one call per user per hour However if the customer intends to support a higher level of voice traffic a single channel should be capable of supporting between 15 and 20 users and still remain in the good user experience level It will always be difficult to accurately predict a customer s u
94. of the MOTOTRBO portable radio and on the front and rear accessory connectors of the MOTOTRBO mobile radio Detailed specifications are available in the respective product service manuals NOTE Option boards enable a third party to embed an application into the MOTOTRBO mobile and or portable radios and utilize third party provided hardware and software Option boards can control the radio through the internal option board interface as well as interact with external e g PC based applications Option boards can also send voice or data calls and receive calls routed to the radios 68007024085 April 2011 130 System Feature Overview To support the logging of over the air activities a radio provides start and end notifications of all the calls that the radio monitors over the air The notifications are sent to only one device e g an option board or a data terminal NOTE A radio monitors only calls whose frequency color code and slot number are similar to its own and are either standard DMR or Motorola proprietary messages In IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus modes each repeater performs the following additional duties Ensures that their communication links with other repeaters in the system are open all the time Informs their operating status e g mode IPv4 UDP address to each other Informs their alarm conditions and provides diagnostic information to the RDAC IP application tool Allows the RDAC IP applicat
95. of the MCDD to track users and send messages out the appropriate channel Therefore it is reasonable that the outbound message rate setting be increased to a greater value than the default if there is more than one channel on a system The default value for the text message server is 14 messages per minute distributed uniformly The default value for the Location Server is 20 messages per minute distributed uniformly For example if a system only has one data capable channel and therefore only one control station the default value of the Outbound Message Rate paces the messages appropriately to not overload the control station or add excessive load to the channel If there are more than one channel 2 to 4 channels and the users are distributed fairly evenly over these channels the Outbound Message Rate could be increased since only a portion of the messages will be going to any single channel It is difficult to predict which channel users will be registered on and even harder to predict how many messages will be sent to a particular user on a particular channel It is recommended that the outbound pacing rates remain as default though special considerations for GPS Revert are discussed in GPS Revert and Loading on page 218 If they are increased and the target radios are not evenly distributed over multiple channels one channel may experience excess loading The MOTOTRBO radio can buffer only up to 10 messages If there is RF conges
96. on the target radio refer to the MOTOTRBO system planner for guidance on how to set the duration This value can be increased in all the transmitting radios if scanning radios are often missing data messages However a larger preamble occupies the channel longer Therefore increasing the Transmit Preamble duration will increase the success rate of data received while other radios are scanning but will decrease the amount of data that can be transmitted on the channel This is a radio wide feature The TX Preamble feature is disabled if the duration is set to 0 This feature is supported in Digital mode only Talkaround Group Call Hang Time Sets the duration during which a radio talks back to a received call or continues a transmitted call using the previously received or previously transmitted digital Group ID This hang time is used during a Group Call in Talkaround mode to produce smoother conversation During this time other radios can still transmit since the channel is essentially idle After the hang timer expires the radio transmits using the Contact Name specified for this channel This feature is supported in Digital mode only Talkaround Private Call Hang Time Sets the duration the radio keeps the call setup after the user releases the Push to Talk PTT button This is to avoid setting up the call again each time the user presses the PTT to transmit This hang time is used during a Private C
97. on the target radio to be set clear toggle or pulse The telemetry commands can also be used to query the status of GPIO pins at the target radio At the receiving end the basic built in telemetry functionality allows the target radio to translate the received telemetry command and to trigger GPIO action It also enables the target radio to display a programmed Text Status Message or act on a telemetry command received from the originating radio responding to an event at the originating radio s GPIO pins The Telemetry Text Status Message is provisioned in the source telemetry radio and is displayed as a popup alert at a target radio via the telemetry application Since the Telemetry Text Status Message is not sent as a standard text message it is not saved in the Inbox or indexed Furthermore its target can only be another radio since it must be received and processed by the telemetry application within the radio It is possible for the message to be forwarded to an external computer connected to the radio or the option board where a customer supplied application could monitor and take an action MOTOTRBO provides a telemetry interface for third party telemetry applications Further information is available in the Telemetry Services ADK listed under MOTOTRBO Applications Interfaces on page 129 Telemetry over the air signaling utilizes the data service similar to the way that text messaging works It can co exist with voice and text messa
98. or before starting CWID i e BSI transmission the repeater of the current Rest Channel selects the new Rest Channel e On detection of no Rest Channel in the event of a failure of the current Rest Channel repeater or the backend network the repeater with the lowest ID selects the new Rest Channel e When a call ends on a system if a call is in progress on the current Rest Channel then the repeater of the current Rest Channel selects the new Rest Channel The Capacity Plus system does not require an exclusive control channel The Rest Channel changes on every call in case of an interference or if the repeater becomes unavailable due to failure This results in the following advantages e Non exclusive channels make it easier to satisfy regulator frequency coordination where exclusive use of channels is not possible e Capacity Plus does not use request and grant mechanism to allocate channels and does not require any central controller to trunk the channels e The dynamic Rest Channel mechanism makes Capacity Plus very suitable for an environment where channels are shared by multiple radio systems e The dynamic Rest Channel mechanism also improves the reliability of the Capacity Plus system In the event of a repeater failure the other available repeaters automatically reconfigure themselves and continue to work as the Capacity Plus system The Capacity Plus system configuration of MOTOTRBO does not require any new hardw
99. priority over digital calls voice or data in DMM mode Dynamic Mixed Mode is a repeater only configuration and the main functions of this feature are e The system requires one pair of physical channels one Tx frequency and one Rx frequency for both analog and digital calls one MOTOTRBO repeater and one set of RF equipment antenna combiners couplers LNA etc to enable analog and digital radio users to communicate e This configuration allows the user to have a mix of legacy analog radios and the digital MOTOTRBO radios ina MOTOTRBO system e The repeater supports two independent time slots or logical channels within the 12 5 kHz physical channel bandwidth while repeating digital calls However the repeater supports one voice path transmit and receive on a 25 kHz or 12 5 kHz channel while repeating analog calls April 2011 April 2011 System Feature Overview Dynamic Mixed Mode does not support the following configurations features e IP Site Connect configuration This means that in Dynamic Mixed Mode the repeater can only repeat the digital calls over the air and cannot send the voice data packets over the IP network The status of the repeater and the control of the repeater cannot be performed from a remote PC application like RDAC IP e Capacity Plus configuration This means that in Dynamic Mixed Mode trunking the logical channels of multiple MOTOTRBO repeaters as per Capacity Plus is not supported e FCC T
100. protected confirmed location response takes 600 milliseconds compared to 540 milliseconds for an unprotected one approximately 10 loss in throughput User Control Over Privacy The Customer Programming Software CPS allows a System Installer to select the type of privacy i e Basic and Enhanced Privacy CPS also allows the enabling or disabling of the privacy service of a channel The option to toggle the privacy capability per channel can additionally be given to the radio user by providing a menu entry or programmable button Without the menu entry or programmable button the radio user is essentially locked to the channel s privacy setting It is important to note that a user can set or reset privacy for a channel and not for the radio If the user is provided with the menu entry or programmable button and he toggles the privacy setting only the selected channel s privacy setting is toggled and remains toggled even after the user changes channels or zones Toggling the privacy setting on a channel will not affect the privacy setting on other channels The privacy setting of a channel controls the transmit privacy setting not the receive privacy setting A radio on a privacy enabled channel always transmits protected while a radio on a privacy disabled channel always transmits unprotected However the radio receives both unprotected and protected regardless of the channel s privacy setting Any time the radio receives a protected
101. pulled a pin low or high the repeater cannot change the level of that pin after RDAC has made a change April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 101 2 8 6 General Considerations When Utilizing the RDAC Application to Set Up the Network Connection When utilizing the RDAC application to communicate with multiple IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus systems each system s network topology has to be considered independently This is important because some connections may utilize a LAN configuration See Local Area Network LAN Configuration on page 190 while others utilize a WAN configuration See Wide Area Network Configuration on page 191 The main difference being that local area configurations utilize the master repeater s local IP address while wide area configurations utilize the wide area IP address Connecting a single RDAC application to numerous systems that were previously residing on the same LAN VPN or WAN requires minimal configuration change The RDAC application needs to be configured with each master repeater s IP address and a unique UDP port for each system This is because the IP address of the master repeater that can be reached at wide or local area IP address does not change When connecting a single RDAC application to systems that were previously residing on independent LANs or VPNs the following configuration options can be considered 1 Combine both networks into one LAN or VPN which mo
102. repeater provides a modular flexible analog only station designed for today s communication systems and for the future It is designed to eliminate dead zones in a communications system by improving the talk in coverage on a particular receive frequency when used in a receiver voting system The satellite receiver is divided into functional modules that separate the frequency band specific and control circuits These modules are self contained functional blocks with module specific alarms This design facilitates the field replaceable unit FRU concept of field repair to maximize system uptime The satellite receiver T7713A contains the following e Receiver Module e Station Control Module e Power Supply Module April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 143 e Backplane Board e Wireline Board standard NOTE The MTR3000 satellite receiver does not support any transmitter subsystems or digital communications functionality However the RDAC application is supported in local and remote network connections 3 1 1 3 1 Satellite Receiver System Typically the satellite receiver connects to a Spectra TAC or a DigiTAC comparator Figure 3 1 shows a typical voting system and the connections of the satellite receivers T1 Control Console q pe Comparator lt q Phone Line gt R2 5 A A A i Repeater Dispatch Site Pho
103. repeater interoperates with the existing analog radios as well as the MOTOTRBO radios operating in analog and digital modes Repeater dynamically switches April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 185 between analog and digital calls While the repeater repeats one analog call at a time it repeats 2 digital calls at a time one on each logical channel The MOTOTRBO radio can be configured with both analog and digital repeater channels The user can select between the analog and digital repeaters via the Channel Selector Knob Alternatively the MOTOTRBO radio user can program his radio to scan between the analog and digital channels to ensure that they do not miss a call The programming can be done from the keypad of the radio or through CPS Details of scan will be discussed in the following sections Below is an example configuration of a mixed repeater mode system TX f RX fs fs fs yy D TX fi TX f TX fs analog analog TX fa RX f2 RX P RX fa i gt RX f Slot 1 As eh Slot 1 Legacy Legacy MOTOTRBO SU TX f2 RX fi MOTOTRBO SU Analog SU Analog Repeater analog mode amp digital mode Nef eA digital mode Slot 1 ys a ape O e TX fs RX fs ee Rs fs fs TX fs analog analog TX fs xX f MOTOTRBO x zn RX fe r Pe RX fs Slot 2 Digital Repeater Slot 2 Legacy MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO
104. repeater will set the major alarm GPIO pin to active level The standby repeater detects the disable pin is changed to inactive level and it becomes enabled The antenna switch is also triggered which changes the antenna to the now active repeater Once the fault in the primary repeater is addressed the repeater is removed from the locked state and reset the primary repeater will enabled and again become the primary repeater The standby repeater will become disabled 68007024085 April 2011 100 2 8 5 System Feature Overview If repeaters are operating in IP site Connect or Capacity Plus mode they must both have existing IP network connections and be communicating with the Master Since they are both on the network they must have different IP Addresses Although the system will not send voice to a disabled repeater it will require link management In IP Site Connect ensure taking this into consideration when planning for network bandwidth See Required Bandwidth Calculations on page 235 for details on calculating the bandwidth for IP Site Connect NOTE A redundant repeater connected to the IP Site Connect system or Capacity Plus system counts in the total number of supported peers It is also important to note that when setting up the Master repeater of an IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus system into a redundant configuration the network link must also be switched with external hardware similar to that of an RF Antenna In th
105. rules are in place to mandate manufacturers to build radios capable of the 6 25 kHz efficiency for 800 900 MHz VHF and UHF bands but the enforcement of these rules are put on hold In the meantime MOTOTRBO offers a way to divide a 12 5 kHz channel into two independent time slots thus achieving 6 25 kHz equivalent efficiency today 2 1 2 2 Delivering Increased Capacity in Existing 12 5 kHz Channels MOTOTRBO uses a two slot TDMA architecture This architecture divides the channel into two alternating time slots thereby creating two logical channels on one physical 12 5 kHz channel Each voice call utilizes only one of these logical channels and each user accesses a time slot as if it is an independent channel A transmitting radio transmits information only during its selected slot and will be idle during the alternate slot The receiving radio observes the transmissions in either time slot and relies on the signaling information included in each time slot to determine which call it was meant to receive 68007024085 April 2011 6 System Feature Overview By comparison analog radios operate on the concept of Frequency Division Multiple Access FDMA In FDMA each transmitting radio transmits continuously on a designated channel and the receiving radio receives the relevant transmission by tuning to the desired carrier frequency Today s Analog MOTOTRBO n lt Siot 2 y A E Slot 1 E y 4 siot 2 Regulatory emissions ma
106. s interruptible voice transmissions but non supervisors cannot interrupt supervisor s voice transmissions because the supervisor radios do not transmit interruptible voice When the system is configured as such both the supervisor and non supervisor radios may succeed at interrupting when a non supervisor is transmitting interruptible voice and fails at interrupting when a supervisor is transmitting uninterruptible voice This situation may be perceived by some users as an inconsistent experience If the system is set up in this manner the users should be given training on the usage of Transmit Interrupt to better understand the difference in experience Voice Interrupt During an interruptible voice transmission a transmitting radio periodically checks its receive frequency and determines whether another radio is requesting an interrupt Therefore interrupting radios must transmit their interrupt signaling when the transmitting radio is checking its receive frequency When only one radio within a group is capable of Voice Interrupt e g a supervisor radio then that radio uses one of the periodic signaling intervals to signal an interrupt request if an interrupt is requested by the radio user When two radios are capable of Voice Interrupt e g two supervisor radios it is possible that both radio users request a Voice Interrupt at nearly the same time i e during the time between two periodic signaling intervals If this happens i
107. sends a text message to a Text Message Dispatcher and it is identified as an external e mail address in the Text Message Server the Text Message Server will forward the text message to the designated e mail address The Text Message Server forwards incoming e mails in a similar fashion 1 4 Multi Channel Server Based Data Applications in Direct Mode For larger systems that have multiple direct mode frequencies the Application Server can be connected to up to 16 control stations Each control station is configured to communicate on the specified channel and acts as the data gateway for that channel April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 163 Presence registration works in the same manner with this configuration as it does with the single channel configuration When a radio powers up or changes channels it sends in a registration to the Presence Notifier via the control station which then informs the applications of the radio s presence Each control station has the same radio ID therefore the field radios transmit their messages to this radio ID regardless of which channel they are on Because the field radios are located on different channels a Multi Channel Device Driver MCDD is required to track the location of each radio so outbound data from the Application Server can be routed to the appropriate channel The MCDD is a small piece of software installed on the Application Server Each control station is ha
108. set as Enabled in most scenarios However if there is an analog signal on a digital priority channel the radio will incur a medium size audio hole on every sample even if channel marking is enabled The radio spends this time searching for synchronization that is not present It is recommended that the priority traffic be placed on a channel that has limited analog interference i e shared use April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 65 2 5 3 Scan Considerations The ability to scan multiple channels is an advantage when a user must be aware of activity on numerous channels MOTOTRBO offers the ability to scan a list of analog and digital channels frequency and slot within the same Scan List often referred to as a Channel Scan List This feature is incredibly useful when planning to migrate from analog to digital or when a user must monitor multiple repeater frequencies and slots at the same time When operating in digital MOTOTRBO also provides the ability to scan multiple groups on a channel slot This is often referred to as a Group Scan A Group Scan is an optimized way to scan for multiple groups on the same channel slot The radio monitors the channel from either the repeater or directly from another radio to determine which group is currently transmitting If the group transmitting is one specified in the Group Scan List the radio will stop and listen The radio is allowed to talkback to the group for the duration of
109. supports IP Site Connect wide area slot or local area slot or Capacity Plus mode of operation and the application supports the operation For further details on how an IP based ADP application is supported in the different modes of operation refer to sections 2 16 2 1 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect 2 16 2 2 ADP Interface with Capacity Plus and 2 16 2 3 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus 68007024085 April 2011 32 System Feature Overview An IP based ADP application can monitor call related activities Based on the activities if the application detects an unauthorized radio s attempt to access the system it can select one of the following ways to prevent the unauthorized access e The application requests the repeater to send a Radio Inhibit command to the receiving radio over the air The repeater forwards the acknowledgement from the radio to the application The application provides an indication to the user that the command was a success or failure Similarly the application can request a repeater to send an Uninhibit command for a disabled radio e When the feature is disabled in a radio the radio ignores all Inhibit commands With the release of software version RO1 07 00 the application can request the repeater to stop repeating the bursts received from an unauthorized radio over the outbound RF repeater channel for the duration of the unauthorized radio key up This solution also pre
110. systems operating in different frequency bands e g 800 900 MHz VHF and UHF The backend network of an IP Site Connect system is designed to work seamlessly with internet connectivity provided by an Internet Service Provider ISP The system only requires that one of the repeaters have a static IPv4 address while the others may be dynamic Also the system avoids the need for reconfiguration of a customer s network such as reprogramming of firewalls When a new call starts at one of the logical channel of a repeater the repeater sends the call to all the repeaters and all these repeaters repeat the call on their corresponding logical channel This allows a radio in the coverage area of any repeater to participate in the call Thus the coverage area of an IP Site Connect system is the sum of the coverage areas of all the repeaters However note that an IP Site Connect configuration does not increase the capacity i e number of calls per hour of the system The capacity of one 68007024085 System Feature Overview 17 68007024085 Wide Area Channel of an IP Site Connect system is approximately the same as that of a single repeater working in digital repeater mode In an IP Site Connect configuration MOTOTRBO radios support all the features that they already support in digital repeater mode This also includes Transmit Interrupt features that are supported on logical channels configured over wide area in software version RO1 07 00 or
111. target group alias are also displayed User names are kept in an address book This allows the user to assign user friendly names as aliases to a radio ID Various alert tones talk permit tones and keypad tones are also available to give additional audio feedback to the user Menu System In addition to accessing system features via buttons the MOTOTRBO keypad portable with display offers a menu shown on its two line LCD display With use of a menu button left and right arrow buttons a back home button and an OK button for selection users can easily navigate through the following additional features e Contacts Scan April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 149 e Messages e Call Logs e Utilities For further details on these menus please see the MOTOTRBO portable user manual Full Keypad The MOTOTRBO keypad portable with display offers a full numeric keypad for users to manually enter target addresses for system features This keypad is also used as an alphanumeric keyboard for text messaging The non display portable does not come with a keypad 3 1 2 1 2 Voice Feature Support With use of the MOTOTRBO portable interface the user has access to all the voice features the MOTOTRBO system as to offer These features include Group Calls Individual Calls All Calls and Emergency Calls 3 1 2 1 3 Command and Control Feature Support Command and control system features like Radio Check Call Alert Remote Monit
112. that there may be a local RDAC application running on a host PC connected to a repeater through RNDIS USB interface Also analog and local area only repeaters can be connected to wide area system so that they may be managed by the RDAC application In digital mode MOTOTRBO offers two logical channels The configuration above shows both the channels acting as wide area channels This means that when a call starts at one of the logical channels of a repeater that repeater sends the call to all the other repeaters and they repeat the call on their corresponding logical channel Since calls are not repeated on both logical channels a radio on a logical channel cannot participate in a voice call on the other logical channel or logical channels of other IP Site Connect systems unless scan is utilized Note that scanning cannot be enabled while roaming Radio to radio data messages are not repeated on both slots either although it is possible to support one Application Server to serve multiple wide area channels The 68007024085 April 2011 188 3 2 3 System Components and Topologies Application Server interfaces with the wide area channels in the same way as it interfaces with the local area channels This is described in section 3 2 2 1 3 Server Based Data Applications in Repeater Mode 1 2 Wide and Local Area Systems with Distributed Data Application Servers It is possible that one of the logical wide area channels of the repeaters
113. that utilizing a high cadence location update rate lowers the overall battery life of the radio since it will be transmitting often 68007024085 April 2011 216 System Design Considerations GOOD REGION fl YW mmm High Voice Usage 3 calls per user per hour Fl ZL m Low Voice Usage 1 call per user per hour J a A BAD 5 40 45 5 10 15 20 2 3 on average 1 in 5 transmissions 5 30 will be busied Location Update Period Min of Users per Slot Figure 4 5 Number of Users versus Location Update Period The value chosen for the location periodic update rate directly affects scan performance Most users realize that a radio pauses scanning when transmitting voice and then resumes scanning once the voice transmission is over The more voice a user transmits the less the radio is scanning which means its probability of missing traffic increases This is also true when transmitting data The more a radio transmits data the less it is scanning and therefore the higher the probability of missing traffic Additionally if the channel used to transmit the data is busy it will take longer to deliver the message therefore the radio s scanning will be further interrupted This means that the higher the location periodic update rate is for a radio its scan performance will degrade This should be kept in mind when using scan with a high cadence location period update It is recommended that radios be configured to use a 10
114. the CPS The CPS offers repeater wide settings as well as programmable input and output pins on the rear accessory connector 68007024085 April 2011 118 System Feature Overview 2 15 5 1 1 CPS Repeater Wide Settings CPS Repeater Control Name Description Audio Type Filtered Squelch configures the repeater so that only the audible frequency spectrum 300 Hz 3 kHz is sent to the rear receive audio pin speakers as well as transmitted over the air The user in deskset controller applications is interested in this audible frequency spectrum Flat Unsquelch should be used in applications such as trunking controllers or community repeaters where there is sub audible signaling that needs to be passed In this configuration the repeater will pass the audio unfiltered over the air as well as to the rear receive audio pin and speakers The filtering is performed in the external device not in the repeater Analog Accessory Emphasis Pre emphasis is configurable on transmitting subscribers In order to match the emphasis settings on the wireline de emphasis on the receive path and pre emphasis on the transmit path of the analog repeater interface can be enabled or disabled This setting is in addition to the repeater s Emphasis setting Furthermore when Audio Type is set to Flat Unsquelch there is no emphasis in the audio Audio Priority This setting determines if External PTT or
115. the call hang time This call hang time overrides the TX Contact Name setting of the channel Because only one call takes place on a channel slot at any given time the scanning radio will not miss a transmission of interest regardless of the length of the group list A Group Scan is configured by creating a group list and adding groups already in the Contacts folder This group list can then be selected as the RX Group List of a particular Channel The Group Scan does not have the advanced features and configuration options of a channel scan For example once configured via CPS the Group Scan cannot be turned on or off and members cannot be added or removed Furthermore the configurable scan options Scan Hang time Timer Talkback etc do not control the Group Scan The Group Scan should be used in simple systems where no advanced scan options are required If advanced scan options and features are required a Channel Scan should be configured instead In Capacity Plus mode MOTOTRBO radios only support Group Scan e All idle radios can perform a Group Scan at the start of a call A call always starts on the Rest Channel and all idle radios are on the Rest Channel e At the end of a call the participating radios are informed about the ongoing calls allowing them to perform a Group Scan e When a radio powers on or when it comes into coverage it searches the channels and joins a call of interest if any If all the channels are busy then
116. the hang time Digital Hang Time resuming scanning until the conclusion of the response to value if the call hang the initial call The timer starts after the end of a timer in the radio or transmission and resets whenever a valid activity is repeater increases detected on the channel during the hang time This feature must be equal to or greater than the amount of Sets the amount of time that the radio waits on an analog time it takes the radio Scan List channel when a carrier signal of sufficient to transmit the Signaling Hold amplitude is detected on the channel This pause allows the Signaling data packet Time radio time to decode the analog system signaling data If plus the channel s the decoded information is incorrect the radio reverts to Signaling Systems ati Pretime This feature is supported in Analog mode only Sets the duration that the radio waits when in a call before scanning the priority channels If the call is taking place on a Priority 1 Channel no scanning will take place When SIA ae aie Ae A priority member must Priority scanning priority channels the radio briefly mutes the ie l p be present in the Scan Sample Time current transmission Increasing this interval improves the List audio quality of the current transmission as fewer checks i are done but this also increases the chance of the radio missing out priority channel activity April 2011 68007024085 Sales and Service Support T
117. the user is not limited to 16 channels He can place up to 16 channels into a zone and then switch between multiple zones This greatly increases the number of available channels to the user Programmable Buttons There are programmable buttons on the MOTOTRBO portable The display portable has 6 programmable buttons while the non display portable only has 4 programmable buttons Each button can be programmed to perform a particular function The short press and long press can be programmed to act differently The orange button located on the top of the radio is commonly used to initiate emergency alarms although it can be configured to function differently Status Indicators There are a few different ways to provide feedback to the user Depending on its color and state a large tri colored LED on the top of the radio indicates whether the radio is transmitting or receiving and whether the selected channel is busy or idle The LED busy indication represents the presence of RF activity on the selected channel and is not specific to the digital slot currently being monitored The MOTOTRBO keypad portable with display also has a two line LCD that displays a wide variety of information including received signal strength battery power emergency status received text message indicator monitor on off and GPS status This display also allows each channel name to be displayed so that the user knows the name of the selected channel The source ID and
118. to communicate through the same repeater Scan Lists are configured to allow users to monitor both analog and digital voice transmissions on the same frequency In Dynamic Mixed Mode MOTOTRBO system does not enable some of the digital only features like IP Site Connect Capacity Plus Transmitter Interrupt and RDAC over IP The system allows digital and analog voice transmission at one site April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 205 Once every analog radio has been swapped with a MOTOTRBO radio the MOTOTRBO repeater can be reconfigured to fully operate in digital mode therefore allowing the user to experience all available digital features 4 2 3 New Full System Replacement The new full system replacement strategy involves replacing all existing equipment with MOTOTRBO equipment Typically a new full system replacement involves minimal downtime as the analog repeater is replaced immediately with the MOTOTRBO digital repeater Radio users carry their existing radios as well as MOTOTRBO radios on cut over day Initially users continue to access the radio system in the same manner as before Once the analog repeater is removed from the system the radio users switch to digital direct mode communication using MOTOTRBO radios After the MOTOTRBO repeater is installed and becomes operational radio users switch their MOTOTRBO radios to digital repeater mode The new full system replacement relies on the MOTOTRBO equipment being
119. to setup redundant repeaters So that when one repeater fails the standby repeater can take over the repeat function Before installation both repeaters are programmed with the same channel information The installer configures one repeater as primary repeater and the other one as standby repeater For the primary repeater the installer configures one GPIO pin for major alarm reporting and configures the pin s polarity For the standby repeater the installer configures one of its GPIO pins as repeater disabled control input pin and its polarity opposite of the primary repeater s alarm pin polarity When the primary repeater s alarm pin becomes active it deactivates the disabled pin and the standby repeater becomes enabled The antenna system is connected to the primary repeater and also connected to an antenna switch The antenna switch is external to the repeater hardware The installer connects the primary repeater s alarm pin output pin and standby repeater s repeater disable pin input pin and the antenna switch all together The installer powers on the primary repeater first and verifies it is working with no major alarm reported Then the installer powers on the standby repeater Antenna Switch Repeater TX RX Repeater TX RX Major Alarm Pin Repeater Disabled Primary Repeater Standby Repeater When a major alarm happens three times in the primary repeater and the repeater enters the locked state the primary
120. toggle this output pin off In Dynamic Mixed Mode this pin is asserted ON on the repeater accessory port when e Squelch is detected e The repeater is transmitting digital call includes call transmission call hang and channel hang time e The repeater is transmitting exclusive CWID This pin is asserted OFF on the repeater accessory port when all of the above mentioned conditions are false PL Detect A signal meeting the PL rules programmed in the channel toggles this output pin to its active state Loss of the PL signal toggles the output pin to its inactive state In Dynamic Mixed Mode this pin is asserted ON on the repeater accessory port when e PL detected The repeater is transmitting digital call includes call transmission call hang and channel hang time e The repeater is transmitting exclusive CWID This pin is asserted OFF on the repeater accessory port when all of the above mentioned conditions are false 68007024085 April 2011 120 System Feature Overview CPS Programmable Description Pins Monitor Asserting this input pin reverts the receiver to carrier squelch operation Upon detection of RF signal the repeater enables the Rx Audio lines and unmutes the speaker In a Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater the user is able to listen to the analog channel activity However for digital channel activity the repeater will emit audible channel busy alert tone on speaker and Rx audio accessory pins but it will not
121. up in the queue while the voice transmission is processing This not only occurs with the radio in emergency but with all other radios since the channel is busy Therefore when the voice call ends all radios will be attempting to access the channel with their GPS data which increases the likelihood of collisions and lost messages Finally it is important to understand that while the user is transmitting due to its hot microphone timer there is no way to communicate back to him Most users can explain their situation in less than 30 seconds and require some feedback from the emergency dispatcher much sooner That is why it is recommended to keep this value low and if additional monitoring is required the remote monitor feature can be utilized Only use a long hot microphone timer in specialized applications Also since the emergency alarm itself is not acknowledged nor retried its reliability is less than that of the standard Emergency Alarm and Emergency Alarm Only and Call These considerations should be taken into account when choosing to operate with Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow 68007024085 April 2011 40 System Feature Overview 2 3 4 4 Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Alarm The Emergency Voice Interrupt feature when enabled in a radio is used during the initiation of an emergency condition when an interruptible voice transmission is already taking place on the channel When an emergency is initiated with Emergency Vo
122. user has the ability to roam or scan not both 2 6 3 3 Configuring the Roaming RSSI Threshold The Roaming RSSI Threshold is a CPS configurable parameter that controls the signal strength a subscriber needs to reach before searching for another site If the RSSI measurement of the currently determined home site is above the specified Roaming RSSI Threshold then the radio will remain on that site and not roam Once the RSSI measurement drops below the threshold it will begin a Passive Site Search process to find a site with higher signal strength This parameter essentially controls the distance away from a site a subscriber will begin looking for another site In real life environments RF coverage is seldom a perfect circle but to simplify this explanation coverage will be abstracted as a circle It is important to note that while passively roaming the radio temporarily leaves the current home site to determine if a stronger site is available Since the radio is temporarily away from the home channel it is possible to miss the beginning of a transmission i e enter the call late Because of this it is not advisable to perform passive roaming all the time The setting of the Roaming RSSI Threshold is a balance between when a radio will leave one site and look for the next versus how often the radio will perform roam and therefore increase the April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 77 chances of late entry to voice calls If the R
123. 0 MOTOTRBO Analog and Legacy Analog Radios on Legacy Analog Repeater MOTOTRBO radios supports analog repeater mode as well In order for the MOTOTRBO radio to communicate with the existing analog or Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater it must be programmed for analog mode as well as programmed with the same frequency and other options PL DPL etc as the existing analog or Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater While in analog mode the MOTOTRBO radio supports most standard analog features including a subset of MDC signaling features While in analog repeater mode the MOTOTRBO radios will not support any of the digital features While in Dynamic Mixed repeater mode MOTOTRBO radios support both analog and digital features TX f2 RX f1 fi fi TX f1 analog analog TX fi RX fz e ae RX fz 2 2 Legacy MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Analog SU Analog Repeater analog mode Figure 3 31 MOTOTRBO Analog and Legacy Analog Radios on MOTOTRBO Analog Repeater If required the MOTOTRBO repeater can be programmed to operate in analog repeater mode When operating in this mode it interoperates with the existing analog radios as well as the MOTOTRBO radios operating in analog mode It is important to note that the MOTOTRBO repeater can only be configured to operate in analog mode or digital mode It does not do both at the same time If required the MOTOTRBO repeater can be programmed to operate in Dynamic Mixed Mode When operating in this mode
124. 0 second data frame is shown in the following table Window Size Number of Windows Includes Announcement Burst in a 30 second data frame 5 100 6 83 7 71 8 62 9 55 10 50 A repeater s slot that is configured with Enhanced GPS maintains allocations of all the windows At the beginning of every window the repeater sends an announcement containing the current window number data frame and the ID of the subscriber for the next reserved window The April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 53 diagram below shows the scheduling of different subscribers in a window map for a given data superframe 30 seconds aa KO Data Frame 1 Data Frame 2 Data Frame 3 Data Frame 4 Data Frame 5 Data Frame 6 Data Frame 7 Data Frame 8 Data Frame 9 Data Frame 10 Data Frame 11 Data Frame 12 Data Frame 13 Data Frame 14 Data Frame 15 Data Frame 16 This windowed data structure with an 8 minute data superframe and a 30 second data frame allows this enhanced feature to support update rates of 0 5 1 2 4 and 8 minutes in addition to one time updates Before sending a location response a subscriber requests a window for reservation for one time location response from the repeater or a set of periodic windows for periodic location responses The repeater allocates window s if available and informs the subscriber in a grant mess
125. 1 7 Emergency Handling Configuration Configuring a communication system like MOTOTRBO to handle emergency situations requires some up front design In emergency situations it is ideal that when a user initiates an emergency he is immediately routed to someone who can handle his emergency situation The previous sections have addressed some basic feature descriptions of how emergency can operate This section will outline in detail how to program the numerous devices in the system in order to meet the needs of a customer s emergency needs and also provide some guidance on choosing the available options It is recommended to review the Emergency Handling feature explanation in the earlier chapters It is important when creating an emergency handling plan to understand the customer s existing emergency procedures An interview with a representative in charge of emergency operations is usually required to fully understand the process This information will act as a base for selecting a configuration 4 11 7 1 Emergency Handling User Roles The first step is identifying users that will participate in the emergency handling plan There are three major roles to identify Emergency Initiator Monitoring Supervisor and Acknowledging Supervisor An Emergency Initiator is a user that does not necessarily have any responsibility for handling emergencies but is expected at some point to have an emergency that needs handling This user s radio is co
126. 10 1 5 Multi Channel Device Driver MCDD and Required Static ROuteS i i iieiea kiaina keiini nienean 268 4 10 1 6 Application Server and Dispatcher Network Connectivity 268 4 10 1 7 MOTOTRBO Subject Line Usage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 4 10 1 8 MOTOTRBO Example System IP Plan cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 269 4 10 1 9 Application Server Network Connection Considerations 271 4 10 1 10 Reduction in Data Messages When Radios Power On 271 4 10 1 11 Ways to Improve Data Throughput ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 272 vii 4 10 1 12 Data Revert Channels for Capacity Plus eeeee 273 4 10 2 Mobile Terminal and Application Server Power Management Considerations c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 4 11 Customer Fleetmap Development ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeseess 277 4 11 1 Identifying a Functional Fleetmap Design Team 277 4 11 2 Identifying Radio Users 5 ee hana aia eles 278 4 11 3 Organizing Radio Users into Groups cceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenneaaeeees 279 4 11 3 1 Configuration of GROUPS tico c2cedsecy cnecegrens secacepapepereneteerenveece mseecedee 280 4 11 4 Assigning IDs and AlidSe S 22 02 ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeececeeneeners 280 4 11 4 1 Identifying Radio IDS cccs c cccenecencceneeeneeeneeeeeeneneneeeneeeecees 281 4 11 4 2 Assigning Radio Aliases
127. 2011 12 System Feature Overview For an advanced more comprehensive understanding of RF coverage prediction for the MOTOTRBO site the reader is encouraged to obtain the TIA Telecommunications Service Bulletin TSB 88 Wireless Communications Systems Performance in Noise and Interference Limited Situations Recommended Methods for Technology Independent Modeling Simulation and Verification A copy of TSB 88 can be obtained from http www tiaonline org 2 1 3 3 User Expectations for Digital Audio Performance There are a number of differences between how digital audio behaves compared to analog audio from the end user listener s perspective Motorola has found that setting proper end user expectations in this regard is an important aspect of system planning What End Users will Experience with Digital Audio Consistent performance throughout coverage area with no gradual fade at the fringes While analog signals slowly degrade as the receiver moves away from the transmitter digital signals perform more consistently throughout the coverage area However digital signals more abruptly shift from good to no signal when crossing the fringe of the coverage area This means users cannot rely on degrading audio quality to warn them that they are approaching the fringe of coverage On the other hand just prior to the fringe of the coverage area digital audio is still crisp and clean whereas analog audio has excessive
128. 2011 290 System Design Considerations The following sections define how Emergency Revert and GPS Revert interact when the Emergency Revert Channel contains a GPS Revert Channel and the radio received a Emergency Location Update Request on the Selected Channel These are sample scenarios intended to aid in understanding the interactions The following sections use a direct mode configuration to simplify the diagrams though they can also be applied to repeater mode The radio initiating the emergency has been configured with the following channels GROUP 1 LOCATION 1 EMERGENCY and LOCATION2 The TX RX frequency the GPS Transmission Channel and the Emergency Revert Channel for each of the four configured channels are listed in the table below GROUP 1 LOCATION 1 EMERGENCY LOCATION 2 Transmit Receive F1 F2 F3 F4 Frequencies GPS Transmission ocation 1 None LOCATION 2 None Channel Emergency Revert EMERGENCY None None None Channel April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 291 4 11 7 5 1 Emergency Alarm hoy Presence V lt H ii TX f RX f Location Request GPS fi MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO amp F digital mode Control Station amp digital mode KY mM as fs Emg Alarm MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode digital mode Presence Notifier Aa Application Server Figure 4 27 Emergency Alarm and GPS R
129. 24085 April 2011 306 System Design Considerations 5 It is recommended to have a digital channel as the home channel and add the analog channels to the Scan List This is because the scanning radios can receive data messages only on the home channel 6 Priority sampling and channel marking CPS configurations are recommended to be disabled in Dynamic Mixed Mode system Refer to Priority Sampling on page 63 and Channel Marking on page 64 for more details Some of the CPS configuration recommendations are listed below Repeater yea Description Configuration Channel Add a new DMM channel and program the parameters in that channel Repeater Type Configure this to Single Site IP Site Master and IP Site Peer configurations are P YP not supported in Dynamic Mixed Mode system Configure SIT so that the channel hang time SIT Group Private Emergency Call Hang time is as small as possible This allows analog users to get almost immediate channel access once a digital call ends Channel Hang Time SIT Call Hang Time SIT Example When SIT 7 seconds and Group Call hang time 5 seconds Channel hang time 2 seconds for that group voice call Example When SIT 7 seconds and Private Call hang time 4 seconds Channel hang time 3 seconds for that private voice call Configure this to TPL or DPL for non community repeater operation Received audio is repeated out Rx Squelch OR
130. 3 2 2 1 5 2 IP Site Connect Mode Figure 3 28 shows a typical IP Site Connect system where slot 2 of all the repeaters have been configured as a wide area Enhanced GPS Revert channel and slot 1 as the Home channel Only location responses are routed on slot 2 whereas voice text and ARS messages are routed using slot 1 Home channel The Enhanced GPS revert slot slot 2 of all the repeaters and all subscribers in the system that send GPS data using the Enhanced GPS revert functionality should have the same window size The total number of windows are shared among all the wide area Enhanced GPS revert repeaters in the system Only one repeater in the system should have a value 90 75 60 or 45 selected for Period Window Reservation this does not have to be the Master repeater a peer is also possible whereas all the other repeaters in the system select a value of None using CPS April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 181 The repeater scheduler then schedule windows for all the other wide area enhanced GPS revert repeaters The application server and control stations can be in the coverage area of any repeater in the IP Site Connect system In Figure 3 28 below they are shown to be in the coverage area of repeater 1 For a window size of 5 or 6 it is recommended to use a network with an inter repeater communication delay of 60 milliseconds or less In case delay is observed to be higher than 60 milliseconds
131. 4 14 Enhanced GPS Revert Considerations Below is a summarized list of items to keep in mind when configuring the Enhanced GPS feature in a system 68007024085 All data messages including GPS from the option board are not supported over the Enhanced GPS Revert channel If a repeater slot configured as Enhanced GPS Revert is power cycled the subscriber s GPS updates scheduling begin again because the scheduling information is not stored in the repeater s memory The window size on all repeaters and subscribers should match GPS data must be configured as unconfirmed on the GPS Revert channel on the radio Enhanced GPS only needs to be enabled on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel of the radio and not on the Home channel However if header compression is planned for use then this feature needs to be enabled on the Home channel instead For single site and IP Site Connect modes the revert channel must be set to Selected on the radio used as the control station Only Enhanced GPS configured subscribers can work on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel This feature do not support the following configurations Legacy revert repeaters working with Enhanced GPS Revert subscribers Legacy subscribers working with Enhanced GPS Revert repeaters Legacy repeaters working with Enhanced GPS Revert repeaters in IP Site Connect mode An application making a periodic request with the Enhanced GPS feature should only make a re
132. 4 5 shows graph for high GPS data over revert channels A Data Revert repeater offers two Data Revert Channels and a revert channel can carry up to 20 location updates per minute with a success rate of 95 and 40 location updates per minute with a success rate of 85 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 Number of Data Revert Channels ON FD 4 A a J ta ar 95 Success 7 85 Success _ rai kd a 7 ral F Fil ot 7 17 42 7 7A LA 7 za 7 7 rai w Jer 1 4 17 Number of Location Updates Per Minute Wr 40 120 200 280 360 440 520 600 680 760 840 920 Figure 4 4 Number of Location Updates versus Number of Data Revert Channels 68007024085 April 2011 214 System Design Considerations 4 4 5 Loading Optimization For Single Repeater and IP Site Connect There are further considerations to take when configuring your MOTOTRBO system to ease the traffic load on a channel These considerations should always be taken into account especially if the designer is forced to operate outside of the good user experience range although operating in such a manner is not recommended 4 4 5 1 Distribution of High Usage Users It is good design practice to identify and distribute high usage users and groups between slots of a single repeater or even other repeaters This keeps the number of users th
133. 50 250 250 CH2 192 168 12 1 12 250 250 250 192 168 12 2 13 250 250 250 Network Address Translation Radio ID 16448250 Radio IP 192 168 12 1 Accessory IP 192 168 12 2 Radio IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Forward to PC Enabled 16448250 10 FAFAFA146 250 250 250 Figure 4 24 Application Server Control Station Network Connectivity As previously discussed the control stations should be configured with the option to Forward to PC so that all data traffic the control station receives is forwarded to the Application Server 4 10 1 4 Control Station Considerations Because the control stations connected to the Application Server act as the data gateway for the system the control stations themselves do not require an Automatic Registration Service ARS IP and the Text Message Server IP to be specified in their CPS Network settings These fields should be left blank In addition the control stations should also have the ARS and GPS options disabled These settings are not required for these control stations since they will be not be transmitting their own GPS or ARS anywhere There is no need for these control stations to be ordered with GPS capability Although it is possible to use the control stations connected to the Application Server for voice it is highly recommended that they only act as data gateways Since control stations except for Trunked Control Stations
134. 6 3 2 i Direct Mode tria banana diate eGapuanbateandds eae eames 156 3 2 1 1 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Direct Mode 157 3 2 1 2 Interoperability between Analog MOTOTRBO Radios and Analog Radios in Direct Modes scsc2ccsine iccsantie tdi eardecieas ahiokaones 166 3 2 1 3 Interoperability between Digital MOTOTRBO Radios Mixed Mode MOTOTRBO Radios and Analog Radios in Direct Mode 167 3 2 2 Repeater Mode sispitsncdcncutnternsesl sitins donee ewan ibinacddiascieceyaternaehenanaie 167 3 2 2 1 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Repeater Mode cceeeeees 169 3 2 2 2 Analog MOTOTRBO Radios in Repeater Mode 00ee 184 3 2 3 IP Site COMME CEIMOd Gin c scc0 secs sticccnncecsdecdicedeeberenotelideseachiavebeatsededehecdsecnton 185 3 2 3 1 Topologies of IP Site Connect System ceceeeeeeeeeetetteeeees 186 3 2 4 Capacity Plus MOde s tc c c ccs cessed zassius woth erahscu nie icusstessciasdsauaualaeiivangecnsenten 196 3 2 4 1 Topologies of Capacity Plus System ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 Section 4 System Design Considerations 4N PU DOSS 5 esencks a a e Taig e bags de e a beset Rs 203 4 2 Migration Plans eneore eee se cast dh ie been eee eea ee aaa ar EEEa 203 4 2 1 Pre Deployment System Integration seseesesseeesseseeessrrrrrrrrrrrrrressssseeeee 203 4 2 2 Analog to Digital Preparation and Migration 204 4 2 3 New Full System Replacement ccccccccccsseees
135. 60 792 924 1056 45 183 366 549 732 915 1098 1281 1464 90 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 75 75 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 9 60 120 240 360 480 600 720 840 960 45 165 330 495 660 825 990 1155 1320 In conventional mode when ARS is sent on the Home channel the table below can be used as a guideline to choose the delay values based on voice call loading and the number of subscribers in the system Number of Radios Sending ARS Based on ARS Initial Delay Value 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 mins mins mins mins mins mins mins mins No Voice 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 Low Voice 51 102 153 204 255 306 357 408 High Voice 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Refer to Section 4 4 2 Voice and Data Traffic Profile for the definitions of High Voice and Low Voice 2 4 3 6 Data Revert Channel A Capacity Plus system extends the GPS Revert Channel feature to the Data Revert Channel feature This feature is available only in Capacity Plus mode as a configurable option The Data Revert Channel feature allows system operators to offload all data messages from radios to a Server e g registration messages location responses text messages to the Server and their over the air acknowledgements etc onto programmed digital channels called Data Revert Channels Data messages including their over the air acknowledgements from radio
136. 600 700 800 900 Number of Users Figure 4 2 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Voice only Profile Figure 4 3 is for mixed voice and GPS data profile It has two sets of graphs one for High Voice with low GPS data and the other for Low Voice with low GPS data Both voice and GPS data are using the Trunked Channels Take note of the trend indicated in the chart The number of users do not increase proportionally with the number of channels The rate increases as the number of channels increase This is due to the fact that the efficiency of trunking increases with the increase in the number of channels April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations Users vs Number of Channels Number of Channels Low Voice Low GPS S 5 GoS 8 GoS 80 100 High Voice Low GPS 2 GoS f High Voice Low GPS 5 GoS High Voice Low GPS 8 GoS Low Voice Low GPS 2 GoS Low Voice Low GPS 5 GoS A Low Voice Low GPS 8 GoS 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 Number of Users Figure 4 3 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Mixed Profiles 213 In the case of high GPS data it is recommended that a Capacity Plus system have exclusive channels for data called Data Revert Channels Figure
137. 7024085 System Feature Overview 97 2 8 3 Connecting Locally via GPIO Lines Connecting locally via GPIO lines only allows access to the local repeater The user has access to the repeater control services as well as access to indications that a minor or major alarm has occurred from the GPIO lines The GPIO lines can be configured in various ways and can be integrated to communicate with a variety of external equipment A custom cable is needed to connect the repeater accessory port to the outside control device Below is an example of one configuration Note that the pin out of the cable is dependent on how the GPIO lines are provisioned via CPS Desk Set GPIO Connections GPIO Pins Custom Cable Standard Cable 68007024085 April 2011 98 System Feature Overview 2 8 3 1 RDAC Local Settings Rear Accessory Port CPS Programmable Pins The rear accessory also has some pins that can be programmed to specific input output functions These pins can be programmed to either active high or low See the table below for descriptions of these functions available for each GPIO pin CPS Programmable Pins Major Alarm Locked State Description This output pin is used to report a major alarm has happened 3 times been reset three times and the repeater is in now locked state Minor Alarm This output pin is used to report minor alarm s is happening on the repeater Repeater Disable Asserting this input pin trig
138. 7024085 April 2011 264 System Design Considerations radio receives a data message for its Radio ID 12045 and the data message inside is targeted towards the address 13 0 47 13 it will forward that message to the connected PC For ease of use the MOTOTRBO radio has the option to be configured with a Forward to PC option which is available in the Network settings of the radio CPS With this option enabled all messages targeted to both the 12 x x x and 13 x x x addresses are routed to the PC It is recommended that this option be chosen whenever a MOTOTRBO radio is connected to the Application Server The Forward to PC option also applies to a MOTOTRBO radio portable or mobile installed in a mobile environment i e a vehicle or in a fixed location a mobile in a tray located on someone s desk If a radio is not connected to an external PC the Forward to PC option should be disabled It is recommended that the default value of the CAI Network address is used If this value is changed all MOTOTRBO radios in the system must be updated with the same CAI Network address Also available for configuration is the Group CAI Network address This is used for broadcast data messages Again it is recommended that this value remain at its default value Figure 4 23 displays the IP connectivity with the radio network Also included is a simplified Network Address Table NAT that shows how the over the air traffic is routed to eith
139. 8007024085 System Design Considerations 219 number of users on a slot In this example for the desired User Experience the Selected Channel supports about 51 radios at a Low Voice profile and the three GPS Revert Channels support about 57 radios at a high GPS profile For the Low Voice profile which is defined in Voice and Data Traffic Profile on page 209 51 users would equate to a little less than 2 transmissions per minute For a high GPS profile which is also defined in Voice and Data Traffic Profile on page 209 57 users would equate to 57 transmissions per minute distributed over three channels In the previous examples it can be seen that the voice rate and the GPS rate cannot always be considered as independent when designing a system Though three GPS Revert Channels are able to support 57 high GPS profile users the Selected Channel is unable to support 57 High Voice profile users Therefore when designing a system both the Selected Channel loading and the GPS Revert Channel s loading must be thoroughly considered The table below provides guidance for determining the maximum number of radios supported on various numbers of GPS Revert Channels with one minute and two minutes update rates It is important to note than maximum loading will essentially keep a repeater keyed up at all times Update rates of less than one minute are not recommended in order minimize the impact on the Selected Channel features voice control
140. An IP Site Connect device also maintains periodic link management messages with every other IP Site Connect device In absence of messages from another IP Site Connect device for one minute the IP Site Connect device concludes that either the other IP Site Connect device has failed or the failure is within the network in between Thus the link management messages allow an IP Site Connect system to reconfigure itself on failure of one or more IP Site Connect devices and the system continues to provide services with the available IP Site Connect devices In case of network failure it is possible that an IP Site Connect system becomes multiple IP Site Connect systems where each system has a subset of original set of IP Site Connect devices All the new systems continue to provide the services that are possible with their subset of IP Site Connect devices Note that there will be only one system that has the Master When the backend network recovers the multiple systems automatically become one system When an IP Site Connect system has only one repeater then both the slots of the repeater repeat only locally i e over the air as per the MOTOTRBO Single Site specifications April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 233 A repeater operates in multiple modes such as disabled locked knocked down enabled and analog enabled and digital with voice data or control services and single or multiple site operation for each slot The repeater inf
141. Channel management The Rest Channel is the available repeater channel in a system that can be accessed by a radio for inbound over the air transmission or an IP based application for outbound over the air transmission A Capacity Plus system requires configuration of two IP addresses primary and Rest Channel Both IP addresses are configurable via the CPS on the repeater The Master repeater also distributes to the application the Rest Channel IP address during the registration procedure The Capacity Plus repeater supports a LAN or WAN IP network topology As a result for WAN topology ADP methods are required to resolve associated abnormalities i e jitter delays latencies packet duplication etc related to unknown IP network s complexities The Capacity Plus repeaters require knowledge of the Rest Channel movement to support initiation of a radio command call for outbound over the air transmission To abstract the movement of the Rest Channel among the repeaters all repeaters are required to be configured with a secondary IP address also known as the Rest Channel IP address 10 1 2 1 as defined in Figure 2 27 The Rest Channel IP address is recommended to be static or global and should be the same on all Capacity Plus repeaters in the LAN The Rest Channel IP address is used by the repeater to access and reserve the Rest Channel and thereafter initiate a radio command on a target repeater primary address April 2011 68007024085
142. Channels The GPS Revert Channel behavior of radios in IP Site Connect mode is the same as the radios behavior in digital repeater mode with the exception that the GPS is sent unconfirmed on a wide area channel See GPS Revert in Repeater Mode on page 178 68007024085 April 2011 190 System Components and Topologies 3 2 3 1 4 Network Topologies for IP Site Connect The IP Site Connect topologies described in the previous sections can reside on a range of backend network configurations and technologies Logical connections between the wide area channels can all reside on the same physical network The actual network topology chosen will most likely be driven by the repeater s physical location and the network connectivity available at that location The Network Topologies can be broken up into two basic configurations e Local Area Network Configuration e Wide Area Network Configuration But note that most network topologies will be a combination of both Local and Wide Area network configurations Each individual configuration will be described and discussed Note that the same network configurations can be used for Digital or Analog Repeaters Enabled or Disabled Repeaters Wide Area or Local Area Repeaters RDAC IP or any other third party device that utilizes the IP Site Connect link establishment protocol 3 2 3 1 4 1 Local Area Network LAN Configuration Customers that have high capacity network connectivity throughout their or
143. E DTMF Tone Level is a codeplug value but not CPS configurable because it normally does not require change DTMF Twist is not configurable and is always set to zero 4 8 8 Ringing Modes When a radio user calls a phone user the phone keeps ringing until the phone user answers Or the radio user ends the call or the call gets timed out by the PSTN When a phone user calls a radio user there is only one ringing mode The radio keeps ringing until the radio user answers the call or the call gets timed out by the repeater When a phone user calls a radio group talkgroup there are two ringing modes These modes are configurable in the repeater via CPS The first method is where the radio keeps ringing until one of the targeted radio users answers the call by pushing PTT and talking back Or the call gets timed out by the repeater The second ringing mode is to allow the phone user to talk immediately after the first ring The second method allows phone users to talk first during a phone call 4 8 9 Enable Disable Manual Dial Manual dial allows a radio user to enter the phone number manually using the radio keypad To prevent misuse of the phone services in the system this manual dialing option can be enabled disabled via CPS on a radio wide basis 4 8 10 Connecting APP Boxes to the Repeater in Capacity Plus In Capacity Plus only the voice channel repeaters can be connected to the APP boxes to support phone calls When connecting the A
144. Exclusive BSI Exclusive BSI is non interruptible in digital and Dynamic Mixed modes When the Mixed with Audio BSI Timer expires the repeater performs the BSI mixed with the on going audio on the channel It is very important to note that there is a two minute hold off timer when the repeater first keys up The purpose of this additional hold off timer is to make sure that the BSI is not mixed with audio immediately after being de keyed for a long duration This delay gives the repeater a chance to transmit the exclusive BSI before interrupting the audio Both the Exclusive BSI Timer and the Mixed with Audio Timer are reset after completion of a BSI transmission It is recommended that the Exclusive BSI Timer TX Interval is set at 75 of the regulatory authority s required BSI period and the Mixed with Audio BSI Mix Mode Timer is set at 95 of the regulatory authority s required BSI period This way the repeater begins attempting to send the BSI exclusively well before the required time This interrupts the voice with mixed BSI as it gets closer to the required period if it has not found an opportunity to perform BSI exclusively BSI can be completely disabled by setting both the Exclusive BSI Timer and the Mixed with Audio BSI Timer to 255 in the CPS It is not a valid configuration to disable the Exclusive BSI and only April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 297 have the Mixed with Audio BSI enabled This results in o
145. Hz channel spacings and can operate in repeater and direct modes April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 2 15 1 115 Analog Voice Features The following traditional Analog features are supported by the MOTOTRBO system Feature Name Description Time Out Timer Sets the amount of time that the radio can continuously transmit before the transmission is automatically terminated Squelch Special electronic circuitry added to the receiver of a radio which reduces or squelches unwanted signals before they are heard through the speaker Monitor Permanent Monitor Talkaround The user can check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button If the channel is clear the user hears static If the channel is in use the user hears the conversation It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio as while pressing the monitor button the user can adjust the volume according to the volume of the static conversation heard This feature allows a user to talk directly to another unit for easy local unit to unit communications and bypass the repeater 12 5 25 kHz Configurable Bandwidth Channels on the radio can be programmed through the CPS to operate at either 12 5 kHz or 25 kHz PL DPL Transmitted when the receiving radio is to only receive calls from radios with specific PL DPL codes this creates communications groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode PL DPL al
146. In this configuration a separate data revert repeater or trunked repeaters can be used for other data such as voice text messages and server bound data 4 14 3 IP Site Connect Mode In IP Site Connect mode GPS updates are routed on the slot configured as wide area Enhanced GPS revert slot Two configurations are possible via the CPS for a wide area Enhanced GPS Revert system 1 One slot configured as Enhanced GPS Revert and another slot for voice and data In this configuration one slot of all the peers in the network is configured for Enhanced GPS operation while the other slot can be used for voice ARS text messages and all other server data 2 Both slots configured for Enhanced GPS Revert This configuration is recommended if the number of subscribers sending location updates exceeds the capacity of the Enhanced GPS throughput of one slot In this configuration the entire IP Site Connect system will be used for sending location updates only April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 301 4 14 3 1 Other Considerations e Only one repeater in the wide area Enhanced GPS Revert system should select a value for Period Window Reservation in the CPS All other repeaters should choose a value of None for this field e Ifthe inter repeater communication delay is more than 60 milliseconds then the window size should exceed 7 68007024085 April 2011 302 System Design Considerations 4 15 Enhanced Channel A
147. LON cnc cxc eecsietacvened cued rccieedileel malgniaicetiventidenetvetss 103 2 10 2 USage COnSid Cr allOn se 2ecd risici weceenerentusdsenduevabeseeuiiocdse enero ed 103 2A0 2 1 Suspending VOX sieeiiieee eae eed seethe ie aceon 103 2 10 2 2 Talk Permit Tone virecnte topcase odes ttc cee erend ne eh Release 103 2 10 2 3 Emergency CallSy fcr ieatersct enticement ecctiuetaeeinreat eel aets cl wnat 104 2 10 24 Transmit Interr pt sseiene Mavata cane liaisons elk ccc ae EE 104 2 11 Lone Worker antore staat an eed a a ore R Beane ait 104 2 12 One Touch Home Revert Button ccccccccccecceeeceeeeseeseeeeeeececeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 104 2 13 Password and Lock Feature Radio Authentication ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 104 2 14 Digital Telephone Patch DTP 2 cccccecceeeseeedeeedeeeeececececcesenedeneeneeeeneeetee 106 2 14 1 Phone Gall Initiation c i508 sel a ostshd ret et cera eretareee nnana 106 2 14 1 1 Call Initiation by a Radio User ooo cece eee ee eect eeeteeeeenttteaaaes 107 2 14 1 2 Call Initiation by a Phone User 2 ccc ceceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeees 107 2 14 2 D ring a Phone Call cc iiste dca Gloeeshuakie sen cnevinni trierer reinkarnira 108 2 14 3 Ending a Phone Calls sserisrns aeaee a ees 109 2 14 4 Digital Telephone Patch System Configuration c ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 2 14 4 1 Phone Patch in Single Site and IP Site Connect Local Area Channels LAC ccceeeeeeee
148. MOTOTRBO Applications Interfaces on page 129 is described in detail in the supporting Application Developers Kit ADK documentation listed below An up to date list of documents is available from the MOTODEV website and on EMEA Motorola Online MOTOTRBO Interface Application Development Kit MOTOTRBO ADK Overview MOTOTRBO Data Services Overview MOTOTRBO Option Board ADK Guide General MOTOTRBO Option Board MOTOTRBO Option Board PROIS Cross Reference MOTOTRBO XCMP XNL Development Guide MOTOTRBO XCMP XNL MOTOTRBO XCMP XNL Development Specification MOTOTRBO Telemetry ADK Guide MOTOTRBO Telemetry Protocol Specification MOTOTRBO Location Data ADK Guide MOTOTRBO Location Request and Response Protocol Specification MOTOTRBO Telemetry MOTOTRBO Location Data Motorola Binary XML Encoding Specification MOTOTRBO Text Messaging ADK Guide MOTOTRBO Text Messaging Protocol Specification MOTOTRBO XCMP Based IP Capable Peripheral ADK Guide MOTOTRBO Non IP Capable Peripheral ADK Guide MOTOTRBO Third Party Peripheral Cable ADK Guide MOTOTRBO ARS Protocol Specification MOTOTRBO IP Site Connect ADK Guideline MOTOTRBO IP Site Connect ADK Specification MOTOTRBO Text Messaging MOTOTRBO Peripheral MOTOTRBO IP Site Connect MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus ADK Guideline MOTOTRBO Repeater XCMP Development MOTOTRBO Repeater Guideline MOTOTRBO Repeater XCMP Specificati
149. OX is not compatible with the Transmit Interrupt features specifically Voice Interrupt and Emergency Voice Interrupt Accordingly for a radio that is provisioned to transmit interruptible voice VOX is prevented from operating Radios should not be provisioned with VOX and either Voice Interrupt or Emergency Voice Interrupt features on the same channel Lone Worker For a radio user who is operating machinery carrying out a security patrol or working in a plant alone the Lone Worker feature provides a way to remotely monitor if a user has stopped activity The Lone Worker feature is a predefined timer reset with user activity For example if the activity timer is set for 10 minutes and the user has no interaction with the radio during this time the inactivity timer expires and a pre warning tone sounds immediately after 10 minutes If the user fails to reset the timer by an interaction with the radio such as a button press PTT volume knob turn etc the radio initiates Emergency For more information see section Section 2 3 4 Digital Emergency The Lone Worker feature is available for both the portable and mobile radios and in analog and digital modes One Touch Home Revert Button This feature is available for mobile radios in both analog and digital modes The customer can program a button as the Home Revert button via the CPS This button allows the user to jump to a pre assigned Home channel The CPS does no
150. PP boxes to the repeaters it is highly recommended to connect the APP boxes to the repeaters with lowest possible rest channel priorities first This balances the traffic on the channels In such a configuration the non phone calls are likely to occur on the repeaters with higher rest channel priorities while phone calls occur on the repeaters with the lowest rest channel priorities April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 257 4 8 11 PBX Routing Configuration in Capacity Plus PBX can be used with the DTP systems However if a repeater is disabled the repeater does not inform the PBX that it is disabled In this scenario the administrator needs to take action to ensure that the PBX does not route the incoming call from the PSTN to the disabled repeater Otherwise the phone user will not be able to connect to the radio users PBX may have different priorities when PBX assigns the extension lines for incoming calls from the PSTN In Capacity Plus the traffic on a channel with higher rest channel priority is normally heavier than the channel with lower rest channel priority Therefore if the system has two or more APP boxes it is recommended to have the PBX route the incoming phone call first to the APP boxes that are connected to repeaters with lower rest channel priorities As a result this balances the voice traffic on all channels 68007024085 April 2011 258 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 System Design Considerations Tra
151. PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO WAY RADIO SYSTEM AA MOTOTRBO SYSTEM PLANNER Section 1 Introduction 1 1 Welcome to MOTOTRBO I ooo nooo cecccccccccccscceccccccccecscccccccaussececcecaussccececcuansccececeas 1 1 2 SottWare V eSrsiOmiscceel a le eevee eked ee echt ed ek ki Ee 2 Section 2 System Feature Overview 2 1 MOTOTRBO Digital Radio Technology 2 s s se cceescsececeeceeceeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 1 1 Digital Radio Technology Overview 2 0 0 2 cccceceeeeeeeeee etter eeeeeeeeeeeeneaaaeeeeeeeees 3 2 1 1 1 Part One The Analog to Digital Conversion eeseeeeeeeeees 3 2 1 1 2 Part Two The Vocoder and Forward Error Correction FEC 3 2 1 1 3 Part Three Framing orcs ce eic css cececeeeces cect cebstenecenicetatdaeee elec aie 4 2 1 1 4 Part Four TDMA Transmission cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 2 1 1 5 Standards Compliance cccccccccccccceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneenseess 4 2 1 2 Spectrum Efficiency via Two Slot TDMA ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenttntttaaeeeeees 5 2 1 2 1 Frequencies Channels and Requirements for SpectrUm BRIGICNCY cuss aestcehisiusl esodeefeendcti eee Seoedtonesdveteveteidandeeuseeaads 5 2 1 2 2 Delivering Increased Capacity in Existing 12 5 kHz Channels 5 2 1 2 3 Two Slot TDMA Reduces Infrastructure Equipment 0 006 7 2 1 2 4 Two Slot TDMA Enables System Flexibility ee eeeeee
152. PS receiver samples each satellite for a certain amount of time to determine if it is visible or not before moving to the next satellite The receiver continues to do this until it detects a certain number of visible satellites and can determine an approximate location thus helping the receiver to truncate the Scan List In a hot start the receiver already has most if not all the data needed to calculate its position Therefore no scanning is needed and minimal downloading is necessary to calculate position resulting in a lower time to acquire a positional fix Horizontal Accuracy Horizontal Accuracy indicates a radius length from the reported point location The latitude and longitude reported is equivalent to a point in the center of a circle with the horizontal accuracy value as the radius of the circle The true position should be within this location range April 2011 48 System Feature Overview 2 4 3 2 Services Provided to a Radio User When the location service is disabled the radio does not provide any location updates to a location application server An icon is displayed on the radio if the location service is enabled The absence of this icon indicates that the location service is disabled The icon shows a full satellite dish when good GPS signals are detected and an empty satellite dish when the radio is receiving poor GPS signals Good Signal Poor Signal Disabled n no icon Oy r r The r
153. Pv4 addresses for IP Site Connect devices except for the Master The IPv4 address of an IP Site Connect device can be dynamic In this case the IPv4 address is allocated by a DHCP server The dynamic nature of the IPv4 address implies that the address may change every time it powers on or even periodically every few hours while the IP Site Connect device is on The dynamic address of a repeater is selected by selecting the DHCP option in the repeater CPS It is recommended that the lease time of the IPv4 address from the DHCP should be kept as long as possible Note that a change in the IPv4 address of an IP Site Connect device causes short disruption of service for the device For static IPv4 address the DHCP option should not be selected and the CPS user should provide the static IPv4 address and the gateway s IPv4 address and netmask An IP Site Connect configuration uses a procedure called Link Management to keep an IP Site Connect device aware of the presence the current IPv4 addresses and UDP ports of other IP Site Connect devices The Link Management requires only one of the repeaters called an Master to act as a broker of IPv4 UDP addresses The Master gets a static IPv4 address from its ISP and the Master s IPv4 UDP address is configured into all the IP Site Connect devices 68007024085 April 2011 232 System Design Considerations The Master s IPv4 UDP address refers to its address as seen from the backend network Note
154. RBO repeater system It is the role of the repeater to keep this synchronization When accessed the repeater begins transmitting idle messages as well as identifying the time slot structure The radios synchronize to the transmissions from the repeater When a radio transmits on its time slot the radio pulses its transmissions in 30ms increments This allows for simultaneous conversation to occur on the other time slot While the first radio is pulsed on the other radio is pulsed off The repeater receives these two pulsed transmissions combines them and transmits them in the correct order in one continuous transmission Repeater operation supports all three methods of voice transmission Group Calls Private Calls and All Calls They can also fully support all command and control messaging like Call Alert Radio Check Radio Enable Disable Remote Monitor and Emergency 68007024085 April 2011 170 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 1 1 Text Messaging in Repeater Mode TX f TX fi RX f2 RX f2 Slot 1 us ge Slot 1 ore 7 so a ea TX f2 RX ft MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode uot lt Slot 1 fs s2 Lory ae 2s TX f i TX f1 RX f2 MOTOTRBO RX f2 Slot 2 Digital Repeater Slot 2 MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 20 MOTOTRBO Radios in Digital Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with Built In Text Messaging In repea
155. Scan List Active Site Searching The Active Site Search method consists of the radio sending a repeater wake up message to each repeater in its sorted roam list until it finds an active site This method is utilized when the user or radio initiates a transmission and the home site repeater cannot be awoken or when the user initiates a Manual Site Roam In most cases the Passive Site Search determines and selects the correct site if the radio is in the unlocked state If the repeater s beacon interval is set too long then it may be possible that the radio has roamed into a new site and has yet to receive a beacon Note that the beacon interval is usually in the range of minutes and it typically takes more than a minute for a radio user to move April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 73 out of range of one site and into the range of another Until a new site is found the radio considers the previous site as the home site If the user presses the PTT or a data transmission is requested at this time the radio will first attempt to wake up the home repeater If the repeater does not wake up the radio repeats this process for each roam list member If the repeater does wake up the radio synchronizes itself with the repeater completes the transmission and make the new site the home site If the end of the roam list is reached and a site is not found the user receives a failure indication This entire process of discovering and synch
156. Site Search As the radio attempts to wake up other sites the user must wait This increase in time will be recognized as an increase in the time from PTT to receiving the Talk Permit Tone This is not expected to occur often if the beacon interval is set appropriately It is expected that the value that the roaming feature adds is worth these performance degradations The Beacon Interval and the Roaming RSSI Threshold should be set appropriately to minimize the amount of time a radio is searching for a site 2 6 3 7 ARS Registration on Roaming 2 1 When a radio roams in data capable mode with the Presence Service enabled the radio can be configured to automatically send ARS registration messages to the Presence Notifier application This ARS registration on roaming capability can be enabled or disabled via CPS configuration and is applicable in both Passive Site Search and Active Site Search During Passive Site Search roaming when ARS registration on roaming is disabled the radio roams when the RSSI of the repeater roamed into is greater than the RSSI of the current Home channel by 0 dB However when ARS registration on roaming is enabled the radio roams only when the RSSI of the repeater roamed into is greater than the RSSI of the current Home channel by 6 dB As a result this reduces frequent registrations on roaming During Active Site Search roaming when ARS registration on roaming is enabled the radio automatically sends an ARS me
157. TDMA can potentially be used for a variety of purposes Many organizations deploying MOTOTRBO systems can use these slots in the following manner e Use both the slots as voice channels This doubles the voice capacity per licensed repeater channel thereby increasing the number of users the system can accommodate and e increasing the amount of air time the users can consume e Use both slots as data channels This allows the organizations to fully deploy data transactions e Use one slot as a voice channel and the other as a data channel This is a flexible solution that allows customers to equip their voice users with mobile data messaging or location tracking capabilities In any of these scenarios additional benefits are realized within the existing licensed repeater channel s Figure 2 4 Example of Two Slot TDMA April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 9 NOTE When used in direct mode without a repeater two slot TDMA systems on a 12 5 kHz channel do not deliver 6 25 kHz equivalent efficiency This is because the repeater is necessary to synchronize the time slots to enable independent parties to share them Thus on a direct or talkaround channel when one radio begins transmitting the whole 12 5 kHz channel is effectively busy even though the transmitting radio is using only one time slot The alternate time slot is unavailable for another independent voice call However the alternate time slot can potentiall
158. The router should support hair pinning and have sufficient bandwidth to handle all the messages 68007024085 April 2011 198 System Components and Topologies between repeaters Hair pinning is returning a message in the direction it came from as a way for it to reach its final destination This is per the router standard RFC 4787 Figure 3 41 Capacity Plus Devices with Remote RDAC and no Data Application Server 3 2 4 1 3 A System with Data Application Server on Trunked Channels It is possible to send data messages to a Data Server over the Trunked Channels This is recommended for a system that requires sending limited number of data messages to the Server This configuration requires one or more Trunked Control Stations The Server must not have the MCDD installed If there is more than one Trunked Control Station the configuration should adhere to the following rules 1 The maximum number of Trunked Control Stations should not be more than the number of Trunked Channels 2 To achieve a success rate of 90 the number of data messages per minute per Trunked Control Station should be less than 10 It is assumed here that the payload of a data message is 50 bytes or characters long 3 The IDs of all Trunked Control Stations should be different 4 The radios should be grouped into n sets where n is the number of Trunked Control Stations 5 Each set of radios is associated to a Trunked Control Station This impl
159. Time Out automatically terminated This feature is used to ensure the Timer TOT channel is not monopolized by any one radio The user may 7 set smaller time outs for busier channels This is a channel wide feature Time Out Sets the amount of time that the radio waits on a channel Timer Rekey after the Time Out Timer expires which stops the radio 7 Delay transmission before allowing the user to transmit again This is a channel wide feature It is recommended to increase the hang time value if the call hang This sets the duration of the radio that will remain ona ume mae radio S increases for direct landed analog channel after the end of a transmission i mode operation In Analog Hang during a scan operation The hang time prevents the radio repeater mode Time from resuming scanning until the conclusion of the operation it is response to the initial call The timer starts after the end of a i transmission and resets whenever a valid activity is lecommended O yeep this value as low as detected on the channel during the hang time possible to allow the radios to start scanning as soon as the existing analog call ends 68007024085 April 2011 312 System Design Considerations Timer aa Description Notes Name This sets the duration of the radio that will remain ona landed digital channel after the end of a transmission during It is recommended to ae a scan operation The hang time prevents the radio from increase
160. When the repeater receives a digital call it retransmits in digital mode It is the scanning feature in the subscriber that allows the MOTOTRBO radios programmed with both analog and digital channels to listen to analog calls from legacy analog radios While the MOTOTRBO radio is listening to an analog call through PL scanning it talks back in analog mode if keyed up within the call hang time NOTE The MOTOTRBO radio needs to be in analog mode to initiate or return an analog call with legacy analog radios This section details migration strategies which involve gradually replacing existing analog radios with MOTOTRBO radios 1 To migrate a system with a single non MOTOTRBO repeater channel radio users are encouraged to use MOTOTRBO radios in digital direct mode This gives them an opportunity to familiarize themselves with the MOTOTRBO digital feature set while communicating with legacy analog radios through the legacy analog repeater If the analog system does not use any PL DPL encoding then analog radios will hear noise caused by digital radio transmissions communicating in direct mode Over time as the number of MOTOTRBO radios increases a cut over day is pre determined On that day the legacy analog repeater will be replaced by a MOTOTRBO digital repeater Radio users communicate with each other in Talkaround while the new repeater is being installed Once the MOTOTRBO repeater is operational MOTOTRBO radio users switch to digita
161. a Revert Repeater Figure 3 29 A Capacity Plus System with an Enhanced GPS Revert Channel April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 1 6 Summary of Features in Digital Repeater Mode The following features are supported in digital repeater mode 183 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Repeater Mode Voice Signalin Emergenc Other g g see Data Calls Features Features Handling Features Group Call PTT ID and Emergency Alarm Text Two channels Aliasing Messaging slot 1 and slot 2 per repeater frequency pair Private Call Radio Inhibit Emergency Alarm Location Scan with Call Tracking All Call Remote Monitor Emergency Alarm Telemetry Time out Timer with Voice to Follow Voice Radio Check Emergency Revert Third Party Polite to All Interrupt ADP system access Applications Dual Tone Call Alert Emergency Voice GPS Revert Polite to Own Multi Interrupt System channel Frequency access Remote Voice Data Over Voice Impolite channel Dekey Interrupt access See Scan Considerations on page 65 for more information on the different scan modes supported by different topologies 68007024085 April 2011 184 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 2 Analog MOTOTRBO Radios in Repeater Mode TX f2 RX fi fi fi TX fi analog analog TX ft RX f2 P RX f2 2 2 Legacy Legacy MOTOTRBO SU Analog SU Analog Repeater analog mode Figure 3 3
162. a simple way to achieve the fair distribution follow these rules 1 The IDs of all Trunked and Revert Control Stations should be the same 2 The radios should be grouped into n sets where n is the number of Trunked Control Stations 3 Each set of radios is associated to a Trunked Control Station 4 For each set of radios it is required to make one or more entries in the IP Routing Table of the Application Server such that a data packet transmitted to a radio is routed to the port of the Trunked Control Station associated with the set of the radio The IPv4 address of the Server as seen by a radio is derived from the radio ID of the Control Stations This is shown in Figure 4 26 The example has two Revert Control Stations shown in blue and two Trunked Control Stations shown in green The example assumes that the IDs all radios are within 1 255 They have been divided into two sets of 1 27 and 127 255 NOTE 1 Say a group of radios is defined as n m where n and m are the lowest and highest IDs of the radios respectively and there are two Trunked Control Stations The radios should be divided into two sets of radios say n p and p 1 m Here p 1 is a power of 2 e g 4 8 16 32 64 2 The sets of radios are non overlapping This means a radio is a member of one and only one set Multiple groups can be allocated to a Trunked Control Station by having one entry per group i
163. ace the data at the bottom of the queue Immediate precedence is used to automatically clear the channel of voice calls by using the Data Over Voice Interrupt feature prior to beginning the data transmission This capability departs from the typical behavior of a radio system which normally gives priority to voice calls over pending data calls The radio user whose transmission was interrupted receives a Talk Prohibit Tone until the user releases the PTT For the Data Over Voice Interrupt feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted If some radios are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g normally desirable for a supervisor s radio then those radios transmissions cannot be interrupted and the data message will be placed near the top of the data queue behind any existing queues for Immediate precedence data messages When Immediate precedence is designated and a data or control transmission occupies the channel the radio must wait for the channel to become clear before initiating the data transmission Priority precedence is used to ensure that the data message is transmitted before any Routine precedence data messages and after any existing Immediate precedence data messages Priority precedence does not use the Data Over Voice Interrupt capability When either Priority or Routine precedence is designated the radio must wait for the channel to be
164. addition of a help pane that displays topic sensitive help instantly without the need to access the online help file April 2011 314 Sales and Service Support Tools 5 3 Service Equipment 5 3 1 Recommended Test Equipment The list of equipment contained in the table below includes most of the standard test equipment required for servicing Motorola portable radios as well as several unique items designed specifically for servicing this family of radios The Characteristics column is included so that equivalent equipment can be substituted however when no information is provided in this column the specific Motorola model listed is either a unique item or no substitution is recommended Description Service Monitor Characteristics Can be used as a substitute for items Example Aeroflex 2975 www aeroflex com Motorola Application Frequency deviation meter and signal generator for marked with an R2670 or equivalent wide range asterisk troubleshooting and alignment Digital RMS 100 uV to 300 V Fluke 179 or equivalent AC DC voltage and current Multimeter 5 Hz to 1 MHz www fluke com measurements Audio 10 Meg Ohm voltage measurements Impedance RF Signal 100 MHz to 1 GHz Agilent N5181A Receiver measurements Generator 130 dBm to 10 dBm www agilent com FM Modulation 0 kHz to 10 kHz Audio Frequency 100 Ramsey RSG1000B www ramseyelectronics com or equivalent Hz to 10 kHz Oscill
165. adio CPS e Migration Planning e How to migrate existing channels to digital channels e What updates to licensing requirements may be needed These questions are addressed in mode detail in Section 4 System Design Considerations on page 203 2 1 3 Digital Audio Quality and Coverage Performance This section describes how digital audio drives coverage performance It also sets expectations for how digital audio behaves and sounds from the end user s perspective 68007024085 April 2011 10 System Feature Overview 2 1 3 1 Digital Audio Coverage The main difference between analog and digital coverage is how the audio quality degrades throughout the coverage region Analog audio degrades linearly throughout the region of coverage while digital audio quality performs more consistently in the same region of coverage A primary reason for the different degradation characteristics is the use of forward error correction coding used in digital transmissions which can accurately deliver both audio and data content with virtually no loss over a far greater area It is this error protection that allows a MOTOTRBO system to provide consistent audio quality throughout its coverage area A comparable analog system can never offer such consistency In the MOTOTRBO system the audio quality remains at a high level because the error protection minimizes the noise effect The figure below graphically illustrates the relationship of delivered s
166. adio does not display its current location on its screen With the exception of pressing the Emergency button a radio user cannot trigger a location update to a location application server In general the radio user does not have to take any action in this process the radio transmits the location coordinates automatically over the system 2 4 3 3 Services Provided to a Location Application For all the services a third party location application server is required to send an explicit request to the radio A radio does not provide unsolicited location update to a location application server When the radio turns on and or selects a properly configured channel i e the previously mentioned ARS Parameter the radio registers with the presence service The location application thus learns that this radio is on the air and will make an explicit request for location updates if it is configured to track the location of the radio The GPS equipped radios transmit an update of their location coordinates over the radio system in response to 3 service methods e Single Location Update The location application server wants to know the current location of a radio user In this case the application sends a request for a single location update e Periodic Location Updates Single location update is used to track the location of a radio user by a location application server but is an inefficient use of air interface Location tracking allows a
167. adio is out of coverage 4 7 8 Considerations for Configuring Mixed Firmware Versions In cases where RO1 05 xx repeaters and other higher versions of repeaters needs to be connected together it is highly recommended to make one of the higher version repeaters as the Master repeater to avoid service degradation issues In scenarios where the MTR3000 repeaters are combined with the MOTOTRBO repeaters it is possible that the MOTOTRBO repeater firmware is of a higher version than the MTR3000 repeater firmware Configure the MOTOTRBO repeater as the Master repeater to avoid service degradation in this scenario 68007024085 April 2011 250 System Design Considerations 4 8 Digital Telephone Patch DTP This section specifically documents the major configuration planning and error prone configuration details for phone patch calls Other configuration details can be found in corresponding CPS manuals Unless specified otherwise the configuration described in this section applies to all system configurations Conventional Single Site IPSC and Capacity Plus 4 8 1 Enable Disable Phone Gateway Repeater for Phone Calls When a repeater is connected to an APP box and used for phone calls it is called a phone gateway repeater Only phone gateway repeaters are capable of hosting phone calls The repeater s radio ID is used as the target ID representing the landline phone user in an individual phone call Hence the ID must be different from
168. aes 76 2 6 3 3 Configuring the Roaming RSSI Threshold 76 2 6 3 4 Setting Beacon Duration and Beacon Interval cccceeceeeeeees 81 2 6 3 5 Emergency Revert GPS Revert and Roaming Interactions 83 2 6 3 6 Performance while ROAMING cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentteaaeeeeees 84 2 6 3 7 ARS Registration ON ROAMING ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 2 7 Voice and Data Privacy osises a soa leet scec Seal las hehe ol teu ta pidguiecoces tscecvaee ee cepeeneeeeee 85 2 2 LYPES Ol PUIVACY gt oo ccc hectare dee aes a os restiuts EEE ees cdeu heer 86 2 7 2 Strength of the Protection Mechanism ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 2 7 3 Scope of Protection stem cecedeiccccpcbocssseveebcdtnincdsoe otosateuwels daa hbienseavbenbiedecidated 87 2 7 4 Effects on Performance rirerire neer tetteire errereen el tees eect eas 87 2 7 5 User Control Over Privacy eeeeesesssssssssrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrresessssssrrrerrerrrrn ene 88 2 7 6 Privacy Indications to USO0 ccccccsesceeceeeedeeeseeceececececeeceeeceeeeeeeeesteneeens 89 2 7 7 Key MISMIAICI as chic Satter Se orete cats aatncesthecat saudlerasineuntenanrecth terarenets cau dee tiaies 90 2 7 8 Keys and Key Management 2 ccc cccceceeceeeseeseedeseesceneccedeseneneeceeeeneeeeneetes 90 2 7 9 Multiple Keys in a Basic Privacy System cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 2 7 10 Data Gatewa
169. age The subscriber stores the window timing reverts to the Enhanced GPS Revert channel before the allocated window arrives and verifies its reservation by listening to a confirmation grant from repeater The subscriber then sends its location response in the reserved window Since subscribers only send their location response in their reserved windows collisions will not happen here Hence this methodology promotes the following benefits 68007024085 April 2011 54 System Feature Overview e Support for up to 360 location responses per minute per repeater using both slots while running at 90 capacity and decrease in the number of channels and associated hardware needed for GPS data transmission e Increased GPS reliability due to the drastic reduction of collision among subscribers sending GPS data For more details on reliability based on voice loading on primary channel refer to Section 4 4 5 6 Enhanced GPS Revert Loading amp Reliability e More control over system throughput by allowing users to choose the most appropriate window size based on the location response characteristics needed This feature is supported in repeater mode only and works in single site Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect modes of operation Only GPS data unconfirmed only is supported on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel in conventional mode both single site and IPSC In Capacity Plus mode ARS Registration Message is also supported on the En
170. aging Client Figure 2 8 Text Messaging Services Figure 2 8 shows a sample MOTOTRBO Text Messaging system configuration See System Components and Topologies on page 137 for more details on setting up your MOTOTRBO system 2 4 2 1 Built In Text Messaging Service The built in text messaging feature allows MOTOTRBO portable and mobile radio users to send and receive information in a text format This feature provides a useful alternative to voice on the MOTOTRBO system The built in text message service is fully accessed from the menu system on MOTOTRBO radio models with keypads and displays Some aspects of this service are also available to non display models April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 45 2 4 2 1 1 Services Provided to a Radio User Using the built in text messaging services a radio user can create send receive store and display a text message The following capabilities are included A radio user can create a text message in one of two ways Quick text or limited free form text messages Quick text messages are pre defined using CPS This allows a user to choose from commonly sent messages without having to retype the content Once selected the user is allowed to edit any part of the Quick text message prior to sending The CPS allows you to define 10 Quick Text messages A radio user can select to send a text message to other radios Messages can be sent to an individual or to a
171. al ID of 16776415 and a CAI April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 263 Network address of 12 the default will have a Radio Network IP address of 12 255 252 223 Below are a few more examples all assuming the default CAI Network address of 12 Unit ID 00012045 Convert to Hexadecimal 002FOD Separate into 8 bit sections 00 2F OD Each 8 bit section represents 1 octet of the IP address Convert each section into decimal 00 47 13 Assemble IP address from conversion above 12 A B C where A The first 8 bit section in decimal format In this example A 0 B The second 8 bit section in decimal format In this example B 47 C The third 8 bit section in decimal format In this example C 13 The IP address for Unit ID 12045 is 12 0 47 13 Unit ID 00000100 Convert to Hexadecimal 000064 Separate into 8 bit sections 00 00 64 Each 8 bit section represents 1 octet of the IP address Convert each section into decimal 00 00 100 Assemble IP address from conversion above 12 A B C where A The first 8 bit section in decimal format In this example A 0 B The second 8 bit section in decimal format In this example B 0 C The third 8 bit section in decimal format In this example C 100 The IP address for Unit ID 100 is 12 0 0 100 Unit ID 05000032 Convert to Hexadecimal 4C4B60 Separate into 8 bit sections 4C 4B 60 Each 8 bit section represents 1 octet of the IP address Con
172. al in a number of situations including e theft e incapacity of the radio user or e allowing the initiator of an Emergency Call to communicate hands free in an emergency situation In MOTOTRBO systems Remote Monitor is configured in portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio to use this function it must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings To permit or prevent a radio from receiving and responding to this command go to the Signaling Systems settings in the CPS When a radio is configured to decode the remote monitor command the duration that the target radio transmits after receiving a Remote Monitor command is also set in the CPS Signaling Systems settings of the target radio The Remote Monitor feature may be activated on a disabled radio Remote Monitor could also be programmed to be activated on radios that are in emergency mode only April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 33 2 3 3 4 Radio Check The Radio Check feature checks if a radio is active in a system without notifying the user of the target radio Besides the Busy LED there is no other audible or visual indication on the checked radio The receiving radio automatically and silently responds with an acknowledgement to the initiating radio This feature is used to discreetly determine if a target radio is available For example if a radio user is non responsive Radio Check could be used to determine if the target radio is switched on a
173. all in Talkaround mode to produce smoother conversation During this time other radios can still transmit since the channel is essentially idle April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 309 mna Description Notes Name The Subscriber Inactivity Timer SIT controls how long the The value of this repeater will continue transmitting with absence of feature must be equal subscriber activity on the uplink If the repeater is operating to or greater than the on shared use frequencies it cannot remain keyed Hang Time Group indefinitely for the benefit of broadcasting synchronization Private or Emergency signals to radios The repeater will likely be de keyed most whichever is the of the time thereby requiring radios to first activate the longest repeater via the uplink frequency and acquire synchronization via the downlink frequency before completing the call setup request and subsequent first Subscriber N L transmission The net result of these extra procedures is Inactivity ie va l Timer increased access time therefore it is desirable to avoid these steps whenever possible There is a trade off to minimizing access time by keeping the repeater keyed for This feature is disabled as long as practically possible while complying with the if Repeater Mode is set regulations regarding shared use channels which to Analog essentially require the repeater to
174. all to an intuitive alphanumeric name representative of the radio that to be addressed Note that All Calls created in the Contacts folder appear in the Contacts menu of the subscriber by name and this name also appears on the radio display when a Private Call is received If configured as above radio users are able to make Private Calls by selecting the Private Call by name from the radio s Contacts menu In addition similar to assigning a Group Call to a channel as described above it is also possible to assign a Private Call to the TX Contact Name attribute of a channel so that users can place Private Calls by making the appropriate channel selection via the top knob on a portable or up down channel select buttons on a mobile It is also possible to assign a Private Call to a radio programmable button called a one touch call in CPS so that users can place a Private Call at the touch of a button These latter 2 methods are the only methods for non display radios to place Private Calls Please note that a radio can in practice receive a Private Call from any other radio that is available on the channel regardless of whether the receiving radio has created a CPS Private Call 68007024085 April 2011 284 System Design Considerations entry for that radio The receiving radio will in this case display the radio ID of the calling radio rather than an alphanumeric alias Similarly a radio can place a Private Call to any oth
175. alog Conventional Digital Conventional are standard in one base station without the cost of additional software e Twice the spectral efficiency one frequency pair provides two logical voice paths e Effectively twice the power efficiency as compared to two analog stations when operating in digital mode e Integrated Components optimizes expensive site space one physical station provides the capacity of two in digital mode April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 141 3 1 1 2 6 Wireline Interface Board The MTR3000 Wireline board is used to connect an analog audio source and sink such as a console to the MTR3000 Base Station Repeater The Wireline board supports Tone and DC Remote Control modes that allow for channel selection and PTT signaling from compatible consoles Local PTT operation is also supported The Wireline can be configured for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation as needed The table below provides a description of the impedance supported by the Wireline board Option Functionality High Impedance For use with an external impedance matching 600 Q For Argentina Canada Chile Columbia Ecuador El Salvador Guam Hong Kong India Indonesia Japan Jordan Kazakhstan Kuwait Macao Malaysia Mexico Oman Pakistan Peru Philippines Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore South Korea Taiwan Thailand UAE USA and Yemen 270 Q 150 nF 750 Q For Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France G
176. alone repeater or as a repeater connected to a backend network as in the case of IP Site Connect mode or Capacity Plus mode As a repeater it listens on one uplink frequency and then re transmits on a downlink frequency Therefore a pair of RF frequencies is required for each repeater in the system A major advantage of using a repeater in the system is that it allows a greater communication range than would be possible talking from subscriber to subscriber Multiple repeaters can be installed in strategic locations for the users coverage to be consistent throughout their required range of operation However only in IP Site Connect mode do the radios seamlessly roam between repeaters In digital repeater mode the users must know the coverage range provided by each repeater and manually switch channels when necessary The repeater is capable of operating in either digital mode analog mode or in Dynamic Mixed Mode This is determined at the initial configuration and is not updated dynamically Therefore at any given time it either operates as a digital repeater as an analog repeater or as a Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater When configured for analog operation the repeater is designed to operate with existing analog systems therefore making migration to a MOTOTRBO system smoother 68007024085 April 2011 138 System Components and Topologies When configured for digital operation the repeater offers additional services The digital repea
177. and or data Care must also be taken to analyze if the Selected Channel can accommodate the anticipated voice traffic for a large number of subscribers 1 GPS Revert 2 GPS Revert 3 GPS Revert Channel Channels Channels Radios supported at 20 40 60 1 minute update rate Radios supported at 40 80 120 2 minute update rate Though GPS Revert Channels can significantly increase the number of radios providing location updates it is important to remember that when powered up an radio needs to register with both Presence and Location Applications before it can send location updates If a large number of radios happen to be powered up in a relatively short period of time the Selected Channel may become overwhelmed with registration traffic and the system s voice handling capacity will be impacted Therefore if this situation must occur the following should be kept in mind e Keep voice traffic on the Selected Channel to a minimum This causes the registration messages to be queued in the radio and the control station e As a rule of thumb expect about three successful registrations per minute Therefore a fleet of 60 radios could require 20 minutes to successfully register In order to minimize registration traffic the radios can be gradually powered on at a rate of three per minute during the estimated time frame Generally a GPS Revert Channel can support more radios when a lower GPS update rate i e
178. annel in the chart refers to a logical channel i e a slot In Capacity Plus both channels of a repeater are in either trunked mode or none Therefore the charts provide the number of users only for an even number of channels The number of calls handled by a Capacity Plus system may vary considerably based upon the quantity of users and volume of calls Most systems are heavily loaded for a few hours in a day It is recommended that the system be designed with an adequate amount of channel resources to handle peak as well as off peak traffic The first chart is for High Voice profile i e 3 Calls per User per Hour with no GPS data The same chart can also be used for other voice only profiles by adjusting the number of users i e the x axis of the chart For example in the case of Low Voice profile i e 1 Call per User per Hour the number of users should be multiplied by three 68007024085 April 2011 212 System Design Considerations Users vs Number of Channels aA r 8 C aa High Voice Profile x ATU 2 GoS 2 J A A 5 4 Vi Jr m 1 High Voice Profile a A 5 GoS riri PS a 8 Lt Te High Voice Profile o L 7 8 GoS D MIA E A 4 4 g ADY T IA is 4 tv g 4 ASP 5 4 4 E reel Vy ca 2 hae 0 0 100 200 300 400 500
179. annel the radio moves to the Rest Channel to invoke this feature However if the Rest Channel is busy this feature is then used to stop the ongoing voice transmission Note that the receiving radio may be busy on another channel and there is no guarantee that the data message will be received In summary a radio does not attempt to interrupt if e The radio is transmitting e The data message is for a revert channel e The Rest Channel is idle April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 261 4 9 5 Remote Voice Dekey The Remote Voice Dekey feature is capable of dekeying interruptible voice transmissions that the radio is either partied to or not partied to Alternatively the radio user has the ability to remotely shut down a transmission that the user is not able to first monitor Because of this it is suggested that the Remote Voice Dekey feature be provided only to well trained supervisors or radio technicians Operational procedures regarding appropriate use of this feature should be established to ensure that the user is not remotely dekeying critical voice transmissions It is presumed that Remote Voice Dekey is not used frequently therefore the collisions described in the Voice Interrupt section is not a major concern When operating in Capacity Plus mode a radio can only dekey interruptible voice transmissions on its own channel The radio is not permitted to dekey interruptible voice transmissions on other channel
180. annel is an individual voice path in other words the users on the same wide area channel monitors each other on any site Figure 2 13 shows a system with 2 sites 2 wide area systems each with 2 wide area channels Wide Area System 1 Channel 1 WAS1 CH1 represents a wide area channel in wide area system 1 WAS2 CH1 cma WAS1 CH1 Figure 2 13 Two Wide Area Systems Each with Two Wide Area Channels Each wide area channel should have its own roam list The roam list should contain one logical channel from each site that corresponds to the wide area channel A logical channel is defined as the frequency pair color code timeslot combination If there are multiple personalities CPS Channels that reference the same logical channel only one should be added to the wide area channel roam list Only wide area channels should be added to the roam list April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 75 The table below shows an example of the two site configuration in CPS The colors match those of Figure 2 13 to help clarify Zone Logical Channel Personality i Folder CPS Channel ae Group a Alias Alias Freq Pair Cause Time Slot Teo 1 SITE 1 TGA 1 WAS1 CH1 2 SITE 1 TGB 5 SITE 2 TGA 2 WAS1 CH2 1 WAS1 CH1 6 SITE 2 TGB The roam lists are configured as shown below 2 WAS1 CH2 Roam List
181. annels Note that this only accounts for loading the first and second factors and assumes registration messaging is evenly spread throughout the day Selected Channel and GPS Revert Channel Loading with High GPS High Voice 1 GPS Revert Channel Low Voice 3 GPS Revert Channels User Experience eae 7 Example of Users per Slot Figure 4 6 Channel Loading with GPS Revert Channels It can be seen in Figure 4 6 that the High Voice Selected Channel User Experience and the single GPS Revert Channel User Experience are fairly similar in terms of user experience versus number of users on a slot In this example for the desired User Experience identified on the above chart as the red horizontal example line the Selected Channel supports about 16 radios at a High Voice profile and the single GPS Revert Channel supports about 18 radios at a high GPS profile For the High Voice profile which is defined in Voice and Data Traffic Profile on page 209 16 users would equate to a little less than 2 transmissions per minute For a high GPS profile which is also defined in Voice and Data Traffic Profile on page 209 18 users would equate to 18 transmissions per minute It can also be seen in Figure 4 6 that the Low Voice Selected Channel User Experience and the three GPS Revert Channel User Experience are fairly similar in terms of user experience versus April 2011 6
182. any subscriber s radio ID or other repeaters radio ID in the system The phone call duration is typically longer than a regular 2 way radio voice call If the phone gateway repeater s TOT is set to be too short it is possible that the timer expires and causes a brief interruption during a phone call In order to eliminate such interruption and to provide a better end user experience it is recommended to set the timer to 300 seconds or longer Conventional Single Site or IP Site Connect The APP box can be configured to support none one or both of the channels of the phone gateway repeater for phone calls If the APP box needs to support phone calls on only one of the channels this channel has to be enabled as the phone gateway while the other channel disabled on this repeater Example In IPSC the APP box may be configured to support one of the WACs while another APP box at a different site may be configured to support the other WAC If the APP box needs to be used to support phone calls on both channels both channels need to be phone gateway enabled If the APP box cannot be used to support phone calls on either channels although physically connected to the repeater both channels need to be phone gateway disabled IP Site Connect If there is a legacy repeater prior to RO1 08 00 on a WAC any phone capable repeater needs to be phone gateway disabled for that particular WAC because phone calls are not supported in legacy re
183. application to radios on a wide area IP Site Connect channel NOTE Playback capabilities require AMBE 2 decoding support by the application April 2011 Receive all radio initiated calls from all repeaters in the system The application may use this information for the system profiling or billing based on the call duration Receive notifications when a repeater is unavailable for over the air service or transmit Base Station Identification CWID due to inbound or outbound inference from other systems or failure of a critical component An IP based application may use the notifications to monitor system availability reliability Initiate radio commands data or voice calls to all wide area configured repeaters in the system IP Site Connect wide area slot configuration only Initiate radio commands to the targeted local repeater slot in the system IP Site Connect local area slot configuration only 68007024085 System Feature Overview 131 2 16 2 1 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect Figure 2 26 illustrates an IP based ADP application interfacing with an IP Site Connect system In an IP Site Connect system configuration a repeater can be configured in either a wide area or local area slot configuration or a combined configuration of both IPSC Repe Local Slot 1 8 IPSC Repeater Local Slot 1 Multisite Slot 2 Application voice data csbk IPSC Repeater Multisite Slot 1 amp 2 Router 2
184. are presumed to occur relatively infrequently and affect radio users individually Based on these assumptions it is appropriate to enable Emergency Voice Interrupt in every radio if so desired If emergency conditions are expected to occur frequently or affect large groups of users i e many radio users initiate emergency or are in an emergency condition simultaneously then Emergency Voice Interrupt users may experience the collisions described in Voice Interrupt and Emergency Voice Interrupt may not perform to the end users expectations In a Capacity Plus configuration this feature is used to stop a voice transmission during an emergency based on the following two conditions e Ifall channels are busy a radio starts an Emergency Call after interrupting an ongoing interruptible call on the busy Rest Channel e f an Emergency Call is active for the same talkgroup on channel c a radio starts the Emergency Call on channel c after interrupting the ongoing interruptible call 68007024085 April 2011 260 System Design Considerations 4 9 4 Data Over Voice Interrupt Data Over Voice Interrupt is not used by any data applications native to the radio e g Text Message Location Telemetry This feature is only available to third party data applications on the option board or attached PC It is suggested that third party data applications only invoke the Data Over Voice Interrupt feature for the most critical of data d
185. are apart from backend network devices such as routers If a customer has multiple MOTOTRBO systems working in digital repeater mode at the same site and wants to convert to a Capacity Plus system then the repeaters and radios should be updated with the new software and the repeaters need to be connected to an IPv4 based backend 68007024085 System Feature Overview 19 68007024085 network If one logical channel of a repeater is configured to the Capacity Plus mode then the other logical channel will also be in the same mode In a Capacity Plus configuration MOTOTRBO systems support all previous digital repeater mode features with the exception of the following Scan Capacity Plus supports Group Scan but does not support scanning channels of another system As the radios are in a trunked system scanning the Trunked Channels is not required Emergency Revert Channel Capacity Plus does not support a revert channel for emergency because probability of all Trunked Channels becoming busy is low However reverting to an emergency group is supported This promotes a centralized handling of an emergency situation IP Site Connect configuration Capacity Plus is a single site system and therefore does not support features related to IP Site Connect configuration such as wide area coverage and automatic roaming However a radio can be programmed with multiple channels in multiple zones one of which could be a Capacity Plus system another a
186. are some trade offs in reducing call hang time The channel will no longer be reserved for a group in the system Thus every time a group member of the same call presses PTT to initiate a call the call will land on a different frequency channel In some cases some of the Group Call participants may switch to other high priority Group Calls While in other cases the system may become busy with other calls and no channels are available to initiate the call Customers may choose to reduce call hang time from the default value rather than setting it to zero based upon channel usage If there are more members in a group and if members of the group are replying instantly to the Group Call then lowering call hang time from the default value may improve overall call throughput However if the group members are not replying instantly to the communication and the channel still needs to be reserved then call hang time should be increased Call throughput reduces by increasing call hang time and vice versa Since all repeaters in the Capacity Plus system needs to exhibit the same behavior it is recommended that call hang time is programmed similarly for all trunked repeaters 68007024085 April 2011 226 System Design Considerations 4 4 6 3 Call Priority in Capacity Plus Mode If there is more than one call active in a Capacity Plus system then a radio joins its most preferred call in the following conditions The call that the radio was particip
187. associated with each user Digital Repeater Loading on page 208 should provide information to help decide the distribution of groups logical channel assignments slots and physical channel assignments When organizing your MOTOTRBO system remember that individual users radios and groups all have different requirements Subsequently they also have different parameters associated with them Organize the radios groups and slot assignments in a spreadsheet An example is shown below File codeplug as Functional group Construction construction ctb Construction User ID usor namo iaia oe 1873 Talks with functional groups Construction Transport Construction Transport Listens only to functional groups Security Security Construction Functional group and talkgroup mapping Security Administrative Transport TG ID 54 TG ID 46 TG ID 8766 TG ID 123 TG ID 99 TG ID 997 TG ID 368 a Cement factory 2 8 Metal shop Carpenters Front desk Delivery trucks Cement mixers ch 1 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 ch 1 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 ch 1 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 Construction Security security ctb Construction Transport Security Administrative Security Security Administrative Bob Rick Al Joe Security Administrative Administrative Security adminis
188. at are received For example an automated service could send out an e mail with a unique ID string in the subject line If a radio replies to the message it preserves the subject line with the unique ID string and the automated system can use the address and subject line of the message to know that a specific unit had replied to a specific message The number of characters allowed in a reply by a radio are equal to 138 characters minus the number of characters in the subject line For example if an e mail is sent with a 30 character subject line and a 100 character body the entire message will be received by the radio When the radio replies to the message the subject line is automatically preserved leaving 108 characters for the radio to reply with MOTOTRBO Text Messages that originate from the front panel of radios or the Text Messaging Client via the Application Server and destined for e mails addresses will contain blank subject lines Radios do not have the capability to create or modify a subject line from the front panel The CPS does not have the capability to create a subject line 4 10 1 8 MOTOTRBO Example System IP Plan The following diagram is an example of the information contained in the previous sections This diagram shows a configuration of multiple digital repeaters at a single site functioning in repeater mode It should be used as a guideline for configuring a MOTOTRBO System 68007024085 April 2011 jdwex ue juo S
189. at follow a high usage traffic profile to a minimum per channel Groups are generally assigned to operate on a particular slot of a repeater Through discussions with the customer the designer should identify high usage groups and distribute them over different slots Groups and users that are on different slots cannot communicate with each other They need to manually change their selector knobs to communicate with the users and other groups on the other slot In most cases this is not a problem since organizations can usually be broken into at least two groups of users But in the case where a customer only has one group of users who all need voice communication between each other at all times then evenly distributing the voice and data load between two channels becomes more complicated If there is only one group in a system its users can all be programmed to operate on a particular slot Their Group Calls Private Calls text messages location updates will all be transmitted on the programmed slot This is an acceptable configuration although it leaves the other slot completely unused If the number of users and their usage grows the slot may be unable to support their traffic For example if a customer has 50 users with voice and GPS usage all on one time slot their user experience may be poor due to the traffic loading It is highly recommended that the users in this case be broken into two unique groups of 25 and distributed between the sl
190. ata that is more important than the interruptible voice transmission on the radio channel It is also suggested that the third party data application be designed to ensure that system events common to multiple radios do not result in Data Over Voice Interrupt transmissions being initiated simultaneously These guidelines are necessary to minimize the probability of Data Over Voice Interrupt signaling requests from colliding with one another As discussed in the Voice Interrupt section above it is likely that the interrupt procedure fails and none of the radios succeed at obtaining a clear channel on which to transmit when the signaling collides In a Capacity Plus configuration a data message invokes this feature dependent on the following conditions e If the radio is transmitting a voice call either on a traffic channel or on a busy Rest Channel the radio continues with the voice transmission e Ifthe radio is on a busy Rest Channel either listening or idling and the data message must be transmitted on a Trunked Channel this feature is used to stop the ongoing voice transmission e Ifthe radio is listening to a voice call on a traffic channel not on a busy Rest Channel and the data message must be transmitted on a revert channel the radio moves to a revert channel to invoke this feature e Ifthe radio is listening to a voice call on a traffic channel not on a busy Rest Channel and the data message must be transmitted on a Trunked Ch
191. atch scenarios April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 89 2 7 6 Privacy Indications to User It is important for a radio user to know the privacy status i e enabled or disabled of the current channel and also to know if the received voice transmission is unprotected or a protected voice transmission There is no privacy indication for incoming protected data transmissions Prior to transmitting a radio user should check the privacy setting of the current channel On privacy enabled channels an icon is shown on the front panel display of the radio when the radio is idle Privacy Status Type Icon Enabled a Enhanced and Disabled None no icon Upon receiving a voice transmission the radio user can know the privacy status of the voice transmission by observing the blinking rate of the receive LED When receiving a protected voice transmission the LED blinks green but at a quicker rate than when receiving an unprotected voice transmission If radio users in a call have mismatching privacy settings but the same key they are able to communicate but the transmissions are protected in only one direction In other words only the transmissions from radios with privacy enabled are protected The radio does not automatically negotiate privacy settings or block transmissions that are not protected Therefore it is up to the radio users to monitor the privacy indications to determine if all the user
192. ate messages 4 11 6 9 Remote Voice Dekey In MOTOTRBO systems Remote Voice Dekey is configured in the portable and mobile radio CPS If used in a repeater system the repeater does not require any specific configuration with respect to Remote Voice Dekey However the repeater needs to be using Transmit Interrupt capable software R01 06 00 or later To allow a radio the ability to initiate this function this option must be enabled via the CPS Only MOTOTRBO radios provisioned with the ability to be interrupted dekeys in response to the Remote Voice Dekey command The Remote Voice Dekey feature can be used in direct talkaround or repeater modes of operation The Remote Voice Dekey feature is capable of remotely dekeying group voice calls and private voice calls Emergency Calls and non Emergency Calls and can be used regardless of whether the initiating radio is a member of the call being remotely dekeyed Since it is possible for this feature to remotely dekey a call that the radio is not unmuted to the radio user may not be aware of the nature of the call that is being remotely dekeyed Accordingly it is recommended that this feature be enabled only in supervisor radios and the radio users be trained on the proper use of the Remote Voice Dekey feature The Remote Voice Dekey feature is not capable of remotely dekeying All Calls or non voice i e data or control calls 68007024085 April 2011 286 System Design Considerations 4 1
193. ater to make a secure connection to the CPS application on the PC If the PC resides behind a firewall the firewall will need to be configured to allow inbound traffic repeater to CPS on a specific CPS TCP port that is configurable in the application Upon initiating an IRP action the CPS communicates its opened TCP port number to which the repeater attempts to connect If multiple CPS applications different PCs are behind a single firewall each application must use a unique TCP port number and the firewall must be configured to correctly route TCP traffic to the corresponding application To authorize access to the repeater codeplug password authentication on a per repeater basis is optional and configurable via CPS The codeplug password can be provisioned in the repeater prior to using this feature April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 103 NOTE Using the CPS to provision or upgrade a repeater will temporarily disable the repeater until the operation is completed The duration of the disabled repeater depends on the network bandwidth and amount of data that is transferred to complete a selected operation 2 10 Voice Operated Transmission VOX MOTOTRBO provides the ability for hands free radio transmissions with select radio accessories 2 10 1 Operational Description Voice Operated Transmission VOX monitors the accessory microphone for voice activity When voice is detected the radio is keyed up and the voice is t
194. ating in ends e A radio powers on or returns from a fade when all Trunked Channels are not busy The preference list for a radio in decreasing order is an Emergency Call of interest All Call the radio s transmit group and the radio s receive group list The preference of groups in a radio s receive group list are displayed in decreasing order A radio enforces the call priority only when it enters a call Upon joining the call the radio searches for only All Calls and Emergency Calls whereby the emergency group is in either the transmit group or the receive group list 4 4 6 4 Call Initiation in Capacity Plus Mode In Capacity Plus mode while a radio is listening to a Group Call a radio user can initiate a non data call e g using the menu The radio moves to the Rest Channel and starts the requested call if there is an idle channel If all channels are busy the radio informs the user by generating a busy signal that the call cannot be initiated Then the radio stays on the Rest Channel until another channel becomes idle April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 227 4 5 4 5 1 Multiple Digital Repeaters in Standalone Mode Multiple repeaters may be required to provide sufficient RF coverage Large geographical regions and areas with large natural boundaries i e mountains are two examples Also regions with a large number of subscribers may need additional repeaters to relieve RF congestion The di
195. ation Server via USB a network interface is created for each Each interface is provided the IP address configured as the Accessory IP in each control station It is important that the Radio IP and the Accessory IP of the four control stations be different from each other to prevent IP conflict and therefore routing problems in the Application Server The following IP configuration for four control stations is recommended Radio IP Accessory IP PC Network Interface IP Control Station 1 192 168 11 1 192 168 11 2 Control Station 2 192 168 12 1 192 168 12 2 Control Station 3 192 168 13 1 192 168 13 2 Control Station 4 192 168 14 1 192 168 14 2 The Individual Radio ID and therefore the Radio Network IP Address is very important when configuring the Application Server control stations Unlike the Radio IP and Accessory IP the control station s Radio Network IP should be identical Each control station should be programmed with the same Radio ID to enable field radios to communicate with the Application Server regardless of what channel they are on Although it was mentioned that MOTOTRBO radios should not have duplicate Radio IDs the control stations are the exception Because control stations are intended to remain on a single channel they will always be monitoring the same channel Although this Radio ID of the control stations can be any valid Individual ID they must be unique and not duplicate any non Control
196. ault Values If shared use is not a problem in the customer s region the beacon transmit ratio become less important and it may be desirable to increase the beacon duration and decrease the beacon interval past what is identified here If the automatic Active Site Search feature is going to be disabled it is advisable to lower the beacon interval as much as possible since radios will rely only on it to find the appropriate site 2 6 3 5 Emergency Revert GPS Revert and Roaming Interactions Emergency Revert and GPS Revert are specific to the current home site This is important since the revert channel of one site will most likely not be the revert channel of another site Although it is possible to revert while roaming roaming while reverted is limited While in emergency and configured as non revert the radio will not perform Passive Site Search If Active Site Search is enabled the radio performs an automatic Active Site Search when the RSSI of the repeater drops below the programmed threshold or if it no longer monitors the repeater beacons normal triggers for passive roam This is considered as a more aggressive method to site search as compared to passively searching The radio also supports the ability to trigger an automatic Active Site Search on transmit request by the user or automatically by the radio GPS Standard Manual Site Roam is also supported Active Site Search can be enabled or disabled via the CPS While reverted due t
197. aximum length of a MOTOTRBO Text Message is technically 140 characters according to the protocol However applications that support the use of Subject Lines may reduce the number of the effective payload The Customer Programming Software CPS and the applications in the radios that create text messages will limit the effective payload to 138 characters External applications that run on Personal Computers PC may further reduce the effective payload to provide indications that messages have been truncated for example replacing the last character with a horizontal ellipse character E mails that are longer than 138 characters will be truncated to fit For example if an e mail is received with a 200 character subject line and a 300 character body only the first 137 characters of the subject line plus a horizontal ellipse at the end is converted into the MOTOTRBO Text Message and the rest of the e mail will be discarded In another example if an e mail is received with a 100 character subject line and a 300 character body then the 100 characters of the subject line and the first 37 characters of the body with an ellipse added at the end will be converted into the MOTOTRBO Text Message format Radios replying to messages preserve the original message s subject line In this manner external services and solutions that use e mail for communication can use the content of the subject line to correlate between e mails that are sent and e mails th
198. ay already have been chosen the next chapter helps dig deeper into how the end user utilizes the system and therefore gives additional ideas on how it should be configured 68007024085 April 2011 196 System Components and Topologies 3 2 4 Capacity Plus Mode In Capacity Plus mode all the radios share the channels of all the trunked repeater s The probability of all channels being busy at the same instant is low Hence radio finds less blocking of calls compared to when only one channel is available to the radio Similarly for the same quality of service sharing of channels allows more calls and thus increases channel capacity In Capacity Plus a channel is configured either for trunking or for data revert A radio has a list of all Trunked Channels and a list of Data Revert Channels While configuring channels observe the following rules e Both channels of a repeater should be used for the same purpose This implies that if one channel of a repeater is a Trunked Channel then the other channel is also a Trunked Channel Similarly if one channel of a repeater is a Data Revert Channel then the other channel is also a Data Revert Channel e The CPS provides a zone for keeping all the trunked and Data Revert Channels The zone is called Channel Pool All the trunked and Data Revert Channels should be kept in the Channel Pool 3 2 4 1 Topologies of Capacity Plus System 3 2 4 1 1 A System with No Data Application Server
199. be used to stop any inappropriate use of a radio or to prevent a stolen radio from functioning In MOTOTRBO systems Radio Disable is configured in the portable and mobile radios with the CPS To allow a radio to use this function it must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings To permit or prevent a radio from receiving and responding to this command go to the Signaling Systems settings in the CPS When disabled the radio s display blanks and the radio is no longer able to make or receive calls The radio can still be turned on and off this indicates that the radio has not failed but is disabled Once disabled a radio can also be enabled via the CPS All radios are configured to accept Inhibit commands by default but this can be disabled via the CPS For over the air radio enable signaling to be successful the target radio must be turned on and be within coverage of the site it was disabled at This is important since a disabled radio locks onto the site or channel on which it was disabled even after a power cycle To receive an enable command over the air the radio also has to be within coverage of the site where the disabling occurred This may also be accomplished by communicating with the radio on the talkaround frequency of the site in which it was disabled 2 3 3 2 2 Using the ADP Application The Radio Enable Disable feature can also be initiated utilizing an IP based ADP application provided the repeater configuration
200. bility Alarm e g SCM with TCXO in 800 900MHz band only on the MTR3000 e Detect and Report FRU Incompatibility Alarms e g PA and exciter are incompatible only on the MTR3000 e Detect and Report Main Fan Failure only on the DR 3000 not applicable for the MTR3000 3 Repeater Control e Change Enabled or Disabled Status e Change Channels e Change Transmit Power Level High or Low e Reset Repeater e Knockdown Repeater The RDAC application can be configured to work over the network via IP or locally via USB When working over the IP network the application communicates with all repeaters within an IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus system using the same link establishment process that the repeaters utilize Therefore it benefits from the existing link establishment and authentication utilized between repeaters All services in the list above are available through the RDAC application April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 95 When working locally the RDAC application connects to a single repeater via USB All services in the list above are available through the RDAC application The repeater control services are not available via the USB interface through the RDAC application The user also has access to the repeaters external GPIO pins External equipment or existing remote adapters and desksets can be configured to set or read the GPIO pins to allow access to the repeater control services as well as access to ind
201. by locating up to four Text Message Dispatchers and four Location Dispatchers throughout the customer s Enterprise Network Up to four installations of each application can be located anywhere on the customer s LAN as long as they can communicate with the Application Server The Dispatcher installation on the Application Server counts as one of the instances of the dispatch software The diagram below shows two instances of each application One is on the Application Server and one remote The applications can reside on the same remote machine if desired 2 AY Internet NETWORK Al ls E mail Al Customer a Text Message USB GPS Enterprise network Dispatch i Sas i MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU ere C E N Location Control Station digital mode Dispatch digital mode Application Server Y NETWORK I WY PC Terminal Uy Figure 3 14 MOTOTRBO Radios In Digital Direct Mode Server Based Configuration with Remote 3 2 1 Dispatchers Another Text Message service that is only available in a server based configuration is the ability to receive and send text messages to external e mail addresses This allows PCs or pagers and cell phones that are text message capable on the system to send e mail messages In order for the Text Message Server to communicate with the outside world the Application Server must have access to the internet When a radio
202. c IPv4 address to establish their link with the wide area system not a local IPv4 address This is true even for the IP Site Connect devices that are located on the same Local Area Network as the Master Again similar to the Wide Area Network configurations the router NAT firewall connected to the Master require some configuration open port so that unsolicited messages from other repeaters can reach the Master repeater To support the ability for the IP Site Connect devices to communicate to other devices on its LAN using the WAN IPv4 address the routers on those WANs must support a feature referred to as hair pinning Hair pinning is returning a message in the direction it came from as a way for it to reach its final destination This is per the router standard RFC 4787 The diagram below shows a simple diagram of IP Site Connect devices located at different sites connected through a mix of local and wide area networks Note that in this drawing the IP Site Connect devices could be in one or more Wide Area Systems i e more than one Master could contain local area channels or even be an analog repeater a disabled repeater or RDAC IP application The number of IP Site Connect Devices located behind a single router will have an effect on the required bandwidth of the WAN connection IP Site Connect Device Local Area Wide Area Network Network Router Firewall NAT or Router Figure 3 38 IP Site Connect Device
203. can List There are three levels of priority within a Scan List Priority 1 Priority 2 and Non Priority The Priority 1 and Priority 2 channels are scanned more often than the Non Priority Scan members Priority Scan is available with any mix of analog digital talkaround or repeater channels The Scan List can be configured to have one Priority 1 member and one Priority 2 member the remaining are considered Non Priority When scanning these priorities affect the order of scanning The following represents the scan order of Scan List Priority 1 Non Priority 1 Priority 2 Non Priority 2 Priority 3 Non Priority 3 etc However the radio may reorder Non Priority scan members in order to optimize the efficiency of the scan In the CPS there are two parameters associated with Scan Lists Set Clear Priority 1 and Set Clear Priority 2 These are used to mark a Scan List member as Priority 1 and Priority 2 unmarked list members are non priority While scanning the radio can accept data e g text message location telemetry or terminal PC data However this is only applicable if the data is received on its selected home channel April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 63 NOTE In MOTOTRBO radio s with software versions R01 04 00 or later various enhancements were made to the scan engine to improve scanning performance This has caused some features such as scanning for Group Text Messaging and Emergency Alar
204. cation allows its user to remotely change the mode of a repeater 3 1 1 2 MTR3000 Base Station Repeater The MOTOTRBO MTR3000 base station repeater provides a modular flexible analog and digital station designed for today s communication systems and for the future The MTR3000 is an integrated data and voice base station repeater designed to deliver increased capacity spectral efficiency integrated data applications and enhanced voice communications The base stations are available for use in the following configurations e Analog Conventional e Digital MOTOTRBO e MOTOTRBO DMR Tier 2 Conventional Single Site e MOTOTRBO DMR Tier 2 Conventional IP Site Connect e MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus Trunking e MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Trunking e MOTOTRBO Transmit Interrupt e _MOTOTRBO Dynamic Mixed Mode DMM e MOTOTRBO Enhanced GPS LTR Trunking e Passport Trunking 3 1 1 2 1 MTR3000 Key Features The following are key features for the UHF and 800 900 MHz release 1 Wireline Card supports integrated Tone Remote and DC Remote Control 2 Analog RSSI 3 Hear clear 800 900 MHz only 4 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrades for low and high power stations 3 1 1 2 2 MTR3000 Standard Features e Operates in analog or MOTOTRBO digital mode with a LED indicating mode of operation e Migration path from analog to digital mode e 12 5 or 25 kHz programmable channel spacing 68007024085 April 2011 140 System Components and Topologies e Op
205. cation with the supervisor For example the user will not be able to initiate other features such as Scan Private Call or other command and control functions Once the emergency is complete e g turn off and turn on the radio or long short press of the emergency button depending on the radio configuration these abilities will return The emergency sequence is generally made up of two major parts e the signaling and e the following voice call April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 35 The emergency alarm is sent first and depending on configuration is commonly followed up by an Emergency Call An emergency alarm is not a data service but rather a confirmed command and control signaling that is sent to a group More than one radio can be configured on the system to monitor that group and be designated to acknowledge emergency alarms for that group These radios are considered acknowledging supervisors There is no user level acknowledgement The supervisor radio automatically acknowledges the emergency and provides an alert to the supervisor radio user There are other radios that are designated to only monitor emergency alarms but are not permitted to acknowledge them these users are commonly referred to as non acknowledging supervisors Thus sending the emergency alarm to a group allows for multiple supervisors to receive the emergency alarm indication It is important that only one acknowledging supervisor should be
206. cccceceeeeee 289 4 11 7 4 Extended Emergency Call Hang Time cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 4 11 7 5 Emergency Revert and GPS Revert Considerations 289 4 11 8 Channel Access Configuration ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenntaaeeees 294 4 11 9 Zones and Channel Knob Programming eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenttetntaeeees 295 4 12 Base Station Identifications BSI Setting Considerations eiee errena ee e ene ca seccaesa sees sagen tags tuned et here aa ada Eart Entent 296 4 13 GPS Revert Considerations For Single Repeater and IP SIG Connect OMY sre oi ek ein nd be tase alae aad Sas een he ha bm erie cia naar 298 4 14 Enhanced GPS Revert Considerations ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 299 4 14 1 Single Site Mod se Acie een een Ree 300 4 14 2 Capacily Plus Mode vedio uli site el il ae tel el pied este de Torti 300 4 14 3 IP Site Connect Mode cccccccccleceneceneeeeeteeneecesnnennececeseceaecceneseneeetes 300 viii 4 14 3 1 Other Considerations c cccecceecececceeceeceeeceeaeceeeceeaecuscnseaeeaeens 301 4 15 Enhanced Channel Access Consideration eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 302 4 15 1 Enhanced Channel Access Advantages eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentetaeeees 302 4 15 2 Enhanced Channel Access Limitations ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeetetteeeees 303 4 16 Failure Preparedness cccccccceeecccceeceeeeees
207. ccess Consideration The Enhanced Channel Access ECA feature is a channel access procedure in which a call initiating radio transmits a channel access request and listens on the channel to determine the status of the request The radio transmits the call only when access to the channel is obtained Only one of the requesting radios can obtain channel access to proceed with the call transmission The ECA provides the ability to reserve a channel OTA for one of the call initiating radios and provide exclusive access to that radio for a short duration The ECA feature is applicable only in repeater mode of operation The ECA procedure is not defined in the conventional DMR standard and is a Motorola proprietary feature 4 15 1 Enhanced Channel Access Advantages e Improves voice data call success rate by minimizing OTA call collisions due to multiple radios keying up within close proximity e Prevents call transmission when the radio is out of inbound range but within the outbound range and provides correct call status indication to the user Improves the GPS data success rate on the GPS revert channel by minimizing collisions e Prioritized channel access for an initiating radio to proceed with a call among other radios April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 303 4 15 2 Enhanced Channel Access Limitations Enhanced Channel Access is configurable on the radio and can be enabled or disabled on a conventional digital channel
208. ce Guide Multilingual 6866575D05 DM 340x User Guide 6866575D02 DM 360x Quick Reference Guide Multilingual 6866575D06 DM 360x User Guide 6866575D04 DM 3000 Series Accessory List Leaflet 6866575D26 DM 3000 Series Installation Manual 6866576D03 DR 3000 Basic Service Manual 6866576D16 DR 3000 Detailed Service Manual 6866576D02 DR 3000 Installation Guide 68007024085 April 2011 A 1 Control Station Installation APPENDIX A CONTROL STATION INSTALLATION A 1 A 1 1 The Data Revert Channel concept may require careful planning to achieve the expected data message throughput as described in the loading sections of the System Planner This is especially true as the number of control stations in a location is increased to support larger data traffic loads Poorly designed installations may result in self inflicted interference The end result of this interference is often corrupted data messages which increases the number of data message retries This increase results in an additional load placed on the system Data Bearer Service MOTOTRBO radios support both Unconfirmed and Confirmed data bearer services at Layer 2 The method selected impacts the transmit and receive roles that Revert Control Stations and either primary control stations conventional or trunked control stations Capacity Plus play within a system In turn these roles can impact the installation It should be noted that applications often implement their own confirmations
209. channel for voice Data and digital signaling are always transmitted on the selected channel The last landed channel is not updated for data and digital signaling In the event that the channel selected for a new transmission is busy a Transmit Interrupt feature may be invoked on that channel if so provisioned on that channel However the radio must additionally be a member of the call in progress for Voice Interrupt to be invoked Finally a radio s interruptible voice transmission periodically stops transmitting momentarily and listens to the channel to determine whether it is being requested to stop its transmission When a radio is scanning channels and testing the channel for presence of a carrier while another transmitting radio is listening to the channel for Transmit Interrupt signaling the scanning radio may conclude that the channel has no activity and moves on to the next channel in the Scan List However this occurrence should happen only occasionally It is most likely that the next time the scanning radio visits the channel it will not occur at the moment that the transmitting radio has suspended its transmission The net result is that the time taken to detect channel activity for an interruptible voice transmission may increase slightly versus uninterruptible voice transmissions April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 71 2 6 2 6 1 Since the repeater is transmitting continuously even during interruptible vo
210. cknowledging Supervisor will leave his location and actually resolve the emergency himself His role is to contact and dispatch other resources to handle the emergency that was reported The Acknowledging Supervisor is able to switch channels to dispatch assistance to the Emergency Initiator and then switch back to the emergency channel In some cases multiple Centralized configurations may be required This is often needed when the number of users becomes too much for one Acknowledging Supervisor to handle or if the customer s organization is broken into multiple organizations that have their own Acknowledging Supervisor This may also be required if a system contains multiple repeaters with non overlapping RF coverage While operating on one site a radio may not be in range of another site therefore if he were to revert to the other site to process an emergency he may not be in the coverage range of the repeater to complete the transmission In this scenario it is recommended that an Acknowledging Supervisor be designated for each RF coverage range This would require a radio be configured to revert to channels within RF coverage of the selected channel In order to revert to a Centralized channel the Emergency Initiator needs to select the channel that is configured with a Digital Emergency System and has its Emergency Revert Channel set to the designated Emergency Channel in the CPS Since this is configured on a per channel basis a radio c
211. codes must be the same Otherwise the repeater may not be able to send the appropriate de access code to end the call when an Emergency is detected during a phone call Since a repeater only interacts with a connected APP box the repeater configuration does not impact how the access de access codes are configured in other APP boxes in the system 4 8 6 2 Radio Configuration If access de access codes are not required for phone calls there is no related access de access code configuration in the radio However if required the system can be programmed to have the codes stored in the radio and sent out automatically or via some simple user interaction like pushing a button Alternatively the system can be programmed for the radio user to enter and send out the access de access codes manually when needed When the codes are configured in the radio via CPS the radio uses the code programmed for the foreseen channel automatically before initiating or ending a phone call on that particular channel This process is transparent to the user Hence there is no restriction on the usage of multiple sets of access de access codes for a particular APP box or whether different APP boxes in the system can use different sets of access de access codes When the access de access codes are not programmed in the radio the code configuration in the APP box is different depending on the system configurations 4 8 6 2 1 Single Site or IPSC Systems Configu
212. come clear before initiating the data transmission NOTE The Data Precedence and Data Over Voice Interrupt features do not need to be configured in the radio or repeater via the CPS because these features are always available For more information on the Data Precedence and Data Over Voice Interrupt features please refer to the MOTOTRBO Option Board ADK Development Guide on the MOTODEV Application Developers website http developer motorola com 68007024085 April 2011 62 2 5 System Feature Overview Scan MOTOTRBO supports scanning of analog voice digital voice data and digital signaling through a repeater or directly from another radio MOTOTRBO radios scan channels or groups or both In Capacity Plus mode it scans the groups only When scanning channels the radio continuously searches a list of channels for activity of interest When activity of interest is found the radio stops and switches to that channel When finished the radio continues scanning the channels in the list The set of channels to be scanned or scan members are determined by a configured Scan List A radio can have multiple Scan Lists and each channel in a radio can be associated with a different Scan List Scan Lists can contain only analog channels only digital channels or a mixture of both analog and digital channels Once Scan is started the radio scans through each Scan member of the associated Scan List for the selected channel The CPS a
213. configuration also depends on whether the codes are to be entered by the radio users or configured in the radios 4 8 6 1 Repeater Configuration If a repeater is not used as a phone gateway repeater there is no access de access code configuration for the repeater However if the repeater is used as a phone gateway repeater a de access code must be configured in the repeater This is mandatory even if the multi digit release code part of the de access code is not required the normal release command part of the de access code must be provisioned The repeater needs the de access code to end the phone call when the phone call needs to be ended by the radio system automatically especially during an Emergency Alarm interrupt Since the repeater can only hold one de access code this code configured in the repeater must be able to end any phone call supported by the APP box that is connected to the repeater If the APP box supports administrator access de access codes multiple sets of codes April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 255 can be used in the system and the administrator de access code needs to be programmed in the repeater However if the APP box does not support administrator access de access codes only one de access code can be used for this connected APP box and the same de access code must be programmed in the repeater NOTE The APP box can still use different sets of access de access codes but the de access
214. country s border refer to a frequency coordinating committee for licensing frequencies adjacent to that country Antenna Information You must also provide the following information about your antenna Structure The most common codes are e B Building with side mounted antenna e BANT Building with antenna on top e MAST Self supported structure PIPE Pipe antenna e POLE Any type of pole antenna e TOWER Free standing guyed structure used for communications purposes e Height Antenna Height Antenna height from ground to tip in meters Support Structure Height If antenna is mounted on top of a building it is the distance from ground to the top of the building Check with the building management company for this information Coordinates Latitude and longitude should be listed in degrees minutes and seconds Site Elevation The antenna site ground elevation above sea level This information should always be in meters 68007024085 System Design Considerations 207 4 3 2 Converting Existing 12 5 25 kHz Licenses The process for converting 25 kHz to 12 5 kHz varies between regions It is recommended to contact the local frequency coordinator s office to inquire how to re file existing frequency allocations There are also consultants that specialize in frequency coordination and can advise on the filing process In the US the following are general guidelines for frequency licenses e
215. create additional ones Additionally only the phone system in a phone gateway repeater needs to be configured Access De access Code Configuration Access and de access codes are encapsulated in the phone system Depending on the customers needs and the type of APP box installed in the system access de access codes may be optionally required to initiate end phone calls Different sets of access de access codes can be used for initiating ending different types of calls e g long distance call international call etc The codes are normally configured and supported in pairs in the APP box if a particular access code is used to start the call the corresponding paired de access code must be used to end the call Additionally administrator access de access codes may be used The administrator codes have the highest priority and can be used whenever access de access code is required For example the administrator de access code can be used to end a phone call regardless which access code was used to initiate the call A system may have more than one APP box installed and these boxes may be used to simply expand the number of phone channels or for different purposes For example one APP box may be used for international calls while the other boxes to expand the number of channels The access de access codes in these APP boxes may be configured similarly or different depending on how phone privileges are assigned among the radios users The
216. ct mode is always unconfirmed and not configurable MOTOTRBO provides an option to transmit a data message with or without the preambles used for increasing the battery life A MOTOTRBO radio sends one in repeater mode or two in Talkaround mode preambles for increasing the battery life For a typical location message this approximately reduces the transmission time by 10 To avoid interoperability issues it should be configured in the system that either all or none of the radios send battery saver preambles If there are radios with software versions prior to RO1 05 00 in the system all the radios in the system should be configured to send battery saver preambles 4 10 1 12 Data Revert Channels for Capacity Plus MOTOTRBO in Single Repeater and IP Site Connect modes support the GPS Revert feature In Capacity Plus MOTOTRBO extends the GPS Revert feature to include all types of data messages transmitted to the Application Server The Data Revert Channel feature allows system operators a configurable option to offload all the data messages from radios to a Server onto programmed digital channels called Data Revert Channels Data Revert Channels are different from Trunked Channels Examples of data messages sent from radios to a Server are registration messages location responses text messages to the Server and their over the air acknowledgements Data Revert Channels are exclusively used for transporting data packets They are also especiall
217. ctly 4 11 4 4 Assigning Group Aliases The groups should also be consistent throughout the system Display radios and data applications identify groups by alias Groups should be named with an alias the customer will easily understand Highly abstract names often cause confusion When assigning aliases you will need to consider character and subscriber limitations Some radio models may allow more or fewer characters than the data applications Since aliasing is done independently in each device if the alias and ID do not match in each device in the system customers may become confused An example is shown below Functional group and talkgroup mapping TG ID 62 TG ID 54 TG ID 46 JTG ID 8766 TG ID 123 TG ID 99 TG ID 997 TG ID 368 N Cement mixers Delivery trucks z D Cc a o gt Z EG Sa D g o 5 oe 2 T Og 2 0 g A ch 1 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 fch 2 slot 1 ch 1 slot 1f ch2 slot1 fch 1 slot 1 ch 2 slot 1 April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 283 4 11 5 Determining Which Channel Operates in Repeater Mode or Direct Mode Repeater Mode enables unit to unit communications using the repeater Direct Mode enables unit to unit communications without using the repeater Each channel on the radio is programmed to be either a Direct Mode channel or a Repeater Mode channel via the CPS Channels defined as Repeater channels in the CPS can be toggled to operate in Talkaround mo
218. d by the location dispatcher for a short period of time The minimum interval between updates High Cadence setting can be set as low as 10 seconds but with the concerns mentioned above kept in mind In order to help visualize the impact of setting the Location Update Period between 1 minute and 10 minutes the following graph was created using the data presented in Figure 4 1 The following assumes a specific desired user experience approximately mid way between good and fair The graph was plotted using the intersection of the Low GPS 10 minute Cadence and High GPS 1 minute Cadence lines for High Voice and Low Voice with the desired user experience design goal The chart provides a method to easily set the Location Update Period for a particular number of users on a channel while keeping their voice usage in mind The intersection between the number of users and the Location Update Period should always be above the line for the applicable voice usage For example if a channel has 10 users and the users have been determined to be High Voice users 3 calls per user per hour then it is recommended that the Location Update Period be set to 3 5 minutes or higher longer Because it is very difficult to determine the true voice usage profile the administrator dealer needs to make a judgment call on whether the usage leans towards the High Voice Usage trend or the Low Voice Usage trend Although the impact is not substantial it should be noted
219. d expect to see an increase in Channel Busy indications since transmissions from both repeaters will be detected by users of both systems In other words the RF congestion for this region would be the sum of transmissions from both repeaters It should be noted that under all circumstances the users with the correct corresponding color codes receive only the transmission intended for them When two sites with the same frequency but different color codes overlap it is important to set the subscriber s Admit Criteria appropriately It is recommended that the subscribers are provisioned with Admit Criteria set to Channel Free to ensure subscriber s from a Site is polite when another on the overlapping Site is transmitting and also polite to any other analog transmission on the frequency If configured to Color Code Free the subscribers are only polite to their own color code and will wake up their repeater even if the other repeater is currently transmitting When there is a large overlap between adjacent sites this usually causes major interference and results in both repeater signals being unusable in the overlapping areas When configured to Always the subscribers are never polite even to their own color code Again this results in both repeaters being awake and transmitting at the same time which causes interference in areas of overlap If this configuration is necessary it is recommended to minimize the areas of overlap as much as pos
220. d the group list you defined in step 2 above to the RX Group List attribute followed by adding the digital Group Call to the TX Contact Name attribute You will also need to define the TX Admit Criteria Rename the channel to something intuitive and assign it to a knob position the channel name will be displayed on the radio whenever it is selected via the top knob on a portable or the up down channel selection buttons on a mobile If configured as described above radio users are able to place a Group Call simply by selecting the defined channel and pressing PTT Groups can also be selected from the Contacts menu on display radios as enabled by step one of the above It is also possible to assign a Group Call to a radio programmable button called a one touch call in CPS so that users can place a Group Call at the touch of a button 4 11 4 Assigning IDs and Aliases Each radio group and control station in the system must have a unique ID number and alias There should be no duplicate IDs on the system April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 281 4 11 4 1 Identifying Radio IDs Radio IDs fora MOTOTRBO system range between 1 and 16776415 There are two approaches to identifying radio IDs Option A As a general practice create contiguous ID ranges but allow room for future expansion As an example a department has a current requirement for 1200 IDs However the department may need up to 2000 IDs in 12 months A
221. de via user selection from the menu or a programmable button When this happens the transmit frequency is set equal to the receive frequency and this channel effectively performs like a Direct Mode channel 4 11 6 Determining Feature Assignments 4 11 6 1 Determining Supervisor Radios Supervisor radios are not defined in the CPS by any specific Supervisor option Instead they are subscribers that have supervisory options enabled Supervisor radios are responsible for acknowledging Emergency Calls and alarms and also perform administrative duties such as remote monitor and selective radio inhibit Some features should only be allowed to users that can use them responsibly 4 11 6 2 Private Calls In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for Private Calls are configured via the subscriber portable and mobile CPS The repeater does not require any specific configuration with respect to Private Calls While the MOTOTRBO CPS enables great flexibility in configuring your system for Private Calling one basic procedure is as follows 1 Every MOTOTRBO radio in a system should be assigned a unique radio ID in the CPS This parameter is programmed in the Radio ID field under the General Settings menu 2 Inthe Contacts folder go to the Digital folder and add a call of type Private Call The CPS will provide a default name and ID assign the actual radio ID of the radio that is to be privately called to this field and rename the c
222. de if a better site is available similar to scan This means that radio may not be present on the home site when a call starts The home site is inspected between every other site to minimize the time away This is similar to the scan ordering of a priority scan member April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 85 One issue that arises from this situation is that if a Group Call or unconfirmed Individual Call starts while the target is inspecting another site the may be a short delay before joining the call This will equate to voice truncation for the target radio Another issue faced will be the need for longer preambles in order for command and control messages and data to be received by a radio that is currently roaming Without an extended preamble roaming radios will miss the message The need for preambles also affects the setup time for confirmed Private Calls Confirmed Private Calls utilize command and control messaging to setup the call In addition the first setup attempt does not utilize any preambles This increases the setup time between radios that are not roaming This means that the first setup attempt of a Private Call is not successful if the target radio is roaming The radio then attempts a second time with a preamble This second attempt will more likely be successful and the Private Call will continue If the current home site cannot be awoken the radio attempts to locate another site using an automatic Active
223. de key when the channel is not in use This can be balanced with the use of the Subscriber Inactivity Timer If shared use is not a concern the SIT can be set to the maximum value If shared use is a concern the SIT should be set equal to or slightly longer than the configured call hang timers This feature is disabled if Repeater Mode is set Sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after to Analog Group Call the end of a Group Call transmission During this time only The value of this Hang Time members of the Group that the channel is reserved for can feature must be equal transmit This produces smoother conversation to or less than the Subscriber Inactivity Timer value This feature is disabled Sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after if Repeater Mode is set the end of a Private Call transmission During this time only to Analog Private Call the individuals involved in the call that the channel is Hang Time reserved for can transmit This produces smoother The value of this g conversation The user may want to set a longer hang time feature must be equal than the Group Call Hang Time as an individual tends to to or less than the take a longer time to reply talkback in a Private Call Subscriber Inactivity Timer value Sets the duration the repeater reserves the channel after This feature is disabled the end of an Emergency Call transmission During this if Repeater Mode is set time only members of the G
224. der consideration when the Roaming RSSI Threshold is set For example if the customer has a Isolated No Overlapping Coverage the threshold can be set to its lowest value of 120dBm Because there is no overlap there is no reason for the radio to start roaming until well outside of the coverage range of the repeater For extremely close sites with large overlaps and quick signal drop off like the Multi Floor Coverage it might be better to set to it to a higher value so that the radios search for stronger sites closer to the repeater The following table is the suggested setting for each basic site configuration Many radio systems will have a combination of site configurations so the system designer will need to take all configurations into consideration and choose an appropriate value Site Configuration Recommended of Outer Range Roaming RSSI Threshold Radio Will Roam Isolated No Overlapping Coverage Rural 120dBm OutofRange Corridor Coverage 110 dBm 10 Dense Overlapping Coverage Urban 108 dBm 20 Multi Floor Coverage 102 dBm 50 It is important to note that the preceding Roaming RSSI Thresholds assume the outbound and inbound RF coverage of the system is balanced In other words when a radio is within good outbound coverage of the repeater the radio s inbound transmission can reach the repeater Since the roaming algorithm uses the outbound transmission to determine when to roam having
225. derations e Configure the Text Messaging application not to send the Service Availability message when the radio powers on In the absence of the Service Availability message a radio uses its pre configured values for the IP address of the Text Messaging Server If the Text Messaging Server sends the Service Availability message then the radio overwrites its values with the values from the received message and stores it persistently The persistent storage of IP address avoids the need to send the Service Availability message if the IP address of the Text Messaging application remains the same Upon change of the IP address a customer should enable the Text Messaging application to send the Service Availability message Once all the radios have received the Service Availability message the customer can disable the sending of Service Availability messages The presence of a radio also triggers the Location Application to send two requests to the radio one for location update on emergency and the other for periodic location updates To reduce the number of messages the radio saves the requests persistently and the Location Application allows the customer to enable disable the transmission of the requests when a radio registers its presence It is not possible to configure requests in a radio using CPS A radio without requests should undergo an initialization process During initialization the Location Application sends the required location reque
226. dialing the phone number If access code is not required the radio user can skip this step by not keying anything After the radio user sends out the phone number and access code the phone rings and the user can answer the call If there is an Interactive Voice Response IVR device at the phone user s end and over dial is required the radio user can enter the over dial digits via the radio keypad or a programmable button Example The IVR device at a bank may prompt the user to enter the account number to access account information 2 14 1 2 Call Initiation by a Phone User When a phone user initiates the call the phone user dials the phone number of the APP box or the PBX box if a PBX is used The PBX then connects the call to the APP box If access code is required the phone user enters the access code following the audible prompt from the APP box After the APP box validates the access code the box connects the call to the repeater The repeater sounds a tone and prompts the phone user for the target ID Then the phone user enters the target ID to reach the radio user group NOTE If a Go Ahead tone is configured in the APP box the phone user hears the tone for the Target ID followed by the Go Ahead tone The length of the target ID is configurable via CPS and the format varies according to different system configurations e Single Site and IPSC The target ID includes the call type channel slot number and the radio talkgr
227. dio registers when the radio powers up in a data capable mode or changes into a data capable mode A radio registers with a Presence Notifier which is incorporated within the third party applications The Presence Notifier informs the data application servers that the registered radio is on the system and available for services In MOTOTRBO systems the codeplug configuration determines whether or not a radio attempts to register on the selected channel This is defined via the ARS parameter which is enabled or disabled through the settings within each channel It must be set to enabled for those channels that are utilized for data communications with infrastructure based applications 68007024085 April 2011 44 System Feature Overview 2 4 2 Text Messaging Services Multiple MOTOTRBO system components interact together to deliver text messaging services These include the built in text messaging capabilities of MOTOTRBO subscriber radios and the third party text messaging applications The services provided by each of these components are described in the following subsections ene Mobile Radios ji Portable Radios Xx a Internet Cell phone or e mail addressable device Application Server Presence Notifier USB eText Messaging Server eText Messaging Dispatch MCDD Control Stations USB USB Br Tertera Aa use 2 MOTOTRBO Text Messaging Fixed Clients Dispatcher Mobile Client MOTOTRBO Text Mess
228. dios Do note that all the features mentioned apply to the radio s built in text messaging as well as to mobile on a PC text messaging 3 1 2 1 7 Accessory and Peripherals Interface The MOTOTRBO portable radio supports an improved accessory and peripherals interface This new interface is Motorola s platform for future accessory development and is not compatible with older accessories It supports the following capabilities April 2011 Enhanced Audio Functionality This unique technology enables communication between the radio and Motorola s enhanced accessories to optimize audio performance It enables more consistent audio levels between accessory types So headsets remote speaker mics or the radio s built in mic and speaker sound more consistent and interoperate more effectively It also optimizes audio quality performance for a given accessory type by employing digital signal processing DSP technology to best match the radio s audio signals to the capabilities of the accessory USB Capability The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface incorporates the standard Universal Serial Bus USB capability thus enabling IP connectivity via standard USB ports with personal computers and other peripherals via a Motorola supplied cable This interface supports radio programming capabilities with no Radio Interface Box RIB required It also supports third party applications by enabling interfaces for IP data service
229. dmit Criteria is provided in Channel Access Configuration on page 294 All Calls do not communicate across different time slots or channels within the system The ability to initiate an All Call is only programmed into radios that are used in supervisory roles All other radios monitor All Call transmissions by default This feature is very useful when a supervisor needs to communicate with all the users on a logical channel rather than just a particular group or individual In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for All Calls are configured with the portable and mobile CPS The repeater does not require any specific configurations for All Calls Radios can be configured to enable the user to select an All Call via the radio menu contacts list All Calls can also be mapped to a channel selection or a programmable button A call receive tone or call preceding tone can be configured to alert the target user of the incoming All Call Greater detail on the fleetmapping process governs who is allowed to make All Calls as well as an introduction to CPS configuration section for All Calls is provided in System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document 2 3 1 4 DTMF Hot Keypad When this feature is enabled the numeric keypad allows live dialing during dispatch operation During a voice call the user can transmit the following characters using a MOTOTRBO radio with keypad 0123456 7 8 9 These characters are encoded as dual tone multi
230. does not dekey the repeater which remains keyed on the Direct Mode carrier frequency and supports two channels timeslots The repeater is not dekeyed because this may interfere undesirably with a call in the other channel timeslot supported by that repeater Provisioning of the Transmit Interrupt feature in general is separated into two basic categories 1 Radios that have the ability for voice transmissions to be interrupted 2 Radios that have the ability to initiate transmit interrupt commands NOTE The radios may be provisioned with none one or both of these capabilities There are a few important items to consider before provisioning of the Transmit Interrupt feature e The Transmit Interrupt feature is supported in digital direct mode single site repeater mode on both local and wide area slots of the IP Site Connect mode and on Capacity Plus system configurations e Ina Capacity Plus configuration an All Call can only be stopped by Emergency Voice Interrupt Voice Interrupt Remote Voice Dekey or Data Over Voice Interrupt features are not supported e Because the Transmit Interrupt features are proprietary to Motorola and use some proprietary signaling i e manufacturer specific extensions that comply to the ETSI DMR Tier 2 standards non Motorola radios may not be able to unmute to an interruptible voice transmission and Motorola radios may not be able to interrupt a non Motorola radio s voice transmission Hence it
231. e 500 ms of total delay which should not be used in case of IP Site Connect system The default is Normal This is used to derive values for other parameters 68007024085 April 2011 234 System Design Considerations such as Arbitration Interval and Call Hang Times in repeaters and Ack Wait times in radios For proper functioning of an IP Site Connect system all the repeaters and radios should have the same delay setting It is recommended that propagation and handling delays between repeaters should be measured e g by pinging between all pairs of repeaters The total delay is equal to the maximum of the measured values of repeaters 1 1 2 1000 BW in Kbps ms where the BW is the available bandwidth of the backend network If the total delay is less than 60 ms then the setting should be Normal If the total delay is more than 60 ms but less than 90 ms then the setting should be High The IP Site Connect system will not work satisfactorily with occasional failure of arbitration hang time and data link layer acknowledgements for a backend network having total delay of more than 90ms The disadvantage of the setting at 90ms is that there is an increase to audio throughput delay 4 6 3 2 2 Jitter Jitter is the variation of packet inter arrival time The source repeater is expected to transmit voice packets at a regular interval i e every 60 ms for one channel These voice packets can be delayed throughout the backend
232. e If there is no activity on a system the Passive Site Search cannot detect any repeaters and therefore is unable to determine at which site the radio should be on Therefore the repeater can be configured to transmit a beacon which is a periodic short transmission when there is no interference when not transmitting Both the beacon duration and interval are programmable During times of no activity the radio utilizes the signal strength of the beacon to determine when it should roam and which site it should roam to If the radio does not receive a beacon in the expected duration it assumes it is out of range of the repeater or that the repeater has failed and roams to another site The duration of the beacon is a function of the number of sites in the IP Site Connect system and therefore in the roam list The interval of the beacon is a function of the shared use rules of the channel and how quickly a radio is required to roam when there is no activity See Setting Beacon Duration and Beacon Interval on page 81 for suggestions on setting the beacon duration and interval for various site configurations and scenarios The radio does not perform Passive Site Search while e transmitting e receiving a call of interest e in emergency e in good RF coverage e in talkaround direct mode e radio disabled e received call alert e monitor mode e microphone is off hook e while in active menu or e while on a channel that has a
233. e APP box installed needs to have the type approval for the region that the system is deployed One end of the APP box is connected to the PSTN or an extension of a PBX box while the other end is connected to a MOTOTRBO repeater via the 4 wire interface To work with the MOTOTRBO system the APP box needs to be configured to use half duplex mode Depending on customer needs and the type of APP boxes the following services can be optionally configured in the APP box e Access and De access Codes 10 characters maximum e The access code is made up of an access command and a multi digit access prefix Nomenclature may vary based on the types of APP boxes The access command is typically the asterisk sign but is programmable in most phone patches The command is used to wake up the phone patch from the radio system and is always required for most of the APP boxes The multi digit access prefix is used to limit radio user access and is optional The prefix is usually up to four digits long Some phone patches allow each prefix to be configurable to allow or block calls starting with 0 1 9 and so on This essentially allows a group of radio users to have access to local dialing e The de access code is made up of a normal release command and a multi digit release code Nomenclature may vary based on the types of APP boxes The normal release command is typically the hash sign but is programmable in most phone patches The command is used t
234. e Client before it will accept messages again April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 277 4 11 Customer Fleetmap Development In a MOTOTRBO system the system administrator can maximize the system s communication effectiveness by translating their organization s operation requirements into a list of supported features The result of identifying and formalizing this information is often referred to as fleetmapping Fleetmapping can be thought of as e Assigning groups to the radios issued to personnel e Assigning groups to the dispatcher control positions e Assigning groups to channels and slots e Defining the feature subsets available to the personnel using the radios and dispatcher control positions A fleetmap determines how the radio communications for each user group of an organization is controlled Through controlling communications between different user groups and between individuals within a group the organization can manage the radio communications system resources efficiently Fleetmapping also provides a structured approach to the management of a large number of radio users and provides the opportunity to plan in advance for expansion or changes within an organization Some of the factors that should be considered when creating or planning changes to the fleetmap are e Identifying a functional fleetmap design team e Identifying radio users e Organizing radio users into groups e Assigning IDs and al
235. e ccna tee aust eee atte te astsuGete 256 4 8 9 Enable Disable Manual Dial ccc ceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaaaeeees 256 4 8 10 Connecting APP Boxes to the Repeater in Capacity Plus 256 4 8 11 PBX Routing Configuration in Capacity Plus eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 257 4 9 Transmit Interrupt System Design Considerations ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 258 4 9 7 _Interr ptible RAGIOS scien ctmatdsctccitcelaiacers theatadtesatencie edt e addascia elas 258 4 9 2 Voice MALS MUP hicgcsccctssies ceevean vy aaaaiscnobtenceentancssadcuas trbuesciaadncsentwetantedeuccesivesnede 258 4 9 3 Emergency Voice Interrupt ccccccccccccceneceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneees 259 4 9 4 Data Over Voice Interrupt vestsvessts csc sasecracatocaieidieadinncveciondiad gas 260 4 9 5 Remote Voice Dekey c ccecececeneceeee seer seeenesenensneccecedeceeesenensennes 261 4 10 Data Sub System Design Considerations cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 4 10 1 Computer and IP Network Configurations eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeees 261 4 10 1 1 Radio to Mobile Client Network Connectivity 0 ee 261 4 10 1 2 Radio to Air Interface Network Connectivity ee 262 4 10 1 3 Application Server Control Station Network Connectivity 265 4 10 1 4 Control Station Considerations ccc cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 4
236. e data communication will be protected and the other will be unprotected Since radios set to privacy disabled will receive protected and radios set to privacy enabled will receive unprotected the communication path will work If important data is being transferred to and from the fixed infrastructure it is recommended that the control station should be set to protected This will guarantee that at least half of the data transmission will be private Also the system will be tolerant if fielded radios are set to privacy disabled It is recommended that all radios including control station should have same privacy settings If the privacy setting is enhanced privacy then the control station should have the transmit keys of all the radios and all the radios should have the transmit key of the control station April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 93 2 7 11 Protecting One Group s Message from Another There may be a need for one Group s voice and data to be protected against another over the same channel same frequency and same slot There may be some radio users who are members of one or more of the groups In this case if a group not only wants to protect their communication from intruders but also from other groups then each group should use separate keys for protection The System Installer should make each group that need to be protected as TX Group for a personality The relationship between a personality and a
237. e output voltage will be 7 75V RMS and the radio supports impedances down to 4 ohms with distortion typically less than 3 Under no conditions should either of these two outputs be connected to ground Rx Aud Provides a line level audio output at 330 mVrms under rated conditions The frequency response of this output has been extended below 300 Hz to support data transfer for specific applications Flat Unsquelch Tx Aud Accepts transmit audio at 80 mVrms through a 560 Q load Care must be taken when choosing an audio source as the output impedance of the source can affect the audio level which may need to be adjusted accordingly The following table provides a description of the fixed audio pins on the rear panel ports for the MTR3000 Fixed Pins Description Rx Audio Aux Rx Audio An RF input signal with 60 RSD provides an Rx Audio output of 330 mVrms into 50 kQ Also a microphone input of 56 mVrms provides an Rx Audio output of 330 mVrms into 50 kQ The Rx Audio output has DC bias of 2 5 VDC An RF input signal with 60 RSD provides an Aux Rx Audio output of 330 mVrms into 50 kQ The Aux Rx Audio output has a DC bias of 2 5 VDC Tx Audio The Tx Audio input provides no pre emphasis The nominal level of 80 mVrms 226 mVpp produces 60 Relative Standard Deviation RSD Tx Audio with Pre The Tx Audio Pre input provides a pre emphasis network The nominal Emphasis lev
238. e output power of the transmitting control stations to the minimum required power to establish reliable communications A strong receive signal can overcome elevated noise floors without impacting data reliability and turning down the TX power decreases the interfering signals that the receivers must tolerate These generals rules have only one objective which is to help achieve acceptable TX RX isolation within a reasonable budget However it should be noted that a stronger receive signal is not always better when IM issues exist When the issue is caused by third order IM every one dB of receive path loss will degrade the receivers sensitivity by one dB and improve IM performance by three dB Two examples are provided to illustrate this point when IM is not an issue Example 1 Fifty watts 47 dBm of control station output power is required and the typical receiver power level into the control station is 115 dBm The difference between the TX and the RX power is 162 dB Since the control station typically provides 100 dB of blocking protection 62 dB of TX RX isolation is required Example 2 Two watts 33 dBm of control station output power is required and the typical receiver power level into the control station is 95 dBm The difference between the TX and the RX power is 128 dB Since the control station typically provides 100 dB of blocking protection 28 dB of TX RX isolation is required This comparatively is much easier to obtain
239. e same procedure Therefore the use of the Unconfirmed Data Bearer Service can be utilized with application layer acknowledgements to provide an end to end confirmed data process Below is a summary of the transmit and receive roles required of the various control stations in the system utilizing Unconfirmed data e Revert Control Station Conventional and Capacity Plus RX Only e Primary Control Station Conventional TX Only Trunked Control Station Capacity Plus TX Only NOTE When operating with Unconfirmed data the Revert Control Stations may be configured to operate as RX Only Control Station Installation A 2 A 1 2 A 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 Confirmed Data When Confirmed data is transmitted it is transmitted to the receiver up to three times The receiver checks the integrity of each TDMA burst CRC check as well as the entire data message CRC check and either passes this up to the application CRC check passes through the IP layer or responds to the initiating radio that select bursts or the entire message must be resent Since scenarios like retries do not change the TX RX roles played by the control stations a first attempt success example is described below For example a text message is sent from a text message server to an individual radio in a Capacity Plus system Here the text message is routed from the server to a Trunked Control Station When the control station is allowed to transmit the data on t
240. e site and minimizes missing any transmissions while performing the roam attempt While passively roaming the radio temporarily leaves the current home channel and inspects other sites to decide if a better site is available It is important to note that since the radio is temporarily away from the home channel it is possible to miss the beginning of a transmission late entry Because of this it is not advisable or required to perform passive roaming all the time Therefore the radio should only passively search for a better site when the current home site is no longer desirable If the radio is within good coverage of a site there is no need to search for a 68007024085 April 2011 72 2 6 2 System Feature Overview better site In other words the radio should only passively roam when the radio has moved far enough away from the site that its signal strength has degraded below an acceptable value or when its signal is no longer present The signal strength threshold to initiate the Passive Site Search Roaming RSSI Threshold is configurable via the CPS See Configuring the Roaming RSSI Threshold on page 76 for suggestions on setting the Roaming RSSI Threshold for various site configurations and scenarios Initiating Passive Site Search and selecting sites based on signal strength works well when the repeater is transmitting but the MOTOTRBO repeater does perform in a shared use environment and is required to de key when not in us
241. each other via a Private Call they must do it with privacy disabled If a radio user needs to communicate with both Groups via an All Call the radio user must transmit in clear mode so that both Groups can monitor If users respond with privacy enabled the user who initiated the All Call only monitors the responses protected with a matching key If the system is utilizing data applications and must communicate through a control station to the application server all radios on a slot must have the same key or they will not all be able to properly communicate with the control station For similar reasons it is not recommended to have radios without privacy capability i e older software versions in the same Group as radios with privacy capability Since older radios are not provisioned with a Privacy Key the audio will be muted If radios with privacy capability need to communicate to radios without privacy capability they will need to disable privacy before transmitting 68007024085 April 2011 92 System Feature Overview As a general rule it is always recommended that groups with different privacy capabilities and settings be placed in different Groups and on different slots 2 7 10 Data Gateway Privacy Settings The privacy setting of a control station acting as the data gateway to the application server is very important for consistent data communications This may even drive the privacy configuration of the rest of the system If a
242. ead the nameplate data on each of the devices listed Write down the voltage and amperage for each device 3 Multiply the voltage by the amperage of each device to calculate the Volt Amps VA Some equipment such as PC power supplies may be marked with a power consumption measured in Watts To convert Watts to VA simply divide Watts by 0 65 for a power factor of 0 65 or multiply by 1 54 The power factor refers to the relationship between the apparent power volt amps required by the device and the actual power watts produced by the device 4 Total the VA for all devices you want to protect with the UPS and enter it in the Subtotal field 5 Multiply the subtotal found in Step 4 by 0 25 and enter it as the Growth Factor This number takes into account room for future growth This growth factor allows for a 5 rate of growth for each year over a five year period 6 Add the Growth Factor to the Subtotal to get the Required VA Now you can select the appropriate UPS model by choosing a model that has a VA rating at least as large as the Required VA that you calculated April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 305 4 17 Dynamic Mixed Mode System Design Considerations A Dynamic Mixed Mode channel is a programmable channel in the repeater and the channel can be added using the CPS During Dynamic Mixed Mode operation the repeater dynamically switches between analog and digital modes t
243. eceive Frequency The above monitoring scheme of Rx frequency is not sufficient in the following conditions e In VHF range in some countries including USA the transmit frequency is not tightly bound to a receive frequency e There is no radio in the other radio system that is currently using the system e The other radio system is being used by a console e The radio that is using the other radio system is too far from the IP Site Connect system To take care of above conditions it is recommended that a repeater of an IP Site Connect system should use an external RF receiver The external RF receiver is tuned to the transmit frequency of the repeater and activates a GPIO compatible output when it receives RF signal The output of the receiver is connected to the Transmit Inhibit an input GPIO line of the repeater The repeater does not wake up if its Transmit Inhibit line is active An attenuator can be inserted between the antenna and the receiver if it is required to change the threshold of the received signal The net effect of this configuration is that the repeater does not wake up if there is another repeater transmitting at its Tx frequency The repeater CPS allows its user to associate an input line of the 68007024085 April 2011 244 System Design Considerations GPIO lines with Transmit Inhibit This arrangement is also applicable to single site repeaters The figure below shows the transmission of red repeater i
244. ed for carrier squelch with a receive frequency of F1 and a transmit frequency of F2 However Channel 2 is now a digital channel configured for Color Code 1 and Group 10 with a receive frequency of F1 and a transmit frequency of F3 The receive parameters in this example are different but Channel 1 has few qualifiers Channel 1 is configured to land on any transmission that breaks squelch This means that any transmission that occurs on Channel 2 will be heard on Channel 7 as an analog signal This Scan List will not only result in misdirected replies but it also results in a digital transmission being played out the speaker as analog The net result is undesirable sounds presented through the user s speaker This type of configuration should be avoided at all times This could be avoided by utilizing a PL or DPL on the analog channel instead of only carrier squelch Another similar problem occurs when the unique receive parameters between scan members are missing or cannot be determined One scenario where this occurs is while scanning two slots of a repeater and a transmission is received directly from a subscriber on the same frequency A radio in repeater mode can receive a transmission directly from a radio However in direct mode slot numbering is not utilized Therefore if a radio is scanning two scan members with the same qualifiers with the exception of the unique slot number when it receives a transmission without a slot number either sca
245. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeennaaaaeeees 38 2 3 4 3 Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow eeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeees 39 2 3 4 4 Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Alarm cere 40 2 3 4 5 Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency VoiCe ccceeeee 41 2 4 MOTOTRBO Integrated Data cccceeeeeeeeeenceneeeeeeeeeseccceneccnceneeeeedeeeeereeeneeeees 42 ZARA COVEIVIEW OEE 42 2 4 2 Text Messaging Services 2 c seeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeseeseneceueceanenceeecteneeees 44 2 4 2 1 Built In Text Messaging Service ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetnetaeeeeees 44 2 4 2 2 Services Provided to a Third Party Text Message Application 45 2 4 3 Location Services ccc ccivesdalz cdeautnnaitinexeintatccaes ines sntehad lsat aitoules ovtina sm nnmnnn Ennen 46 2 4 3 1 Performance Specifications sscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees 47 2 4 3 2 Services Provided to a Radio USED ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetttnaeeeeees 48 2 4 3 3 Services Provided to a Location Application cccceeesseeeeeees 48 2 4 3 4 GPS Revert Channel si cia wciss adssdoctie te aianit neh nendonmnaen de 50 2 4 3 5 Enhanced GPS Revert Channel 2 esssssseseeeeseeedeeeeseeeeneeeeeees 51 2 4 3 6 Data Revert Channel cccccccccccceccneeeeneeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 2 4 4 Telemetry Servite ceea wane eaa nE 59 2 4 4 1 Physical Connection Information
246. eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneauansaesseeseees 304 4 16 1 Direct Mode Fallback Talkaround ccceceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeenntttnaaeeees 304 4 16 2 Uninterrupted Power Supplies Battery Backup ccccseeesssereees 304 4 17 Dynamic Mixed Mode System Design Considerations cc cceceeceeeeeeeeees 305 4 17 1 Dynamic Mixed Mode System Configuration Considerations 305 4 17 2 Loading Considerations in a Dynamic Mixed Mode System 307 4 18 Configurable Timers ce tenece ect Roost ele ciel meee eeec aoe A rend 308 Section 5 Sales and Service Support Tools i PMO S Ca so cla ag ek ha taeda ns rasa aonb ed da an ae taste path pce e 313 5 2 Applications Overview aalcc Sovatinevsccaedt cates tocianeacdsigh dies sume adatae ate ce oanadeswanieth os 313 Dro SERVICE ECUIDIMIOTIL sase mdahasave eras a 314 5 3 1 Recommended Test Equipment ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaneaes 314 5 4 Documentation ANd Trainings ccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 315 5 4 1 MOTOTRBO Documentation mzctsis ccavedsssesuy niaiioee estendamanticatncgams 315 Section A Control Station Installation Aci Data Bearer Services en sie aie ae ie a a aaa 1 Ac 2 Interfere NCA tac sooo ete whee hate ee haan e a whe econ ete ae 2 A 3 Control Station Installation Considerations c cccccceccceececceececceeeeeceecesaeeeeeeees 3 Glossary Notes Int
247. eeeeeeeees 8 2 1 2 5 Two Slot TDMA System Planning Considerations eeee 9 2 1 3 Digital Audio Quality and Coverage Performance sseseeeeeeeeeees 9 2 13 Digital Audio COVERAGE 2 igeecsse i cecandedecetwusleecbcenbdenes teehee etitcentacaetives 10 2 1 3 2 Predicting Digital Audio Coverage cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettttnaeeeeees 11 2 1 3 3 User Expectations for Digital Audio Performance 12 2 1 3 4 Audio Balancing ei secede elect a ii cea oess tate eaa 13 2 2 Basic System Topologies for Digital and Analog Operations eeeeee 14 2 2 1 Repeater and Direct Mode Configurations cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenttteeeeeees 14 2 2 2 MOTOTRBO Supports Analog and Digital Operation 006 20 2 2 3 MOTOTRBO Channel ACCESS 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeees 20 2 2 3 1 Impolite Operation Admit Criteria of Always ceeeeeeeees 21 2 2 3 2 Polite to All Operation Admit Criteria of Channel Free 22 2 2 3 3 Polite to Own Digital System Operation Admit Criteria of Color Code Free cxniaste pectin coe thee ete eel eee 22 2 2 3 4 Polite to Other Analog System Operation Admit Criteria of Correct ay ad ere rene e ee ere eee eee ene ee etre 22 2 2 3 5 Polite or Impolite or Voice Interrupt While Participating in a Call In Call Criteria sc 2 Geceds cute otc ccc onetn ver tea etre neice erie 23 2 2 3 6 Re
248. eeeeenttaaeeees 240 4 6 5 Security Considerations ccceececececceeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeaees 241 4 6 6 General Considerations When Setting Up the Network Connection for an IP Site Connect SySt M ic cccccccecceecesscseuceececcceeteneeenecener eee eneseveenneceecens 242 4 6 7 Considerations for Shared Use of a Channel 000ceeeeeeeeeteeeeteeees 243 4 6 8 Migration from Single Site Systems 00 0 0 cece eect eee eeeeeeeeeentetaaaeeees 245 4 6 9 Migration from an Older IP Site Connect System eeeeeeeeeeeees 245 4 7 Multiple Digital Repeaters in Capacity PIUS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 246 4 7 1 System Capacity si slo dead deed aaan e E chelate teeter deel bes laa 246 4 7 2 Frequencies and Color Code Considerations ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 4 7 3 Considerations for the Backend Network cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetaeeees 247 4 7 4 Behaviors in Presence Of Failures cccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeteeeeenteaaaeeees 247 4 7 5 Limiting Interference to Other SySteMs cceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeentnteaeeees 248 4 7 6 Plan for Talkaround MOG Gc 2 vesagssaocecenusies s ans censeneaenudenes usansSsasuretdsesssantoneden 248 4 7 7 Ways to Improve Battery Life 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeees 249 4 7 8 Considerations for Configuring Mixed Firmware Versions 00 249 4 8 Digital Telephone Patc
249. eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneneees 205 4 3 Frequency Licensing 2 xa lt del soe eet area ees Sal gene bbeete Sols Roaetaaeee added 206 4 3 1 Acquiring New Frequencies Region Specific eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 206 4 3 2 Converting Existing 12 5 25 kHz Licenses 207 4 3 3 Repeater Continuous Wave Identification CWID eee 207 4 4 Digital Repeater Loading nc 202 202 2 tece desea cn cece eesdseedeateces deestecetececcevanesecceeeeeeteees st 208 4 4 1 Assumptions and Precautions ccccccccccccseeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanenes 208 4 4 2 Voice and Data Traffic Profile eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaaaaaeeees 209 4 4 3 Estimating Loading Single Repeater and IP Site Connect 210 4 4 4 Estimating Loading For Capacity Plus eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettteettaeeees 211 4 4 5 Loading Optimization For Single Repeater and IP Site Connect 214 4 4 5 1 Distribution of High Usage USers ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 4 4 5 2 Minimize Location Periodic Update Rate csseseeeeeeeeeeees 215 4 4 5 3 Data Application Retry Attempts and Intervals 66 217 4 4 5 4 Optimize Data Application Outbound Message Rate 5 217 4 4 5 5 GPS Revert and Loading 22 2 ccccceccseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeseensceees 218 4 4 5 6 Enhanced GPS Revert Loading amp Reliability eee 221 4 4 6 Loading Opti
250. eeeteeteeees 131 2 16 2 2 ADP Interface with Capacity PluS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 132 2 16 2 3 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus 133 2 16 3 MOTOTRBO Documents Available via the Third Party Application Partner Progrann is sccvuiscecceaticenievanalgecad davces denen Higa astel Gavel nessantes 134 2 16 4 Available Levels of Partnership ccccccssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeanenes 135 Section 3 System Components and Topologies 3 1 System Components sancncuccitee cat nu cee Reed 137 3 1 1 Fixed End ComponentSiicsciaceniiine khanna aiienaa kent 137 Sve Repeater ai eateries y deta a once antares as Aa oathatinanalaetdaatesteacicns 137 3 1 1 2 MTR3000 Base Station Repeater ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 139 3 1 1 3 MTR3000 Satellite Receiver cc ceccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 142 3 1 1 4 Radio Control Station cccccececccccaceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeaes 144 3 1 1 5 MC1000 MC2000 MC2500 Console ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 3 1 2 Mobile Components Gircisie tetclatonavacetheinicareinigndietivanel ivacetine ade abet 145 3 1224 MOTOTREO Ponabl esc iz cc teeseetceetess costs ales ore ete cee 146 3 1 22 MOTOTRBO Mobiles nana cca eee e ee 151 3 1 3 Data AppliGalions addins int oia a cia E Aiea etedsonets 156 3 2 System TOPOOGI SS iccc8 cieeet ea cse cca cee eaeinaeh cae aes ceases coe eee eae 15
251. el of 80 mVrms 226 mVpp produces 60 RSD Tx Data Transmit data PL or DPL signaling The nominal level of 80 mVrms 226 mVpp produces 12 RSD 68007024085 April 2011 122 System Feature Overview 2 15 5 1 4 Front Panel Audio Ports on the MTR3000 The following table provides a description of the front panel ports for the MTR3000 Front Panel Ports Description Speaker Output to Powered Voice speaker Adjustable between 0 to 500 mVrms 1 4 Vpp across 2 4 KO 60 system deviation Audio signal appears between Pins 3 and 4 on the connector Must use speaker type HSN1000 older model or HSN1006 via adapter cable Part No 0185180U01 NOTE The Speaker port is only supported in analog mode regardless of the speaker used Microphone Local microphone Input Use microphone type GMN6147 older model or GMMN4063 Modulation sensitivity for 60 system deviation is typically 56 mVrms 158 mVpp NOTE The Mic port is only supported in analog mode regardless of the Mic used For older model of microphone GMN6147 the 3 control buttons for speaker volume control Rx monitor and Intercom control functions are not supported 2 15 5 2 Configuration Summary Table The following table gives a high level view of which features of the analog repeater interface are needed to support specific types of accessories This table is meant to act only as a guideline Console Acc Type Tr
252. els which must be the selected channel for data messages then the amount of scan preamble to use can be as specified in the first row of the Priority Scan table above regardless of the number of non priority Scan List members 2 5 3 2 Channel Scan and Last Landed Channel A Channel Scan can be configured by selecting a group of already configured channels within a radio using the CPS and adding them to a Scan List Each channel is then configured to use this Scan List of channels When scan is activated on a channel that contains a Channel Scan List the MOTOTRBO radio checks for activity on each of the channels on the list While scanning a digital channel for activity all Groups specified in the channel s RX Group List will be monitored However if the radio is configured with a Channel Scan that contains channels that are configured with a RX Group List a Group Scan then only the Last Landed Channel is remembered by the radio not the Last Landed Channel and Group This means that voice transmissions are transmitted on the TX Call Member configured for the channel that was the Last Landed Channel not the Group in the Receive Group List of channel that was the Last Landed 68007024085 April 2011 68 System Feature Overview Channel Note that if a transmission is made within the call hang time of the scanned transmission it will be targeted towards the landed channel and group If it occurs after the call hang time has expired it w
253. ement decryption If required the voice and data messages are encrypted decrypted by the source and destination radios A repeater sends the voice or data packet to other repeaters as it receives over the air Also in case of data message the destination radio sends the Ack Nack and if required the Selective ARQ takes place between the source and destination radios and not between a radio and its repeater A call is a session of one or more transmissions from participating radios To ensure continuity between transmissions the single site configuration of MOTOTRBO has Hang Time during which the channel is reserved for participant s of the ongoing call The IP Site Connect configuration extends the concept of session to include Remote Monitor call Individual and group data call and CSBK Call e g Call Alert Radio Check Inhibit Uninhibit The Hang Time ensures that a call continues with minimum interruptions The flow of data messages from a radio to an application e g Location or Text Messages in an IP Site Connect system is similar to a single site configuration of MOTOTRBO A data packet flows burst by burst to a Control Station connected to the Application Server The Control Station assembles the bursts into a PDU If the PDU is confirmed then the Control Station handles the data link layer acknowledgement If the PDU is encrypted then the Control Station decrypts the PDU The Control Station strips the data link layer headers and for
254. enable ECA on all radios accessing the channel to derive maximum benefit from the feature For a correct and reliable operation it is strongly recommended to upgrade the repeater firmware version to RO1 08 00 or later before initiating calls with the ECA feature enabled on the radio 68007024085 April 2011 304 System Design Considerations 4 16 Failure Preparedness 4 16 1 Direct Mode Fallback Talkaround A repeater channel is defined by having different receive and transmit frequencies and any channel that is programmed with the CPS to have different receive and transmit frequencies will be considered to be a repeater channel and the MOTOTRBO radio will expect a repeater operating on that channel The radio user will get an access denied tone if there is no repeater available or if the radio is out of range of the repeater Channels defined as repeater channels in CPS can be modified to operate in Talkaround mode via user selection from the menu or a programmable button When a repeater channel is thus modified to operate in Talkaround mode the transmit frequency is set equal to the receive frequency and it effectively becomes a direct mode channel The system now performs similarly to the direct mode topologies we have previously described 4 16 2 Uninterrupted Power Supplies Battery Backup To determine the UPS capacity you will need follow these simple steps 1 List all equipment to be protected by the UPS on a worksheet 2 R
255. enable third party applications to developers who are members of the Third Party Application Partner Program 2 16 1 MOTOTRBO the Dealer and the Accredited Third Party Developer A third party developer that joins the Third Party Application Partner Program is accredited and offered technical support from Motorola in the form of getting access to protocol Application Programming Interface API documentation online support as well as to Motorola channel partners and customers With this in mind the dealer can sell MOTOTRBO as it is to customers or the system can be modified by a third party developer Third Party Application Partner Program member to satisfy a broader range of customer needs and applications 2 16 2 MOTOTRBO Applications Interfaces The following applications interfaces are available to PC based and non PC based peripherals of a radio e Text Messaging e Telemetry e IP Data Services e Location Services e Radio Command and Control KCMP XNL e Automatic Registration Service These interfaces utilize the USB interface on the side accessory connector of the MOTOTRBO portable radio and on the front and rear accessory connectors of the MOTOTRBO mobile radio The following capabilities are available to core or traditional peripherals receive audio e transmit audio e basic control lines e g PTT Receive unsquelch etc These interfaces utilize the audio and control lines on the side accessory connector
256. encies have higher interference Repeaters with the same amount of interference should have the same preference level For trunking operation a Capacity Plus system always prefers to use a repeater of a higher preference level over a repeater of lower preference level For system owners having a mix of shared frequency channel licenses and exclusive frequency licenses the repeaters with exclusive frequency licenses should have a higher preference level than the repeaters with shared frequency licenses 4 4 6 2 Improving Channel Capacity by Adjusting Hang Times MOTOTRBO supports message trunking by keeping a channel reserved for the duration of hang time after a transmitting radio has unkeyed the microphone During the hang time only the members of the ongoing call can start a transmission The advantage of the message trunking is that it provides guaranteed access to the channel for the duration of a call The disadvantage of the message trunking is that the channel remains unused during the hang times To improve channel utilization a customer may choose to reduce the call hang time in the repeater Experienced radio users respond quickly and therefore require a shorter hang time Capacity Plus allows a customer to program a near zero call hang time in repeaters By programming a zero call hang time MOTOTRBO acts as if the channel is allocated for only one transmission and in this case MOTOTRBO supports Transmission Trunking However there
257. ency Alarm Only When configured for Emergency Alarm Only the emergency process only consists of the emergency alarm part The number of emergency alarm attempts and their admit criteria are configurable and can even be set to retry indefinitely The number of alarm attempts are controlled by CPS parameters in the Digital Emergency System settings these parameters include the number of polite and impolite retries The alarm is initially sent regardless of channel activity and once the configured impolite attempts are exhausted the polite retries are executed when the channel is idle Emergency ends when e an acknowledgement is received e all retries are exhausted e the user manually clears the emergency or e the user pushes the PTT No voice call is associated with the emergency when operating as Emergency Alarm Only Pressing the PTT clears the emergency and a standard voice call is processed 2 3 4 2 Emergency Alarm and Call When configured for Emergency Alarm and Call the emergency consists of the emergency alarm process followed by the ability to perform an Emergency Call The number of emergency alarm attempts and their admit criteria are configurable and can even be set to retry indefinitely The alarm is initially sent regardless of channel activity and once the configured impolite retries are exhausted the polite retries are executed when the channel is idle Emergency alarm stops when e an acknowledgement is received
258. entional Figure 3 27 is a system configuration that shows how the Enhanced GPS Revert feature can be used in single site mode operation It is assumed that the repeater has slot one configured for Voice Text and ARS data and slot two for location responses When a radio powers on the radio registers on the Home channel with the Presence Notifier which notifies the Location Server All outbound data from the server including location request is routed on the Home channel whereas all location responses are on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel There should not be any non 68007024085 April 2011 180 System Components and Topologies GPS traffic on the GPS Revert channel as it affects GPS reliability Voice calls on an Enhanced GPS Revert channel are not repeated GPS TM 7 USB Lo ee Soon 7 Tx f2 Te MCDD i es Control Station A Slot 1 T 8 oice text Presence Notifier ARS Channel Enhanced Location Server GPS Revert Channel USB e T a Woe Application Server ne eo No ys Control Station Slot 2 Aa TM Figure 3 27 Single Site Conventional System with an Enhanced GPS Revert Channel A user may also configure both slots of the repeater for enhanced GPS via the CPS In this scenario the user needs another repeater for voice and regular data because only GPS data is supported on slots configured with Enhanced GPS
259. er radio by utilizing the manual dialing option in the radio s menu however in this case the user must know the Radio ID of the called party 4 11 6 3 All Call In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for All Calls are configured via the subscriber portable and mobile CPS The repeater does not require any specific configuration with respect to All Calls While the MOTOTRBO CPS enables great flexibility in configuring a system for All Calls one basic procedure is as follows 1 Inthe Contacts folder go to the Digital folder and add a call of type All Call The CPS will provide a default name rename the call to an intuitive alphanumeric name representative of the All Call All Calls created in the Contacts folder appear in the Contacts menu of the subscriber by name If configured as above a user would initiate an All Call by selecting the call by name from the radio s Contacts menu Additionally similar to assigning a Group Call to a channel as described above it is possible to assign an All Call to the TX Contact Name attribute of a channel so that users can place All Calls by making the appropriate channel selection via the top knob on a portable or up down channel select buttons on a mobile This is the only method for a non display radio to place an All Call It is also possible to assign an All Call to a radio programmable button called a Number Key Quick Contact Access in the CPS so that
260. er the Radio or the Mobile Client The NAT is a translation table within the MOTOTRBO radio that allows packets to be routed from the PC through the radio and over the air to the destination address As previously mentioned when the Forward to PC option is selected traffic for both the 12 x x x and 13 x x x addresses is forwarded to the PC If disabled that NAT table would show the 12 0 47 13 traffic being routed to Radio IP of 192 168 10 1 This is the common configuration for MOTOTRBO radios that are not connected to an external Mobile Client MOTOTRBO Radio Mobile Client on a PC 12 0 47 13 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 2 13 0 47 13 12 0 47 13 192 168 10 1 13 0 47 13 192 168 10 2 Network Address Translation Radio ID 12045 Radio IP 192 168 10 1 Accessory IP 192 168 10 2 Radio IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 10 1 ARS IP 11 250 250 250 TMS IP 11 250 250 250 Forward to PC Enabled Figure 4 23 Air Interface Network Connectivity April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 265 4 10 1 3 Application Server Control Station Network Connectivity In some system topologies described in previous sections the Application Server is required to service up to 16 different channels This requires the Application Server to have a network connection of up to 16 control stations at the same time Similar to the Mobile Client configuration when each control station is connected to the Applic
261. eration down to 8 W e Reliable 100 W Continuous Duty Cycle Operation e Analog and digital conventional are all standard in one base station without the cost of additional software or hardware e Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS compliant e Switching power supply functions over a wide range of voltages and frequencies 3 1 1 2 3 MTR3000 Programmed in MOTOTRBO Mode e Supports two simultaneous voice paths in digital 12 5 kHz TDMA e Divides an existing channel into two timeslots delivering twice the capacity through a single repeater e Supports MOTOTRBO IP Site Connect for increased wide area coverage e Supports MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus Single Site Trunking without a separate hardware controller e Supports MOTOTRBO Dynamic Mixed Mode to facilitate your analog to digital migration in conventional repeater applications e Supports MOTOTRBO Transmit Interrupt for greater subscriber unit control and flexibility 3 1 1 2 4 MTR3000 Serviceability e Repeater diagnostic and control software provides remote or local site monitoring e Easy to replace components with functionally separate Field Replaceable Units FRU Software based design simplifies feature upgrades e Easy access to station ports no need to remove the front panel shortening installation and maintenance time For ease of installation minimal station alignment is needed Supported by Motorola s 2 year standard warranty 3 1 1 2 5 Total Cost of Ownership e An
262. erience during a phone patch call e Busy Tone Disconnect When this APP option is enabled the APP box ends the phone call once a PSTN busy tone is detected It is recommended to turn on this option if it is provided in the APP box For further information on how to connect the APP box to the repeater and APP box tuning details please refer to the respective repeater service manuals 4 8 5 Phone System Configuration There are many phone related configurations that defines how a radio repeater communicates with the PSTN and support phone calls in the radio system To make the configurations easier a data structure called phone system is introduced to group and encapsulate these configurations Because radios and repeaters act in different roles in a phone call the configurations encapsulated in the phone system are different for radios and repeaters The phone system in a repeater includes configurations such as de access code busy TOT and so on The phone system in a radio includes configurations such as gateway ID access code and others 4 8 5 1 Configuring a Radio in a Phone System For a radio multiple phone systems can be created and configured via CPS The phone system defines how the radio interacts with the PSTN via a particular APP box hence a valid phone system must have a corresponding APP box in the system However a radio may interact with the PSTN via an APP box in different ways Therefore it may have more than one
263. ermany Greece Iceland Ireland Italy Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland Bahrain Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Hungary Israel Latvia Lebanon Malta Morocco Nigeria Poland Romania Slovakia and Slovenia 220 Q 115 nF 820 Q For Australia Bulgaria and South Africa 370 Q 310 nF 620 Q For New Zealand 900 Q For Brazil 320 Q 230 nF 1050 Q For United Kingdom 200 Q 100 nF 680 Q For China 900 Q 30 nF For legacy MTR2000 68007024085 April 2011 142 System Components and Topologies 3 1 1 2 7 Repeater Specifications The MOTOTRBO repeater is currently available in 12 5 kHz or 25 kHz operation in analog or 12 5 kHz in digital The table below shows the available repeater bands and associated power levels that are currently supported Repeater Type DR 3000 Dimensions 5 25 x11 75 x19 h x x w 133 35mm x 298 45mm x 482 59mm Weight 14 kg 31 Ibs UHF 1 1 25 25 40 1 40 1 25 UHF 2 up to 512 MHZ above 512 MHz Power watts VHF 1 25 25 45 350 MHz a 800 MHz 1 30 Repeater Type MTR3000 Dimensions 5 25 x16 5 x19 h x 1x w 133 35mm x 419 09mm x 482 59mm Weight 19 kg 42 Ibs UHF 1 UHF 2 800 900 MHz VHF Power 8 100 W 8 100 W 8 100 W 3 1 1 3 MTR3000 Satellite Receiver The MTR3000 satellite receiver unlike the base station
264. erred to as Late Entry and is an advantage over analog signaling schemes 1 Systems that are running on software versions RO1 01 00 RO1 05 00 or software version RO1 06 00 or later which has the Transmit Interrupt feature disabled in the CPS configuration or non Motorola equipment etc April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 31 2 3 3 1 PTT ID and Aliasing This feature allows the target radio to identify the originator of a call If programmed with the radio CPS Customer Programming Software a user friendly alphanumeric name or alias can also be displayed These user friendly aliases are also used when initiating voice calls and digital signaling features The alias information in the transmitting radio should correspond with the alias information in the receiving radio The transmitting radio ID is sent over the air and if there is an alias for that ID in the receiving radio the receiving radio displays the alias If no alias is configured at the receiving radio for that ID then only the transmitting radio s ID is shown 2 3 3 2 Radio Enable Disable There are two ways to enable disable a radio e by another radio typically in a supervisory role that sends Inhibit Uninhibit command using over the air signaling or e by a third party application connected to the repeater that sends Inhibit Uninhibit command using the ADP application 2 3 3 2 1 Using Over the Air Signaling The Radio Disable feature can
265. escription Notes Name If the carrier signal is lost after Motorola Data Communication MDC signaling data is detected the radio stays muted for the duration of this timer or until the carrier Coast signal is redetected Once the carrier signal is redetected Duration this timer is stopped and the Data Operated Squelch 7 DOS Auto Mute Duration timer begins again This feature helps to prevent temporary loss of DOS in areas of poor signal strength or signal distortions Sets the duration that the radio remains muted when the radio is receiving Motorola Data Communication MDC signaling data to reduce noise from the data reception The Auto Mute user has to know the size of the data to select a suitable This feature is Duration duration If the duration is too short then some unwanted supported in Analog noise will still be heard and if the duration is too long it mode only might clip some voice audio This is normally used on radios that support both voice and data on the same channel Sets the duration that the radio waits before attempting Fixed Retry another polite or impolite transmission to transmit signaling This feature is Wait Time data Configuring the radios with different wait durations supported in Analog increases the probability of accessing the system and mode only reduces the chances of data lost due to collisions The Time Out Timer TOT is the amount of time that the radio can continuously transmit before transmission is
266. evert Interaction Diagram Figure 4 27 illustrates the channels used when an emergency is initiated and the radio is configured for Emergency Alarm Only with an Emergency Revert Channel and the Emergency Revert Channel is configured with a GPS Revert Channel Note The channels are defined in the table in the previous section The following describes the sequence of events 1 The radio switches from the Selected Channel f1 to the Emergency Revert Channel f3 From here the radio transmits the Emergency Alarm and waits for the acknowledgement While waiting for the acknowledgement the Emergency Location Update is held in queue 2 Once the acknowledgement is received the radio switches back to the selected channel f1 and transmits the Emergency Location Update Therefore in this scenario the GPS Revert Channel associated with the Emergency Revert Channel has no impact on the channel used to transmit the Emergency Location Update 68007024085 April 2011 292 System Design Considerations 4 11 7 5 2 Emergency Alarm and Call fs DOW V V EER RX f PETI Presence Emg RX f Location paella cPs Location son Rent Er Emg USB USB f3 log Control Station igi CN Control Station digital mode g y digital mode J S 4 ys KAV PiE O Y Ee Vv E 4 RX f amp RX f4 lt D E Ww MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Control Station digital mode digital mode MCDD Presence Notifier
267. except for TCP IP e Ensure networking application messages are routed to the Ethernet connector or the wireless network interface and not to the network connection to the control station s Sometimes the Application Server is connected to the radio network via the control station s When operating under these conditions it is important to remember that all network traffic generated by the Application Server will be routed to the control station s In order to optimize the radio network these messages should be kept to a minimum The following items should minimize the amount of network traffic being routed to the control station s e Disable all protocol support except for TCP IP e Turn off the PC wireless network interface e Do not launch any networking application i e internet browser e mail etc e Disable all automatic updates for network applications that are running in the background such as virus updates IM updates Windows updates etc 4 10 1 10 Reduction in Data Messages When Radios Power On When a radio powers on up to eight data messages are exchanged between the radio and the Server This may cause congestion in the channels if many radios are powered on within a short duration The situation worsens if one or more data messages are lost due to the overflow of queues or poor RF transmission conditions A loss of message causes multiple retries both at the Data Link and Application layers These additional messages
268. f operation optionally following emergency revert procedures At this point Emergency Voice Interrupt could be invoked if the feature has been configured in accordance with the Emergency Voice Interrupt operation as described previously The second interaction to consider occurs when the radio is provisioned for both the Scan Priority Sampling and a Transmit Interrupt feature Priority Sampling is temporarily suspended when a Transmit Interrupt request is pending This is necessary to ensure that the radio user s transmit request takes priority over the radio s receive activities Thirdly the radio can be configured with the scan feature such that replies occurring within a specified duration are transmitted to the same group and channel this reply is called talkback A reply that occurs outside of this duration is considered a new transmission If the radio is provisioned for Transmit Interrupt and talkback then Transmit Interrupt is applied to the same group and channel when the radio user invokes a Transmit Interrupt feature while receiving If the designated transmit channel is busy and the radio is not a member of the ongoing call then the Voice Interrupt request is simply denied Recall the options for new voice transmissions outside of the previously mentioned duration are transmitted while scanning include the selected channel the channel from which scan was started another predetermined channel or on the last landed
269. for analog mode as well as programmed with the same frequency and parameters for example PL and DPL as the analog radio While in analog mode the MOTOTRBO radio supports most standard analog features including a subset of MDC signaling features While in analog direct mode the MOTOTRBO radios does not support any of the digital features 3 2 1 2 1 Summary of Features in Analog Direct Mode All features listed in Analog Features on page 114 are supported in analog direct mode April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 167 3 2 1 3 Interoperability between Digital MOTOTRBO Radios Mixed Mode MOTOTRBO Radios and Analog Radios in Direct Mode fi f2 TX fi analog TX fi TX f digital TX f2 RX f A RX RX f lt RX fo Legacy MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU Analog SU analog mode amp digital mode digital mode changed via mode choice Figure 3 18 Legacy Analog and MOTOTRBO Analog and Digital Radios in Direct Mode In this configuration aMOTOTRBO subscriber is programmed to talk to an analog radio as well as a MOTOTRBO radio that is programmed for digital only In order for the MOTOTRBO radio to communicate with the analog radio it must be programmed for analog mode as well as programmed with the same frequency and parameters for example PL and DPL as the analog radio When in the digital mode the MOTOTRBO subscriber has all of the digital features that are available
270. from the Selected Channel f1 to the Emergency Revert Channel f3 and then transmits one Emergency Alarm 2 The radio stays on the Emergency Revert Channel f3 and initiates an emergency voice call During the emergency voice call the Emergency Location Update is held in queue 68007024085 April 2011 294 System Design Considerations 3 Once the emergency voice call ends the radio switches to the Emergency Revert s GPS Revert Channel f4 and transmits the Emergency Location Update 4 After this transmission the radio switches to the Emergency Revert Channel f3 and while not being involved in voice calls it registers Note This requires the Emergency Revert Channel to be ARS enabled 5 After registration periodic location updates are sent on the Emergency Revert s GPS Revert Channel f4 until the emergency is cleared This configuration in Figure 4 29 is useful when a system needs to simultaneously support multiple Emergency Calls from multiple groups on a single Emergency Revert Channel The placement of Emergency Calls on the Emergency Revert Channel and the location updates on a different channel significantly increases both emergency voice throughput and Location Update throughput while in the emergency state It should be noted that changing the Emergency s GPS Transmission Channel to either the Selected Channel f1 or the Emergency Revert Channel f3 removes one control station from the system The actual config
271. g Features Quik Call II X DTMF Encode Decode Encode MDC 1200 Call Alert Encode Decode MDC 1200 Selective Call MDC 1200 PTT ID Encode Decode MDC 1200 Emergency Encode Decode MDC 1200 Selective Radio Inhibit MDC 1200 Radio Check MDC 1200 Remote Monitor Digital Signaling Features Call Alert Encode Decode Private Call Encode Decode Emergency Encode Decode Selective Radio Inhibit Encode Decode Radio Check Encode Decode Remote Monitor Encode Decode 68007024085 April 2011 128 System Feature Overview Feature Name DM 3601 Analog Scan Features Scan X Nuisance Channel Delete X Priority Scan X Dual Priority Scan X Digital Scan Features Scan X Nuisance Channel Delete X Priority Scan Talkaround X Priority Scan Repeater Mode X Dual Priority Scan Talkaround X Dual Priority Scan Repeater Mode X Mixed Mode Scan Features Scan xX Nuisance Channel Delete X Priority Scan X Dual Priority Scan X April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 129 2 16 Third Party Application Partner Program The MOTOTRBO system is complete and robust enough to fulfill the diverse needs faced by a variety of customers However realizing the important role third party developers play in supporting market growth by creating customized applications that add value to customers in different vertical applications Motorola provides a powerful suite of capabilities to
272. ganization will most likely have a desire to utilize their existing network for wide area connectivity IP Site Connect supports the following technologies e Private LANs e Corporate LANs e Private Wireless Systems e g Motorola s Canopy or Point to Point PTP systems Exact configurations of Local Area Networks can vary greatly As long as the devices are on the same network or have access to other networks through an internal router or NAT configurations the IP Site Connect system will operate correctly It is also assumed that in these local configurations that bandwidth is not an issue Nevertheless it is important for the system installer to understand the bandwidth that each IP Site Connect devices require in order to operate optimally See Network Bandwidth Considerations on page 235 The diagram below shows a simple diagram of IP Site Connect devices located at different sites connected through a local area network Note that in this drawing the IP Site Connect devices could be in one or more Wide Area Systems i e more than one Master could contain local area channels or even be an analog repeater a disabled repeater or RDAC IP application 1 For more information about Canopy see http Awww motorola com Business US EN Business Productt and Services Wireless Broadband Networks Point to Multipoint Networks 2 For more information about PTP see http www motorola com Business US EN Business Product and Services Wi
273. ge Server But in order to send and receive text messages to Text Message Dispatchers the Text Message Server configuration is required This configuration also works with external text message applications connected to the field radios This configuration can be expanded by locating up to four Text Message Dispatchers and four Location Dispatchers throughout the customer s Enterprise Network Up to four installations of each application can be located anywhere on the customer s LAN as long as they can communicate with the Application Server The Dispatcher installations on the Application Server counts as one of the instances of the dispatch software The diagram below shows 2 instances of each application One is on the Application Server and one remote The applications can reside on the same remote machine if desired ah Xt Slot 1 Ree Slot 1 fs y AN l SA Internet NETWORK A A z sS E mail A y lt S7 m2 A USB GPS gt TX f2e RX fi v 7 z MOTOTRBO A _ Control Station MOTOTRBO SU Presence Notifier 5 digital mode digital mode eS Text Message fa os Server 8 NeTworK Customer 3 ise Enterprise nerwork Dispatch TX fi TX fi t 1 RX fe MOTOTRBO RX fa f Netwo rk 5 Slot 2 Digital Repeater Slot 2 1 d a 3 YL 7 CEN Location qe N gt Se S A J Dispatch K Org VA oot Bs Text Mes
274. gency on the selected channel so that the Monitoring Supervisors can be contacted 4 11 7 4 Extended Emergency Call Hang Time As previously described the MOTOTRBO repeater reserves the channel for a short duration after a voice transmission By default the call hang time associated with an emergency is slightly larger than those for Group Calls and Private Calls The repeater can be configured to extend the call hang time for Emergency Calls even longer to provide an additional opportunity for the Emergency Initiator or Emergency Acknowledger to communicate without competing with other users 4 11 7 5 Emergency Revert and GPS Revert Considerations During registration with the Location Server the radio receives a periodic location update request and an emergency location update request When the radio enters the emergency state it will attempt to transmit the emergency location update response on a specific channel The transmission channel of this message is defined by the radio s Emergency Mode Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call or Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow and its GPS Transmission Channel Selected or Revert Understanding which channel is used for the Emergency Location Update is important as a control station is required on that channel to enable the reception of the message by the Application Server For more information on emergency handling see See Emergency Handling Strategies on page 287 68007024085 April
275. gers the repeater to enter disabled state In this state the repeater can not execute repeat functions Releasing this input pin will revert the repeater back to enabled state where the repeaters can start repeating calls Tx Power Level High Asserting this input pin triggers the repeater to change the TX power level to be high Releasing this input pin will revert the repeater back to TX low level low Repeater Knockdown Asserting this input pin triggers the repeater to temporarily enter Repeat Path Disable Mode In this mode the repeater s transmitter will only be enabled by the external PTT and the audio source will be the Tx Audio Input pin Releasing this input pin will revert the repeater back to Normal Mode where the repeaters transmitter can be activated by a qualified RF signal on the receive frequency Note that repeater knockdown is not supported in digital mode In Dynamic Mixed Mode system this feature is not supported during an ongoing digital transmission Channel Change There are up to 4 pins that can be configured and used for channel change The repeater can support up to 16 channels Asserting this input pin represents 1 Releasing this input pin represents 0 0000 represents first channel 1111 represent the last channel April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 99 2 8 4 Redundant Repeater Setup By using the alarm feature and control feature together it is possible
276. ges to itself or to the PC but not both TX f1 TX f1 Text Message Client RX f2 RX f2 Text Message Client TMC Slot 1 gt 4s go 4 Slot 1 TMC T Nay SY TM Bo K USB USB Mobile PC MOTOTRBO SU TX P RXT MOTOTRBO SU Mobile PC Terminal digital mode digital mode Terminal YA Text Message Client MOTOTRBO Text Message Client TMC Digital Repeater TMC Mobile PC MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU Mobile PC Terminal digital mode digital mode Terminal Figure 3 21 MOTOTRBO Radios in Digital Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with Text Messaging 68007024085 April 2011 172 System Components and Topologies 3 2 2 1 2 Telemetry Commands in Repeater Mode Below are some basic telemetry configurations using both time slots of a repeater A description of each follows Xen Reh f2 f2 Slot 1 hy Slot 1 PA N GPIO s ig GPIO Output Input Telemetry Device Customer Provided Telemetry Device MOTOTRBO SU TX f2 RX fi MOTOTRBO SU Customer Provided digital mode N A digital mode hc Slot 1 s he 5a oy L P i TX f1 Input RX f2 MOTOTRBO Slot 2 Digital Repeater Telemetry Device Door Open Customer Provided MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU Saai digital mode digital mode Output Telemetry Device Cust
277. ging If telemetry messages are expected to occur 68007024085 April 2011 60 System Feature Overview often for example 30 radios sending telemetry once every 5 minutes this may affect performance of other services on the channel This should be taken into consideration when determining the data load versus quality of service of a channel 2 4 4 1 Physical Connection Information The MOTOTRBO portable offers three GPIO pins and the MOTOTRBO mobile offers five GPIO pins for telemetry These GPIO pins can be set to high or low toggled or pulsed for a configured duration A pin can be configured to be active high or active low It is recommended to use an AC powered MOTOTRBO mobile for most extended telemetry applications Motorola does not currently offer external hardware for telemetry configuration The GPIO lines have a 4 7k ohm pull up resistor tied to a regulated 5 Vpc supply within the mobile radio The regulated supply remains on as long as power is supplied to the mobile even if the mobile is turned off so the pull ups are active even when the radio is off When configured as input the voltages of the GPIO lines should be within the range of 0 Vpc to 5 5 Voc e OVpc to 0 8 Vpc are interpreted as low level e 2 2 Vpc to 5 5 Vpc are interpreted as high level When configured as output the GPIO will be able to source a current of 1mA maximum at the following levels e 4 7 Vonc to 5 5 Vp for a high level OVpbc to 0 8 V
278. ging internally or forward data to a mobile computer connected to the radio Do note that all the features mentioned apply to the radio s built in text messaging as well as to mobile on a PC text messaging 3 1 2 2 7 Front Panel Accessory Interface The MOTOTRBO mobile radio supports an improved front panel accessory interface This new interface is Motorola s platform for future accessory development and is not backwards compatible with older accessories This interface supports the following capabilities 3 1 2 2 8 Enhanced Audio Functionality This unique technology enables communication between the radio and Motorola enhanced accessories to optimize audio performance It enables more consistent audio levels between accessory types so that users of different microphones will sound more consistent and interoperate more effectively It also optimizes audio quality performance for a given accessory type employing DSP digital signal processing technology to best match the radio s audio signals to the capabilities of the accessory USB Capability The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface incorporates standard Universal Serial Bus USB capability enabling IP connectivity via standard USB ports with Personal Computers and other peripherals via a Motorola supplied cable This interface supports radio programming capabilities with no RIB box required from the front microphone port connection It also supports thi
279. gital mode of operation of the MOTOTRBO repeater provides new capabilities to resolve common problems associated with deploying multiple repeaters in a system The techniques described in the sections below can also be used to resolve problems associated with interfering RF signals from adjacent radio systems Overlapping Coverage Area As with analog radio systems when digital radio systems are separated by frequency or distance there are no negative interactions between the systems which need to be addressed Figure 4 12 shows two systems which operate on a common set of frequencies but are physically separated so that there are no interactions between the systems F1 up F2 down F2 down Figure 4 12 Multiple Repeaters Similarly Figure 4 13 shows two systems which overlap in space but operate on a difference set of frequencies so that there are no negative interactions Figure 4 13 Multiple Repeaters with Overlap 68007024085 April 2011 228 System Design Considerations Issues arise however when repeaters operate on common frequencies and have overlapping regions Figure 4 14 shows that when a radio transmits in a region of overlap repeaters from both systems retransmit the received signal Analog radio systems often use PL DPL to resolve these types of problems With the MOTOTRBO repeaters operating in digital mode this issue can be resolved by assigning a unique color code to each repeater and programming the associated
280. gn Considerations Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers 5 x 6 kbps 30 kbps If Master Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers 5 x 3 kbps 15 kbps RDAC Traffic 55 kbps Required Uplink Downlink Bandwidth 175 kbps Peer does not include self Using the same method for all IP Site Connect devices in the example system yields the following Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 1 Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 2 Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers ajaj N amp Repeater 1 Oo 1 N Repeater 2 oO aj N f Repeater 3 ojaj oj Repeater 4 oO 1 oj amp Repeater 5 Oo a oj o RDAC If Master Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers Required Uplink Downlink Bandwidth kbps 175 160 160 85 130 85 Peer does not include self IP Site Connect devices behind a single router need to be added together to acquire the wide area network bandwidth requirements See the final bandwidth requirements in the figure above Note that an analog repeater or disabled repeater connected to the IP Site Connect system would require the same amount of traffic as a local only repeater Repeater 4 But keep in mind that if the disabled repeater will eventually be enabled without disabling a different repeater the bandwidth of the enabled repeater should be accounted for in the bandwidth plan Apr
281. group When a message is sent to an individual the sender receives an acknowledgement once the recipient receives the message If all delivery retry attempts were exhausted a failure indication will be generated With messages addressed to a group the sender only receives confirmation that the message was transmitted and does not receive confirmation from any of the intended recipients When receiving a text message the user is notified of a new message by an icon display string and an audible tone if enabled in the codeplug via the CPS Messages are received only if the radio is currently in digital mode of operation A radio user should enter Scan mode to receive messages if multiple channels are being utilized System planning considerations associated with data and scan are discussed in System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document A user can store up to 30 received or sent text messages at a time The user is notified once the Inbox and sent folder storage becomes full Once full subsequent new messages automatically cause the oldest messages to be deleted Messages are not deleted when the radio is turned off A user can store up to 30 draft text messages in the Drafts folder at a time Once full subsequent new drafts automatically cause the oldest draft s to be deleted A user can opt to Send Edit or Delete the drafts in the Drafts folder The user can opt to Save a text message that is being written or edited to
282. group is 1 1 The System Installer should associate a key to a personality The relationship between a key and a personality is 1 1 And therefore the relationship between a key and a group becomes 1 1 If a radio X wants to make a protected Private Call to a radio Y and if both the radios are member of a group T then the radio X goes to a personality whose TX Group is T If there is no group where both the radios are member then it is not possible to send a protected message For a protected All Call the transmitting radio should go to a specific personality and the key associated with that personality is present in all the radios For a protected Private Call the transmitting radio should go to a specific personality and the key associated with that personality is present in the receiving radio 2 7 12 Updating from Basic Privacy to Enhanced Privacy It may not be possible for a System Installer to update all the radios from Basic Privacy to Enhanced Privacy in one session In such cases the System Installer instructs all the radio users to disable the Privacy feature and operate in clear mode When instructed the radio users disable the Privacy feature using the radio front panel All the messages are transmitted in clear The System Installer updates the software of radios and configures the radios for Enhanced Privacy Once all the radios are upgraded the System Installer updates the software of repeaters
283. h DTP cccccccececeeeceeeeseseeeseneceneccnaeneeecegeneeeneeeeeees 250 4 8 1 Enable Disable Phone Gateway Repeater for Phone Calls 250 4 8 2 Enable Disable a Radio from Initiating Receiving Phone Calls 251 4 8 3 Phone Channel Configuration cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennenaaeeees 251 4 8 3 1 One APP Box per Repeater via 4 wire Interface 006 251 4 8 3 2 Single Sie coeliac nocd a tae thai cleaner ls ei e Ea rae Aa EET alee aia 251 4 8 3 3 IP Site COMMGC i esccsscacecacate ie atest a cate eee ecceeees 252 AOA Capacity P SS ie en leet soil a eed ee 252 4 8 4 APP Box Conmiguration cic s occ zccte cel eececdd cnt cectgaed sere eceetextidinlonaiveleaeels 252 4 8 5 Phone System Configuration ccc eeeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 253 4 8 5 1 Configuring a Radio in a Phone System ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 253 4 8 5 2 Configuring a Repeater in a Phone System eeeeeeeeee 254 4 8 6 Access De access Code Configuration cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetnnenaeeees 254 4 8 6 1 Repeater Configuration cecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 254 4 8 6 2 Radio Configuration S 6 cctetecuctoaele hod ececdieed apeedenentseeteetonsietiessieal es 255 4 8 7 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Configuration ceeeeee 256 4 8 8 RINGING Modes 223 seccetere nesatesoieh diel teceh ocate bes
284. hanced GPS Revert channel There is no support for voice or other non GPS data on the Enhanced GPS Revert channel Data from option board interface is also not supported over an Enhanced GPS Revert channel A window size ranges from 5 to 10 The size depend on the following factors e The parameters that the application has requested in a location response such as longitude latitude time altitude velocity direction and so on Whether IP UDP headers compression is enabled The table below shows the calculation for the window size with enhanced privacy enabled Requested Element LRRP Response Size bytes Latitude Longitude 11 Time Request ID Speed_hor Direction_hor Altitude Radius MO ow NI wl wo Q Variable sized fields Assume that Request ID value is smaller than 256 The following calculations assume GPS data is unconfirmed and Compressed UDP Data Header is selected in the CPS For No Privacy WindowSize LRRPResponseSize 1 12 3 April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 55 For Enhanced Privacy WindowSize LRRPResponseSize 1 12 4 If a subscriber is out of range or its battery is dead it will not send GPS data during its reserved windows so the repeater also has a mechanism to free up the windows reserved for that subscriber The repeater waits for a certain period of time before releasing the windo
285. hannel group and slot they are currently selected on This assumes that there is an Acknowledging Supervisor that is monitoring that same channel group or slot This means that each group is required to have a designated supervisor whose responsibility is to handle emergency situations Because emergency alarms do not traverse slots or channels there would need to be one and only one supervisor designated for each group on every channel and slot Multiple Monitoring Supervisors could be configured to monitor for emergency alarms without sending acknowledgements to stop the Emergency Initiator s retries It is also very important to note that because users are generally mobile it is possible that the Acknowledging Supervisor becomes unavailable busy changes channels or roams out of range of the system If this happens Emergency Initiators may go unacknowledged In a system with a small number of users and groups a Tactical strategy is often the easiest method to implement When the number of users groups and channels grow the required number of Acknowledging Supervisor also grows It will quickly become difficult to guarantee the April 2011 288 System Design Considerations multiple assigned Acknowledging Supervisors are actively monitoring their assigned groups It is also often not cost effective to have numerous designated Acknowledging Supervisors handling emergency situations In order to operate Tactically the Emergency Ini
286. he IP Site Connect system may also contain analog repeaters disabled repeaters and RDAC applications These devices do not send voice over the network but they do require the bandwidth to support the standard link management and control signaling For a quick reference the graphs below show the required bandwidth for two simple IP Site Connect system configurations The first shows the required bandwidth for various size systems where every repeater in the system utilizes both channels or slots as wide area The second shows the required bandwidth for various size systems where every repeater in the system utilizes one channel or slot as wide area and the other channel or slot as local area In each system 68007024085 April 2011 236 System Design Considerations one RDAC is present repeater authentication is enabled and Secure VPN is not being utilized in the routers Bandwidth required vs Number of Repeaters 2 Wide Area Channels with RDAC Master Non Master Uplink Downlink Bandwith Kbps Number of Repeaters Uplink Downlink Bandwith Kbps Bandwidth required vs Number of Repeaters 1 Wide Area Channel with RDAC Master Non Master Number of Repeaters Figure 4 18 Required Bandwidth for Two Simple IP Site Connect System Configurations Note that although the two examples above may represent typical IP Site Connect configurations and may pr
287. he Rest channel it is transmitted The receiving radio checks the integrity of the bursts and of the message If the CRC check passes it transmits a received confirmation burst back to the Trunked Control Station as well as passes the data up to the application Upon receipt of the text message the radio s application is required to send an application layer acknowledgement to the server for confirmation Here the radio moves to a Data Revert Channel and transmits the data to a Revert Control Station when allowed The receiving control station checks the integrity of the bursts and of the message and if the CRC check passes it transmits a received confirmation burst back to the radio as well as passes the data up to the application Below is a summary of the transmit and receive roles required of the various control stations in the system utilizing Confirmed data e Revert Control Station Conventional and Capacity Plus RX and TX e Primary Control Station Conventional TX and RX e Trunked Control Station Capacity Plus TX and RX NOTE When operating with Confirmed data the Revert Control Stations cannot be configured to operate as RX Only Interference With multiple control stations operating in close proximity it is important to isolate the transmitted signals from the receivers Typical types of interference to consider are Intermodulation and Desense Blocking Intermodulation Intermodulation IM occurs when two
288. he source and target individual ID and Group IDs are not protected Control messages such as Radio Disable Remote Monitor Radio Check Call Alert and the embedded and standalone digital signaling are also not protected The protection is provided in all the operational modes direct mode repeater mode and IP Site Connect and through all the communication paths between the sending radio and the destination radio This implies that the voice and data messages remain protected in the following situations e Over the air in direct mode e Over the air and inside a repeater in repeater mode and e Over the air inside repeaters and over the backend network in IP Site Connect Note that the Basic and Enhanced Privacy does not protect the voice and data messages between a radio and its option board or between a radio and its accessory including a MDT Any data that extends past the radio network is not protected For example text messages from field units to text message dispatchers or e mail addresses on a network are not protected once they leave the destination radio i e a Control Station Both Basic and Enhanced Privacy protect Individual voice call Group voice call All system call Emergency Call and all Packet data calls i e Individual Group unconfirmed and confirmed 2 1 4 Effects on Performance Basic Privacy uses only one key which is known to both the sender and the receiver This eliminates the need to transport crypt
289. he target user may act as confirmation For example Joe are you there Yes go ahead It is important to understand the advantages and disadvantages of confirmed and unconfirmed operation as it relates to performance In general confirming radio presence increases the setup time voice access time of a Private Call since the user must wait for the control signaling to go through the radio network before acquiring a talk permit tone Although this may take more time it does guarantee that the target radio is present prior to providing the talk permit tone When operating on an IP Site Connect system that is connected through the public internet this time may be longer than when operating on a single site since the control messaging may be traversing through the internet If the target radio is scanning or roaming the setup time of a confirmed Private Call may increase due to the fact that the first control message may not successfully reach the scanning or roaming radio The second attempt which contains a preamble has a higher likelinood of reaching the scanning or roaming radio Since unconfirmed Private Calls do not transmit any control signaling the additional setup time is not required and therefore the voice access time is shorter Because setup messaging is not used prior to starting the call it is possible that scanning or roaming radios may arrive late to a call This could cause the user to miss the first few words of the t
290. hen to switch to Talkaround mode For example all radio users may switch to Talkaround mode when their radio is not on the Capacity Plus system for more than 10 minutes A customer may decide to plan the Talkaround mode configuration according to the number of groups that need such an operation The available Talkaround mode frequencies should be distributed to the different groups based on their call profiles Radios users can use scan mode in Talkaround To detect if the Capacity Plus system is once again up and running radio users may periodically switch to a Capacity Plus channel and observe the activity on the channel April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 249 4 7 7 Ways to Improve Battery Life To improve battery life of a portable radio a user can switch the radio power to low power mode by using the radio menu or power button Low power mode improves battery life of a portable radio significantly over the high power mode When a user notices that the radio is not providing talk permit tone for multiple PTT attempts in low power mode and that the signal strength bar is still visible the radio should be switched to high power mode when initiating a call When switching to different power modes the radio user will not miss any incoming calls The call listening capability of radio does not change with the radio transmit power Additionally a radio user may turn off the radio when calls are not expected or when the r
291. hort disruption of service To enable the use of static IPv4 addresses do not select the DHCP option ensure the static IPv4 address the gateway IPv4 address and netmask are provided Just like an IP Site Connect configuration a Capacity Plus configuration uses Link Management to keep a device aware of the status the current IPv4 address and UDP port of other devices For reference see Considerations for the Backend Network on page 231 on Link Management in an IP Site Connect configuration The Link Management requires only one of the repeaters called a Master to act as a broker of IPv4 UDP addresses The Master s IPv4 UDP address is configured into all the Capacity Plus devices The Master s IPv4 UDP address refers to its address as seen from the backend network A firewall NAT may translate the address in the customer network into another address on the backend network 4 7 4 Behaviors in Presence of Failures A Capacity Plus system has no centralized controller and this makes it tolerant to failures It automatically detects most types of failures reconfigures itself and continues to provide the services although with decreased capacity A repeater detects the failure of other repeaters or the backend network Keep Alive messages are periodically exchanged between repeaters The absence of such messages from a repeater indicates a failure of either that repeater or of the network in between A failed repeater is not se
292. hould be kept less than the duration for which the firewall remains open for inbound messages Exchange of dummy messages between two IP Site Connect devices also acts as a Keep Alive messages They are required even if there is no firewall or the firewall is configured to keep itself open for any message transmitted to the IP Site Connect device 4 6 3 1 Automatic Reconfiguration An IP Site Connect system automatically discovers the presence of a new IP Site Connect device The new IP Site Connect device is configured with the IPv4 UDP address of the Master On power on the new IP Site Connect device informs its IPv4 UDP address to the Master and the Master informs all the other IP Site Connect devices about the presence of a new IP Site Connect device This allows adding an IP Site Connect device to a live IP Site Connect system This simplifies the installation addition of an IP Site Connect device as there is no need to take the system down and configure other IP Site Connect devices with the IPv4 UDP address of the new IP Site Connect device The periodic link management messages between an IP Site Connect device and the Master also act as keep alive messages In absence of messages from an IP Site Connect device for one minute the Master concludes that either the IP Site Connect device has failed or the network in between and the Master informs all the other IP Site Connect devices about the absence of the IP Site Connect device
293. humb to minimize the feature options available This will guarantee that a user cannot accidentally place the control station in a state where it is not monitoring inbound data traffic In almost all scenarios it is highly recommended that a mobile radio with an AC power adapter be utilized as the data gateway Although a portable radio can temporarily be used for this purpose it is not recommended for long term installations The primary reason why a mobile is recommended for this purpose is its ability to remotely locate the RF antenna This is important since computers and their components are sometimes sensitive to RF power Mobile antennas should be located away from the server itself and isolated from each other For example if a server has four control stations connected to it it is recommended that the antennas be installed on the roof of the building and separated enough from each other so that they do not interfere This is also important since in building coverage is sometimes difficult to achieve All inbound data messages will pass through these control stations so it is important that they are within good RF coverage of the repeater Additionally a control station is left powered on all the time A portable continuously powered on in a charger is more likely to encounter power related failures In non Capacity Plus mode if a control station does power off or power cycles host specific routes will be removed from the Application Server
294. iagnosis and Control Private Radio Inhibit Emergency Location Two Channels Privacy Call Alarm and Call Tracking Slot 1 and Slot 2 All Call Remote Emergency Telemetry Shared Time out Timer Monitor Alarm with Voice Channel to Follow Support Dual Tone Radio Check Emergency Third Party Call Initiation Option Board Multi Revert Group ADP by a Listening Frequency Applications Radio Voice Call Alert Emergency Data Revert Interrupt Voice Interrupt Channels Remote Voice Data Over Dekey Voice Interrupt The following chapter discusses some of the considerations to take while designing a MOTOTRBO system It focuses more on how the user uses the system and the configuration needed to support it Although a basic system topology may already have been chosen the next chapter helps dig deeper into how the end user utilizes the system and therefore gives additional ideas on how it should be configured April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 203 SECTION 4 SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 4 1 4 2 4 2 1 Purpose This section describes various system configurations readers need to know before deciding how to best support the needs and usage of their customers It explains the usage supported on a single repeater system as a guideline for design It then identifies the customer needs that need to be considered when optimizing system performance It continues to cover various other considera
295. iases e Determining feature assignments e Private Calls e All Call e PTT ID and Aliasing e Radio Disable e Remote Monitor e Radio Check e Call Alert e Emergency Configurations e Determining channel access requirements e Determining subscriber programming requirements e Determining data application access and requirements 4 11 1 Identifying a Functional Fleetmap Design Team To develop a fleetmap a design team of key representatives from the customer s system managers technicians and operators needs to be formed to create effective communications plans for radio users and system operators 68007024085 April 2011 278 System Design Considerations 4 11 2 Identifying Radio Users The system administrator needs to do the following to establish a fleetmap e Determine the customer s organizational structure from a radio user s perspective e Consider the needs of portable and mobile radio users e List all of the potential radio users in a single column on a spreadsheet e Define the functional groups that use the system e Group together radio users who need to communicate with each other on a regular basis Typically each functional group of radios will have different communication requirements Therefore each functional group will have their own codeplug for their radios that differs from other functional groups Functional User User Listens Codeplug Alias Talks with Group Name ID only to
296. ications that a minor or major alarm has occurred The access to these GPIO pins further allows the radio installer to utilize the alarm pin and enable disable pin to create a redundant switch over configuration Alarm Reporting and Control is available using the GPIO pins Note that any combination of RDAC connected over the Network RDAC connected via USB or connections via GPIO are supported The ability to change the repeater channel can be utilized to toggle channel parameters between predetermined settings For example if the repeater contains one channel that is in analog mode and another channel that is in digital mode changing the channel between these channels essentially changes the mode from analog to digital The same strategy can be used to toggle the wide area and local setting of a timeslot One personality could be provisioned for two wide area channels while the next has one wide and one local channel Other channel parameters can be changed using the same strategy It is important to note that many control operations require the repeater to perform a reset before processing the control operation During the reset the repeater will not be able to service inbound transmissions from fielded radios Also note that the repeater takes no consideration to the ongoing traffic when instructed to perform a control operation In other words if a call is in progress Group Call Individual Call All Call Emergency Call data call etc the
297. ice Interrupt enabled the radio attempts to interrupt an ongoing interruptible voice transmission on the channel The radio then uses the established procedures for either Emergency Alarm or Emergency Alarm with Call depending upon the CPS configuration For the Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Alarm feature the radio is not required to be a member of the voice call being interrupted NOTE For the Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Alarm feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted However not all need to be provisioned with the Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Alarm capability If some radios are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g normally desirable for a supervisor s radio then those radios transmissions cannot be interrupted and the radio user instead transmits the Emergency Alarm in accordance with the configuration of the polite and impolite Emergency Alarm fields in the CPS if Emergency Alarm is attempted while receiving another radio s uninterruptible transmission If the interruption of the voice transmission is successful the radio uses the established procedures for either Emergency Alarm or Emergency Alarm with Call depending upon the CPS configuration once the channel has been cleared The radio user whose transmission was interrupted receives a Talk Prohibit Tone until the PTT is released If the interrup
298. ice calls this is only a concern when scanning channels that may contain interruptible voice Direct Mode transmissions Site Roaming MOTOTRBO supports the ability to automatically roam between sites of an IP Site Connect system The portable and mobile can be configured with a roam list that contains a list of channels each of which is one site one repeater of an IP Site Connect system wide area system The radio searches through the list of sites and selects the one with the strongest signal and identifies this site as its current home site The radio remains on this home site until the signal strength has dropped below a programmable threshold or when it has lost communications with the home site at which time it attempts to find a better home site If a better home site is not found it remains on the previous home site and continues searching Note that roaming occurs while the user is not in a call Roaming is not supported while the user is in a call Although site roaming functions automatically the radio user can be provided the ability to control when and where the radio roams The radio user can lock on to a particular site or remain unlocked and allow the radio to choose the appropriate site To manually change sites the user can either change their radio dial position to the desired channel or site or they can initiate the Manual Site Roam feature and have the radio find the next available site When the user changes radio dia
299. ich initializes a talkgroup call on slot 2 to talkgroup 100 The following figures describe the typical phone patch topologies in Single Site configuration and IPSC LACs Local Pa Y Channel 1 Local Channel 2 Figure 2 19 Phone Patch Topology in Single Site Configuration April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 111 SITE A Local Channel 1 SITE B E Figure 2 20 Phone Patch Topology in IP Site Connect Local Area Channel Configuration 68007024085 April 2011 112 System Feature Overview 2 14 4 2 Phone Patch in IP Site Connect Wide Area Channels WAC In IP Site Connect IPSC wide area channels include channels from multiple repeaters However since a WAC can host only one call at a time it is designed that a WAC can support only one APP box that can be connected to any repeater on the WAC The phone patch call can be initiated from any site but it always goes through the only APP box supported on the WAC NOTE The target ID includes the call type the channel and the radio or talkgroup identifier Legacy or third party radios are not able to join in the phone call because this is a new Motorola proprietary feature The following figures describe the typical phone patch topologies in IPSC
300. icrophone and converted from an acoustic waveform to an analog electrical waveform This voice waveform is then sampled by an analog to digital converter In typical radio applications a 16 bit sample is taken every 8 kHz this produces a 128 000bps bits per second digital bitstream which contains far too much information to send over a 12 5 kHz or 25 kHz radio channel Therefore some form of compression is required 2 1 1 2 Part Two The Vocoder and Forward Error Correction FEC Vocoding Voice encoding compresses speech by breaking it into its most important parts and encoding them with a small number of bits while greatly reducing background noise Vocoding compresses the voice bitstream to fit the narrow for MOTOTRBO 6 25 kHz equivalent radio channel The MOTOTRBO vocoder is AMBE 2 which was developed by Digital Voice System Inc DVSI a leader in the vocoding industry This particular vocoder works by dividing speech into short segments typically 20 to 30 milliseconds in length Each segment of speech is analyzed and the important parameters such as pitch level and frequency response are extracted These parameters are then encoded using a small number of digital bits The AMBE 2 vocoder is the 68007024085 April 2011 4 System Feature Overview first to demonstrate very low bit rates while producing toll quality speech such as traditionally associated with wireline telephone systems Together with the vocoding process Fo
301. ided to the PC as the default gateway These IP addresses are only used for communication between the MOTOTRBO radio and the connected PC It is recommended that the default values Radio IP 192 168 10 1 Accessory IP 192 168 10 2 be used in all mobile client configurations In other configurations where multiple MOTOTRBO radios are connected to one PC these values need to be different to prevent IP conflicts 68007024085 April 2011 262 System Design Considerations If the default IP address programmed in the radio or the one provided to the PC conflicts with other network interfaces on the PC then the Radio IP should be changed using the CPS The radio also allows for the default UDP ports for the ARS Text Message and Telemetry applications to be changed if there exists conflict within the PC These UDP ports will need to be updated in the application configuration as well Again it is recommended that the default values be used whenever possible For best results it is recommended that mobile clients do not have additional network interfaces Additional static routes may need to be manually entered in the mobile client PC if multiple interfaces are present It is also recommended that any applications that attempt to broadcast network traffic be disabled in the PC Unnecessary traffic sent to the MOTOTRBO radio may cause undesired congestion over the air The simple diagram below displays the IP connectivity between the Mobile Client
302. ies that the configured IP address of the server in a radio is the IP address of its Trunked Control Station s peripheral April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 199 6 For each set of radios it is required to make one or more entries in the IP Routing Table of the Application Server such that a data packet transmitted to a radio is routed to the port of the Trunked Control Station associated with the set of the radio Trunked CS1 Trunked CS2 Figure 3 42 Capacity Plus Devices with Data over Trunked Channels A minimal configuration of Figure 3 42 is shown in Figure 3 43 below TMS ma Figure 3 43 Two channel Capacity Plus Devices with Data over Trunked Channels 68007024085 April 2011 200 System Components and Topologies 3 2 4 1 4 A System with Data Application Server on Revert Channels If a system requires sending a large number of data messages e g location data to a Server Capacity Plus is able to dedicate up to a maximum of twelve repeaters for the transmission to take place This configuration requires one Revert Control Station per Data Revert Channel i e slot and at least one Trunked Control Station The IDs and therefore the IPv4 address of all Revert and Trunked Control Stations are the same The IPv4 address of the Server as seen by a radio is derived from the SUID of the Control Stations The Server sends data packets to the radios via Trunked Control Stati
303. il 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 239 4 6 3 2 4 2 Required Bandwidth Calculations While Utilizing a Secure Virtual Private Network As was discussed in previous chapters peer to peer communications over the network are optionally authenticated and are also encrypted end to end if enabled in the radios See Voice and Data Privacy on page 85 If this is not considered sufficient for a particular customer IP Site Connect supports the ability to work through a Secure Virtual Private Network VPN Secure VPN is not a function of the IP Site Connect device but rather of the router It is important to note that Secure VPN does add the need for additional bandwidth and may introduce additional delay For a quick reference the graphs below show the required bandwidth for the two previously discussed simple IP Site Connect system configurations but in this case utilizing routers with Secure VPN enabled and repeater Authentication Disabled When utilizing Secure VPN routers repeater authentication is not necessary since the Secure VPN utilizes its own authentication As can be seen the bandwidth requirements per device increase substantially This should be taken into account when planning for bandwidth Bandwidth Required vs Number of Repeaters Bandwidth Required vs Number of Repeaters 1 Wide Area Channel with RDAC Secure VPN 2 Wide Area Channels with RDAC Secure VPN Master Non Master 800
304. ill be targeted towards the TX Call Member When using the Last Landed Channel option it is recommended for each group to have its own configured channel This way there is only one group associated with a channel essentially making the Last Landed Channel and the Last Landed Group the same 2 5 3 3 Scan Members with Similar Receive Parameters When adding members to a Scan List it is important to be conscious of the differences and similarities between their receive parameters A Scan List that contains scan members with the same receive parameters but different transmit parameters may result in misdirected reply transmissions This is best explained by first describing the simplest example of such a scenario ZANI Radio 1 vA Channel 1 Scanning qf Radio F1 F1 F3 Radio 2 N Channel 2 Figure 2 11 Misdirected Response while Scanning In this example a Scan List contains two scan members Channel 1 and Channel 2 Channel 1 is an analog channel configured for carrier squelch with a receive frequency of F1 and a transmit frequency of F2 Channel 2 is an analog channel configured for carrier squelch with a receive frequency of F1 but with a transmit frequency of F3 A Scan List such as this implies that there is a repeater that is transmitting on F1 and receiving on F2 and another that is transmitting on F1 and receiving on F3 See Section Figure 2 11 Misdirected Response while Scanning Since the radio only l
305. in digital direct mode However the MOTOTRBO radio user has to manually switch from digital mode to analog mode to communicate with the two groups Alternatively the MOTOTRBO radio user can program the radio to scan between the analog and digital channels to ensure a call is not missed This can be done from the keypad of the radio or through the CPS Please see Scan on page 62 and Scan Considerations on page 65 to learn more about scan 3 2 2 Repeater Mode There are a few reasons why a customer may require a repeater in their system The first is if the required coverage area is large they may require strategically located high power repeaters in order to cover all of their operating space Even if their required coverage area is small due to geographical limitations such as mountains valleys or man made obstructions they may still need multiple high power repeaters to reach all the coverage areas They also may need the extra bandwidth a repeater offers One channel may not be able to support a large number of users therefore additional channels may be required In many of these cases the insertion of a MOTOTRBO repeater can alleviate the problems with minimum additional cost Such a repeater is transparent to field radio communications They just select the required channel using their channel selector and continue their normal 68007024085 April 2011 168 System Components and Topologies communications However as
306. io The Channel Marking feature introduces logic that assumes that if a transmission was recently identified as not of interest there is no need to fully review it at every scan interval Additionally if the type of transmission is of the same type as the transmission identified as not of interest before there is a high likelihood it is the same transmission Therefore the radio only needs to identify the type of transmission taking place which is beneficial as identifying a transmission type takes much less time than fully identifying if a transmission is not of interest This assumption is made for a pre determined number of times after which the scan member is fully reviewed again This method changes the experienced audio holes from long audio holes every priority scan interval to one long audio hole followed by numerous short audio holes and then another long audio hole and so on This feature can greatly increase audio quality while a radio is in priority sampling mode The drawback to channel marking is the assumption that the target of a transmission has not changed The scanning radio will not know if the target has changed until the next full inspection The system should be configured in such a way using CPS parameters to achieve a balance which delivers improved audio quality without sacrificing too much flexibility to consistently locate new transmissions which otherwise would be of interest It is recommended that Channel Marking is
307. io user in the phone call has higher channel access priority than the phone user allowing the radio user to key up and talk impolitely over a phone user regardless of the radio s in call permit criteria configuration However if a phone user needs to talk the phone user has to wait until the radio user dekeys Otherwise the phone user will not be heard by the radio users When another radio user is talking in a phone talkgroup call the radio user follows the radio s In Call Criteria configuration with the exception of using the Follow Admit Criteria when the In Call Criteria is provisioned with Transmit Interrupt NOTE This is because Transmit Interrupt is not supported in the phone call When detecting an impolite takeover from a radio that is not partied to the phone call or an emergency on the phone patch channel during a phone call the repeater automatically ends the phone call by sending a de access code to the APP box April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 109 During a phone call if a radio drops out of the call due to various reasons for example out of range the radio can make a late entry back into the call if it is a talkgroup call If it is an individual call the radio can make a late entry back to the call in Conventional Single Site or IPSC However late entry is not supported in a Capacity Plus system configuration if a radio fades out of an individual call completely There are three switches that happe
308. ion cannot be interrupted by either over the air OTA transmissions or PTT transmissions by the repeater s accessories 68007024085 April 2011 208 4 4 4 4 1 System Design Considerations Digital Repeater Loading The designer is able to choose the number of channels required to support his customer s expected traffic after understanding how much traffic a single slot channel can support The amount of traffic on a channel is dependent on numerous variables which are difficult to estimate exactly at design time Since MOTOTRBO comprises of Voice traffic Text Messaging traffic Location Tracking traffic Registration and Signaling traffic previous voice traffic only methods to gauge repeater capacity may not be sufficient Because this traffic is mostly initiated by the end user it is difficult to predict how often it occurs Standard usage profiles of existing customers have been created for voice and data services These profiles act as a baseline for estimating how much traffic a user creates on a system If the standard profiles do not match your customer s expected usage further estimations based on the trend lines need to be considered After the system is used and real life usage is identified further adjustments may be required Assumptions and Precautions Channel loading analysis involves several assumptions e Generalized high level view of data and voice services interaction represents true interaction e An e
309. ion R01 07 00 or later this feature is also supported on Capacity Plus system configurations and IP Site Connect wide area channels For IP Site Connect wide area channels a repeater can use this feature to stop a voice transmission where a radio continues to transmit even after failure of arbitration This also provides feedback to the transmitting radio that the transmission is not repeated over the air and allows the radio to participate in a call started by another radio To support different use cases Transmit Interrupt has four unique variations Voice Interrupt This feature allows a radio that is unmuted to an interruptible voice call to stop the ongoing voice transmission and initiate its own voice transmission to the same call membership Voice Interrupt is typically used during a prolonged voice transmission when late breaking or urgent information becomes available and it is necessary to disseminate the information to the group as quickly as possible e Emergency Voice Interrupt This feature allows a radio to stop any ongoing interruptible voice transmission and initiate its own emergency transmission Emergency Voice Interrupt gives a radio an improved access to the radio channel in an emergency condition e Remote Voice Dekey This feature allows a radio to stop an ongoing interruptible voice transmission It is typically used by a supervisor to remotely dekey a radio that is inadvertently transmitting e g the PTT is
310. ion requires more data message retries to successfully complete confirmed transactions thus lowering throughput Integrating voice and data on the same channel brings several benefits These include e Use of one RF channel for both voice and data e Use of one system infrastructure for both voice and data e Use of one subscriber to send and retrieve both voice and data messages over the air Integrating voice and data on the same channel also brings several considerations These include the following e Traffic loading e Customer application requirements e Contention of voice and data System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document provides practical guidance on the above considerations April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 43 MOTOTRBO supports data services in a number of ways e MOTOTRBO allows radios to send unit to unit and unit to group data packets It supports confirmed and unconfirmed delivery of a data packet The table below shows the confirmed and unconfirmed mode for all the software versions R01 01 00 RO1 02 00 R01 05 00 Call Type Release R01 03 00 R01 04 00 R01 06 00 Confirmed Confirmed CPS selectable for a personality Confirmed by Unit to Unit default Exception In IP Site Connect location data is always sent unconfirmed Unit to Group Unconfirmed NOTE If some of the radios in R01 05 00 or later are still running
311. ion to remotely change mode of operation i e switching from analog mode to digital mode of operation In Capacity Plus systems repeaters also inform the status of their logical channels to each other Based on the status information a repeater selects the next Rest Channel In IP Site Connect wide area slot configuration systems a repeater ensures that one call prevails at all the sites if multiple calls start within a short interval This triggers all repeaters in the system except those that detect interference to repeat the selected call This feature is also supported for voice data or radio command initiated by an IP based application In IP Site Connect local area slot configuration and Capacity Plus systems a repeater arbitrates between the radio command calls i e radio check radio enable disable IP console enable and IP console disable started within a short interval by a radio or an IP application IP Site Connect and Capacity Plus systems also support an ADP interface The interface enables IP based applications to connect to the systems and support various services including voice data and radio commands The following services are available e Support radio command services e g radio check radio enable disable IP console enable and IP console disable Monitor all over the air system activities and provide recording services playback system profiling system usage etc Route audio data from an
312. ions that function together in a system The first step in designing a system that satisfies the customer s needs is identifying the devices and applications within the system and then choosing a basic system configuration of how these components will be interconnected This section defines the different components and applications available their offered services and their roles in the system We will then describe some of the standard system topologies that MOTOTRBO supports Please note that all data application modules contained in this system planner are depictions of typical third party data application modules and have been included simply to illustrate certain MOTOTRBO application enabling features 3 1 1 Fixed End Components The system contains devices with fixed locations and other devices that are mobile This sub section covers the devices with fixed locations 3 1 1 1 Repeater The MOTOTRBO repeater provides an RF interface to the field subscribers The repeater is AC and DC powered and designed to be discreetly mounted on a standard 19 rack found in most communication tower locations It offers front panel indicators of its current status including real time transmit and receive indicators for each time slot Once configured through the Customer Programming Software CPS the repeater is designed to operate behind the scenes and without the need for further user interaction The repeater can either be configured as a stand
313. is case the IP Address of both the Primary and the Standby repeaters must be the same since all the Peers communicate with it using this IP address As they have the same IP Address they cannot be connected to the network at the same time This also means that the standby repeater cannot be contacted via a network RDAC application while not in the primary repeater role since it is not connected to the network Because the two devices have the same IP address but different MAC addresses Peers may not be able to contact the Master repeater until the router and repeater ARP tables are updated Depending on router configuration this could take up to 15 to 20 minutes It is recommended to consult the Network Administrator for details on setting the ARP interval within the customer s network Dual Control Considerations It is possible to have RDAC connected locally over the network and connected via GPIO lines simultaneously to a single repeater In this case the repeater can be controlled through GPIO as well as through the network The user should be aware that it is not recommend using both methods to control the repeater at the same time Note that after a control command has being executed from RDAC application the control console connected via GPIO may no longer indicate the state of the repeater correctly since it will be reading the state of the hardware pin rather than the internal repeater state In other words if the external application has
314. is configured for local communication only In this case each site has its own logical channel for local communication This is useful in case a customer need a significant load of local communication This configuration offloads the local communication from the wide area channel The following figure shows an example of such configuration in which one of the logical channels say slot 2 is used in IP Site Connect mode wide area and the other slot 1 is used in digital repeater mode local area The calls originating on slot 1 are not sent to other repeaters A customer should use slot 1 for local groups i e groups whose members are expected to be present in the coverage area of the repeater and slot 2 for groups whose members are distributed over the coverage area of multiple repeaters E l Site 1 Presence Notifier Text Message Text Message Location Server Application Server Site 3 TX fe RX fs Server Dispatch MOTOTREO Control Station digital mode MOTOTRBO Location Digital Repeater Dispatch l MASTER AS Sy oe MOTOTRBO es Control Station digital mode MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater Multi Channel Device Driver Presence Notifier Text ee TX fe RX fr Site 2 Presence Notifier Text Message Text Message Location Server Dispatch TX fs RX fs MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Location Server aaon Jeng
315. is provisioned as such If a new site is not found the radio returns and remains on the original site or the site revert channel if provisioned Per normal revert rules upon clearing the emergency the radio would return to the home site If the radio roams to a site that has Emergency Disabled or no Emergency System then radio remains in emergency but 68007024085 April 2011 84 System Feature Overview does not process the emergency sequence The user can then attempt another Manual Site Roam to find a site that does have emergency Note that in most cases the passive search while not in emergency should get the radio on the correct site and therefore when it emergency reverts it should still be at the same site If in Silent Emergency mode no ergonomics associated with Manual Site Roam are displayed While GPS reverted no automatic roaming is supported If the GPS Revert Channel is out of range the data message is dropped On return to the home channel after a failed GPS revert the radio will initiate an Active Site Search using the selected personality s roam list This will make sure that an available site is found prior to the next GPS revert attempt While in emergency initiator not receiver and GPS revert occurs no automatic roaming is supported while reverted If GPS Revert Channel is out of range the data message will be dropped On return to an emergency revert channel after a failed GPS revert the radio will NOT initia
316. istens and qualifies using the receive parameters while scanning the scanning radio could monitor a transmission from either repeater on either scan member It does not know if it has actually landed on the correct channel or not It only knows that the receive parameters have been qualified for the current channel being scanned In other words it does not know if the transmit parameters of the channel it has landed on matches the receive parameters of the radio that is has monitored If the radio has landed on the wrong channel when the radio user replies the radio will transmit on the wrong frequency The result will be a misdirected reply about half the time This scenario can be avoided by making at least one of the receive parameters unique In an analog April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 69 system this could be done with the use of PL or DPL In a digital system this can be done by using a unique color code or unique group per channel This will allow the scanning radio to only land on the channel where all receive parameters match and therefore properly direct the user s reply F2 F2 F1 F1 Radio 1 Channel 1 Scanning qf Radio SN Radio 2 Figure 2 12 Misdirected Response while Scanning Similar problems can occur if one scan member has fewer qualifiers than the others Taking the example in Section Figure 2 11 Misdirected Response while Scanning again Channel 7 is still an analog channel configur
317. it AGC is to produce the best voice quality possible under real life conditions Since voice is still the main application of a two way radio this is a primary goal A secondary result of the AGC is to produce flat received speech loudness level over a range of input levels at the microphone The usage of IMPRES Accessories extends this input range so optimal voice quality occurs over an even greater input range Section Figure 2 7 Transmit Audio Sensitivity illustrates this extended range flat response in the curve titled MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM Digital This same response curve can also be produced in analog mode by using a IMPRES Accessory and enabling Analog Mic AGC in the CPS General Settings Figure 2 7 illustrates this type of response in the curve titled MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM AGC on Analog An advantage of this type of response is that soft talkers and users that turn away from the microphone while speaking will still come through loud and clear Professional Series e MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM AGC off Analog n n o c no 53 l E oO o o Q N a gt Q gt e o 2 Q o O gt MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM AGC on Analog X MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM Digital 95 100 Transmitter Input dB SPL Figure 2 7 Transmit Audio Sensitivity 68007024085 April 2011 14 System Feature Overview The flat audio response of digita
318. iteria e Always This criteria is often referred to as Impolite channel access and can be applied to analog and digital channels e Channel Free This criteria is often referred to as Polite to All and can be applied to analog and digital channels Color Code Free This criteria is sometimes referred to as Polite to Own Color Code or Polite to Own System and is applied only to digital channels April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 21 e Correct PL This criteria is sometimes referred to as Polite to Other System and is applied only to analog channels The radio checks for a PL match prior to allowing a transmission Channel access methods must be specified for each channel in the radio CPS The TX Transmit parameters for each defined channel contains an Admit Criteria selection that must be set to one of the values described above All these channel access options govern how standard group voice calls and Private Calls access the system Not all transmission types utilize these settings For example emergency voice calls always operate impolitely This gives emergency voice calls a slightly higher priority over existing traffic on the channel Data calls are always polite Since a data call can be queued and retried its priority is considered lower than voice Note that a polite radio user attempting a voice call will be polite to data but an impolite user may not Control me
319. ithin range of each other at all times A single frequency is assigned to all field radios to serve as a half duplex channel The radios are not limited to one direct mode frequency They can be programmed to have different frequencies which are selectable with the channel selector knob Direct mode does not need over the air hang time for voice calls See Repeater on page 137 The radio has an internal call talk back timer The channel access method used before the call timer expires is impolite since the radio is still a member of an active call This is independent of the Channel Access selection for call initiation polite or impolite April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 157 3 2 1 1 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Direct Mode f TX ft digital gt TX ft RX ft _ RX ft 1 MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 6 MOTOTRBO Radios in digital mode In Direct Mode In direct mode configuration a single frequency is assigned to all radios to communicate with each other Since there is no repeater designating a slotting structure there is no time slot synchronization Therefore only one voice conversation or data transaction can occur at a time on that channel In digital direct mode the radios support all three methods of voice transmission Group Calls Private Calls and All Calls They can also support all command and control messaging like Call
320. ity while offering RF coverage performance equivalent to or better than today s analog radio April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 7 2 1 2 3 Two Slot TDMA Reduces Infrastructure Equipment As we have seen two slot TDMA essentially doubles repeater capacity This means that one MOTOTRBO repeater does the work of two analog repeaters a MOTOTRBO repeater supports two calls simultaneously This saves costs of repeater hardware and maintenance and also saves on the cost and complexity of RF combining equipment necessary in multi channel configurations Just as importantly the two slot TDMA signal fits cleanly into a customer s existing licensed channels there is no need to obtain new licenses for the increase in repeater capacity and compared to alternative technologies that may operate on different bandwidths there is no comparative increase in the risk of interference with or from adjacent channels Analog 2 Channel System 12 5kHz Analog Frequency Pair 1 Repeater 1 Ea i ad PE Fi paira requency Pair Groups Repeater 2 a Repeater 3 MOTOTRBO 2 Channel System Two Calls per repeater amp channel 12 5kHz TDMA a S Frequency Pair ia Repeater Groups Figure 2 3 MOTOTRBO Requires Less Combining Equipment 68007024085 April 2011 8 System Feature Overview 2 1 2 4 Two Slot TDMA Enables System Flexibility The two time slots or logical channels enabled by two slot
321. ity Plus system Hence an Option Board will not be able to customize the current working personality Transmit Interrupt The Voice Interrupt Emergency Voice Interrupt Remote Voice Dekey and Data Over Voice Interrupt features are supported on Capacity Plus systems running on software version RO1 07 00 or later Capacity Plus does not provide the following features Coverage of multiple sites Call queuing priority and preemption Priority Monitor Capacity Plus provides higher priority only to an All Call Radio access control April 2011 20 System Feature Overview Greater detail on system services available in direct mode and repeater based system topologies is described in System Components and Topologies on page 137 2 2 2 _MOTOTRBO Supports Analog and Digital Operation The MOTOTRBO system can be configured to operate in analog mode digital mode or in Dynamic Mixed Mode The system can consist of multiple repeaters A single MOTOTRBO repeater configured to operate in Dynamic Mixed Mode can dynamically switch between analog and digital modes depending on the type of call it receives A repeater in Dynamic Mixed Mode system cannot be part of multiple repeater system in which the repeaters are connected over the network for IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus operation MOTOTRBO portable and mobile radios can communicate in analog and digital The mobile or portable radio user selects the mode of operation analog or digi
322. ity is disabled e Capacity Plus If a phone system is connected to any channel from the channel list on the selected digital personality the radio can initiate receive phone calls on that channel Otherwise phone capability is disabled 4 8 3 Phone Channel Configuration 4 8 3 1 One APP Box per Repeater via 4 wire Interface In all system configurations the physical connection for DTP is the 4 wire interface between the repeater and the APP box which is identical to the APP configuration The physical connection is through the repeater s GPIO connector with the following pins e TX Audio Input impedance AC of 560 ohms Single ended RX Audio Single ended e PTT 5v level GPIO e COR 5 v level GPIO e Ground 4 8 3 2 Single Site When a repeater is connected to an APP box in a Single Site configuration both channels of the repeater can be used as phone channels The phone calls on either of these two phone channels use the same APP box that is connected to the repeater Since both channels are phone channels the radio or phone user needs to specify which channel to use when initiating the call The radio user can manually switch to the phone channel where the call shall start on The phone user can specify which channel to use when prompted for Target ID by the repeater 68007024085 April 2011 252 System Design Considerations 4 8 3 3 IP Site Connect Each logical channel either WAC or LAC can only use at mos
323. ize interference and must use unique color codes An Application Server is a PC like equipment where one or more application runs An application can be a data application such as a Location Server Text Message Server or a voice application such as a Console An Application Server is connected to one or two Control Stations and these Control Stations are connected over the air to a repeater If the configuration has more than one Control Station then the Application Server should have the MCDD software installed A third party application can reside on an Application Server and since the Application Server is connected to Control Stations one per logical channel the application is not required to implement any third party API that partially emulates the behavior of a MOTOTRBO repeater and radio The backend network can be a dedicated network or most probably an internet provided by an Internet Service Provider ISP ISPs provide a range of technologies such as dial up DSL typically ADSL cable modem broadband wireless access ISDN Frame Relay Satellite Internet access etc The backend network cannot be based on a dial up connection due to small bandwidth or Satellite Internet access due to large delay The IP Site Connect configuration does not require an ISP to provide a non varying static IPv4 address except for the Master repeater A repeater can be behind a firewall and or a router and or a NAT A repeater has USB and Ethernet ne
324. kelihood of receiving the beacon the 68007024085 April 2011 82 System Feature Overview beacon duration should be increased It is safer to have a beacon duration longer than shorter but keep in mind that if the duration is increased the beacon interval must be increased to meet the beacon transmit ratio The beacon interval controls how quickly a radio can roam to a site and how quickly it roams away from a site when there is no activity When roaming with no system activity a radio needs to see a beacon in order to roam to a new site If the repeater beacon is sent out every one minute the radio may be one minute deep into the site before it sees the site and roams to it Similarly when roaming with no system activity a radio may be one minute outside of the site before it attempts to roam The impact of this value often changes based on how quickly the users are traveling For example a car driving 60 m p h can cover a mile a minute and therefore will be one mile into or out of a site before roaming This could be acceptable for site configurations such as the Isolated No Overlapping Coverage or the Corridor Coverage but the Dense Overlapping Coverage coverage type may require a quicker beacon since it will both trigger the leaving and entering of sites Note again that if the user initiates a transmission before the passive roam finds the beacon the radio will attempt to wake up the site repeater A one minute beac
325. known to be out of range of any control station accepting location updates In order to extend battery life minimize time away from the Rest Channel and or to efficiently use frequency resources in these situations the radio can also be configured to disable the transmission of data messages on revert channels by using the selection None To configure a radio to support data messages there are a few parameters that must be managed correctly How these parameters interact to dictate the radio s performance is shown in the table in section Section 2 4 3 4 GPS Revert Channel 2 4 4 Telemetry Services The MOTOTRBO radios incorporate telemetry functionality that is only supported in the digital mode of operation Both the MOTOTRBO portable and mobile radio support General Purpose Input Output GPIO lines on the radio accessory connector With this telemetry functionality the originating radio can send a telemetry command to another radio Sending the telemetry command can be triggered either by GPIO pins or a programmable button In either case the telemetry command can be sent out on the normal traffic channel e g the selected channel for single site conventional systems Alternatively if the telemetry command is triggered by a programmable button the telemetry command can be sent out on a CPS configured telemetry channel that is selected from the Channel Pool or visible zone channels Telemetry commands instruct GPIO pins
326. l 2 14 3 Ending a Phone Call A phone patch call can be ended by either the radio user phone user or the APP box with the following methods e The radio user may push the back button or a programmable exit button to end reject the call Alternatively the de access code can be sent manually from the keypad e The phone user ends the call simply by hanging up or by sending the de access code from the keypad Sending the de access code is recommended because this method allows the radio system to end the call immediately thus letting the radio users know that the call is ended in the correct manner However if the phone user ends the call by hanging up this depends on when the APP box responds to the PSTN disconnecting signaling Some APP boxes may not be able to detect PSTN signals and therefore waits for the TOT to expire Hence ending the call in this manner normally takes a longer time 68007024085 April 2011 110 System Feature Overview e Additionally if a phone TOT is configured in the APP box the call is ended by the APP box automatically when the call duration exceeds the timer Some APP boxes provide configurable 30 second warning alert tones before the timer expires When the phone call ends the text string and icon on the radio screen disappear This is followed by a phone exit tone from the radio to alert the user that the radio has been disconnected from a phone call The phone patch feature works simila
327. l hangtime starts before they are granted a transmission Utilizing the Channel Free Tone helps train users from transmitting too early Although a setting of Always may be useful for speeding up conversations for well disciplined users it may cause undisciplined users to step over other users Therefore it is recommended that most users are provisioned with an In Call Criteria of Follow Admit Criteria 68007024085 April 2011 24 System Feature Overview 2 2 3 6 Repeater Wake up Provisioning When there is no inbound traffic for a specified duration Subscriber Inactivity Timer the repeater stops transmitting and enters an inactive state In this inactive state the repeater is not transmitting but instead it is listening for transmissions When the user or radio needs to transmit through the repeater the radio sends a wake up message to the repeater Upon receiving the wake up message the repeater activates and begins transmitting idle messages The radio then synchronizes with the repeater before it begins its transmission The repeater wake up sequence is configurable within the radio The number of wake up attempts TX Wakeup Message Limit and the time between the attempts TX Sync Wakeup Time Out Timer may be altered if required to operate with other vendor s systems It is recommended that these values remain at default while operating on MOTOTRBO systems April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 25 2
328. l is successfully cleared down In other words a radio user has the ability to clear the channel of another user s interruptible voice transmission before beginning their own voice transmission when both radios are participating in the same voice call e g both are members of the same group during a Group Call or both are participating in the same Individual Call The radio user whose transmission was interrupted receives a Talk Prohibit Tone until the user releases the PTT If the channel is not successfully cleared down the user typically receives a Channel Busy Tone until the PTT is released NOTE For the Voice Interrupt feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted However not all need to be provisioned with the Voice Interrupt capability If some radios are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g normally desirable for a supervisor s radio then those transmissions cannot be interrupted and the radio user receives a Channel Busy tone if the Voice Interrupt feature is attempted while receiving an uninterruptible voice transmission If configured for Follow Admit Criteria and the previously configured channel access Admit Criteria is set to either Channel Free or Color Code Free the user will receive a Transmit Denial Tone when they press the PTT while receiving a transmission for them Users must wait until the user stops transmitting and cal
329. l is different from the traditional analog audio response The traditional response is a linear response and the louder one speaks then the louder the received volume Figure 2 7 illustrates a traditional analog response in the curves titled Professional Series and MOTOTRBO with IMPRES RSM AGC off Analog When Analog Mic AGC is disabled then the Analog Mic Gain dB is adjustable in the CPS General Settings Therefore MOTOTRBO in analog mode is able to deliver the traditional analog response and is adjustable to fit into existing systems Examination of Figure 2 7 indicates that digital and traditional analog responses are similar at an input Sound Pressure Level SPL of 98 dB Below this level analog is quieter than digital This is important to note as a system requiring MOTOTRBO to function as a digital radio and also as an analog radio during migration may experience received audio level differences that are mode dependant This could occur when scanning both digital and analog channels and the analog talker is located in a quiet environment such as an office In quiet environments many users tend to speak softly and therefore the input will fall below the equivalent response level of 98 dB SPL Therefore during the migration period the analog response may be quieter than the digital response 2 2 Basic System Topologies for Digital and Analog Operations MOTOTRBO is a conventional radio system In its most basic form a MOTOTRBO system i
330. l positions the radio always begins on the selected channel The Site Lock On Off and Manual Site Roam controls can be configured to be accessible through a button or the menu The radio user is provided indications via the LED on when the radio is roaming They are also provided an indication on which site the radio is currently on when the user enables Site Lock via button press The radio has two methods in which it accomplishes the act of roaming a passive method and an active method Passive Site Searching The Passive Site Search method has the radio searching through a list of sites and selecting the one with the strongest signal This method is utilized whenever the site is unlocked It relies on repeater transmissions in order for the subscriber to determine which site has the strongest signal strength Since it is expected that the radio will encounter other activity while performing the Passive Site Search it qualifies the signal using the sites programmed color code prior to selecting it as the new home In addition it sorts the sites in the roam list according to their signal strength in order to optimize follow up roams Sites that have been detected in previous roam attempts and are assumed to be near by are searched before those that have not been detected before Also while roaming the radio inspects the current home site in between other sites in order to minimize the time away This strategy provides priority to the last hom
331. l repeater mode while legacy analog radio users communicate in Talkaround 2 To migrate a system with two repeater channels MOTOTRBO radios are programmed with both the current analog channels as well as future digital channels A recommended approach is to place all the analog channels in one zone and all digital channels in another zone Analog and digital channels are programmed into the MOTOTRBO radios to allow users to communicate on both repeaters Scan Lists are configured to allow users to monitor both analog and digital voice transmissions Both the existing analog repeater and the MOTOTRBO repeater in digital mode should be set up to operate side by side This configuration requires two frequency pairs one pair for the analog repeater and one pair for the MOTOTRBO repeater Users gradually migrate over to the MOTOTRBO repeater i e legacy analog radios are swapped for MOTOTRBO radios Once every analog radio has been swapped with a MOTOTRBO radio the legacy analog repeater can be replaced with another MOTOTRBO digital repeater The system is now fully digital with two digital repeater channels 3 To migrate a system with a single MOTOTRBO repeater channel load upgrade the MOTOTRBO repeater with firmware version RO1 06 10 or later Configure the repeater to Dynamic Mixed Mode using the CPS This configuration requires one frequency pair Analog and digital channels are programmed into the MOTOTRBO radios to allow users
332. lected as a Rest Channel repeater If a Rest Channel repeater fails a new Rest Channel is selected by the system To help a radio detect the failure of the Rest Channel repeater the Rest Channel repeater periodically broadcasts system status over the Rest Channel If a radio misses the broadcast then it knows that either the repeater has failed or it is not within the coverage area of the repeater and the radio starts searching for the Rest Channel 68007024085 April 2011 248 System Design Considerations When the backend network switch fails each repeater cannot connect to all other repeaters Each repeater then starts working as a two channel trunking system At the time of the switch failure all radios may be on the Rest Channel or busy on other channels In the first instance the call capacity is severely impacted while in the second radios on different channels are unable to communicate To resolve a failure of a revert channel repeater a radio makes multiple attempts to transmit a data message on different channels If a Trunked Control Station fails a set of radios will not receive data messages from the Application Server 4 7 5 Limiting Interference to Other Systems Capacity Plus is designed to be compatible with both exclusive and shared channels To help a radio detect the unavailability of a Rest Channel the repeater periodically transmits a very short system status message beacon If the radio misses this transmission
333. llows a user to create edit or delete Scan members in a Scan List as well as associate a Scan List to a channel The user can start or stop Scan and also add or remove Scan members of a Scan List using the radio s interface Changes to the Scan List made by the radio are persistent until the radio is turned off Note that Scan and Roam are mutually exclusive on a channel within CPS When the radio is scanning and it detects a digital Scan member in its Scan List it looks for transmissions targeted towards the group s associated with that channel The radio also looks for transmissions targeted towards itself e g Private Calls or signaling commands The radio can be configured such that replies that occur within a specified duration is transmitted to the same group and channel this reply is called talkback If the reply occurs outside of this duration it is considered a new transmission There are also options for where new voice transmissions outside of the previously mentioned duration are transmitted while scanning Voice can be configured to transmit on the selected channel the channel from which Scan was started another predetermined channel or on the last landed channel for voice the last channel that Scan locked on to Data and digital signaling are always transmitted on the selected channel The last landed channel is not updated for data and digital signaling Priority levels can also be configured for members of a S
334. lows for more privacy on a frequency PL DPL is transmitted as a sub audible frequency or a digital code Channel Access Control This feature dictates what conditions a radio is allowed to initiate a transmission on a channel There are three possible values which are Always Channel Free and Correct PL Refer to MOTOTRBO Channel Access on page 20 for more details 2 15 2 MDC Analog Signaling Features MOTOTRBO contains a limited set of built in MDC signaling features These include Feature Name Description Emergency Signaling Sends a help signal to a pre defined person or group of people The emergency feature also allows a user to sound an alarm or alert the dispatcher in an emergency situation The user is also able to acknowledge an emergency PTT ID PTT ID identifies the user s outgoing calls on other users radios Call Alert notifies the radio user of incoming calls if they are a short Call Alert distance away from their radio Call Alert also informs unavailable users that someone is trying to reach them 68007024085 April 2011 116 System Feature Overview 2 15 3 Quik Call Il Signaling Features The Quik Call II signaling is used during analog mode of operation and encodes either single tone or a sequence of two tones within the audible frequency range approximately 300 3000HZ Encoding decoding is particularly used for the Call Alert and Voice Selective Call fea
335. lves this restriction and allows a radio to use all the repeaters at a site The sharing of repeaters improves the utilization of channels System Capacity In Capacity Plus MOTOTRBO supports a maximum of 20 backend network devices e g repeaters RDAC PC where network devices include a maximum of six trunked repeaters i e twelve Trunked Channels a maximum of twelve Revert repeaters i e 24 revert channels and two RDACs or similar applications A Capacity Plus channel mode supports more radios compared to a single repeater configuration for details see Estimating Loading For Capacity Plus on page 211 The ID of radios in Capacity Plus ranges from 1 to 65535 i e 16 bit and the ID of groups in Capacity Plus ranges from 1 to 254 i e 8 bit The Group ID of 255 is reserved for All Call When adding a new trunked repeater to a Capacity Plus system all the radios should be configured with the channels of the new repeater before the new repeater is connected to the Capacity Plus system Frequencies and Color Code Considerations As Capacity Plus is a single site trunking system all the repeaters should use different frequencies Their color code can be the same or different A Capacity Plus system has the ability to share RF channel s with other systems but it is necessary to ensure that all channels in all overlapping systems have a unique frequency pair and color code combination A Capacity Plus radio requires lists
336. mended 3007 240 180 Minimum Update Period sec 60 50 60 70 80 Number of Subscribers Figure 4 7 Minimum Location Update Period versus Number of Subscribers April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 221 4 4 5 6 Enhanced GPS Revert Loading amp Reliability The number of subscribers supported on an Enhanced GPS slot is a function of the window size derived from the size of the location data and the update rate Additionally the success rate of the location updates is also a function of the call duration on the selected primary channel and the repeater loading The following figures illustrates the relationship between these variables The curves in Figure 4 8 illustrate the average location update success rate against the number of subscribers for a 1 minute update rate per subscriber a 10 second call for the talkgroup per minute and 75 repeater loading If there are no talkgroup calls the subscribers would update 100 of the time as long as the number of subscribers are less than or equal to the maximum number of allocated reserved windows The maximum allocated reserved windows is the repeater loading However voice calls keeps a subscriber from sending location updates on its reserved slot Hence the subscriber makes a request to send in the data on the unreserved windows after the call Therefore in Figure 4 8 it is
337. message regardless of the channel s privacy setting the radio always tries to unscramble or decrypt the message If a radio is never required to receive protected messages then it should be provisioned with a key that is different than the key s used by the rest of the system Simply setting a channel to be privacy disabled does not stop the radio from receiving protected messages A radio receives a protected message correctly as long as it has the right key Therefore when one radio user on a privacy enabled channel transmits every radio regardless of its channel s privacy enabled or privacy disabled status will hear the transmission clearly if their provisioned Privacy Key is identical to that of the transmitting radio A radio user receiving a protected transmission sees the green LED blinking rapidly The receiving radio user should consider changing the privacy setting to match that of the call initiator when replying In case of Basic Privacy a system utilizes only one key and if all radios are privacy capable it is recommended that all radios are set to privacy enabled and equipped without the option to toggle the privacy settings by a radio user Since Basic Privacy does not cause any degradation in audio quality or decrease in performance there is no reason for the normal user to switch between non privacy and privacy Removing the option to toggle the setting from the radio user will safeguard against any complicated privacy mism
338. minute update and that scanning radios should NEVER use a value lower than 2 minutes April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 217 4 4 5 3 Data Application Retry Attempts and Intervals The interval a data application will retry to send a message and the number of retries it will send if the target does not respond is configurable in the external data applications like Location and Text Messaging The following table shows the default values provided External Data Number of Interval Time Period between Application Retries Retries Text Messaging 2 70 seconds Location Application 3 30 seconds It is recommended to not change the default values If this value is lowered too low messages may become unreliable when a user is on the system but will free up some bandwidth if the user is not available Increasing too high until it is past the default will increase the load on a channel although it may increase the probability of delivering a message 4 4 5 4 Optimize Data Application Outbound Message Rate Text Message and Location Applications both have the ability to set the outbound message rate The outbound message rate is defined as the interval in between subsequent messages sent by the applications to its connected control stations It is important to note that the Application Server is connected to up to four channels and is not aware of which channel is used to route a message It is the function
339. mits a registration message to its programmed ARS IP address e g 12 0 47 13 on one of the channels monitored by a control station the control station forwards that address to the Application Server through its network interface e g 192 168 11 2 The MCDD then automatically adds a route for that radio IP 12 0 47 13 and 13 0 47 13 to the 192 168 11 2 network interface Once that is done if a message from the Application Server needs to reach 12 0 47 13 or 13 0 47 13 the message is routed to the 192 168 11 2 network interface and therefore out the correct control station and correct channel that has registered radio 12045 This is how data messages are sent out on the correct channel for a radio Additional steps are required to route multicast traffic Multicast traffic is traffic destined for radio groups The routing table in the PC must be modified to allow for multicast traffic Please see the MCDD install manual for details Installation of the MCDD is not required in Capacity Plus 4 10 1 6 Application Server and Dispatcher Network Connectivity As described in previous chapters the Application Server can also be configured with a LAN connection to the Customer Enterprise Network CEN A few restrictions apply to the network configuration between the Application Server and the Dispatch clients In most customer cases the LAN interface on the Application Server is connected to their pre existing network The only requirement is that
340. mization For Capacity PIUS ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetttteeeees 225 4 4 6 1 Preference for Using a Frequency ceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 4 4 6 2 Improving Channel Capacity by Adjusting Hang Times 225 4 4 6 3 Call Priority in Capacity Plus Mode ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneees 226 4 4 6 4 Call Initiation in Capacity Plus Mode ccceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeees 226 4 5 Multiple Digital Repeaters in Standalone Mode cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 227 4 5 1 Overlapping Coverage Area csiccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenaaaaeeees 227 4 5 2 Color Codes in a Digital System 000 ceececeeeeee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaaaeeees 228 4 5 3 Additional Considerations for Color Codes cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettetetaeeees 229 4 6 Multiple Digital Repeaters in IP Site Connect MOde ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 230 4 6 1 System Capacity asi cet ictal cero ekana ekeke eee tgegelnwsat ne reelaedabepandewtbeoncntegussennte 230 4 6 2 Frequencies and Color Code Considerations cccccccceeseeseeeeeeeeees 230 4 6 3 Considerations for the Backend Network cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettetaeeees 231 4 6 3 1 Automatic Reconfiguration cccccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 232 4 6 3 2 Characteristics of Backend Network ccseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 4 6 4 Flow of Voice Data Control Messages cceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeee
341. mobile and portable radio portfolio includes models that are equipped with a built in GPS receiver The acquisition of location data is done by a GPS receiver inside the radio and is dependent on the GPS receiver receiving accurate signals from the earth orbiting Global Positioning System GPS satellites However the GPS receiver may not work well indoors or in environments where the sky is largely obscured Using the integrated data services capability of the MOTOTRBO system GPS equipped mobiles and portables are able to transmit their location coordinates over the radio system to a receiving application that displays the radios geographic locations on a high resolution map This third party receiving application is the second part of the system MOTOTRBO provides a location interface to third party location services applications For more information regarding third party applications please see Third Party Application Partner Program on page 129 April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 47 2 4 3 1 Performance Specifications GPS Transmitter Portable Mobile TTFF Time to First Fix Cold Start lt 2 minutes lt 1 minute TTFF Time to First Fix Hot Start lt 10 seconds Horizontal Accuracy lt 10 meters Note Accuracy specifications are for long term tracking 95th percentile values gt 5 satellites visible at a nominal 130 dBm signal strength The definitions for some of the te
342. mparison to Figure 4 10 shows that the average success rate improves dramatically because now there is a large number of unreserved slots to accommodate subscribers that miss their reserved window Note that the 75 loading case carry more updates than the 45 loading case hence the success rate has improved One minute update rate one 20 sec call per minute with 45 loading 102 00 100 00 98 00 gedi Window 5 i Window 6 94 00 Window 7 92 00 7 x gt lt Window 8 j 90 00 Window 9 Window 10 Average Success Rate 88 00 y 86 00 84 00 0 20 40 60 80 100 Radios Figure 4 11 One Minute Update Rate with a 20 second Call per Minute at 45 Loading April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 225 4 4 6 Loading Optimization For Capacity Plus 4 4 6 1 Preference for Using a Frequency The Capacity Plus system is designed to operate efficiently in a shared channel environment The term shared channel environment is typically used when more than one system uses the same frequency for communication within the same coverage area For system owners having licenses for shared use of frequencies it is recommended to set a preference level for the use of a frequency A repeater whose frequencies have lower interference from other system s should be given higher preference level over the repeater whose frequ
343. mpedance of the source can affect the audio level which may need to be adjusted accordingly When mixing the audio and signaling care must also be taken to determine the expected deviation of the signaling For example in LTR controllers the expected deviation of the LTR data is 800Hz Please refer to your controller s user manual which gives guidance on how to tune the data signal output to achieve adequate data deviation Similar to existing cables resistors can be placed on the cable to drop the level coming out from the controller on the order of 1 2 Vp p to the level expected by the transmit audio pin Once the resistor value is determined the audio and signaling signals can be mixed into a single wire that can be crimped onto the MOTOTRBO accessory connector Motorola Part Number PMLN5072_ The MTR3000 repeater has an audio transmit input and a data transmit input that can be used with the two outputs on the analog trunking controllers and community repeater panels tone panel 68007024085 April 2011 124 System Feature Overview 2 15 5 3 2 Zetron Controllers The following are the Zetron configurations needed that will enable Zetron controllers to interface with the MOTOTRBO repeater April 2011 MOTOTRBO Pin 1 Pin 3 Pin 7 Pin 10 Pin 11 Pin 12 Pin 13 Pin 14 Pin 15 lt 12VDC Pin 7 GND Pin 8 lt Squelch Pin 22 TX Audio gt Pin 11 TX Audio GND LTR TX Data gt gt 3 3k DISC GND
344. ms to no longer be backward compatible with older software versions All equipment must be upgraded for these features to perform correctly 2 5 1 Priority Sampling When scanning if some activity of interest is found the radio stops and switches to that channel If the activity of interest is incoming data addressed to the scanning radio an individual voice call or it is on a Priority 1 scan member scanning completely stops for the duration of the call But if the activity is a voice Group Call on a Priority 2 or a Non Priority scan member the radio continues to periodically scan higher priority scan members For example if the radio is receiving voice on a Non Priority scan member then the Priority 1 and Priority 2 scan members are scanned periodically In this case the order of scan will be Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 2 etc If the radio is receiving voice on a Priority 2 scan member then only the Priority 1 scan member is scanned periodically If a transmission of interest is found on the higher priority member the radio switches to that member to monitor the transmission If it is not of interest it returns to the previously monitored member Priority Sampling does not occur when transmitting Because the radio is currently receiving voice leaving the current scan member to scan a higher priority member will cause the radio to temporarily leave the current transmission This causes an audio hole in received audio
345. must also understand the details bandwidth and delay of the network link at each site and between sites For example if connecting sites have long distances between them the delay of the entire link needs to be considered Spanning continents connected via Satellite may introduce unacceptable delay But if the continents are connected via fiber optic there may not be any issues Also keep in mind that because traffic from one repeater is sent to every repeater the required bandwidth of the ISP link at one site is a function of the amount of other repeaters in the system Adding a repeater will increase the required bandwidth at all sites See Network Bandwidth Considerations on page 235 A repeater can be and is suggested to be behind a router and or a NAT and or a firewall Although not required it is highly suggested in order to protect against the undesired solicitations common over the public internet Although IP Site Connect will work through most off the shelf devices the following two router NAT firewalls have been validated and are therefore suggested for use e D Link EBR 2310 e CISCO PIX 501 As previously described peer to peer communications over the network can be optionally authenticated and are also encrypted end to end if enabled in the radios If this is not considered sufficient for a particular customer IP Site Connect supports the ability to work through a Secure VPN Virtual Private Network Secure VPN i
346. n This system planner is complementary to additional training and documentation including e Radio Customer Programming Software CPS and related training e System workshop system service training e Product specification sheets 68007024085 April 2011 2 Introduction 1 2 Software Version All the features described in the System Planner are supported by the radio s software version RO1 08 00 and above April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 3 SECTION 2 SYSTEM FEATURE OVERVIEW 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 MOTOTRBO Digital Radio Technology This section provides a brief overview of MOTOTRBO digital radio technology It addresses two of the primary benefits delivered by this technology spectral efficiency and improved audio performance Digital Radio Technology Overview The digital radio technologies employed by MOTOTRBO can be summarized as follows 2 slot TOMA hah V Wee yy header PEE a j re N f Stot 1 radio transmits Stot 1 radio Transmits waits spectrum et burst available to i 2 3 4 another radio Figure 2 1 MOTOTRBO Digital Radio Technology Stet 2 radio Section Figure 2 1 MOTOTRBO Digital Radio Technology is broken down into four parts which are described in the following subsections 1 Part One The Analog to Digital Conversion When a radio user presses the Push To Talk PTT button and begins speaking his voice is received by the radio m
347. n IP Site Connect System and others could be MOTOTRBO conventional channels or Analog conventional channels Impolite calls Capacity Plus supports impolite Emergency Call and impolite transmissions i e Group members can transmit over an ongoing call A new call always starts on an idle channel and therefore a radio does not start a non Emergency Call impolitely Talkaround mode A radio can have a talkaround personality but in Capacity Plus mode there is no talkaround option Monitoring of channels status Monitoring is important in a conventional system where a radio stays on a channel In Capacity Plus a radio moves from one Rest Channel to another Most of the Rest Channels are in an idle state and therefore monitoring is not necessarily needed Fragmentation of a Data Packet Capacity Plus does not fragment a data packet before transmitting over the air Thus the size of an IP datagram including IP and UDP headers should be less than the maximum size of the Packet Data Unit The value of the Packet Data Unit is a CPS programmable parameter with a maximum size of 1500 bytes Option Board If the Option Board feature is enabled for Capacity Plus then the feature is automatically enabled for all trunked and revert channels of a Capacity Plus system On a Capacity Plus personality the Option Board is not aware of the transmit or receive channel Additionally an Option Board does not use or create Virtual Personalities in a Capac
348. n consists of a PC referred to as the Application Server running the server software connected to the radio infrastructure via a mobile radio or control station The mobile radio is usually AC powered The mobile is configured as a control station therefore it routes all data to the Application Server Since this mobile is the radio gateway to the server it is configured to transmit and receive on a single channel The control station is programmed with a known radio ID so the field radios know how to contact the server The server and the control station connected via USB must be located in the center of the customer s coverage area since all field radios are expected to communicate with it There can only be one Application Server per system One key service offered by the server based configuration is radio presence notification The Presence Notifier is required to reside on the Application Server The purpose of the Presence Notifier is to track whether field radios are currently present on the system Upon power up or channel change the MOTOTRBO radio transmits a registration message to the control station connected to the Application Server where the Presence Notifier resides The Presence Notifier then informs other data applications that the radio is available to receive and transmit data messages Typically location applications require a server based configuration and the Presence Notifier to operate The Location Server applicati
349. n IP Site Connect system optionally offers authentication of all the packets sent between IP Site Connect devices Each packet has a 10 bytes long cryptographic signature The signature is created using Keyed Hash Message Authentication Code HMAC which is a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST standard The hashing is done using SHA 1 algorithm The HMAC uses a 20 bytes long symmetric keys and generates a 20 bytes long signature To reduce the bandwidth requirement over the backend network the 20 bytes long signature is truncated to 10 bytes before attaching to the packet Packet authentication prevents an attacker from using an impersonator as an IP Site Connect device in order to get access to the IP Site Connect system This feature if selected by a customer requires the customer to manually configure the same key to all the IP Site Connect devices Note that the IP Site Connect system does not support rekeying remotely The above authentication mechanism does not provide protection against the replay attacks Fora more secure authentication an IP Site Connect configuration should use Secure VPN routers to connect with the backend network Secure VPN routers can optionally provide confidentiality of all the messages including system messages between IP Site Connect devices control messages i e CSBK and voice or data headers A disadvantage of using Secure VPN Routers is that the IP Site Connect requires more inbound and outb
350. n a Group Call is received In step 3 below you will assign this Group Call again by name to the Transmit TX Contact Name attribute of a channel 2 In the RX Group Lists folder add a new group list and then add the Group Call you just created to be a member of the list The group list controls which groups a radio will hear when tuned to a selected channel For example if members of the Maintenance group should also be able to listen to other groups on the channel those other groups would be added to the RX Group List if members of the Maintenance group should only hear traffic related to their own group then only the Maintenance group would be added to the group list The group list should again be renamed to something intuitive in step 3 below you will assign this group list by name to the RX Group List attribute of a channel 3 Inthe channels menu each zone can contain up to 16 channels that can be mapped to the 16 position top selector knob of the portable radio or the relative channel number selections on a mobile Radio users that require more than 16 channels must organize them into multiple folders in CPS so that they can be accessed as zones in the radio menu Zones if used can and should also be given names In an appropriate folder create a new digital channel To fully define the channel you must assign the appropriate receive and transmit frequencies and also select the TDMA slot number Then ad
351. n analog radio transmits the repeater switches to analog mode to repeat the analog call However the repeater only repeats analog calls that are qualified by PL DPL TPL If a digital radio transmits then the repeater switches to digital mode to repeat the digital call While the repeater repeats one analog call at a time it can repeat 2 digital calls at a time one on each logical channel When a repeater repeats a new digital call that starts on one of the logical channels the repeater does not qualify any analog call including an Emergency Call until the digital call both the transmission and call hang time is over and the corresponding channel hang time has expired Upon the expiry of channel hang time only then does the repeater start qualifying both analog and digital calls simultaneously Similarly if an analog call is being repeated the repeater does not qualify any digital call including digital data and Emergency Calls on any of the two logical channels until the analog call is over and the corresponding hang time has expired Analog console device s are supported only when the repeater has not qualified an OTA digital call If an analog console device tries to key up the repeater when a digital call has been received over the air the analog call will be denied access The repeater notifies the console via a channel busy tone generated over the speaker and Rx audio pins on the 4 wire repeater interface Analog consoles do not have
352. n during a call e Radio to Phone switch The radio user finishes talking and dekeys then the phone user starts to talk e Phone to Radio switch The phone user talks while a radio user keys up and starts to talk e Radio to Radio switch The radio user finishes talking and dekeys while another radio user keys up immediately and starts talking This switch only takes place in talkgroup calls only To ensure a smooth switch and avoid voice truncation the Enhanced Channel Access feature is introduced to minimize the switching impact and to achieve the best overall user experience in all system configurations As a result only minimum additional Voice Access Time is introduced for the switches The performance parameters are summarized in the table below Phone Additional Voice Single Site IP Site Connect Capacity Plus AIEEE TIVES AES Min Mean Max Min Mean Max Min Mean Max Radio to Radio 60 210 360 60 210 360 60 210 360 All time figures are increases to existing Voice Access Time A phone call is clear regardless of whether privacy enhanced privacy is enabled in the radio or not Transmit Interrupt is also automatically disabled for the phone call When a radio is in a phone call there are visual ergonomic indications to show that the radio is currently in a phone call A text string and icon appearing on the radio display indicates that it is currently in a phone cal
353. n is to ensure that all the frequencies color code pairs of all the overlapping systems are unique a FA down Flup F2 down F2down F3 up 4 4 N 4 CC CC 5 8 F4 down F1 MY lt x is lt a Site 2 F8 down Site 3 System 2 Figure 4 17 Example of Two IP Site Connect Systems with Overlapping Coverage Areas Considerations for the Backend Network The backend network can be a dedicated network or an internet provided by an Internet Service Provider ISP ISPs provide a range of technologies such as dial up DSL typically ADSL Cable modem Broadband wireless access Canopy ISDN Frame Relay Satellite Internet access etc In some cases dedicated links or networks can be effectively used or deployed removing the monthly fees associated with public networks The backend network cannot be based on dial up connection due to small bandwidth or Satellite Internet access due to large delay A repeater has three network interfaces Ethernet USB and over the air A repeater uses its Ethernet port to communicate among them using IPv4 UDP Since UDP does not support confirmation an IP Site Connect system provides its own acknowledgement and retries mechanism for critical activities Note that the Ethernet port is not a default IP gateway of a repeater i e an IP datagram arrived from USB or over the air is not automatically routed to the Ethernet port It is not necessary to get a static I
354. n member will monitor it and land When the user replies the transmission will be returned through the repeater on whichever slot assigned to the scan member it was monitored on Depending on the configuration of the direct mode radio and its proximity to the repeater the transmission may or may not be monitored This can be managed by having different groups configured for each slot This ensures that each slot has unique identifiers besides just the slot number However this does not help if the subscriber in direct mode is out of range of the 68007024085 April 2011 70 System Feature Overview repeater This is why it is not good practice to transmit in direct mode in the RF range of the repeater Generally these scenarios can be avoided if Scan Lists are created with scan members that have unique receive parameters 2 5 4 Transmit Interrupt and Scan Some of the Transmit Interrupt features and scan can be used together However there are a few interactions that need to be taken into consideration as discussed in the following paragraphs Firstly since scan is not permitted when the radio is in an emergency mode of operation Emergency Voice Interrupt and scan do not have any direct interactions to consider because these two features are mutually exclusive However if a radio is in scan mode when the radio user initiates an emergency condition the radio first exits the scan mode of operation and then enters the emergency mode o
355. n supports the same number of radios supported by a single site configuration Note that an IP Site Connect configuration increases the coverage area and not the call capacity of a single site configuration Frequencies and Color Code Considerations The figure below shows an example of two IP Site Connect systems with overlapping coverage areas The frequencies and color code of repeaters should follow the following rules e The geographically adjacent repeaters of an IP Site Connect system should use different frequencies Their color code can be either same or different e If the frequencies of the geographically adjacent repeaters of two IP Site Connect systems are the same then their color codes should be different It is not advisable to keep the same frequencies because in areas of overlap there will be destructive interference Note that an IP Site Connect configuration does not support simulcast e A system may be sharing the channels with other systems over multiple sites It is possible that two systems named here as Sys1 and Sys2 may be using the same frequencies color code pair at two different sites say Site1 and Site2 During automatic site search Passive Site Search a Sys1 s radio at Site2 will find Sys2 s repeater and will stay on that channel This is not a desirable situation A way to avoid April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 231 vA IP Site Connect Site 1 2 down 4 6 3 this situatio
356. n the IPv4 routing table of the Server For more details on how to configure the IP routing table refer to the spreadsheet file MOTOTRBO Text Messaging Installation Procedures for Supporting MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus xls available only to customers of Motorola s MOTOTRBO Text Messaging application April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 275 SUx 10 S U x Conv CS1 10 C S 0 SERVER An IP msg to Server NAT Source 10 8 U x b 1 6 8 0 192 P C 5 Dest 11 C S 0 a LZ EEA p 4 IP Routing Table An Application i 192 P C 5 192 P C 5 192 P C 0 IP Routing Table I An IP msg to a SU7 or SU66 11 8 0 10 C S 0 i 192 P C 1 Source Any a Dest 10 S U 7 b or 10 S U 66 b IP Source 10 S U x IP Source 10 S U x IP Dest 11 C S 0 1 IP Dest 192 C S 5 IP Routing Table L2 Source SUX F IP Source 10 S U x L2 Dest CS0 IP Dest 192 086 Interface SUx WO SUisc Conv CS2 10 C S 0 192 P C 7 ee ore gules Source 10 S U x b Dest 11 C S 0 a 55 80 11 C S 0 192 P C 6 2 192 P C 8 a4 IP Routing Table moa A 11 C S 1 10 C S 0 CAI 192 P C 2 192 P C 6 A SU from set 1 Trunked CS3 10 C S 0 10 S U 7 An IP msg from Server NAT Source 11 C S 0 a Dest 10 S U 7 b 192 P C 3 192 P C 7 IP Source 11 C S 0 7 IP Source 11 C S 0 IP Source 192 P C 7 IP Dest 10 S U 7 IP Dest 10 S U 66 IP Dest
357. n though the source radio checks the channel at one site it does not mean there is no interference at another site Therefore a repeater will check for over the air interference before waking up and transmitting The repeater always acts with an Admit Criteria of Channel Free and has a configurable signal strength threshold Note that although one site may be busy the other non busy sites will continue with the call 2 2 3 1 Impolite Operation Admit Criteria of Always When configured for impolite operation a radio does not check for an idle channel prior to allowing a transmission From the user s perspective the radio simply transmits when the PTT is pressed However on a digital repeater channel the radio checks if the repeater is hibernating Transmission will not proceed if the repeater is hibernating and the radio is unable to wake it 68007024085 April 2011 22 System Feature Overview NOTE Itis very important to note that when a radio is utilizing impolite operation it is possible that it is transmitting on top of another user s transmission This causes RF contention at the target When RF contention occurs between digital transmissions it is impossible to predict which signal is usable If one transmission is much stronger than the other it is received instead of the weaker signal But in most cases the two transmissions on the same frequency and time slot results in both transmissions being unusable Thus it is
358. nal mode all location responses are sent over the repeater slot configured as Enhanced GPS revert The following two configurations are possible 1 One slot configured as Enhanced GPS Revert and another slot for voice and data In this configuration only location responses are sent over the Enhanced GPS Revert channel Voice text messages ARS and other data are sent over the other slot 2 Both slots configured for Enhanced GPS Revert This configuration is recommended if the number of subscribers sending location updates exceeds the capacity of one Enhanced GPS slot In this case a second repeater would be needed to support voice text messages ARS and other data 4 14 2 Capacity Plus Mode In Capacity Plus mode all location responses and ARS registration messages are sent over the repeater slot configured as Enhanced GPS revert A data revert repeater can be configured for Enhanced GPS revert and the following two configurations are possible via the CPS 1 One slot configured as Enhanced GPS Revert and another slot for Data Revert In this configuration GPS and ARS registration data are sent over the slot configured as Enhanced GPS revert All other data and voice either goes on the Data Revert slot or Capacity Plus Trunked Channels 2 Both slots configured for Enhanced GPS Revert This configuration is recommended if the number of subscribers sending location updates exceeds the capacity of the Enhanced GPS throughput of one slot
359. nalog 9 3 Hours Digital 13 Hours IMPRES Li ion 2200 mAh Battery Analog 13 5 Hours Digital 19 Hours The portable is available in two tiers e A keypad radio with display and e A non keypad radio with no display The portable is fully configurable via the Windows based CPS It can be programmed to allow access to all MOTOTRBO features and all channels within the system or can be simplified to only allow limited access The MOTOTRBO portable can truly be configured to cater to your customer s needs April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 147 3 1 2 1 1 User Interface Channel Selector Knob Antenna On Off Volume Control Knob Emergency Button LED Indicator ff I Universal Connector for Accessories Side Button 1 Display Push to Talk PTT Button a S L Menu Navigation Keys a i 03 Side Button 2 S o Side Button 3 ne am Keypad INS Front Button P1 6 Microphone u Speaker Figure 3 2 MOTOTRBO Portable Display Model Front Button P2 Channel Selector Knob q Antenna JG AE DA Emergency Button eee ap Universal Connector for Accessories OY O Speaker p Push to Talk PTT Button a a Microphone a po Side Button 2 _1 Side Button 3 I J On Off Volume Control Knob LED Indicator Side Button 1
360. ncy In MOTOTRBO systems the Emergency Revert 68007024085 April 2011 36 System Feature Overview Channel is configured in portable and mobile radio CPS at the Digital Emergency Systems settings The Capacity Plus system does not support a revert channel for emergency The start of an Emergency Call is announced over all busy channels This allows a listening radio that is interested in joining the Emergency Call to leave its channel and join the Emergency Call A radio is interested in an Emergency Call if the emergency group is either the Tx Group or is in the Rx Group list of the radio A radio listening to an Emergency Call e g e1 joins another Emergency Call e g e2 only if the e2 s group has a higher priority than the e1 s group The first priority is the Tx Group followed by any Rx Group in the Rx Group list of the radio The Capacity Plus system ensures that an Emergency Call should start on a channel where the users monitoring the Emergency group are present There are some behavior differences in software versions RO1 05 00 RO1 06 00 and RO1 07 00 This is shown in the following flowchart April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 37 R0O1 06 00 or later RO1 05 00 Emergency Call is transmitted impolitely over the ongoing All Call because Is All Call active all radios are on the channel where All Call is active Emergency Call is transmitted over the ongoing Emergency Call
361. nd battery life minimize time away from the Selected Channel and or to efficiently use frequency resources in these situations the radio can also be configured to disable the transmission of Location Update messages on a per channel basis by using the selection None It should be noted that a radio will be shown as present to the dispatcher when a radio is switched from a GPS enabled channel to a GPS disabled channel until the presence indication duration is exceeded To configure the radio to support location updates there are a few parameters that must be managed correctly How these parameters interact to dictate the radio s performance is shown in the table that follows These parameters are the radio wide GPS setting that resides in the General Settings CPS folder and the ARS and GPS Revert settings that are present for each channel defined in CPS In this case the channel being defined is titled Channel1 Also in the case where a GPS Revert Channel GPS1 is selected this requires that GPS1 has already been defined as a channel in CPS Channels Channels General Zone Zone Result Settings GPS Channel1 Channel1 ARS GPS Revert GPS Chip Disabled Not Enabled Not Enabled Not Selectable Presence Disabled Location Disabled GPS Chip Disabled Not Enabled Enabled Not Selectable Presence Enabled Location Disabled GPS Chip Enabled Enabled Not Enabled Not Selectable Presence Disabled Location Disabled
362. nd monitoring the channel If the target radio responds with an acknowledgement the initiator could then take additional action such as using the Remote Monitor command to activate the target radio s PTT In MOTOTRBO systems Radio Check is configured in portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio to use this function it must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings All MOTOTRBO radios will receive and respond to a Radio Check i e this feature cannot be turned off in the CPS 2 3 3 5 Call Alert The Call Alert feature allows a radio user to essentially page another user When a radio receives a Call Alert a persistent audible and visual alert is presented to the user The initiator of the Call Alert is also displayed If a user is away from his radio at the time of the reception the alert remains until the user clears the Call Alert screen If the user presses the PTT while the Call Alert screen is active he starts an Individual Call to the originator of the Call Alert For in vehicle applications this is often used in conjunction with the Horn and Lights option When a user is away from his vehicle a Call Alert can initiate the vehicle s horn and lights to sound and flash which notifies the user to return to the vehicle and call the originator In MOTOTRBO systems Call Alert is configured in portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio to use this function it must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings All MOTOTRBO radios
363. ndled like a different network interface to the Application Server When the MCDD sees a registration it updates the PC s routing table so that any data traffic for that radio is routed out the correct network interface and therefore through the correct control station and over the correct channel This allows data applications to simply transmit a data message to the radio and the MCDD takes care of the routing to the correct channel Any channel that supports data and needs to communicate to the Application Server needs a dedicated control station Internet NETWORK E mail 7 f ioy TX f1 digital IX f RX fi D SA TE RX fi i GPS Location f Dispatch N USB L q o o C t Text M Z MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU ustomer N e lessage Control Station digital mode Server 8 digital mode E Network pacai E a J 2 gt Text Message f Y Location Server 0 TX fe digital TX fz Dispatch CEN tocaton soner z RX f2 z RX fa Location 2 Dispatch 1 GPS Application Server USB i PC Terminal Y MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO su Control Station digital mode y digital mode Ui Figure 3 15 MOTOTRBO Radios in Two Channel Digital Direct Mode Server Based Configuration with Remote Dispatchers 68007024085 April 2011 164 System Components
364. ne Line R2 Satellite Receiver Phone Line R2 Satellite Receiver R2 Phone Line Satellite Receiver Figure 3 1 Satellite Receiver Connections Within a Voting System 68007024085 April 2011 144 System Components and Topologies 3 1 1 4 Radio Control Station The MOTOTRBO Control Station is based on the MOTOTRBO Mobile except that it is configured to be the RF link from the data Application Server to the repeater and other radios It is integrated with an AC power supply and appropriate housing to be placed on a desk Since it is the radio gateway to the server it is configured to transmit and receive on a single channel It is programmed with a known radio ID so that field radios know how to contact the server In a MOTOTRBO system there can be up to four control stations connected via four USB ports each control station communicates through a separate logical channel In most cases the Control Station is externally controlled by the PC It requires no user interaction once programmed However if a situation requires the use of a control station to transmit voice it is capable of transmitting voice as well A Capacity Plus configuration with Data Revert Channels requires a set of control stations to route data from radios to the Server and another set of control stations to route data from the Server to radios Control stations operating in conventional mode called Revert Cont
365. nel access between analog and digital transmissions As more digital radios start replacing the analog radios distribute some of the digital radios to use the other logical channel It is important to note that heavy users of one category analog or digital will occupy the channel longer than the users in the other category when they are in a polite system configuration It is recommended to keep digital channel hang time to the minimum or as low as possible to allow fair channel access between analog and digital calls However with a smaller channel hang time the system access time for digital calls may increase due to the fact that the radios need to wake up the repeater before calls 68007024085 April 2011 308 System Design Considerations 4 18 Configurable Timers The following is a list of timers that are used to synchronize communication in the radio system The values of these timers can be configured through the CPS Timer Name Description Notes TX Preamble Duration Preamble is a string of bits added in front of a data message or control message Text Messaging Location Messaging Registration Radio Check Private Call etc before transmission This preamble prolongs the message in order to reduce the chances of the message being missed by the receiving radio The Transmit TX Preamble Duration sets the duration of the preamble This duration needs to be increased as the number of scan members increases
366. network and may not arrive at that same regular interval at the destination repeater The difference between when the packet is expected and when it is actually received is called Jitter To overcome the effect of jitter the IP Site Connect system employ a Jitter Buffer of fixed 60 milliseconds If a packet does not arrive at a destination repeater within the 60 ms after the expected time then the repeater assumes the packet is lost replays a special erasure packet and discards the late arriving packet Because a packet loss affects only 60 ms of speech the average listener does not notice the difference in voice quality Thus a jitter of more than 60 ms degrades the audio quality 4 6 3 2 3 Packet Loss Packet loss in IP based networks is both common and expected To transport voice bursts in timely manner IP Site Connect system cannot use reliable transport mechanisms i e confirmed packets and therefore while designing and selecting the backend network it is necessary to keep packet loss to a minimum The IP Site Connect system responds to periodic packet loss by replaying either a special packet in the case of voice or the last received packet in the case of data In the case of voice the ongoing call ends if six consecutive packets do not arrive within 60 ms of their expected arrival time In the case of data the repeater waits for the expected number of packets as per the data header before ending the call April 2011 68007024085
367. nfigure the maximum value of an initial random delay for ARS registration via the CPS This field is called ARS Initialization Delay and has a range of 0 minutes to 4 hours with a default value of 0 minutes A value of O minutes defines that the ARS registration message will be sent out between 5 seconds and 15 seconds and this feature is essentially not delayed 5 seconds to 15 seconds was the existing delay in ARS registration prior to RO1 07 00 If a user selects a value of 30 minutes then the subscriber randomly chooses a time between 5 seconds and 30 minutes and sends the April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 57 ARS when this random time elapses This randomization of time between different subscribers sending the ARS reduce ARS collisions at power on When to use e This feature can be used with Enhanced GPS to avoid collisions among large number of subscribers sending ARS messages in a short period of time However the user must enable Persistent LRRP Request in the CPS to ensure that GPS data is still sent even if ARS is delayed e This feature can be used in any scenario where large number of subscribers power on in a short period of time and delay in ARS registration message is permitted When not to use e This feature should not be used in situations where ARS registration message is immediately needed For example text messaging from server to subscriber may not work properly if this fea
368. nfigured with either an emergency button or an external switch to initiate an emergency The radio needs to be programmed on how to contact a Supervisor based on the selected configuration Alternatively this radio can be programmed to give a non persistent indication display and or audio that the current call is an Emergency Call This indicates to the user that he should avoid interfering with the call taking place The majority of users in a system will be considered Emergency Initiators A Monitoring Supervisor is a user that needs to know when an emergency occurs but is not the individual identified to handle and acknowledge emergencies This user s radio will provide an indication that an Emergency Alarm has been received and provide an indication that an Emergency Call is taking place This user does not transmit an acknowledgement to the Emergency Alarm The Emergency Alarm will be persistent on the Monitoring Supervisor s radio until manually cleared Duplicate attempts of the same Emergency Alarm will not restart the Emergency indication There can be multiple Monitoring Supervisors per group A Monitoring Supervisor may also be an Emergency Initiator An Acknowledging Supervisor is the user specifically identified to respond to received emergency situations This user s radio provides an indication that an Emergency Alarm has been received and provides an indication that an Emergency Call is taking place In addition to the indication
369. ng of acronyms that are applicable to MOTOTRBO systems and products Acronym APP COTS CWID DMM DTP DTMF ECA IPSC LAC OTA PBX PSTN TOT WAC Definition Analog Phone Patch Commercial Off the Shelf Continuous Wave Identification CWID Dynamic Mixed Mode Digital Telephone Patch Dual Tone Multi Frequency Enhanced Channel Access IP Site Connect Local Area Channel Over the Air Private Branch Exchange Public Switched Telephone Network Time out Timer Wide Area Channel MOTOROLA otorola Solutions Inc 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg Illinois 60196 U S A OTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and he Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2006 2011 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved ay 2011 www motorola com mototrbo ao IAAI 68007024085 E
370. nges prior to having to send the ID mixed with analog repeat audio This feature is disabled by the repeater if the value is set to 255 in The station will generate a Continuous Wave Identification Analog mode This CWID mixed with analog audio when the repeater is feature is also disabled repeating analog signals or is in analog hang time and the Py the repeater if it is in Mix Mode programmed mix mode timer has expired This feature Digital or in Dynamic Timer should be set to a period longer than the TX Interval to Mixed Mode allow the station the opportunity to send a CWID by itself at This feature is not the end of a set of user radio exchanges rather than having applicable to digital to send the ID mixed with analog repeat audio repeater operation as CWID will not be generated while digital repeat is in progress Sets the duration that the radio waits after a Push to Talk PTT button press before it starts transmitting the Motorola Data Communication MDC signaling system data packet e g preamble bit sync and data When This feature is Pretime communicating via a repeater system or console this supported in Analog feature allows the repeater to stabilize before the radio mode only starts transmitting the data Additionally this timer gives scanning radios time to land on the channel prior to the reception of MDC data April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 311 mar D
371. nism and a tool to remotely manage repeaters The tool called RDAC receives alarms from all the repeaters helps in diagnosis of repeaters and provides some controls over the repeaters When operating in Capacity Plus Mode MOTOTRBO trunks the logical channels of multiple MOTOTRBO repeaters operating in digital repeater mode at the same location This allows the radios to share the logical channels resulting in less waiting time to access the system and increased channel capacity for a given quality of service Another advantage is that the probability of all channels being busy at the same instant is low therefore the probability of a call being blocked is lower than when only one channel can be accessed Capacity Plus is a single site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO system In a Capacity Plus configuration all the idle radios i e radios neither receiving nor transmitting are on an idle channel called the Rest Channel Therefore a new call always starts on the Rest Channel At the start of a call the Rest Channel repeater selects one of the idle channels as the new Rest Channel informs the radios on the current Rest Channel about the new Rest Channel converts the current Rest Channel to a traffic channel and starts repeating the bursts sent by the radio The radios that are not April 2011 April 2011 System Feature Overview participating in the call i e destination of the call is not of their interest move to the
372. nly Mixed with Audio BSI being sent in scenarios where the repeater is keyed for two minutes If the Exclusive BSI Timer is enabled and the Mixed with Audio BSI is disabled it is possible that during periods of heavy use the BSI will not be generated within the configured time period For analog it is recommended that the Mixed with Audio BSI is enabled at all times Since Mixed with Audio does not operate in digital mode or in Dynamic Mixed Mode it is possible that during extended periods of high activity the repeater never has a chance to de key and would therefore never have a chance to send BSI This is more likely on a highly loaded GPS only repeater This should be combated by lowering the traffic on the channel or by lowering the subscriber inactivity timer SIT in the repeater This de keys the repeater quicker between transmissions and provide a higher chance of de key and therefore a higher chance of sending Exclusive BSI in the desired time frame Since Exclusive BSI is interruptible in analog mode a situation may arise where extended periods of high activity may cause the repeater to continually de key attempt BSI and then be interrupted by another inbound transmission The de keying and re keying of the repeater causes the hold off timer to be reset and the Mixed with Audio BSI is never triggered unless a particular transmission lasts over two minutes In this case it is recommended that the hangtime be increased so that the repea
373. nnel and a local channel and the last repeater has two local channels The routers are not utilizing Secure VPN 175 kbps ae i repeater Local Area Network Router Firewall NAT or Router WAC Wide Area Channel LC Local Channel RDAC Remote Diagnostics and Control Repeater 5 Figure 4 19 Example System for Calculating Bandwidth Requirements without Secure VPN Let us start with Repeater 1 Repeater 1 is an Master and has two wide area channels The first wide area channel has three peers and the second wide area channel has two peers Note that since Repeater 4 and Repeater 5 have local area channels these are not considered wide area channel peers It is also important to remember that a peer does not include the device currently being calculated Each calculation provides enough bandwidth to support an RDAC command during times of high activity This assumes that only one RDAC command occurs at a time and is not utilized often If it is expected that multiple RDAC applications will be performing commands on repeaters often and simultaneously one might wish to increase the bandwidth to support these types of activities The detailed bandwidth calculation for Repeater 1 is as follows Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 1 3 x 15 kbps 45 kbps Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 2 2 x 15 kbps 30 kbps 68007024085 April 2011 238 System Desi
374. nnels for transmission This increases the probability of a successful transmission Additionally this increases the reliability of the transmission when a revert repeater is down as the radio automatically looks for the next repeater A radio uses the revert channels ina round robin fashion distributing the load of data transmission fairly between the channels There is at least one Trunked Control Station which is used by the Application Server to send a data message to a radio A Trunked Control Station has the Capacity Plus software installed and follows the Rest Channel as the Rest Channel changes There may be more than one Trunked Control Stations in a Capacity Plus system The required number depends on the number of messages from the Application Server to radios It is recommended to use a Trunked Control Station for every 20 messages of 50 byte or character size payload per minute 68007024085 April 2011 274 System Design Considerations To avoid misconfiguration the CPS does not allow programming a trunked and revert channels in the same list The CPS only performs channel check but not actual frequency check Thus while configuring the frequencies for the system caution must be exercised to not use the same frequency for a revert channel and a Trunked Channel A Capacity Plus system can have more than one Trunked Control Station therefore a fair distribution of data packets among the Trunked Control Stations is required For
375. nnels one for transmission the other for reception April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 15 68007024085 When operating in Analog Repeater Mode MOTOTRBO operates similar to existing analog repeaters by supporting one voice path transmit and receive on one pair of physical channels and can be configured to operate in 25 kHz channel bandwidth systems and or 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth systems When operating in Digital Repeater Mode MOTOTRBO uses a pair of physical channels configured for 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth Through the use of Time Division Multiple Access TDMA technology and the synchronization provided by the repeater MOTOTRBO splits each 12 5 kHz channel one transmit and one receive into two independent time slots or logical channels within the 12 5 kHz physical channel bandwidth This allows the user to assign voice or data traffic to either of the time slots independently To the end user this means they now have two voice or data channels that can be managed independently instead of one These two logical channels two time slots can transmit and receive independently of each other When operating in Dynamic Mixed Mode DMM MOTOTRBO uses a pair of physical channels configured for 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth for digital operation and 25 kHz and or 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth for analog operation The repeater dynamically switches between analog and digital modes based on the call it receives from radios If a
376. not for them This can slow down scanning For single site and IP Site Connect modes the revert channel must be set to Selected on the radio used as the control station It is not recommended to use a portable as a control station but if a portable is used as a control station then battery saver mode should be disabled since the Location Update messages will not be preceded with preambles Voice data or control messages that are sent to an radio on the GPS Revert Channel will not be received The radio is only on the GPS Revert Channel to transmit location updates and it DOES NOT qualify activity on this channel If group data is to be supported on a system the inclusion of preambles should be added to minimize the occurrence of the group data message being missed while an radio is on the GPS Revert Channel Avoid situations where a large number of subscribers are powered on in a relatively short period of time as this causes a flood of registration messages that impacts the voice quality of service on the Selected Channel during the registration process See GPS Revert and Loading on page 218 for recommendations on minimizing impact when using Motorola applications In order to minimize users from inadvertently changing a radio to the GPS Revert Channel it is recommended that the GPS Revert Channel s is placed in a different zone than the primary voice and data channel s 68007024085 System Design Considerations 299
377. nsed channels for professional and commercial users April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 5 2 1 2 Spectrum Efficiency via Two Slot TDMA 2 1 2 1 Frequencies Channels and Requirements for Spectrum Efficiency A radio communications channel is defined by its carrier frequency and its bandwidth The spectrum of available carrier frequencies is divided into major bands such as 800 900 MHz VHF and UHF and the majority of licensed channels in use today have widths of either 25 kHz or 12 5 kHz As the airwaves have become increasingly crowded new standards and technologies that allow more radio users to share the available spectrum in any given area are needed The demand for greater spectral efficiency is being driven in part by regulatory agencies In the U S for example the Federal Communications Commission FCC requires manufacturers to offer only devices that operate within 12 5 kHz VHF and UHF channels by 2011 By the year 2013 all VHF and UHF users are required to operate in 12 5 kHz channels The next logical step is to further improve the effective capacity of 12 5 kHz channels While there is no current mandate requiring a move to 6 25 kHz such discussions are on going at the FCC and other agencies It s only a matter of time before the ability to carry two voice paths in a single 12 5 kHz channel also known as 6 25 kHz equivalent efficiency becomes a requirement in 800 900 MHz VHF and UHF bands Presently FCC
378. nsmit Interrupt System Design Considerations Transmit Interrupt is a very powerful feature it is capable of remotely dekeying a radio that is transmitting interruptible voice Hence limiting access to these features only to responsible and well trained radio users is important If a radio operates on a channel that supports Direct Mode Transmit Interrupt features then the TX Interrupt Direct Mode Compatibility CPS field should be enabled This is necessary to minimize potential collisions on the channel during a Direct Mode interruptible voice transmission This field must be enabled in the CPS both for Direct Mode channels where interruptible voice transmissions may be present and Repeater Mode channels where interruptible voice transmissions may be made by some radios in Talkaround Mode However it is not necessary to enable this field for Repeater Mode channels where Talkaround mode is not supported by any radio Interruptible Radios The first consideration associated to the Transmit Interrupt features is determining which radios voice transmissions should be interruptible For consistent behavior the recommendation is that all radios operating on a channel should use interruptible voice transmission However it is desirable in some applications to provide a small number of radios e g normally supervisor radios that are not interruptible This sets up a system where supervisors have the ability to interrupt non supervisor
379. nstalled on the PC These configurations are commonly used in vehicles or on desktops that do not have LAN connections Since they can run on AC power or off the in vehicle battery mobile radios are usually used for these applications though a portable can also be used Note that the radio can be configured to route incoming text messages to itself or to the PC but not both Text Message Client RX ft 7 digital RX fi Text Message Client fi TX f1 igi d TX f1 TMC f TMC TM TM USB USB Mobile PC MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU Mobile PC Terminal digital mode digital mode Terminal Figure 3 8 MOTOTRBO Radios in digital mode Text Messaging In Multiple Direct Mode 3 2 1 1 2 Telemetry Commands in Direct Mode Below are some basic telemetry configurations each with a quick description TX fi 5 gt TX fi RX f1 RX f1 m EE a Output Telemetry Device Customer Provided MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 9 Send Telemetry Command from MOTOTRBO Radio to Another MOTOTRBO Radio to Toggle an Output Pin April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 159 In the first basic configuration a portable radio is programmed with a button that sends a pre configured telemetry command over the air to toggle a mobile radio s output GPIO pin The GPIO pin
380. nterfering with the green repeater Figure 4 21 An Example of Interference at Transmit Frequency April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 245 4 6 8 Migration from Single Site Systems The hardware of radios both portables and mobiles and repeaters of MOTOTRBO s single site system are fully compatible with the IP Site Connect configuration To migrate to IP Site Connect system the customer is required to update the software of repeaters and reconfigure them Some of the features of the single site radios may work in the IP Site Connect system but it is highly recommended that the software of the radios should also be updated Data applications of single site configuration are fully compatible with the IP Site Connect configuration 4 6 9 Migration from an Older IP Site Connect System IP Site Connect repeaters provide a robust migration for upcoming software versions for repeaters IP Site Connect repeaters exchange their respective link protocol version information and validate interoperability support when they detect repeaters having different firmware software versions loads For example assume an IP Site Connect system running on software version RO1 05 00 is being upgraded to R0O1 06 00 The upgraded RO1 06 00 repeater initiates the discovery exchanges link protocol version information with the R0O1 05 00 repeaters and synchronizes the protocol versions for optimal repeater operations While the repeater s versioned
381. o user to carry a one to one conversation that is only heard by the two parties involved For example an employee may use a Private Call to privately alert a specific manager about a security incident rather than placing a Group Call that would be heard by the whole group Though Private Calls utilize the signaling capabilities in MOTOTRBO systems to govern which radios are allowed to participate the use of a Private Call does not necessarily imply the use of encryption or scrambling Private Calls can be configured as confirmed or unconfirmed on a per channel basis For confirmed Private Calls the calling radio transmits a short control signal message to the target radio This signaling verifies the presence of the target radio before being allowed to start the call The receiving user does not need to manually answer this signal but rather the receiving radio automatically responds to the setup request Once the receiving radio replies to the setup request the initiating radio sounds a Talk Permit tone and starts the call The receiving radio sounds a Private Call indication to the user prior to relaying the received voice Once a Private Call is set up subsequent transmissions do not require the call setup messaging For unconfirmed Private Calls the calling radio does not transmit any control signaling before being allowed to start the call Although there is no confirmation the radio is present on the system an audible indication from t
382. o emergency no automatic roaming occurs This is primarily due to the fact that the emergency revert channels may not be on the same logical channel and the emergency handlers may not be the same It is not desirable for a user to automatically leave one emergency handler and switch to another without notification A radio will perform an Active Site Search using the selected personality s roam list when the emergency is first initiated if the revert channel is not available Once on the revert channel only Manual Site Roam is available In other words if a user enters emergency and then roams out of range of the revert channel the radio does not automatically roam even if the user presses the PTT When a Manual Site Roam is initiated while reverted the radio performs an Active Site Search using the selected personality s roam list When a new site is found due to a roam while in emergency the emergency process restarts on the new site similar to manually changing the dial position if the new home is provisioned for revert If the new home is not provisioned as revert the emergency process does not restart since the radio never left the wide area channel It is assumed that the original target of the emergency is still monitoring since the source never left the wide area channel The radio also assumes that emergency handling configuration outside of revert is the same across the wide area channel The radio reverts if the new home site
383. o hang up the phone patch from the radio system and is always required for most of the APP boxes The multi digit release code is optional and only used to limit who can hang up a phone call when required e Multi digit access prefixes and multi digit release codes can be linked within most phone patches This allows phone calls that are started with a particular access code to only be April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 253 hung up on with the linked de access code This is especially useful for Group Phone Calls since any user can attempt to hang up a phone call Utilization of a particular access code for group calls that is linked to a de access code most Radio Users don t have will limit who can hang up on a Group Phone Call e Phone Usage TOT This defines the maximum duration of a phone call If the phone call lasts longer than this timer the APP box ends the call automatically It is recommended to configure this timer appropriately according to the customer s phone usage e Mobile inactive timer If there is no radio activity for a period longer than the mobile inactive timer the APP box ends the phone call automatically It is recommended to configure this timer appropriately according to the customer s phone usage e Go ahead tone The phone user hears this tone when the radio user de keys If this tone is provided by the APP box it is recommended to enable this option to improve the phone user s exp
384. o parameters e g Key Identifier with the voice or data payload A voice message in case of Basic Privacy neither requires any modification in the payload nor any additional headers Therefore the System Access Time and the audio quality of a Basic privacy protected voice is same as that of an unprotected voice Enhanced Privacy uses multiple keys and a random number to ensure that the encryption data is different for each data message and each superframe of a voice message This requires transporting crypto parameters e g key Identifier Initialization Vector with the voice or data payload A voice message in the case of Enhanced Privacy requires an additional header and replaces some of the least important bits of the voice payload with the Initialization Vector The additional header increases the System Access Time except when Talk Permit Tone is enabled in repeater mode where the additional header replaces one of the normal voice headers The replacement of payload bits reduces the voice quality Note that the reduction in voice quality is barely noticeable 68007024085 April 2011 88 2 70 System Feature Overview In case of both Basic and Enhanced Privacy a data message requires an additional header to distinguish between an unprotected data message and a protected data message In case of Enhanced Privacy the additional header is also used to transport crypto parameter This reduces the data throughput For example a typical
385. o transmit analog and digital calls To support DMM feature in the repeater the following design rules have been laid out 1 4 17 1 Once a call type analog or digital has been qualified the repeater will not try to qualify another call type until the current call is complete including the call hang time hang and channel hang time For digital calls the hang time needs to be expired on both logical channels Analog call type includes an over the air OTA call or any operation PTT pin knockdown on the 4 wire Analog Repeater Interface ARI trying to access the repeater Analog console device s are supported only when the repeater has not qualified an OTA digital call An audible alert channel busy tone is generated over the speaker and Rx audio pins on the 4 wire repeater interface to indicate that the channel is busy and that the console access has been denied Only PL DPL TPL squelch type repeat is supported in MOTOTRBO repeater as CSQ repeat is not supported However if the receive squelch type is configured to CSQ the received audio is sent over the Rx audio accessory pin for community repeater operation To ensure proper Dynamic Mixed Mode operation only exclusive CWID transmission is supported in MOTOTRBO repeater operating in Dynamic Mixed Mode while mixed CWID is not supported in order to be compliant with the digital mode of operation Furthermore the exclusive CWID transmission cannot be interrupted by either OTA o
386. oaming RSSI Threshold is too low the radio will remain on a low signal strength home site even though there might be a stronger site available If the Roaming RSSI Threshold is too high the radio will be roaming in full coverage of a repeater and causing late entry when not required Figure 2 14 shows the impact of the Roaming RSSI Threshold value in relationship to the good coverage line dotted which most system coverage is designed to meet Note that the Roaming RSSI Threshold is a negative number therefore a high value is 80dBm and a low value is 120dBm The colored area is where the radio would roam Figure 2 14 Roaming Triggered by Roaming RSSI Threshold Value The default value of the Roaming RSSI Threshold is 108dBm It can be programmed for anything between 80dBm and 120 dBm A value of 108dBm is approximately 80 of the good coverage Therefore roaming will occur in the outer 20 of coverage The default value is acceptable for most configurations but may not be optimal in a some particular configurations Before setting the Roaming RSSI Threshold one must consider the customer s site configuration Consider the following four basic site configurations 1 Dense Overlapping Coverage Urban This type of coverage consists of dense sites with generous overlap This coverage type is often found in large cities or highly populated areas Overlapping sites utilize different frequencies Non overlapping sites may share frequencies
387. of all trunked and revert channels This makes it necessary to reprogram all the radios when a frequency is added to the system If a Capacity Plus system is to be expanded in the future and if these frequencies are known then it is recommended to keep all future frequencies in the trunked list Keeping additional trunked frequencies in the radio marginally slows down the radio operations when the radio is powered on or when the radio comes out of fade But this prevents the need to reconfigure all the radios when new repeaters are added If a Capacity Plus repeater needs to be removed from service for an upgrade or for repair there is no need to reconfigure the radios The MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus system can still operate as long as there is one Capacity Plus repeater functioning in the system Additionally there is no need to power down the whole MOTOTRBO system while removing or adding a repeater in the Capacity Plus system The above recommendation is also true for revert channels but with a condition A radio may experience delay in transmitting data over revert channels During this delay a radio may miss a call taking place on the Trunked Channel April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 247 4 7 3 Considerations for the Backend Network A Capacity Plus system requires a backend network if it has more than one repeater The backend network for Capacity Plus is a Local Area Network In the simplest and most common configurati
388. oftware versions prior to RO1 06 00 to software version RO1 06 00 or later and provision with the two channels described above The channel with all Transmit Interrupt features disabled is then used during the upgrade e For systems that use a repeater the repeater may be upgraded to be Transmit Interrupt capable at any time Finally once all radios have been upgraded to software version RO1 06 00 or later the channel with the Transmit Interrupt features enabled is used by all radios on the system 2 3 3 Digital Signaling Features We have already described how digital calls utilize digital vocoding and error correction coding processes and that a given digital call occupies a single logical channel frequency and TDMA time slot Within a given time slot the digital call is organized into voice information and signaling information Included in the signaling information is an identifier used to describe the type of call that is transmitted within the time slot e g Group Call All Call or Private Call Signaling information also includes identification information and or control information which is used to notify listeners on a voice call of system events and status e g the ID of the transmitting radio and the group ID Because this information is repeated periodically during the course of the call this embedded signaling allows users to join a voice transmission that is already in progress and still participate in the call This is ref
389. oice call can take place at any given time although this does allow for data transmission to occur at the same time on the different slots of a repeater Furthermore if two radios transmit at the same time on different slots some of the radios will scan to one slot and some will scan to the other slot It is not possible to predict the distribution since all radios are scanning Also note that while scanning the probability April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 215 of missing a voice header and entering a call late entry increases therefore missed audio may occur Because of these drawbacks it is highly recommended to break users into at least two unique groups and distribute them across slots and only use this scanning strategy if completely necessary 4 4 5 2 Minimize Location Periodic Update Rate The high usage location profile defined assumes that every user on the channel has location capability and uses a 1 minute refresh rate In actual fact if every user actually has a 1 minute refresh rate this increases the traffic loading tremendously It is recommended that users be configured to use a 10 minute update and to only increase individual radios to a 1 minute update rate during emergencies or special situations Although each customer scenario may be different knowing a user s location every 10 minutes is usually considered sufficient If a user reports an emergency his location update rate can be increase
390. omer Provided Figure 3 22 MOTOTRBO Radios in Digital Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with Telemetry Functions In the first basic configuration a portable radio is programmed with a button shown by the pointing finger above that sends a preconfigured telemetry command over the air on the second time slot to toggle a mobile radio s output GPIO pin The GPIO pin is connected to external hardware that detects the closure and turns on a light shown by a light bulb above This configuration can be extended to such things as remotely opening door locks turning on pumps or switching on sprinklers Another application might be to combine the voice from the radio s external audio lines a relay closure and a public announcement system to remotely make announcements over the intercom from your portable radio This second basic configuration is a mobile configured on the second time slot connected to customer supplied external telemetry hardware shown by the door icon in lower right corner detects a closure that signifies a door has been opened Upon detecting the GPIO pin as active it sends a pre configured Text Status Message to a particular portable radio The portable radio displays Door Opened to the user as a popup alert This basic configuration can be used at remote locations to detect a variety of sensors such as water levels door and window intrusions or even motion sensors Combining the first and second configuration the user can
391. on April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 2 16 4 Available Levels of Partnership 135 The below list briefly details the different levels of partnership available to third party developers who wish to join the Third Party Application Partner Program Level of Partnership Registered User Description Provided access to non proprietary documents For developers looking for general information with no specific application planned Licensed Developer Provided access to non proprietary documents and additional access to Application Development Kits ADKs Requires License Agreement Level 1 Vendor capability assessment For new developers of developers with one time applications planned Application Partner Provided access to non proprietary documents Application Development Kits ADKs and additional access to Motorola s Marketing Support and User Forums access to use the Motorola logo and listed as a Motorola partner on the MOTODEV website Requires License Agreement and accreditation by regional ADP manager Level 2 Vendor capability assessment For developers with proven applications Level of Partnership Registered User Description Provided access to non proprietary documents For developers looking for general information about the partner program available applications and solutions and the process on How to become a Par
392. on an Ethernet Switch is used to connect all repeaters To add a remote RDAC connect the Ethernet Switch to a Router see section 3 2 3 1 4 for a list of recommended devices This router is connected to either a dedicated network or to the Internet provided by an Internet Service Provider Although Capacity Plus works with most off the shelf devices the following Ethernet Switch is validated and suggested for use e HP Procurve 2510 24 J9019B A repeater has three network interfaces Ethernet USB and over the air A repeater uses its Ethernet port to communicate with other network devices using IPv4 UDP Since UDP does not support confirmation Capacity Plus provides its own acknowledgement and retry mechanism for critical activities The Ethernet port is not the default IP gateway of the repeater An IP datagram that arrives from USB or from over the air is not automatically routed to the Ethernet port Only the Master repeater needs a static IPv4 address Other Capacity Plus devices may have either static or dynamic IPv4 addresses Dynamic IPv4 addresses are allocated by a DHCP server The dynamic IPv4 addresses may change every time the Capacity Plus device powers on or periodically every few hours To enable the use of dynamic addresses select the DHCP option in the repeater codeplug via the CPS The lease time of the IPv4 address from the DHCP server should be kept as long as possible A change in the IPv4 address of a device causes a s
393. on a Rest Channel then the radio is either not within the coverage area of the repeater or the repeater cannot transmit due to interference by other systems or a failure The radio then starts searching for a new Rest Channel The interval of periodic transmissions of the system status messages can be selected within certain limits by an authorized technician There are two points to consider Amore frequent beacon transmission helps a radio detect the unavailability of the Rest Channel faster and thus reduces the downtime caused by interference from other systems and improves capacity Hence it is recommended to keep the beacon interval at the default value e Ifthe system incorporates a shared channel causing interference to other systems the default value of the beacon interval can be increased 4 7 6 Plan for Talkaround Mode In Capacity Plus a MOTOTRBO radio does not support Talkaround To ensure a communication channel is available when the Capacity Plus system is completely shut down or when a radio has moved out of the coverage area it is recommended to program at least one common channel in Talkaround mode i e at least one of the channel knob position should be programmed for Talkaround mode The Talkaround mode configuration is useful when the Capacity Plus system fails or the radio is out of coverage area All that a user needs to do is to switch to Talkaround personality The radio user may define their own protocol for w
394. on interval may not be an issue for users on foot unless the sites are very close like in the Multi Floor Coverage example In this case a user in an elevator can move between sites at a very high rate A one minute interval may cover the entire duration of an elevator ride from the first floor to the top Here it is recommended to keep the beacon interval in the range of 20 seconds Note that a beacon transmit ratio of a 5 may not be achievable for systems with a high number of repeaters In this case the designer may either decide to abandon the target beacon transmit ratio since in building coverage usually does not propagate very far or have neighbors to interfere with or lower the beacon duration to only cover the max number of overlapping sites a radio may ever see The table below is the recommended beacon duration and beacon interval 8 beacon transmit ratio for a varying number of sites The default value is a 4 32 second Beacon Duration with a 60 second Beacon Interval Number of Sites in Beacon Duration Beacon Interval Wide Area System sec sec 2 0 72 10 3 1 92 30 4 3 12 40 5 4 32 60 6 5 52 70 7 6 72 90 8 7 92 100 9 9 12 120 10 10 32 130 11 11 52 150 12 12 72 160 13 13 92 180 April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 83 Number of Sites in Beacon Duration Beacon Interval Wide Area System sec sec 14 15 12 190 15 16 32 210 Def
395. on is installed on the Application Server machine with the Presence Notifier When a radio registers with the Presence Notifier it informs the Location Server that this radio is now on the system The Location Server then sends out a service availability message through the control station to the radio informing it how often to send in periodic updates and what to do if an emergency is initiated April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 161 Location Dispatch applications request a radio s location information from the Location Server application and display the radio s location on a map A Location Dispatch application can reside on the Application Server as well The diagram below depicts this configuration xen digital Xen RX fi lt RX fi fi USB Location Dispatch MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode digital mode Application Server Figure 3 12 MOTOTRBO Radios In Digital Direct Mode with Location Server and Local Location Client Text Messaging also uses a server based configuration Similar to the Location Server the Text Message Server application is installed on the Application Server machine with the Presence Notifier When a radio registers with the Presence Notifier it informs the Text Message Server that the radio is now on the system The Text Message Server then sends out a service availability message through the control station to the radio informing it how i
396. on older software versions like R01 00 00 or R01 01 00 then the radios must select the unit to unit data as confirmed mode MOTOTRBO also enables infrastructure and or PC based applications by supporting Internet Protocol IP addressing and IP packet data services Rather than relying upon external modems MOTOTRBO radios can connect directly to computer equipment with standard USB interfaces This simplifies and lowers the cost of integrating with applications and at the same time expands the universe of potential applications that organizations can deploy Depending upon availability in your region Motorola offers two PC based MOTOTRBO applications e MOTOTRBO supports a Third Party Application Partner Program This program includes a complete application developer s kit that fully describes interfaces for IP data services command and control of the radio and for option boards that can be installed in the radio For some infrastructure based data applications the radio must first complete a registration process before data messages can be exchanged between the radio and the infrastructure based application Registration has no impact on voice operation aside from utilizing the same channel Polite voice calls will have to wait until an in progress registration completes before it can use the channel while impolite voice calls can transmit on top of a registration transmission A radio does not have to register for voice services A ra
397. ons Note that Manual Site Roam is supported while in an emergency See Emergency Revert GPS Revert and Roaming Interactions on page 83 for more details It is important to note that Active Site Search causes wake up messages to be transmitted on each roam list member s frequencies until a site is found This may not be agreeable in some areas where frequency overlap and sharing is common In order to minimize the number of unwanted transmissions the radio shall only transmit one polite wake up message If sending frequent GPS location updates while out of range the radio shall limit the Active Site Search to only occur once every 30 seconds If this is still not acceptable in the area of operation the radios should have automatic Active Site Search disabled the Manual Site Roam button removed and the beacon interval should be configured as short as possible This ensures that the Passive Site Search finds new sites quickly and the user has no method to initiate an Active Site Search Note that if Active Site Search is disabled there will be no roaming while in an emergency 68007024085 April 2011 74 System Feature Overview 2 6 3 Roaming Considerations 2 6 3 1 Configuring a Roam List When configuring a Roam List it is important to keep in mind that a system can contain more than one IP Site Connect system or also known here as a wide area system A wide area system is made up of one or two wide area channels Each wide area ch
398. ons and not via the Revert Control Stations As the data packets are not sent via the revert channels there is no need for installation of the MCDD Multi Channel Device Driver software in the Server A Capacity Plus system can have more than one Trunked Control Station Therefore it is required to distribute the data packets fairly among the Trunked Control Stations and the distribution should be transparent to the applications in the Application Server A simple way to achieve fair distribution is to group the radios into n sets where n is the number of Trunked Control Stations and associate each set to a Trunked Control Station For each set of radios it is required to make one or more entries in the IP Routing Table of the Application Server so that a data packet transmitted to a radio is routed to the port of the Trunked Control Station associated with the radio PN MCDD TMS Location Revert CS1 Revert CS2 Revert CS3 channels Revert CS4 Figure 3 44 Capacity Plus Devices with Data over Revert Channels April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 201 3 2 4 1 4 1 A System with a Dispatch Station Console A dispatch station can be connected to a Capacity Plus system using one or more Trunked Control Stations The interface between the dispatch station and the Trunked Control Stations can either be 4 wire or XCMP USB The dispatch station could either be a single
399. ontrol Station Trunking Control Station Figure A 1 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Voice only Profile Control Station Installation Figure A 1 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Voice only Profile Control Station Installation A 6 A 3 2 Confirmed Data Considerations All control stations must be both TX and RX Therefore there are isolation requirements between all control stations and not just different types of control stations Assuming an IM free frequency plan was selected the interference to design around is blocking One method is to separate the RX and TX paths of the Revert Control Stations As these are fixed frequencies this can be accomplished with a duplexer Trunked Control Stations are required to operate on multiple channels and Revert Control Stations are only required to operate on one channel the properties of the duplexers may differ for the different control station types The same techniques that were applied to Unconfirmed Data can then be applied to Confirmed Data An example of this type of installation is illustrated below Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Trunking Control Station Trunking Control Station pHa Figure A 2 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Voice only Profile Control Station Installation Data Revert C
400. ontrol Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Trunking Control Station Trunking Control Station Figure A 2 Number of Users versus Number of Channels for Voice only Profile Control Station Installation A 8 A 3 3 Antenna Separation One method to provide isolation between the transmitters and the receivers is through antenna separation The following charts indicate the typical isolation of two dipole antennas when either separated horizontally or vertically Horizontal Separation Isolation 80 0 70 0 60 0 50 0 150 MHz s 450 MHz 850 MHz 40 0 Isolation dB 30 0 20 0 10 0 1 10 100 1000 10000 Antenna Spacing feet Figure A 1 Horizontal Separation Isolation A 9 Control Station Installation Vertical Separation Isolation 80 0 70 0 60 0 150 MHz 450 MHz a 850 MHz 50 0 40 0 Isolation dB 30 0 20 0 10 0 1 10 100 Antenna Spacing feet Figure A 2 Vertical Separation Isolation Control Station Installation Vertical Separation Isolation 80 0 70 0 60 0 TF si 40 0 850 MHz Isolation dB 30 0 10 0 10 100 Antenna Spacing feet e Figure A 2 Vertical Separation Isolation G 1 Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listi
401. ools 313 SECTION 5 SALES AND SERVICE SUPPORT TOOLS 5 1 Purpose This module introduces the standard system layout identifying each component s role in servicing the system features listed in Module 2 This module is to help the reader understand what devices are needed to support a particular system feature It will also display the building blocks of the system from a subscriber only system to a mixed mode multi repeater data capable system 5 2 Applications Overview The three software applications listed below and their associated drivers are available on the CD kit GMVN5141 Name Customer Programming Software CPS Application Overview CPS enables a dealer to program the device s features according to the customer requirements Navigating around the CPS is now easy and convenient with the addition of a help pane that displays topic sensitive help instantly without the need to access the online help file AirTracer AirTracer has the ability to capture over the air digital radio traffic and save the captured data into a file AirTracer can also retrieve and save internal error logs from MOTOTRBO radios The saved files can be analyzed by trained Motorola personnel to suggest improvements in system configurations or to help isolate problems Tuner 68007024085 Tuner is an application to tune and test subscriber and repeater products Navigating the around the Tuner is now easy and convenient with the
402. or Radio Enable Disable are all accessible from the MOTOTRBO portable s user interface 3 1 2 1 4 Analog Compatibility The radios can be programmed to support many current analog system features Supported analog features include e Analog communications on a 12 5 25 kHz channel as standard e Private Line PL and Digital Private Line DPL coded squelch control as standard e MDC signaling 3 1 2 1 5 Integrated GPS Antenna and Receiver The MOTOTRBO portable can contain an internal GPS receiver that works with the Location Services Tracking Data Application The location application and radio can be configured so that the radio transmits its location to a centralized application The GPS antenna is integrated into the portable s main antenna In the LCD display on the radio an icon indicates if the radio is in range of the GPS satellites 68007024085 April 2011 150 System Components and Topologies 3 1 2 1 6 Text Messaging Compatibility The MOTOTRBO portable can receive and transmit text messages These can be Quick Text pre defined messages already stored on the portable In the case of keypad radio with display freeform messages also can be created using the keypad Through the menu the user can access the Inbox that contains all the messages he has received The radio allows a user to send a text message to an individual a dispatcher or a group of radios He can also reply to and forward text messages to other ra
403. or more off channel signals mix in the receiver s front end to create a product that falls on the receive channel This product effectively raises the noise floor of the receiver and dictates a larger received signal to establish an acceptable Signal to Noise Ratio SNR Typical IM protection of the control station is around 75 dB It should be noted that this protection diminishes when one of the interferers is on the adjacent channel Operating with self inflicted IM due to frequency selection is not recommended as TX RX isolations in excess of 80 dB depends on interferer level and receiver level may be required Adequate frequency planning selection may resolve this concern Desense Blocking Desense or blocking occurs when a very strong off channel signal begins to saturate the receiver s front end This effectively raises the noise floor of the receiver and dictates a larger received signal to establish an acceptable SNR Typical desense protection of a control station is 100 dB Every installation will need to take this into consideration when designing the site installation A 3 A 3 A 3 1 Control Station Installation Control Station Installation Considerations Mitigation techniques require isolating the transmitted signal from the receivers Two general rules for good design are e Place the receiving control station antennas in a location where they will receive a strong RF signal from the source Turn down th
404. or periodic updates The table below summarizes system throughput Window Number of Updates per Minute per Slot Size 90 75 60 45 5 180 150 120 90 6 150 125 100 75 7 128 107 86 64 8 112 93 75 56 9 100 83 66 50 10 90 75 60 45 NOTE These numbers are based on good signal conditions The actual throughput and reliability may vary with RF conditions and voice call loading For more details on loading reliability relationship see Section 4 4 5 6 Enhanced GPS Revert Loading amp Reliability The Enhanced GPS feature can be configured in the following manner in 1 Conventional single site and IPSC modes 1 1 One slot for voice one slot for Enhanced GPS Revert 1 2 One slot for GPS Revert one slot for Enhanced GPS Revert 1 3 Both slots for Enhanced GPS Revert 2 Capacity Plus mode 2 1 One slot of data revert repeater for GPS ARS one slot for all other data 2 2 Both slots for Enhanced GPS Revert More details in Sections 3 2 2 1 5 1 Single Site Conventional 3 2 2 1 5 2 IP Site Connect Mode and 3 2 2 1 5 3 Capacity Plus Mode 2 4 3 5 1 ARS Initialization Delay Upon power on subscribers normally register with the Presence Notifier by sending ARS messages immediately In a scenario where a user has a system with many subscribers powering on within a short time there can be many collisions between ARS registration messages To reduce collisions a user can co
405. orms the Master whenever its mode of operation changes and the Master informs to all the other IP Site Connect devices This allows the IP Site Connect system to adapt its operation when the mode changes Note that only an enabled and digital repeaters with a channel enabled for multiple site operation participate in voice data control communication across multiple sites A disadvantage of link Management is that the Master becomes a single point of failure But the consequence of failure of the Master is limited The IP Site Connect system continues to function except that it is not possible to add an IP Site Connect device into the system If an IP Site Connect device powers on while the Master is in failed state then it will not be able to join the IP Site Connect system On failure of the Master it is possible to switch a redundant IP Site Connect device to act as an Master The static IPv4 address and the UDP port number of the redundant IP Site Connect device should be same as that of the failed Master otherwise all the IP Site Connect devices will require to be reconfigured with the IPv4 address and the UDP port number of the new Master 4 6 3 2 Characteristics of Backend Network To create a proper backend network design it is important to know its characteristics This section explains four issues dealt within the backend network 4 6 3 2 1 Delay Latency Backend network delay or latency is characterized as the amount of time it takes
406. oscope 2 Channel Leader LS8050 Waveform measurements 50 MHz Bandwidth www leaderusa com 5 mV div to 20 Vidiv Tektronix TDS1001b www tektronix com or equivalent Power Meter and Sensor 5 Accuracy 100 MHz to 500 MHz 50 Watts Bird 43 Thruline Watt Meter www bird electronic com or equivalent Transmitter power output measurements RF Millivolt 100 mV to 3 V RF Boonton 92EA RF level measurements Meter 10 kHz to 1 GHz www boonton com or equivalent Power Supply 0 V to 32 V B amp K Precision 1790 Voltage supply OAto20A www bkprecision com or equivalent April 2011 68007024085 Sales and Service Support Tools 315 5 4 Documentation and Trainings 5 4 1 MOTOTRBO Documentation The following items listed are documentation provided by Motorola to support the entire range of products available in the MOTOTRBO system Motorola Part No Name GMLN4575D MOTOTRBO Publications CD 6866574D01 DP 340x Quick Reference Guide Multilingual 6866574D05 DP 340x User Guide 6866574D02 DP 360x Quick Reference Guide Multilingual 6866574D06 DP 360x User Guide 6866574D04 DP 3000 Series Accessory List Leaflet 6866574D35 DP 3000 Series Detailed Service Manual 6866574D29 DP 3000 Series Basic Service Manual 6866575D33 DM 3000 Series Basic Service Manual 6866575D40 DM 3000 Series Detailed Service Manual 6866575D01 DM 340x Quick Referen
407. ots In the event that all users could be broken into two unique groups but are required to maintain voice communication with each other the solution is to split the same group across the two slots and enable scan One half of the group should be assigned to slot 1 and the other half assigned to the same group but on slot 2 They should use the same group number This can be done by having two channels with the same frequencies but different slots and with the same group as the TX Call Member All radios should include both and only these two channels in their selected Scan List Scan hang time duration should be set to the Group Call hang time duration in the repeater which defaults to two seconds Talkback scan should always be enabled so that users can talkback during the scan hang time When assigning all users to the same group the use of scan primarily serves to aggregate the multiple channels into a single logical channel for voice Location data will be transmitted out the selected channel when no voice is taking place Therefore location data will be evenly distributed across two slots Note that when a voice call occurs all radios will scan and land on a particular slot The other slot will be empty at this time since all radios will be monitoring the voice call The drawback of this operation and why it is not generally recommended is that this configuration essentially cuts the voice capacity of a repeater in half since only one v
408. ould be configured to operate differently based on the selected channel There are 32 Digital Emergency Systems available This means that one radio can be configured to revert to 32 different channels depending on the configuration of the Digital Emergency System that is assigned to the selected channel It is not recommended that a Centralized emergency strategy be implemented using Emergency Initiators operating Tactically and one Acknowledging Supervisor scanning multiple channels When multiple emergencies occur simultaneously it is more effective for the Emergency Initiators to come to the Acknowledging Supervisor rather the Acknowledging Supervisor searching for the Emergency Initiators April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 289 4 11 7 3 Acknowledging Supervisors in Emergency The emergency strategy of the Acknowledging Supervisor himself should be considered Since this user is the one identified to handle emergencies who should he attempt to contact if he has an emergency In a tactical environment the user may only need to change or possible revert to another channel to contact another Acknowledging Supervisor In a centralized configuration with multiple dispatchers one Acknowledging Supervisor dispatcher could be configured to revert to the other Acknowledging Supervisor dispatcher If there is no other individual to contact the Acknowledging Supervisor may simply wish to operate tactically and transmit his emer
409. ound bandwidth from the ISP The use of Secure VPN routers make the authentication mechanism of IP Site Connect redundant and it is recommended that it should be disabled This saves some bandwidth over the backend network 68007024085 April 2011 242 System Design Considerations 4 6 6 General Considerations When Setting Up the Network Connection for an IP Site Connect System Network setup and configuration varies significantly depending on the complexity of the equipment and IP network the system resides on It is always wise to communicate with the Network Administrator during installation and during the design phase as they are likely be the individuals configuring the network equipment and own a great deal of knowledge in this area Below is a short list of items to keep in mind when setting up or when troubleshooting the networks of IP Site Connect systems April 2011 When assigning Static IP addresses within a Network it must not conflict with another static IP address As with any IP conflict this can cause a disruption to the IP Site Connect traffic Also ensure that the static IP address does not fall into the DHCP assignable range This can cause an IP conflict if the address is dynamically assigned to another device on the network If other network devices are present on the same IP network as the IP Site Connect devices it is good practice to setup Quality of Service QoS rules in the Internet Router This ensures that the
410. oup identifier 68007024085 April 2011 108 System Feature Overview e Capacity Plus The target ID only includes the call type and the radio talkgroup identifier the channel slot number is not required When keying in the target ID the phone user may try up to three times maximum after which the system terminates the call automatically if no valid target ID is received After the repeater validates the target ID if the channel is busy the repeater sounds a busy waiting tone to the phone user and waits for the channel to become idle before resuming the call setup While waiting for the channel to become idle the phone user hears the busy waiting tone and can choose to wait or end the call If the channel does not become idle for a configurable period of time the repeater ends the call setup In this scenario the phone user stops hearing the busy waiting tone and hangs up the call If the channel is idle or becomes idle before the timer expires the repeater alerts the called radio user group by ringing tones A radio user can join a phone call from a phone user while scanning for activities on the phone channel except in Capacity Plus where scanning is not supported For individual phone calls the target radio user answers by pushing the PTT before the call can be set up completely For talkgroup phone calls it is configurable in the repeater via CPS to allow a target radio user to answer the call by pushing the PTT before the call can
411. out February the January zone is updated with March s keys and renamed to March Keys On the first of March the users switch and so cycle starts again This makes sure that only two months of keys are compromised if a radio is stolen or lost 2 7 9 Multiple Keys in a Basic Privacy System Although a radio can only use one key in a Basic privacy system at a time a Basic privacy system may utilize multiple keys to sub divide a group into a set of groups Note that this is not a recommended configuration and some considerations need to taken into account if the decision is made to utilize multiple keys in a system It is not recommended that Groups be sub divided into smaller groups with the use of keys This results in one sub group of users hearing unintelligible audio or digital warbles when the other sub group communicates It is recommended that the users should be divided into Groups and provisioned so that a user can not transmit nor receive on the other s Group If users with different keys are allowed to communicate with Basic privacy enabled for example via a protected Private Call a key mismatch will occur and unintelligible audio will be heard Although these users with different keys will never be able to communicate privately they will be able to communicate when privacy is disabled For example two different Groups are isolated by provisioning different privacy keys When a user in each Group needs to communicate to
412. ovide a quick snapshot of the bandwidth requirements for a particular size system more complicated configurations will require additional calculations The following equation should be used to calculate the bandwidth for each IP Site Connect device in the IP Site Connect system and then added together at sites where multiple devices reside behind one wide area connection BWyc 15 kbps Bandwidth required to support Wide Area Voice or Data 1 slot BW 6 kbps Bandwidth required to support Link Management BWipr 3 kbps Bandwidth required to support Master Messaging BWrp 55 kbps Bandwidth required to support RDAC commands Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 1 x BWyc kbps kbps Number of Wide Area Channel Peers for Slot 2 x BWyc kbps kbps Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers x BWyy kbps kbps If Master Total Number of IP Site Connect Peers x BWir kbps kbps RDAC Traffic BWrp kbps Required Uplink Downlink Bandwidth kbps April 2011 Peer does not include self 68007024085 System Design Considerations 237 To help demonstrate the use of the above equation on a more complicated IP Site Connect system take the following example system shown in the diagram below This system has six total IP Site Connect devices at three sites five repeaters and one RDAC Three of the repeaters have both channels configured as wide area one has a wide area cha
413. pc for a low level 2 4 4 2 Telemetry Examples See section 3 2 1 1 2 and section 3 2 2 1 2 for diagrams and descriptions of the following simple telemetry examples in both direct and repeater mode e Send Telemetry Command from Radio to Another Radio to Toggle an Output Pin e Send Telemetry Message from Radio to Another Radio when Input Pin State Changes e Send Telemetry Command to Toggle an Output Pin from Radio to Another Radio when Input Pin State Changes April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 61 2 4 5 Data Precedence and Data Over Voice Interrupt Data applications on the internal option board or running on an attached PC are able to request priority treatment of data messages and Data Over Voice Interrupt independently To facilitate this the data application designates the precedence of each data message as being Immediate Priority or Routine When the radio receives a data message for transmission from an internal option board or attached PC application the radio determines the precedence requested for the data message and processes the data message accordingly The use of the precedence designators can be summarized as such Immediate precedence is used to place data near the top of the queue and request the Data Over Voice Interrupt feature Priority precedence is used to place the data near the top of the queue without invoking the Data Over Voice Interrupt feature Routine precedence is used to pl
414. peater Wake up Provisioning ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 2 3 MOTOTRBO Digital Features 2ccccos2 Soeteiece ne eS eee ee recente eee ees 25 2 3 1 Digital Voice Features ain ct edhe lac tet enlincenmn ereere reenn nkanta eee 25 23 11 Gro p CallS zhele a craudhaas a a e aS 25 2 9712 Private CalScin eee peste eee eee 26 2 Oe SAM Geall sackets A ec es eel su neces Pot a nl cade oe at ols A e bead at 27 2 3 1 4 DTMF Hot Keypad p cez cleat ele acct ccretneedemeuatenatesyatee ache eu tae 27 2 3 2 FANS Interrupt ecstacelyicistctshcsatntiuay dai a E ate 28 2 3 2 1 Upgrading a System to be Transmit Interrupt Capable 30 2 3 3 Digital Signaling Features 22 cccccceececeeeeeeeeseeeseeesenseecesseneeceeneetenees 30 2 9 1 PTF ID and AliaSiNg esccvecate nis ccs e a 31 2 3 3 2 Radio Enable Disable ccccccccccccsceeenseeseseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenees 31 2 3 3 3 Remote Monitor ss ovad steer seavpstesavosuadeutocten oda hue taditnd lave Sdesaneantdcaeneetoced 32 ZS WA Radio GNECK sesi inet a a E that ade 33 2 9 9 9 Cal Alert nirea ee ddadda taeae Aa a a eiaeia 33 2 3 3 6 Remote Voice Dekey ccccccccccccccecceeeeneeeseseeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 2 34 Digital Emergency cixdce s nnee a a e aa neces 34 2 3 4 1 Emergency Alarm Only 2 2 2 cccccccecceeeeeeseeneneseneedenedesecnccoesseentees 38 2 3 4 2 Emergency Alarm and Call cc ccccccccceec
415. peaters Capacity Plus Because the channels are trunked the CPS configuration to support phone calls is at the repeater level instead of the channel level The APP box can only be configured to support either both or none of the channels of the phone gateway repeater for phone calls In Conventional Single Site IPSC LACs and Capacity Plus configurations once a repeater channel is phone gateway disabled no phone calls can take place on this channel However in April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 251 IPSC WACs there may still be phone calls on the channel hosted by an APP box from another site 4 8 2 Enable Disable a Radio from Initiating Receiving Phone Calls A radio s capability of initiating receiving phone calls can be enabled disabled on a per digital personality basis This is especially useful if there is a need to prevent a radio from participating in phone calls on some particular channels This configuration capability is done by connecting or disconnecting a phone system to the channel on the selected personality e Conventional Single Site or IPSC LACs If a phone system is connected to the selected Home channel the radio can initiate receive phone calls Otherwise phone capability is disabled e IPSC WAC If a phone system is connected to the selected Home channel not the channel from the roaming list the radio can initiate receive phone calls from any site on the WAC Otherwise phone capabil
416. phone system for a particular APP box Example If there is only one APP box in the system but if a radio uses different access de access codes on different digital personalities different phone systems can be created and each phone system will have different access de access codes If a radio needs to initiate or receive phone calls on a selected digital personality a phone system or systems in Capacity Plus must be linked to the channel or channels in Capacity Plus on per digital personality basis via CPS The phone system linking varies according to different system configurations 68007024085 April 2011 254 System Design Considerations e Conventional Single Site and IPSC LAC The phone system is linked to the channel whereby the corresponding repeater is physically connected to the corresponding APP box e Capacity Plus Multiple phone systems may be available for a selected digital personality A phone system is linked to the channel whereby the corresponding repeater is physically connected to the corresponding APP box e IPSC WAC If there is an APP box on this WAC the corresponding phone system must be linked to the selected Home channel even if the phone system is physically connected to a repeater at the remote site 4 8 5 2 Configuring a Repeater in a Phone System 4 8 6 For a repeater there is one and only one repeater wide phone system The user is allowed to configure the phone system but not allowed to
417. position console or a multiple position server based system The number of Trunked Control Stations depends on the number of concurrent paths supported by the dispatch station A simple configuration will have one Trunked Control Station dedicated to each group The dispatch station maintains the association between the group and the Trunked Control Station To make a call to a group the dispatch station uses the Trunked Control Station associated within the group The configuration may have a Trunked Control Station dedicated to an Individual Call All the radios have this Trunked Control Station listed in their address book as a dispatcher If the configuration has data applications then the Trunked Control Stations for both data and dispatch station should be mutually exclusive This means that a Trunked Control Station should not be used for both data and voice The configuration is shown in the following figure Console Appl Application Server Figure 3 45 Capacity Plus Devices with a Dispatch Station Console 68007024085 April 2011 202 System Components and Topologies 3 2 4 1 5 Summary of Features in Capacity Plus Mode The following features are supported in Capacity Plus mode Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Capacity Plus Mode relies signaling Emergency Data Calls Other Features Features Features Handling Group Call PTT ID and Emergency Text Trunked Remote Aliasing Alarm Messaging Channels D
418. pplications There is no centralized database in MOTOTRBO Since aliasing is done independently on each device if the alias and ID do not match in each device in the system customers may become confused 68007024085 April 2011 282 System Design Considerations An example of a spreadsheet showing a possible radio ID and alias database is shown below a a Alias Unit ID Talks with a Construction John John 1873 Construction Transport Security Construction Bob Bob 1835 Construction Transport Security Construction Rick Rick 542 Construction Transport Security Security Al Al 98 Security Administrative Security Joe Joe 4762 Security Administrative Administrative Frank Frank 6654 Administrative Security Administrative Mike Mike 19172 Administrative Security Administrative Steve Steve 78378 Administrative Security Transport Lenny Lenny 23 Transport Construction Security Transport Carl Carl 2 Transport Construction Security 4 11 4 3 Identifying Group IDs Group IDs for a MOTOTRBO system range between 1 and 16776415 The same approach that is used to identify radio IDs can be used for Group IDs Group IDs are not centrally maintained or managed in a MOTOTRBO system It is up to the system administrator to document the Group designation Note that these IDs must match those entered in other radios and data applications in order for the system to operate corre
419. presence of RF activity on the selected channel and is not specific to the digital slot currently being monitored Therefore if the LED indicates no RF activity on the channel the radio user can be sure their slot is idle However if the LED indicates the presence of RF activity on the channel the radio user will not know if their slot is actually idle or busy If the radio users transmit when the LED indicates a busy channel there is a chance their transmission will collide with another transmission Care should be taken since RF collisions in digital mode most likely results in both transmissions not reaching their intended target Therefore it is highly recommend that only well trained and disciplined radio users are configured to have impolite channel access April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 295 4 11 9 Zones and Channel Knob Programming The MOTOTRBO radio is capable of being programmed with up to 160 channels Each radio has a 16 position selector knob switch in which various channels and call types can be programmed In order to maximize the programming capability of the radio the concept of zones is introduced Zones can be created on the radio through the channels menu of the CPS A zone can contain up to 16 channels that are mapped to the 16 position top selector knob of the portable radio or the channel number selector on a mobile Radio users that require more than 16 channels must organize them into m
420. privacy mode even if they are in different groups In direct mode all the radios that communicate with each other must use the same privacy mode The software for both co exists in a radio and repeater While configuring a radio or repeater using CPS the CPS user selects the radio wide privacy type to be either Basic or Enhanced 2 7 2 Strength of the Protection Mechanism Both Basic and Enhanced Privacy do not provide resistance against replay attack i e an adversary intercepts the data and retransmits it or traffic analysis i e disclosure of information that can be inferred from observing the traffic patterns Their protection mechanism requires a key that is shared only among the intended parties They do not use any hardware based cryptographic engine or a hardware protected memory for storage of keys The resistance provided by the Basic Privacy is minimal due to the following reasons e The Basic Privacy uses a non cryptographic algorithm to transform plain voice data into protected voice data It is possible for an adversary to obtain the key by storing a few over the air voice or data packets and performing few simple mathematical operations e The Basic Privacy uses 16 bit keys A user selects a key from 255 predefined keys stored in the CPS The limited number of possible keys makes it easy for an adversary to guess the key in use The intended use of the Basic Privacy is to stop casual eavesdropping only The
421. program the radio to scan more frequently transmissions on the most important channel and ensure they do not miss critical calls Dual Priority Scan allows a user to program a radio to frequently scan transmissions on the two most important channels and ensure they do not miss critical calls Tone Private Line Lockout During scan if activity is detected on a channel but does not match the un muting condition lockout occurs Once lockout occurs the radio ignores activity on that channel for the next nine scan cycles However if scan finds that activity has ceased on that channel the counter is reset and is no longer ignored Talkback Scan with Home Channel Revert Talkback scan allows activity on different communications channels to be monitored and answered Home channel revert allows a user to automatically access a preferred channel 2 15 5 Analog Repeater Interface To facilitate the migration from analog to digital the MOTOTRBO repeater offers an analog repeater interface that allows the repeater to operate with legacy analog accessories The interface is configurable via the CPS and can support the following applications 1 Tone panels 2 Phone Patches 3 Console Desksets connected via a local interface 4 Console Dispatcher in base station configuration 5 Trunking controllers such as LTR and PassPort 2 15 5 1 Analog Repeater Interface Settings The analog repeater interface is configurable via
422. properly programmed and tested before being deployed 68007024085 April 2011 206 4 3 4 3 1 System Design Considerations Frequency Licensing Acquiring New Frequencies Region Specific The licensing process varies from region to region Generally before the license process begins detailed information about the proposed radio system must be provided to the frequency coordinator such as April 2011 Frequency Frequency Band Frequency band or specific frequency it operates on Subscriber Radio Count The number of radios that will operate on the system Output Power ERP The output power of the system amplifier as well as the effective radiated power ERP which is the system s power at the antenna Emission Designators Includes several pieces of vital information such as modulation signal type of information and size of the channel This determines the channel width your system will occupy For MOTOTRBO systems the Emissions Designators are Data only 7K60FXD Voice and Data 7K60FXE The first four values are defined as the Necessary Bandwidth This can be derived from the 99 Energy Rule as defined in Title 47CFR2 989 The next two values are the Modulation Type and the Signal Type The final value is the Type of Information being sent More information can be found with the region s frequency coordinating committee International Coordination For stations near another
423. provided when training radio users on the desired usage of Voice Interrupt on a particular system e Provide the Voice Interrupt capability to only radio users that need to have such capability Minimize the number of users within a group that have Voice Interrupt capability e Use good radio protocol Keep transmissions as short as possible and wait until the transmitting radio user has stopped talking and dekeyed e g wait to receive a Channel Free Tone before beginning a new transmission e Be aware of situations near the end of a transmission when the radio user has stopped speaking but has yet to dekey the radio e Create guidelines for acceptable use of the Voice Interrupt feature define when it is acceptable to interrupt another radio user s transmission e g Voice Interrupt is only used when late breaking information has become available that is critical to disseminate immediately e Be aware of situations where the transmitting radio user says something that may elicit an immediate reaction from the listening audience and either curb the desire to respond immediately or allow a designated radio user e g a supervisor or dispatcher to use Voice Interrupt to respond to maintain order on the channel Alternatively train users to wait a short period of time before responding to the transmitting radio users 4 9 3 Emergency Voice Interrupt The Emergency Voice Interrupt feature is used only during emergency conditions which
424. purpose input output GPIO functions This enables interface with dispatch and telemetry applications and other traditional radio system applications April 2011 156 System Components and Topologies 3 1 3 Data Applications For further details on third party applications refer to Third Party Application Partner Program on page 129 3 2 System Topologies The primary element in the design of any private two way radio communications system is the networking of a fleet of field radios portable and mobile radios To set up such a system the following questions should be asked How many system users require a field radio e Which system users need to communicate with each other e Where are system users transmitting and receiving from when communicating with other system users This information becomes the basis in determining the extent of the required system coverage area and the creation of its topologies This information and the desired feature set determines decisions on the system s topology 3 2 1 Direct Mode If within the customer s required coverage area any system user can directly communicate with all of the other system users with just the output power of the transmitter in their portable or mobile radio then a Direct Mode system can be used Thus a Direct Mode system is a system where no infrastructure is required to successfully communicate with all of the system s field radios All field radios are w
425. quest with a cadence of 0 5 1 2 4 and 8 minutes If the cadence is different the subscriber responds with a LRRP error message PROTOCOL_ELEMENT _NOT_SUPPORTED This is also valid for persistent requests A radio can only have one periodic request at a time If Persistent Storage is enabled on the radio the user must send a Triggered Location Stop Request from the application before sending a new periodic request If the user needs to change the application then the user should either delete all requests from the Persistent Storage via the CPS or ensure that a Triggered Location Stop Request is sent from the first application before a new periodic request is sent by the new application The ARS initialization delay feature is recommended if a customer plans to use Enhanced GPS in a system that has many subscribers powering on at the same time and all of them need ARS This helps to reduce ARS collisions at power up More details in Section 2 4 3 5 1 ARS Initialization Delay If CWID is enabled no GPS updates will be sent out while CWID is being transmitted The user can choose to disable CWID via the CPS if needed If there are free windows available in a system these may be used by the repeater to go into hibernate mode Hence reserving more one time windows running at 60 or 45 capacity increases the chances of hibernation April 2011 300 System Design Considerations 4 14 1 Single Site Mode In Single Site Conventio
426. quire any specific configuration for groups Radios can be configured to enable the user to select among multiple groups using the radio channel selector knob or buttons or using the radio menu contacts list Which group a radio user hears on a given channel depends on a configurable parameter called the RX Group List A call preceding tone can be provisioned to alert the target user of the incoming Group Call This can be enabled or disabled per Group An introduction to configuring Group Calls and RX Group Lists is provided in System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document Groups are defined according to the organizational structure of the end user When planning for groups customers should think about e which members of the functional workgroups in their organization that need to talk with one another e how those workgroups interact with members of other workgroups and e how users will collectively share the channel resources Greater detail on the fleetmapping process is provided in System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document 68007024085 April 2011 26 System Feature Overview 2 3 1 2 Private Calls MOTOTRBO provides the capability for a user to place a Private Call also known as an Individual Call directly to another radio even if they are not in the same group However for this action to take place both radios need to be on the same channel and time slot This feature allows a radi
427. r customer s expected usage further estimations based on the trend lines need to be considered Further this is the profile of how all users on a channel will act together It is understandable that not all users will use this profile all the time These profiles should be used with Figure 4 1 to estimate the number of users per channel that yield an acceptable user experience Profile a Name Traffic Type Call Description Traffic Per User Per Hour Group Voice Call iv second cah 2 90 transmissions per call High Voice 3 0 Calls per User per Hour Individual Voice 20 second call 4 es 10 Call transmissions per call Group Voice Call 1 FSRONG call 2 90 transmissions per call Low Voice 1 0 Calls per User per Hour Individual Voice 20 second call 4 A flys 10 Call transmissions per call 660 milliseconds for Single Repeater and IP Site Connect per ea High GPS Location Updates transmission and 99 ors Transmissions por Useupel Hour a i e 1 Minute Update Period Cadence 540 milliseconds for Capacity Plus mode per transmission 660 milliseconds per 6 GPS Transmissions per User per Hour owas Pocanon V padaras transmission i e 10 Minute Update Period Cadence High tex Text Messaging idichalariers par 2 5 Text Messages per User per Hour Messaging message Low Tox Text Messaging 0 eharaciet pel 0 5 Text Messages per User per Hour Messaging message 68007024085 April 2011 210
428. r does not resume after a power cycle or channel change the menu or the designated programmable button must be used 2 10 2 2 Talk Permit Tone When VOX is used in conjunction with the Talk Permit Tone TPT the expected behavior of the radio should be understood When TPTs are disabled the radio operator may begin speaking and the radio will immediately key up and transmit the entire phrase uttered by the radio operator However when TPTs are enabled the radio operator must use a trigger word to key up the radio The trigger word will not in most cases be transmitted After uttering the trigger word the radio operator should wait until after the TPT is heard to begin speaking 68007024085 April 2011 104 System Feature Overview 2 10 2 3 Emergency Calls When a radio operator presses the Emergency Alarm button on a VOX enabled channel VOX is temporarily suspended so that the radio operator can handle the emergency situation VOX operation will automatically resume once the emergency has been cleared If at any time during the emergency the radio operator presses PTT VOX operation will not automatically resume after the emergency is cleared See Suspending VOX on page 103 for instructions on how to resume VOX 2 10 2 4 Transmit Interrupt 2 11 2 12 2 13 Because of the long delay involved with interrupting a voice transmission that translates to large amounts of audio truncation in a radio configured for VOX operation V
429. r repeater accessory PTT transmission Dynamic Mixed Mode System Configuration Considerations A few repeater and subscriber configuration recommendations have been laid out to ensure proper Dynamic Mixed Mode system operation 1 For analog repeater operation configure the Rx and Tx squelch types as PL TPL or DPL in the repeater The Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater does not repeat if Rx squelch is configured as CSQ Configure the Tx and Rx squelch types as PL TPL or DPL in both legacy analog and MOTOTRBO radios If Rx squelch type is configured as CSQ the radios will unmute to digital transmission and play out digital noise Configure the admit criteria of both analog and digital radios to be polite to each other MOTOTRBO radio configuration recommendations are provided in the table below For legacy analog radios it is recommended to configure the polite rule as Busy Channel Lockout on Wrong PL code If MOTOTRBO radios need to communicate on their digital channels with the legacy analog radios or with MOTOTRBO radios on analog channels the digital channels can be configured to scan for analog channels by way of scanning DPL or TPL Scanning may result in an initial audio truncation and the truncation depends on the number of scan members in the Scan List To prevent loss of digital data transmission it is recommended to configure the preamble duration as per the recommendations listed in Scan Considerations on page 65 680070
430. r to clearing the locked state Alarms are categorized as shown below e Major Alarms Major alarms indicate hardware failures that prevent the repeater from functioning normally e Minor Alarms Minor alarms are warning alarms causing the repeater to enter a disabled state where it does not transmit receive or repeat but still responds to GPIO controls such as channel steering alarms and diagnostics 68007024085 April 2011 96 System Feature Overview e Mixed Alarms This alarm type could be major or minor depending on the availability of a backup repeater and the type of the system configuration The list of major minor and mixed alarms varies for different repeaters and repeater models Refer to the RDAC application Online Help for further details 2 8 1 Connecting Remotely via the Network Connecting RDAC via the network allows access to all repeaters in an IP Site Connect or a Capacity Plus system If a system has more than one wide area system i e more than one Master repeater then the RDAC application is required to know the static IP address and UDP port of each of the Master repeater A single RDAC application supports up to eight IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus systems i e eight Master repeaters It will learn the addresses of the other repeaters through communication with each Master Similar to repeater communication the RDAC application should not require any specific firewall configuration It will req
431. radios using CPS with the matching color code F2 down F2 down Figure 4 14 Multiple Repeaters with Overlap and Common Frequencies 4 5 2 Color Codes in a Digital System Color codes or CC in the images are defined by the Digital Mobile Radio DMR standard and can be used to separate two or more MOTOTRBO digital radio systems which operate on common frequencies Figure 4 15 shows two MOTOTRBO radio systems which operate on common frequencies but have uniquely defined color codes F2 down Figure 4 15 Multiple Digital Repeaters with Unique Color Codes Color codes are assigned as channel attributes on the radios allowing a single radio to communicate with multiple sites each having a uniquely defined color code April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 229 4 5 3 Additional Considerations for Color Codes The total number of available color codes per frequency is 16 From a radio user s perspective the color code is similar in nature to a Group ID However it should not be used for this purpose Just as Groups are intended to separate users into groups the color code is intended to uniquely identify systems or channels which operate on common frequencies Multiple repeaters operating on common frequencies with large areas of overlap as shown in Figure 4 16 could be configured with unique color codes This would allow both repeaters to operate with some degree of independence However the radio users shoul
432. rammable buttons while the numeric display mobile has two programmable buttons Each button can be programmed to perform a particular function The short press and long press can be programmed to act differently The buttons can be programmed to give quick and easy access to the MOTOTRBO system features triggering emergency alarms and operating horns or lights Status Indicators The MOTOTRBO mobile provides a multi colored LED on the front of the radio that informs the user of the busy or idle status of the selected channel The LED busy indication represents the presence of RF activity on the selected channel and is not specific to the digital slot currently being monitored The MOTOTRBO Mobile also provides a two line LCD display that shows a wide variety of information including received signal strength battery power emergency status monitor on off and GPS status This display allows each channel name to be displayed so that the user knows the name of the selected channel The source ID and target group alias are also displayed for ease of use User names are kept in an address book This allows the user to use familiar names as aliases a radio ID Various audio alert tones talk permit tones and keypad tones are available to help the user navigate Menu System In addition to the accessing system features via buttons the MOTOTRBO Mobile offers a menu shown on its two line LCD display With use of a menu button left and right arrow buttons a
433. ransmission no more than what is lost while scanning for a Group Call In addition the user must utilize an audible acknowledgement to validate presence when configured with unconfirmed Private Calls since no control messaging is used to confirm radio presence In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for Private Calls are configured with the portable and mobile radio CPS The repeater does not require any specific configurations for Private Calls Radios can be configured to allow the user to select the recipient of a Private Call using the radio menu contacts list Private Calls can also be mapped to a channel selection or a programmable button Users can also manually dial the destination radio ID with the radio keypad This means a radio can make a Private Call to any other radio that is on the channel regardless of whether the radio has created a CPS Private Call entry for the target radio A call receive tone or call preceding tone can be configured to alert the target user of the incoming Private Call This can be enabled or disabled per individual radio Greater detail on the fleetmapping process that governs who is April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 27 allowed to make Private Calls and to whom as well as an introduction to the CPS configuration section for Private Calls is provided in System Design Considerations on page 203 of this document 2 3 1 3 All Call All Call is a one way voice call between a privileged opera
434. ransmitted When voice is no longer detected at the accessory microphone the radio is de keyed 2 10 2 Usage Consideration There are several considerations that should be made when VOX is used First VOX is designed to key up and transmit whenever voice is detected This means that every time the operator speaks the radio will transmit If the radio operator is in close proximity to another person the radio may detect the other person s voice and begin transmitting The successful use of VOX requires the radio operator to be aware of any possible audio sources that may inadvertently cause the radio to transmit at an undesirable time Second the use position of the VOX accessory is an important factor in using VOX successfully The radio operator should position the accessory so that it can pickup the operators voice with a minimal amount of ambient noise Additional consideration is needed as outlined in the following sections 2 10 2 1 Suspending VOX In those situations when VOX may not be desired the radio operator can temporarily suspend VOX by pressing PTT The radio will immediately suspend VOX and key up the transmitter Traditional i e non VOX radio behavior will be used for any following transmissions VOX operation will be resumed if the channel is changed and changed back the radio is power cycled or the user re enables VOX using the menu or a designated programmable button To disable VOX on a channel so that VOX behavio
435. ration When a phone call is started the radio user needs to select which channel to make the phone call Therefore the radio user knows which channel and which APP box the phone call is occurring on hence which access de access code to use In these system configurations multiple sets of access de access codes can be used and the codes may differ in different APP boxes in the system 4 8 6 2 2 Capacity Plus System Configuration Because the phone channel is selected by the system automatically the radio user does not know the channel information when entering the access de access code Therefore multiple sets of codes can be used in a Capacity Plus system but they must be the same in all the APP boxes if the codes need to be entered manually by the radio user 68007024085 April 2011 256 System Design Considerations 4 8 7 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Configuration During a phone call the phone numbers are generated and go through the system in the form of DTMF tones These DTMF tones interact with components that are not part of the MOTOTRBO system For example APP PBX PSTN and others Hence the generated DTMF tones must be compliant with the local DTMF generating receiving standards in order for these components to receive and understand the DTMF tones generated from the MOTOTRBO system The following DTMF parameters are configurable both in the radio and repeater via CPS e DTMF Tone Duration e DTMF Inter Tone Delay NOT
436. ration messages are sent to keep the presence availability information fresh but the system load is increased If this time interval is increased the system load is decreased but the presence availability information may become stale 68007024085 April 2011 268 System Design Considerations In non Capacity Plus mode once a radio is registered with the Presence Notifier the MCDD adds a route to a routing table so data messages from the Application Server to the radio are transmitted on the correct channel However if for some reason the host specific route does not exist then the Global Route is used and the data message will be transmitted from all control stations connected to the Application Server This scenario increases system loading during situations where there is Application Server to radio data An example of this would be network Text Message Server sourced text messages targeted towards subscribers in the field 4 10 1 5 Multi Channel Device Driver MCDD and Required Static Routes In non Capacity Plus mode the Application Server can have up to 16 different network interfaces that access the radio network In order for data messages targeted towards Radio Network IP addresses such as 12 0 0 1 and 12 0 47 13 to transmit out through a network interface with IP addresses 192 168 11 2 or 192 168 12 2 the MCDD is required to add routes for each radio that registers with the Presence Notifier For example when radio 12045 trans
437. rd party applications by enabling interfaces for IP data service telemetry services and text messaging and location tracking refer to Third Party Application Partner Program on page 129 of this document for more details on the Third Party Application Partner Program Improved Connection The MOTOTRBO microphone connection employs a rugged twist and lock mechanism for greater durability and connection strength Rear Accessory and Peripherals Interface The MOTOTRBO mobile radio also supports an improved rear panel accessory and peripherals interface It supports the following capabilities 68007024085 USB Capability The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface incorporates standard Universal Serial Bus USB capability enabling IP connectivity via standard USB ports with Personal Computers and other peripherals via a Motorola supplied cable This interface supports radio programming capabilities with no RIB box required This interface also supports third party applications by enabling interfaces for IP data service telemetry services and text messaging and location tracking refer to Third Party Application Partner Program on page 129 of this document for more details on the Third Party Application Partner Program Core peripherals The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface also includes core functionality for audio input and output PTT monitor receive unsquelch channel steering and other general
438. re Overview different group or individual Once the original voice transmission is terminated via the Remote Voice Dekey feature the interrupting radio user can initiate a new call via any of the available call initiation methods When the programmable button is pressed and an interruptible voice transmission is on the channel the radio attempts to stop the interruptible voice transmission If the radio succeeds at interrupting the voice transmission the radio user receives a Remote Voice Dekey Success Tone when the channel is successfully cleared down If the radio fails to interrupt the voice transmission then the radio user typically receives a Remote Voice Dekey Failure Tone The radio user whose transmission was interrupted receives a Talk Prohibit Tone until the PTT is released Digital Emergency MOTOTRBO offers a variety of emergency handling strategies that will fit the customer s organizational needs In its basic form MOTOTRBO provides the ability for a radio user in distress to send a confirmed emergency alarm message and emergency voice to a user on a supervisory radio The emergency alarm message contains the individual radio ID of the initiator Upon reception of an emergency alarm the supervisor receives audible and visual indications of the emergency and the initiating radio ID is displayed Depending on configuration emergency voice may follow between the initiator and the supervisor Once the supervisor handles the emergenc
439. re two examples Most APP boxes in the market support the following telephony services e Access and De access Codes e The access code is used to wake up the APP box and prevent the radio user or phone user from making unauthorized phone patch calls e The de access code is used to terminate the phone patch call if an access code is required when setting up the call e Different access code de access codes may be configured to have different privileges so the codes can be used to block allow radio from performing a call type e Phone Usage Time Out Timer TOT The APP box ends the call once the timer expires e A go ahead tone is emitted to the phone user when the radio user de keys This provides an indication to the phone user to begin talking e Direct connection to the PBX or PSTN line e Type Approvals for Supported Countries Instead of recreating such services in the radio system this feature relies on the APP box to provide these services The APP Box is connected to the MOTOTRBO repeater via the 4 wire interface The phone patch feature utilizes APP boxes that are connected to the repeater hence this feature is only available in repeater mode but not direct mode 2 14 1 Phone Call Initiation It can be configured via CPS to allow a radio to initiate or receive phone calls on per digital personality basis Only phone enabled radios can initiate and receive a phone call April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 107 2
440. recommended that only disciplined users are granted the right to use impolite operation Further those impolite users are encouraged to utilize the busy channel LED on their radio to determine if the channel is idle prior to transmitting When operating in IP Site Connect mode it is important to understand that impolite channel access only occurs at the local site If a call is taking place on the IP Site Connect system and the original source of that call is at the same site as the interrupting impolite radio RF contention will occur and it is unclear which source will be successful If the original source of the call is at a different site from the interrupting radio the original call continues at all other sites except where the interrupting radio is located When operating in Capacity Plus mode the impolite operation is supported only in Emergency Calls 2 2 3 2 Polite to All Operation Admit Criteria of Channel Free When configured for Polite to All operation the radio checks if channels are idle or busy prior to allowing a transmission The radio is polite to all analog or digital transmissions another system s transmission or other traffic on your system This option is often used when there are neighboring communications systems to prevent radio users from disrupting each other s transmissions However when this option is used any strong signal on the channel blocks other users from transmitting 2 2 3 3 Poli
441. reless Broadband Networks Point to Point Bridges April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 191 Only the repeaters acting as Masters will require a local static IPv4 address The other IP Site Connect devices will utilize this local static IPv4 address to establish their link with the wide area system IP Site Connect Device IP Site Connect Device Local Area Network Figure 3 36 IP Site Connect devices connected through Local Area Network 3 2 3 1 4 2 Wide Area Network Configuration The largest benefit of IP Site Connect is the ability to connect sites over public Internet Service Provider ISP links as well as private high speed connections ISPs provide a range of technologies with varying bandwidth IP Site Connect supports the following technologies as long as the requirements listed in the backend Network Considerations section are met e Private T1 e DSL typically ADSL e Cable Modem e Broadband Wireless Access e g Public Canopy provided by WISPs Wireless Internet Service Providers e ISDN e Frame Relay 68007024085 April 2011 192 System Components and Topologies IP Site Connect does not support dial up connections due to small bandwidth or Satellite Internet access due to large delay When utilizing public internet connections it is important that the system installer understand the bandwidth and delay that each IP Site Connect device requires in order to operate optimally They
442. repeaters perform the control operation and drop the call in progress In addition the IP connection between the repeater and the RDAC will be temporarily severed while the repeater is rebooting The connection must be re established before additional operations can be performed This should be taken into consideration before performing any control functions on an active repeater In addition to the repeater reporting alarms to RDAC application and setting the GPIO alarm pins accordingly it is important to note that it also takes action when major alarms are received The repeater will perform a reset after a major alarm is reported as an attempt to clear the alarm If the alarm is not clear after reset it will reset again This will continue until the alarm is cleared or the repeater is locked 3 major alarms Once 3 major alarms have been reported the repeater will enter the Locked state and set the Major Alarm Pin At this time all the LEDs on the Repeater front panel will be solid While in the locked state the repeater will not service any calls over the air The RDAC application will display the locked state and have the ability to retrieve logs In order to exit the locked state the repeater must be read and written to with the CPS to reset the major alarm counter This is automatically done when CPS writes a codeplug to the repeater Note that 3 major alarms almost certainly means that there is a hardware problem that should be addressed prio
443. resistance provided by the Enhanced Privacy is significantly better than the resistance provided by the Basic Privacy due to the following reasons e The Enhanced Privacy uses a cryptographic algorithm to transform plain voice data into protected voice data The algorithm is the well known ARC4 Alleged RC4 and is same as RC41 A cryptographic algorithm makes it very difficult for an adversary to obtain the key from over the air protected messages 1 The name RC4 is trademarked by RSA Security Although unofficial implementations are legal but the RC4 name cannot be used April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 87 e The Enhanced Privacy uses 40 bit long keys A radio can store up to 16 keys and the Enhanced Privacy allows using different keys for different channels The large number of possible keys approximately 1 trillion makes it difficult for an adversary to guess the value of a key Note that a 40 bit long key may not provide the protection needed to transmit valuable data such as credit card numbers e Using the same key the Enhanced Privacy protects each superframe of voice or each data packet in a different and unrelated way This increases the resistance further 2 7 3 Scope of Protection Both Basic and Enhanced Privacy protect only the voice and data messages including IP UDP headers The layer 2 voice and data headers data response packets and link control data are not protected This means that t
444. rly in all MOTOTRBO system configurations except some minor differences in specific system configurations The following subsections describe the minor differences in each particular system configuration 2 14 4 Digital Telephone Patch System Configuration 2 14 4 1 Phone Patch in Single Site and IP Site Connect Local Area Channels LAC In Single Site the system can support only one phone call per repeater because a repeater can only be connected to one APP box The phone call utilizes either channel of the repeater one ata time and the selection of the channel is the choice of the party initiating the phone call This could be the radio user or the phone user The other unused channel can be used for other voice or data services Legacy or third party radios are not able to join in the phone call because this is a new Motorola proprietary feature The phone patch call on an IPSC LAC works similarly as the phone patch call in a Single Site channel The target ID includes the call type Talkgroup 8 or Individual 7 the channel slot 1 or 2 and the radio or talkgroup identifier Example The phone user is instructed to dial the phone number associated with the Phone Patch box and then prompted to provide the target ID to reach a radio user The phone user dials extension 710020 after the beep which initializes an individual call on channel 1 to radio 20 To contact an entire talkgroup the phone user dials extension 820100 wh
445. rms stated in the table above are as below 68007024085 Cold start A cold start scenario occurs when the radio is first powered up and the GPS receiver is attempting to acquire its first position lock In this scenario the GPS receiver only has a valid almanac stored it does not have any valid satellite ephemeris data nor valid real time clock synchronization Almanac data is stored in a non volatile persistent memory and is valid for approximately one year The GPS receiver regularly updates the almanac data therefore it will always be valid unless the radio is powered off for more than one year The almanac data provides a mapping of the GPS satellites position in the sky in relation to a real time clock Hot start A hot start scenario occurs when the GPS receiver attempts to acquire a new location fix after a previous fix had occurred recently In this scenario the GPS receiver has valid satellite ephemeris data a valid almanac and valid real time clock synchronization TTFF Time to First Fix indicates the time the GPS receiver takes to determine its first or subsequent position lock This is determined largely by the time taken to download a full satellite ephemeris or satellite orientation packet with a data rate of 50 bits per second bps as well as how long it takes for the GPS receiver to reach the relevant satellite in its Scan List In a cold start the Scan List includes all of the 24 orbiting satellites The G
446. roduction 1 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 Welcome to MOTOTRBO Improving workforce productivity and operational effectiveness requires superior communications quality reliability and functionality MOTOTRBO is the first digital two way radio system from Motorola specifically designed to meet the requirements of professional organizations that need a customizable business critical private communication solution using licensed spectrum MOTOTRBO combines the best in two way radio functionality with digital technology to deliver increased capacity and spectral efficiency integrated data applications and enhanced voice communications MOTOTRBO is an integrated voice and data system solution comprising of mobile and portable radios audio and energy accessories repeaters and a third party application partner program Figure 1 1 MOTOTRBO System This system planner will enable the reader to understand the features and capabilities of the MOTOTRBO system and will provide guidance on how to deploy and configure the system and its components to take advantage of its advanced capabilities This system planner is divided into 5 sections with the first being this introduction Section 2 provides an overview of system level features Section 3 describes the system components in more detail Section 4 provides guidance on system design considerations including configuration of components Section 5 provides product sales and support informatio
447. rogramming Software CPS to an IP network allows the CPS to access all repeaters in an IP Site Connect system and a Capacity Plus system utilizing their backend network connections The CPS can also leverage IP based access to Dynamic Mixed Mode DMM or Single Site repeaters by connecting the repeaters to an IP network and configuring each one to act as a single site Master Prior to using IRP the feature must be configured with the repeater locally connected via USB to the CPS application The CPS can communicate with repeaters of multiple modes enabled disabled knockdown digital and analog The primary requirement is that the repeater must be on an IP network and communicating with a Master repeater or acting as one However the CPS can only connect to one Master at a time and can only program a single repeater at a time Once the repeater has been properly configured and installed in a networked configuration the CPS needs to be directed to the IP address of a Master repeater as defined by the repeater configuration If a system has more than one wide area system i e more than one Master repeater then the CPS is required to know the static IP address and UDP port of each of the Master repeater The CPS then learns the addresses of other repeaters connected to the Master once the application connects to the Master Unlike repeater to repeater communication the CPS application may require firewall configuration This is to allow the repe
448. rol Stations are used for routing data messages from radios to a data Application Server Alternatively control stations operating in Capacity Plus called Trunked Control Stations are used for routing data messages from the data Application Server to the radios Unlike Revert Control Stations idle Trunked Control Stations move with the Rest Channel and therefore are on the same channel with all the idle radios See Capacity Plus Devices with Data over Trunked Channels on page 199 3 1 1 5 MC1000 MC2000 MC2500 Console The MOTOTRBO mobile in analog mode supports the MC Deskset Series of consoles The MC Deskset Series provides a complete portfolio of products for a small control room Each unit provides control of the radio s via a compact desk unit offering a choice of control methods Local and Remote The portfolio ranges from a simple talk and listen unit to a miniature multi channel console The MC1000 can control a single control station and provides a selection of up to four frequencies This unit requires no software for programming The MC2000 can also control a single control station but provides a selection of up to 16 frequencies Programming this unit is through configuration software installed on a PC The MC2500 controls up to 4 control stations with the ability to patch and multi select channels All channels are capable of 16 frequency controls This unit is programmed through configuration software installed on a PC
449. ronizing with an active repeater increases the voice access time of the transmission time from PTT to Talk Permit Tone However this increase only occurs for one transmission since the next transmission proceeds regularly on the new site NOTE Wake up messages are always sent politely This means that if the radio detects an interfering signal the radio does not transmit a wakeup message on that roam list member Instead it continues performing an Active Site Search on the next roam list member If the user requests a Manual Site Roam be it through a button press or menu item the radio actively searches for the next available site using the process described above The Manual Site Roam does not necessarily find the best site but rather allows the user to move to the next site that is in range and transmitting If no site is found a negative indication is provided to the user If in direct mode a successful site search changes the new channel found to repeater mode An unsuccessful site search remains in direct mode NOTE Generally the radio does not perform any Passive Site Search during an emergency No automatic roaming is performed when the radio is reverted during an emergency However when configured to a non revert emergency channel and with Active Site Search enabled the radio will perform Active Site Search automatically whenever the RSSI of the repeater drops below the programmed threshold or if it no longer detects repeater beac
450. roup that the channel is to Analog Emergency reserved for can transmit This produces smoother call Pang conversation The user may want to set the longest hang Ea Time f i feature must be equal time as compared to the Private and Group Call Hang Time to or less than the to reserve the channel long enough to receive an Subscriber Inactivity emergency response Timer walue 68007024085 April 2011 310 System Design Considerations mner Description Notes Name Sets the duration the repeater will reserve the channel for after the end of an analog call transmission During this time only members of the call that the channel is reserved TE 1 anore enabled call Hang fi t it This produces smoother conversation As Sny iN Apear Mode Time P RAN SAnS p is set to Analog or this hang timer is shared among all types of analog calls Dynamic Mixed Mode Group Private Emergency etc the duration should be set following the call type that needs the longest hang time The station will generate a Continuous Wave Identification CWID also called BSI when the repeater has no other repeat audio requests either analog or digital analog or all digital hang time has finished and the programmed TX Interval transmission interval timer period has expired This feature should be set to a period shorter than the Mix Mode Timer to allow the station the opportunity to send a CWID at the end of a set of user radio excha
451. rward Error Correction FEC is also applied FEC is a mathematical checksum technique that enables the receiver to both validate the integrity of a received message and determine which if any bits have been corrupted FEC enables the receiver to correct bit errors that may have occurred due to radio frequency RF channel impairment This effectively rejects noise that can distort an analog signal and by comparison enables more consistent audio performance throughout the coverage area At this stage the vocoder has already compressed the 128 000bps input signal to 3 600bps 2 1 1 3 Part Three Framing In framing the vocoded speech is formatted for transmission This includes organizing the voice and any embedded signaling information such as color code group ID PTT ID call type etc into packets These packets form a header and payload type of structure the header contains the call control and ID information and the payload contains the vocoded speech This same structure can also relay Internet Protocol IP data packets the IP packets are simply an alternative form of payload to the MOTOTRBO radio The header information is repeated periodically throughout the transmission thereby improving the reliability of the signaling information as well as enabling a receiving radio to join a call that may already be in progress we refer to this condition as late entry 2 1 1 4 Part Four TDMA Transmission Finally the signal is
452. s 4 10 Data Sub System Design Considerations 4 10 1 Computer and IP Network Configurations The data applications in a MOTOTRBO system utilize IP UDP communications therefore it is necessary to design the IP configuration of the data capable devices Although complex it is important to understand how data traffic is routed from one radio to another in a MOTOTRBO system This section details the different connects and where they are used within a MOTOTRBO system 4 10 1 1 Radio to Mobile Client Network Connectivity As described in earlier chapters the MOTOTRBO radio connects to a computer via USB Once connected the PC detects the connection loads a driver and establishes a new network interface This network interface looks similar to a LAN or WLAN network interface to the PC The radio acts like a DHCP server providing the PC with an IP and setting its own IP as the default gateway The Radio IP address used for this connection is programmed into the MOTOTRBO radio in the network settings of the CPS The Accessory IP value is not editable in the CPS It will be updated based on the Radio IP The first 3 octets are the same as the radio IP the last octet will be the Radio IP value 1 for example if the Radio IP is 192 168 10 1 the Accessory IP will be automatically updated to 192 168 10 2 e Accessory IP provided via DHCP to the Network Interface on the PC e Radio IP used by the Radio to communicate with the PC prov
453. s this user s radio is responsible for transmitting an acknowledgement to the Emergency Initiator Until the Emergency Initiator receives the acknowledgement his radio will continue to transmit its emergency alarm messages until his user takes action to stop or the radio exhausts the number of programmed retries It is important to note that the Acknowledging Supervisor s radio not the user sends the acknowledgement when it receives the Emergency Alarm Reception of an emergency alarm acknowledgement only guarantees that the radio received the message not the user Because it is the responsibility of the Acknowledging Supervisor to stop the Emergency Initiator s retries duplicate attempts of the same Emergency Alarm will restart the emergency indication if cleared It is highly recommended that there only be one Acknowledging Supervisor April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 287 per group and slot If there is more than one acknowledgement messages may interfere with each other when transmitting and cause a delay in acknowledging the Emergency Initiator An Acknowledging Supervisor may also be an Emergency Initiator These MOTOTRBO radios are configured to operate in each role by setting a few options using the CPS as described in the following table Note that these options are configurable per channel and therefore per Group Frequency and Slot This means that a user can play a different role depending on the channel
454. s comprised of radios that communicate to each other directly in direct mode through a repeater in repeater mode or through a set of repeaters in IP Site Connect Mode The MOTOTRBO system can be configured to operate in analog mode digital mode or in both modes 2 2 1 Repeater and Direct Mode Configurations In direct mode receive and transmit functions are both carried out on the same physical channel i e transmit and receive frequencies are the same 1 When operating in Analog Direct Mode MOTOTRBO supports one voice path transmit and receive on one physical channel and can be configured to operate in 25 kHz channel bandwidth systems and or 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth systems The option board interface meets the timing constraint of the MPT1327 standard which is a signaling standard for trunked private land mobile radio system The following features do not work with MPT 1327 e VOX e Scan normal and priority e Battery saver 2 When operating in Digital Direct Mode MOTOTRBO uses one physical channel configured for a 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth On that one direct 12 5 kHz physical channel bandwidth a MOTOTRBO digital system can support only one voice or data path at a time Without a repeater in place to coordinate the time slot sequence among radios only one radio can transmit at a time in order to guarantee transmissions do not overlap In repeater based radio communications systems a voice path requires a pair of cha
455. s connected through Local Area and Wide Area Network April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 3 2 3 1 6 Summary of Features in IP Site Connect Mode The following features are supported in IP Site Connect mode 195 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in IP Site Connect Mode relies signaling Emergeney Data Calls Other Features Features Features Handling Group Call PTT ID and Emergency Text Two Wide Area Remote Aliasing Alarm Messaging Channels slot Diagnosis and 1 and slot 2 Control Private Radio Inhibit Emergency Location Mix of Wide Roaming Call Alarm and Call Tracking Area and Local Area Channels All Call Remote Emergency Telemetry Scan Wide Area Monitor Alarm with Voice Coverage to Follow Dual Tone Radio Check Emergency Third Party Polite to All Time out Timer Multi Revert Per Site ADP System Frequency Applications Access Voice Call Alert Emergency GPS Revert Polite to Own Privacy Interrupt Voice Interrupt Per Site System Channel Access Remote Voice Data Over Impolite Dekey Voice Channel Interrupt Access See Scan Considerations on page 65 for more information on the different scan modes supported by different topologies The following chapter discusses some of the considerations to take while designing a MOTOTRBO system It focuses more on how the user uses the system and the configuration needed to support it Although a basic system topology m
456. s in the call have a matched privacy setting The radio will display the privacy setting of the received transmission but will blink if it does not match the transmit mode of the receiving radio When a privacy setting mismatch occurs they should request the other members of the call to switch their privacy settings to match The radio allows users to enable or disable privacy on the channel while on a call Radio users with non display or numeric display radio models are not able to view the icon that is shown on a privacy enabled channel Therefore it is recommended that such users should not have the option to toggle the privacy setting If non display or numeric display radio users must be able to toggle between protected and unprotected it is recommended that this be done by programming duplicate channels one with privacy enabled and one without and the user should use the dial position to toggle between protected channels and unprotected channels For example dial position one may be set to communicate with a Group in unprotected mode and dial position two may be set to communicate with the same group but in protected mode 68007024085 April 2011 90 System Feature Overview 2 7 7 Key Mismatch In case of Basic Privacy a receiving radio assumes that the received protected transmission is protected using the same Key that it has because the key identifier is not sent with the message If the receiving radio does not have the same key
457. s not a function of the IP Site Connect device but rather of the router It is important to note that VPN does add the need for additional bandwidth and may introduce additional delay This should be taken into consideration in bandwidth planning The following Secure VPN router has been validated and is therefore suggested for use See Network Bandwidth Considerations on page 235 e Linksys 4 Port Gigabit Security Router with VPN Model RVS4000 Only the repeaters acting as Masters require a publicly accessible static IPv4 address from the Internet Service Provider The other IP Site Connect devices utilize this publicly accessible static IPv4 address to establish their link with the wide area system In addition the router NAT firewall connected to the Master require some configuration open port so that unsolicited messages from other repeaters can reach the Master repeater The diagram below shows a simple diagram of IP Site Connect devices located at different sites connected through a wide area network April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 193 Note that in this drawing the IP Site Connect devices could be in one or more Wide Area Systems i e more than one Master could contain local area channels or even be an analog repeater a disabled repeater or RDAC IP application Wide Area Network IP Site coe Device Figure 3 37 IP Site Connect Devices connected through Wide Area Network 3 2 3 1 5 Wide
458. s routing tables In these situations the Application Server to radio data increases the system load as it has to be transmitted by all connected control stations The actual load increase is based on the amount of Application Server to radio data This load increase gradually dissipates as the radios re register with the Presence Notifier and the host specific routes are added back into the routing table However it is recommended to connect control stations to an Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS and are never powered off and on while radios are registered with the Presence Notifier In Capacity Plus if a Revert Control Station powers down then the radio to the Application Server data increases the load on the rest of Revert Control Stations When the failed Revert Control Stations power on the load is automatically distributed on all the Revert Control Stations If a Trunked Control Station powers down then the Application Server is unable to send data to the radios allocated to the failed Trunked Control Station Therefore it is recommended to connect Trunked Control Stations to an Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS or to have redundant Trunked Control Stations During the registration process with the Presence Notifier the radio is instructed to refresh its registration at a specific time interval The default time interval is 4 hours though this is a configurable parameter in the Presence Notifier If the time interval is decreased more regist
459. s that keys may be provisioned into the radio but are not associated with any channel In this case the keys are used to unprotect a received message but are not used by the radio to protect a transmission A Privacy Key is provisioned in a radio using a CPS The keys are not readable editable or erasable by the radio user Once a key has been chosen and programmed into a radio the key cannot be extracted and viewed by CPS It can only be retained or overwritten In case of Basic Privacy a CPS user can select one of the 255 prescribed keys These keys are referenced by a key index from 1 to 255 Each key index references a particular 16 bit key that is used for protecting over the air There is no option for a blank null or zero key In case of Enhanced Privacy the valid range for the value of a Key is 1 to 1 099 511 627 774 i e FFFFFFFFFE in hex The Key values 0 and 1 099 511 627 775 i e FFFFFFFFFF in hex are reserved and should not be used MOTOTRBO does not support remote or over the air programming of keys into a radio Keys can be programmed in a radio using only CPS CPS supports loading of the value and identifier of a Key into a radio either manually or from a protected archive file in case of Enhanced Privacy only In case of getting the keys from a protected archive file the CPS User selects the protected file and provides the password The file is unreadable without a password The CPS is capable of copying
460. s that share the same compressed identifier the radio incurs additional audio holes to validate the actual uncompressed identifier matches Duplicate compressed identifiers can be avoided if kept within a 256 ID range where the first ID of the range is an integer multiple of 256 For example if group and individual identifiers are kept between 0 and 255 or 256 and 511 or 512 and 767 etc they will have unique compressed identifiers and no audio hole will be experienced while priority sampling the other timeslot 68007024085 April 2011 64 2 5 2 System Feature Overview Setting a busy channel as a priority channel can cause excessive audio holes in non priority audio as the radio checks each new transmission on the priority channel to determine if it is call of interest If the priority channel has many short transmissions that are not of interest the radio will be forced to incur at least one audio hole for each Therefore it is recommended that if possible high priority transmissions should be isolated on channels that are not overly utilized by other traffic Channel Marking In addition to configuring the sampling interval for Priority Sampling MOTOTRBO offers a way to mitigate the duration of the audio hole itself with a feature called Channel Marking Although relatively short it does take time to determine if a transmission is of interest on a particular scan member During this time there is an audio hole in the scanned aud
461. sage Application Server USB Dispatch d y id d MOTOTRBO STOTRI UY Control Station vol ital Pa oy Yaa digital mode dig PC Terminal LAAJ Figure 3 24 MOTOTRBO Radios in Digital Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with a Server Based Configuration and Remote Dispatchers 68007024085 April 2011 176 System Components and Topologies Another Text Message service that is only available in a server based configuration is the ability to receive and send text messages to external e mail addresses This allows PCs or pagers and cell phones that are text message capable on the system to send e mail messages In order for the Text Message Server to communicate with the outside world the Application Server must have access to the internet When a radio sends a text message to a Text Message Dispatcher and it is identified as an external e mail address in the Text Message Server the Text Message Server will forward the text message to the designated e mail address It requires access to the internet in order to send the message The Text Message Server also forwards incoming e mails in a similar fashion On the following page is an example of a server based configuration that supports four data capable time slots with local and remote dispatchers Note that any mix of external and internal radio Text Message Clients are supported on each channel April 2011 68007024085 177
462. sage as being either high or low It is expected that most customers will operate somewhere in between these April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 211 two profiles The designer must use knowledge of the customer s organization and their expected usage to predict where on this chart they will operate Note that the voice only lines are a good frame of reference for existing customer with analog voice systems These trend lines represent those of a voice only analog system and a voice only digital system Understanding what user experience level a customer is currently operating at can help with predicting the new user experience when adding data services Two other trends from the chart are also worth pointing out The first is that the level of adding data low traffic for location tracking and text messaging does not cause a huge impact to the number of users supported For example the lines for High Voice usage traffic one with voice only and the other with the addition of low location tracking and text messaging both show that supporting 15 20 active users on one channel will keep the system from approaching the stressed level Similarly both curves for the Low Voice traffic show that 30 35 users could be supported well on a single channel Another important note is that these trend lines are associated with a single slot of aMOTOTRBO repeater Since MOTOTRBO is a two slot TDMA system a customer that is upgrading from a
463. same system identifier This aids in preventing co system interference The repeater does not block transmissions of radios within its own system As previously described the repeater utilizes embedded signaling to announce the current status of each channel It is up to the radios in the field to interpret these signals and grant or deny their user s request for transmission Therefore when a user or a group of users utilizes a channel time slot the repeater announces that the channel is being used and who is using it Only radios that are part of that group are allowed to transmit The repeater additionally allows a short duration of reserved time after a transmission This allows other users in the group to respond to the originator This reserved hang time greatly increases the continuity of calls because new calls cannot start until the previous call ends Without this feature users may experience delays in responses that is between transmissions of calls due to other calls taking over the channel in between their transmissions After this reserved hang time the repeater stays active for a short period of time and offers an opportunity for any user on the system to transmit or start a new call If no user transmits for a duration of time the repeater stops transmitting When the next radio transmission occurs the repeater starts repeating again Most of the basic MOTOTRBO voice and data services work the same in repeater mode as
464. sees ee eeeeeeneenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 2 14 4 2 Phone Patch in IP Site Connect Wide Area Channels WAC 112 2 14 4 3 Phone Patch in Capacity Plus 2000 cccccceceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaaaees 114 2 15 Analog Features neen chad inan neon waned ead ees 114 2 19 1 Analog Voice FOALS scsecs2ccenacegcets cecarencceves examen ceeesmrereneteecesecetacentcetes 115 2 15 2 MDC Analog Signaling FeatureS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeersrrrrrrrrrrreresssssseree 115 2 15 3 Quik Call Il Signaling Features ccc e cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 2 15 4A alog Scan Features asco 2hocaserce ca leack e aeee aaaea deee SES 117 2 15 5 Analog Repeater Interface 22 2 cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeenceecnenees 117 2 15 5 1 Analog Repeater Interface Settings cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 2 15 5 2 Configuration Summary Table 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenaaaees 122 2 15 5 3 Configuration Considerations cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnttnnaeeees 123 2 15 6 Comparisom Chan sons vtavwiaecssascsaus EE 127 2 16 Third Party Application Partner Program eeesssssssssssssseserrrrrrrrrrrrressssssseee 129 2 16 1 MOTOTRBO the Dealer and the Accredited Third Party PSV ClO ast ew ce ered eee mid mad eet Lh De ee ese 129 2 16 2 MOTOTRBO Applications Interfaces sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 129 2 16 2 1 ADP Interface with IP Site Connect c eect eeee
465. ser breaks radio silence by pressing the PTT and speaking the radio returns to its normal unmute rules Silent emergency and the unmute options have no effect on data It is the responsibility of the end user to make sure data is not sent to a terminal that would divulge any emergency state Transmission of data does not clear Silent Emergency The channel and group on which a user transmits his emergency is crucial to properly contacting a supervisor MOTOTRBO offers the ability for a user to transmit the emergency on a selected channel or to automatically change to a predetermined channel to transmit his emergency Transmitting an emergency on a selected channel referred to as a tactical emergency is often useful on small systems where there are only a few groups of users Each group has its own specified user that handles emergencies Automatically changing to a predetermined channel referred to as reverting is often useful in systems that have a dispatch style emergency strategy Users in various groups and channels are configured to revert to a specific channel and group to process an emergency This allows one user to monitor an Emergency group and all other users revert to him in case of an emergency This minimizes the possibility of supervisors missing emergencies on one channel while monitoring other channels After the emergency is cleared all users revert back to the selected channel they were on before the emerge
466. should not be misled into thinking that communications grade digital audio quality in radio systems is analogous to the high fidelity audio quality of CD s and DVD s Digital cannot solve historic problems System issues with coverage and interference are not necessarily eliminated by switching to digital Adjacent or co channel interference may sound different to a digital user but digital technology does not solve interference issues For example analog interference will not be heard as voice to a digital radio and vice versa but disruption of system performance can still occur 68007024085 System Feature Overview 13 2 1 3 4 Audio Balancing Transmitting voice over a digital air interface requires a voice coder or vocoder for short The vocoder used by MOTOTRBO is the Digital Voice Systems Inc DVSI AMBE 2 This vocoder delivers excellent voice quality with robustness to both background noise and RF channel bit errors in a 6 25 kHz equivalent channel bandwidth In order to produce optimal voice quality the input level into the vocoder must fall within a specific amplitude range The diverse nature of users with respect to mouth to microphone distance as well as voice level and directivity can make this a bit problematic In an effort to produce optimal voice quality over these diverse input conditions MOTOTRBO digital always employs Automatic Gain Control AGC in the audio transmit path The primary function of the transm
467. sible and to use an Admit Criteria of Color Code Free Remember that these two repeaters will be sharing bandwidth and should be loaded appropriately Figure 4 16 Color Code with Site Congestion 68007024085 April 2011 230 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 System Design Considerations Multiple Digital Repeaters in IP Site Connect Mode The main problem with the standalone configuration of multiple digital repeaters is that a radio ata site can participate only in the calls that originate at that site The IP Site Connect configuration removes this restriction and allows a radio to participate in a call originating at any site In IP Site Connect configuration repeaters communicate among themselves using a backend wire line network A call originating at a repeater is transmitted by all the repeaters in the IP Site Connect system Since all repeaters participate in a call it is necessary that all the repeaters have the same call related parameters e g Call Hang Times System Inactivity Time Time Out Time System Capacity In IP Site Connect configuration MOTOTRBO supports a maximum of 15 IP Site Connect devices where IP Site Connect devices include a maximum of five host PCs of RDAC IP applications disabled repeaters enabled repeaters in analog mode and enabled repeaters in digital mode both slots in wide area mode one slot in wide area mode and one in local mode and both slots in local mode A channel in IP Site Connect configuratio
468. sk N Freque Tat 12 5KHz ch annel 12 5KHz channel 12 5kHz Analog 12 5kHz TDMA 1 voice for each 12 5kHz channel Divides existing channel into two timeslots A single repeater for each channel Delivers twice the capacity through repeater Performance is same or better than 12 5kHz FDMA Single repeater does work of two repeaters Reduces need for combining equipment Enables 40 increase in radio battery life Figure 2 2 Comparison between Today s Analog and MOTOTRBO TDMA thereby offers a straightforward method for achieving 6 25 kHz equivalency in 12 5 kHz repeater channels a major benefit for users of increasingly crowded licensed bands Instead of dividing channels into smaller slices of decreased bandwidth which is what would be required to increase spectrum efficiency with FDMA methods TDMA uses the full 12 5 kHz channel bandwidth but increases efficiency by dividing it into two alternating time slots Additionally this method preserves the well known radio frequency RF performance characteristics of the 12 5 kHz signal From the perspective of RF physics that is actual transmitted power and radiated emissions the 12 5 kHz signal of two slot TDMA occupies the channel propagates and performs essentially in the same way as today s 12 5 kHz analog signals With the added advantages of digital technology TDMA based radios can work within a single repeater channel to provide roughly twice the traffic capac
469. smits the configured Morse code alphanumeric sequence when one of two configured BSI timers has expired The Exclusive BSI Timer is named TX Interval in CPS and the Mixed with Audio Timer is named Mix Mode Timer in CPS The goal of these two timers is to minimize the impact to the ongoing traffic while still being compliant with regulatory authorities TX Interval is used to configure an Exclusive BSI which is sent the next time the repeater de keys The Mix Mode Timer is used to configure a Mixed with Audio which is mixed with the analog audio on the channel Mixed with Audio BSI is only utilized when configured for analog operation Mixing BSI with digital audio is not supported in MOTOTRBO When the Exclusive BSI Timer expires the repeater transmits BSI the next time the repeater de keys This allows the BSI to be transmitted without disrupting on going voice which is ideal Furthermore if the Exclusive BSI Timer expires while the repeater is not active no subscriber activity the repeater does not wake up and send BSI Instead it waits until the next transmission occurs and then transmits BSI upon de key BSI is only required during times of activity Note that Exclusive BSI is interruptible in analog mode if the repeater receives a radio transmission If interrupted the BSI is attempted again at the next de key Also whenever the repeater is forced to de key due to a Time Out Timer expiring it takes the opportunity to transmit an
470. sonality The following logical channel attributes of the home site are utilized e Transmit Frequency and Transmit Reference Frequency e Receive Frequency and Receive Reference Frequency e Color Code Time Slot e Talkaround Setting e GPS Revert Channel e Emergency System Including Emergency Revert Channel Take specific note of the GPS Revert and Emergency Revert channels Because physical channels will be different per site the revert channels must change when the radio roams to another site It is recommended that emergency settings other than revert channel should be the same for all personalities within a roam list Otherwise the radio may perform an emergency differently as it moves from one site to another The remaining personality attributes Transmit and Receive Group List Channel Access etc will be used from the currently selected channel regardless of which site the radio is currently roamed to It is good practice to make these parameters identical for personalities within a roam list so that the radio acts the same regardless if it roams to the personality or if the user selects the personality 2 6 3 2 Scan or Roam When selecting a roam list for a personality to utilize one will notice that a personality cannot contain a roam list and a Scan List MOTOTRBO does not currently support the ability to roam between sites and then scan channels at a particular site Therefore while on a particular personality a
471. spends the most time on the Selected Channel The radio only switches to the GPS Revert Channel when a Location Update needs to be transmitted Since voice transmissions have priority over data transmissions when the radio is involved in a call on the Selected Channel the Location Update is queued until after the call is completed In order to minimize the amount of time spent away from the Selected Channel while on the GPS Revert Channel the radio will not attempt to qualify traffic on the GPS Revert Channel Therefore all voice data and control messages transmitted to a radio should never be transmitted on the GPS Revert Channel as they will not reach their destination April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 179 The example in Figure 3 26 illustrates only one GPS Revert Channel However depending on the GPS data load more than one GPS Revert Channel may be needed For example a single large group that generates significant Location Update traffic must be sub divided across several GPS Revert Channels Each GPS Revert Channel requires a control station which must be connected to the Application Server PC The maximum number of control stations that can be connected to the PC is four 3 2 2 1 5 Enhanced GPS Revert in Repeater Mode This section provides the recommended system topologies for the Enhanced GPS Revert feature in Single Site Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect modes of operation 3 2 2 1 5 1 Single Site Conv
472. splay The mobile is fully configurable via the Windows based configuration software CPS It can be programmed to allow access to all MOTOTRBO features and all channels within the system or can be simplified to only allow limited access The MOTOTRBO Mobile can truly be configured to cater to your customer s needs 68007024085 April 2011 152 System Components and Topologies 3 1 2 2 1 User Interface Power Button LCD Screen Channel Rocker Volume Knob LED Indicators l Speaker Mic Connector Programmable Buttons P Figure 3 4 MOTOTRBO Mobile Control Head Full Display Model Power Button Numeric Display i Channel Rocker LED Indicators Volume Knob Indicator Icons Speaker Mic Connector Programmable Buttons Figure 3 5 MOTOTRBO Mobile Control Head Numeric Display Model The primary buttons of the MOTOTRBO Mobile offer the user the ability to initiate most system features These buttons and switches are the corner stone of the radio and should be very familiar to radio users April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 153 Push to Talk Button The Push To Talk PTT button on the microphone is the primary button used to initiate voice transmissions The cable connecting the microphone to
473. ssage to the Presence Notifier application if it roams into a site successfully This ARS registration on roaming capability can be used by user applications to monitor which repeater site a radio is currently in Voice and Data Privacy Over a digital channel MOTOTRBO supports a way to keep communication both voice and data private Privacy protects the information where protection means that the MOTOTRBO resists reading of data payload or listening of voice by anybody other than the intended receivers MOTOTRBO does not provide any mechanism to authenticate the radios or radio users and it does not protect the integrity of the messages 68007024085 April 2011 86 System Feature Overview 2 7 1 Types of Privacy MOTOTRBO offers two type of privacy mechanisms Basic and Enhanced Both of them utilize Motorola proprietary mechanisms algorithms and therefore are not interoperable with other vendor s privacy offerings The main differences between Basic and Enhanced Privacy are that the Enhanced Privacy provides higher level of protection and it supports multiple keys in a radio compared to one key in the case of Basic Privacy The two privacy mechanisms are not interoperable Both mechanisms cannot operate in a radio at the same time This implies that either all the digital private channels support Basic Privacy or all the digital private channels support Enhanced Privacy Also all the radios on a repeater must use the same
474. ssages used for signaling features are also always polite The exception is the emergency alarm Emergency alarms are sent with a mix of impolite and polite channel access in order to optimize the likelihood of successful transmission When the Admit Criteria is either Channel Free or Correct PL a configurable RSSI threshold is provided per channel in the radio If the received signal strength is less than the configured RSSI threshold the signal is considered as an interference and the radio gets channel access when the user initiates a new call However if the received signal strength is greater or equal to the configured threshold the channel is considered busy and the radio does not get channel access when the user initiates a new call It is the responsibility of the site planner or the service provider to set the RSSI Threshold to an appropriate value considering the RF interference and also ensure that the desired signal strength is more than the configured threshold The default value of RSSI Threshold is 124 dBm The configurable range is between 124 dBm to 80 dBm When a value of 124 dBm is selected subscriber does not get channel access if carrier activity is detected due to interference on the channel when the user initiates a new call A value of 124 dBm is very sensitive to RF interference When operating in IP Site Connect mode the repeaters also check the channel for interference before transmitting This is required since eve
475. ssigning the IDs during planning saves future re programming of radios and subscriber records Option B The radio ID can be created so that each ID will provide certain information about the radio Each digit in the Radio ID can represent a certain code or radio type For example 16776415 a er Range 0 9999 Sequence Number Range 0 6 0 Reserved 1 MOTOTRBO Portable 2 MOTOTRBO Mobile 3 Analog Portable 4 Analog Mobile 5 Reserved Other options are to use a digit to identify the user s home group or other identifier Radio IDs are not centrally maintained or managed in a MOTOTRBO system It is up to the system administrator to document the radio ID designation Note that these IDs must match those entered in other radios and data applications in order for the system to operate correctly 4 11 4 2 Assigning Radio Aliases You can assign an alias to each radio user Although anything can be used as an alias the user s last name is often used Radios that are assigned to vehicles are often aliased with the vehicle number such as Cab 35 or Fire Truck 3 If radios are used by multiple users through different shifts the job description is often used such as West Side Guard or Cleaning Crew 2 Since unique names are required no two radio users should have the same alias Aliases should be consistent in all radio programming CPS and the data applications Databases are not shared between the various a
476. st likely requires changing repeater IP addresses in one of the networks 2 Connect to each LAN through a WAN As it is now a wide area configuration this requires some changes because all peers including the RDAC application are now required to utilize the master repeater s wide area IP address instead of the local IP address 3 Place the RDAC on the LAN of one of the sites This requires one system to communicate using the local IP addresses while the others the wide area IP address In all of the options mentioned above each system must utilize a unique UDP port configured via the RDAC application 68007024085 April 2011 102 2 9 2 9 1 System Feature Overview IP Repeater Programming IRP IP Repeater Programming allows a system administrator to provision and to upgrade repeaters within the system utilizing the IP network This feature is supported on repeaters equipped with a 32 MB memory running on firmware version RO1 07 00 or later Additionally the Master repeater of a system configuration must be running on firmware version RO1 07 00 or later as well The following services are provided 1 Repeater Configuration e Read the current repeater configuration e Write a modified repeater configuration 2 Repeater Upgrade e Upgrade repeater firmware and or codeplug version 3 Repeater Feature Enable e Activate a purchased feature on the repeater System Configuration for IRP Support Connecting the Customer P
477. stimated amount of blocking interference reliability and call denials varies with the traffic profile and could change some of the results used e Anestimated number of radios using the location tracking feature 100 and the rate of those messages for the high end traffic profile once every minute for every mobile is used Given these assumptions the chart presented can be used to provide customers with a general rule of thumb for levels of user experience expected based on the number of users In addition for this analysis the term number of users is used to indicate the number of active participating users generating traffic and does not include the number of users who monitor the activity of other radios on the channel April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 4 4 2 Voice and Data Traffic Profile 209 The following table summarizes the standard traffic profiles for voice and data The three traffic types considered are voice calls Group Calls and Private Calls data transmitted for location tracking and text messaging For each traffic type two levels are set One is for the case of a typical low usage or light traffic user and the other is for a typical high usage or heavy traffic user The voice and text messaging profiles are derived using assumed typical behaviors These profiles act as a baseline for estimating how much traffic a user creates on a system If these standard profiles do not match you
478. sts to the radio A radio needs to be initialized only once If a customer needs to change the IP address or the UDP port number of the Location Application then the Location Application should delete the requests from all the radios before it changes its address As it is not always possible to satisfy the above condition MOTOTRBO provides an alternative to delete all the requests in a radio using the CPS NOTE This feature was introduced in software version RO1 05 00 Text Messaging and Location Applications compatible with software versions prior to RO1 05 00 may not support this feature All customers are encouraged to verify their applications for feature compatibility 4 10 1 11 Ways to Improve Data Throughput MOTOTRBO uses UDP IPv4 protocols for transporting data messages It also provides an option to compress the UDP IPv4 headers between radios including control stations in all system configurations single conventional site IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus This applies to clear Basic Privacy and Enhanced Privacy transmissions in both repeater mode and direct mode This is a Motorola proprietary feature and it is transparent to the applications in the Server A control station or a radio sends compressed data messages only if the feature is enabled but they process compressed data messages even if the feature is disabled Anon MOTOTRBO radio or a MOTOTRBO radio with software versions prior to RO1 05 00 cannot receive compressed data
479. system contains some privacy capable radios and some privacy incapable i e older software versions radios then the control station must be privacy capable but configured to transmit unprotected This way outbound messages can be received and processed by the older radios not privacy capable Note that the privacy capable radios send their data protected and the control station will be able to decode these messages as long as it has the proper key In case of Basic Privacy there can only be one key per channel or slot Since the control station can only contain one key it cannot communicate privately to two different Groups utilizing different keys If a Basic Privacy system utilizes multiple keys those users must be divided onto two separate channels or slots each with their own control station utilizing the proper key Setting the control station to privacy disabled will not solve this problem since incoming messages such as GPS or text messages may be protected using different keys and only one key can be used at the control station to unprotect Therefore although outbound messages would be functional inbound messages would not be If users have the ability to toggle their privacy settings it is acceptable to have the control station set to either privacy enabled or privacy disabled but only if their provisioned keys match If the control station is set to privacy enabled and the radio is set to privacy disabled one direction of th
480. t one APP box and the APP box can be connected to any repeater that is part of the logical channel One APP box may support up to two logical channels if these two channels are on the same repeater that the APP box is connected to However only one logical channel can be supported at a time Similar to the call initiation in a Single Site configuration the radio or phone user needs to specify which channel to use when initiating the call The radio user can manually switch to the phone channel where the call shall start on The phone user can specify which channel to use when prompted for Target ID by the repeater 4 8 3 4 Capacity Plus When a repeater is connected to an APP box in a Capacity Plus configuration both channels of the repeater can be used as phone channels The phone calls on either of these two phone channels use the same APP box that is connected to the repeater In order to support phone calls all voice repeaters in the system need to be upgraded to RO1 08 00 or later The radio user does not select which phone channel to use when initiating a phone call because Capacity Plus is a trunked system The system instead selects an available phone channel automatically for the call When the phone user initiates the call he she calls the phone number of the APP box or PBX but does not specify which channel of the repeater to use 4 8 4 APP Box Configuration The DTP feature is designed to work with most of the COTS APP boxes Th
481. t allow a customer to select a channel in the Channel Pool to be the Home Revert Channel Password and Lock Feature Radio Authentication MOTOTRBO provides a password based locking mechanism to protect radios from unauthorized users This feature can be enabled and the password can be changed both via the CPS or the radio menu The Channel Pool is a zone for keeping all the trunked and Data Revert Channels April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 105 With this feature enabled a radio prompts the user to enter a four digit password on powering up After three incorrect password attempts the radio enters a locked state for 15 minutes No calls including Emergency Calls can be placed or received when a portable radio is in locked state Upon correct password entry the radio enters normal operation mode The password input method varies according to the radio display models For example e Onanon keypad portable a user inputs the password via a combination of the Channel Switch and Side Button s e Onanon keypad mobile a user inputs the password via a combination of the Channel Knob and Front Button 2 e Onakeypad mobile a user inputs the password either with the Accessory Keypad or via a combination of the Channel Rocker button and the lt OK_Button gt If a Foot Switch is configured to initiate an emergency and the radio is powered up using the Foot Switch the radio skips the password input procedure
482. t can communicate with the Text Message Server Text Message Dispatch applications communicate with the Text Message Server in order to send and receive messages to and from the radio network via the connected control station A Text Message Dispatch application can reside on the Application Server as well As previously described radios can send text messages to each other without communicating through the Text Message Server But in order to send and receive text messages to Text Message Dispatchers the Text Message Server configuration is required The diagram below depicts this configuration This configuration also works with external text message applications connected to the field radios fi a a gt 2 Presence Notifier W t digital 1x E i Text Message Client fi TMC Text Message Server T GPS Text Message USB USB Dispatch Location Server pire E MOTOTRBO SU Mobile PC ontrol Station gi i digital mode Terminal Location digital mode ig Dispatch Application Server Figure 3 13 MOTOTRBO Radios In Digital Direct Mode with Text Message Server Location Server and Local Dispatchers 68007024085 April 2011 162 J fi am l 4 i Presence Notifier TX fi a gital TX fi s y RX ft ae TE RX ft Dispatch Text Message NETWORK Server Text Message Dispatch System Components and Topologies This configuration can be expanded
483. t is likely that the interrupt procedure fails for both radios due to a signaling collision that occurs during the periodic signaling interval and neither of the radios succeed at obtaining a clear channel on which to transmit Extending this discussion to beyond two radios e g additional group members configured with Voice Interrupt capability it becomes even more likely that more than one radio user requests a Voice Interrupt at nearly the same time resulting in a signaling collision and a failed interrupt procedure The likelihood of more than one radio user requesting a Voice Interrupt at nearly the April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 259 same time is difficult to predict or estimate because this depends heavily on the usage characteristic profile of a particular system operating procedures implemented by the system administrators and the training provided to the radio users Example Some systems may provide every radio user with Voice Interrupt capability and experience no signaling collisions resulting in Voice Interrupt failures On the other hand other systems similarly provisioned would experience many Voice Interrupt failures Yet other systems may provide only a few radios users with Voice Interrupt capability but experience high rates of collisions and Voice Interrupt failures NOTE Performance varies by system To maintain radio user experience at an acceptable level the following suggestions can be
484. t routes all data to the Application Server Since this mobile is the radio gateway to the server it should be configured to transmit and receive on a single channel frequency and time slot The control station is programmed with a known radio ID so the field radios know how to contact the server The server and the control station connected via USB must be located in an area that is in good coverage of the repeater it is communicating with If there are multiple repeaters covering a large geographical area the Application Server s control stations must be located in good coverage of each repeater This is important since it is common for the overlap between repeaters to be small and often only in low signal strength areas There can only be one Application Server per system One key service offered by the server based configuration is radio presence notification The Presence Notifier is required to reside on the Application Server The purpose of the Presence Notifier is to track whether field radios are currently present on the system Upon power up or channel change the MOTOTRBO radio transmits a registration message to the control station connected to the Application Server where the Presence Notifier resides The Presence Notifier then informs other data applications that the radio is available to receive and transmit data messages Each frequency and time slot that needs to communicate with the Application Server needs to have its own con
485. tal and physical and logical channel using his channel selector knob each channel selection position is configured for a particular call type on either a digital channel that specifies both frequency and time slot or an analog channel that specifies both frequency and 25 kHz or 12 5 kHz bandwidth Radio channels are either analog or digital This is configured by the CPS The radio can scan between analog and digital channels Greater detail on channel planning and configuration is provided in System Design Considerations on page 203 2 2 3 MOTOTRBO Channel Access Channel access dictates what conditions a radio is allowed to initiate a transmission on a channel The channel access rules of MOTOTRBO are governed by the mobile and portable radios It is the radio s responsibility to assess the state of the system and utilize its channel access rules to decide whether to grant the call to the user In repeater systems it is the repeater s responsibility to e Identify if a channel is busy or e Identify if a channel is idle or e Inform for which radio the channel is reserved The repeater does not block or deny any channel access from radios on its system but will not repeat transmissions from another system There are two main types of channel access ina MOTOTRBO system Polite and Impolite access In the configuration software channel access is referred to as the Admit Criteria MOTOTRBO supports the following Admit Cr
486. te an Active Site Search since this is not supported while in emergency See Emergency Revert and GPS Revert Considerations on page 289 for further details on how Emergency Revert and GPS Revert operate together In summary Feat re Passive Site Automatic Active Site Automatic Active Site Manual Search Search on TX Request Search on Loss of Site Site Roam Tactical Emergency jot available Available Available Available Non Revert Only Available on ck a Not Available Available Emergency Initiation Emergency Revert Not Available Not Available Performed After Dropping GPS Revert while Reverted the Data Message Not Available Available 2 6 3 6 Performance while Roaming It is important to note that roaming not just enabled but in the act of searching may cause some minor degradations in performance Therefore it is important that the Roaming RSSI Threshold and the radio s Site Lock be set appropriately when not mobile These degradations are similar to what a scanning radio would experience Degradation may be experienced in the following areas e Late Entry to Voice Transmissions Voice Truncation e Longer Preambles required for Control Messages and Data e Increased setup time for Confirmed Private Calls e Group Call Time to Talk Permit may increase if Site Search Required While roaming the radio temporarily leaves the current home channel and inspects other sites to deci
487. te to Own Digital System Operation Admit Criteria of Color Code Free This criteria applies only to digital channels When configured for Polite to Own Digital System operation the radio checks for an idle or busy channel prior to allowing a transmission This operation is similar to the Polite to All operation with exception that the radio is not polite to analog systems or other system s transmissions It is only polite to other traffic in its own system This option is often used when there are no neighboring communications systems or when there is no concern about interfering with radios in neighboring communication systems 2 2 3 4 Polite to Other Analog System Operation Admit Criteria of Correct PL This criteria applies only to analog channels When configured for Polite to Other Analog System operation the radio checks for an Idle or busy channel prior to allowing a transmission This operation is similar to the Polite to All operation with exception that the radio is not polite to analog systems with the same PL It is polite to other system s transmissions The radio checks for a PL match prior to allowing a transmission April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 23 2 2 3 5 Polite or Impolite or Voice Interrupt While Participating in a Call In Call Criteria The In Call Criteria applies only when the radio is participating in an active call The radio can optionally allow others that are part of the
488. telemetry services text messaging and location tracking Refer to Third Party Application Partner Program on page 129 for more details on Third Party Application Partner Program Core peripheral The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface also includes core functionality for audio input and output PTT monitor receive unsquelch channel steering and other general purpose input output GPIO functions This enables interface with dispatch and telemetry applications and other traditional radio system applications RF input output The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface also includes antenna signal RF input out for use with future accessories such as public safety style microphones and vehicular adaptors Rugged and Submersible The MOTOTRBO accessory and peripherals interface meets IP57 requirements submersible to 1 meter for 30 minutes thus enabling development of rugged and submersible accessories 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 151 3 1 2 2 MOTOTRBO Mobile The MOTOTRBO Mobile is designed to be located in a vehicle and powered by the vehicle s battery or by AC power Its durable construction makes it safe to use in most in vehicle environments It also can be used on desktops that are not truly mobile Similar to the portable the mobile offers numerous ways to access the system s features The mobile is available in two tiers e A radio with full display and e A radio with numeric di
489. tem automatically selects the channel for the phone call When the radio user initiates a phone call if the rest channel is idle and phone capable for this radio the phone call starts on the rest channel If the rest channel is not phone capable for the radio the phone call starts on an idle channel that is phone capable When a phone user calls a radio user group the user dials the telephone number of the APP box The phone call can start on either idle channel of the repeater that the APP box is connected to Then the following rule is in order If a channel is the rest channel the phone call starts on this channel if neither channel is the rest channel channel 1 has a higher priority than channel 2 Legacy or third party radios are not able to join in the phone call because this is a new Motorola proprietary feature The following figure describes the typical phone patch topology in Capacity Plus Figure 2 24 Phone Patch Topology in a Capacity Plus Configuration 2 15 Analog Features For customers that are migrating from Analog systems to Digital systems MOTOTRBO supports both analog and digital modes of operation MOTOTRBO mobile and portable radios support both analog and digital modes the user can select which mode to use and change modes dynamically while MOTOTRBO repeaters are configured to operate in digital mode or in analog mode When in Analog mode MOTOTRBO utilizes traditional FM technology supports both 12 5 and 25 k
490. ter operates in TDMA mode which essentially divides one channel into two virtual channels using time slots therefore the user capacity is doubled The repeater utilizes embedded signaling to inform the field radios of the busy idle status of each channel time slot the type of traffic and even the source and destination information Another advantage during digital operation is error detection and correction The further a transmission travels the more predominant the interference becomes and inevitably more errors are introduced The receiving MOTOTRBO radio operating in digital mode utilizes built in error detection and correction algorithms native to the protocol to correct these problems The MOTOTRBO repeater uses the same algorithms to correct the errors prior to retransmission thus repairing any errors that occur on the uplink it then transmits the repaired signal on the downlink This greatly increases the reliability and audio quality in the system which increases the customer s coverage area In digital mode the repeater only retransmits digital signals from radios configured with the same system identifier This aids in preventing co system interference The repeater does not block transmissions of radios within its own system As previously described the repeater utilizes embedded signaling to announce the current status of each channel It is up to the radios in the field to interpret these signals and grant or deny their
491. ter does not de key between every transmission If this period of high activity occurs longer than two minutes the Mixed with Audio occurs otherwise the Exclusive BSI occurs during a period of decreased traffic load It may not be desirable to enable Mixed with Audio BSI with the use of analog data i e MDC or VRM data The mixing of the BSI with the analog signalling will most likely cause the signalling to become corrupted 68007024085 April 2011 298 4 13 System Design Considerations GPS Revert Considerations For Single Repeater and IP Site Connect only GPS revert when used correctly can significantly improve the integrated voice and location data performance of a system In order to maximize location throughput while minimizing missed data text telemetry etc and voice transmissions there are a number of factors that must be considered April 2011 Non location update traffic should not be transmitted on the GPS Revert Channel when attempting to maximize the Location load on the GPS Revert Channel Avoid adding the GPS Revert Channel into the Scan List if the location load is high as scanning radios will often land on this channel and qualify traffic that is not for them This can slow down scanning While in repeater mode avoid placing the alternate slot associated with GPS Revert Channel into the Scan List if the location load is high Scanning radios will often land on this channel to qualify traffic that is
492. ter mode the MOTOTRBO radios are capable of sending text messages to other radios Radio to radio text messaging is accomplished by a text messaging application that is built into the radio From the front keypad the radio user can select the target radio and type a text message In order for the text message to be sent successfully to the target radio both radios need to be on the same channel and time slot Similar to voice if multiple direct mode frequencies are being used the user must choose the channel his target is on before sending his text message The radios do not have to be on the same group Text messaging and the previously discussed voice services operate on the same channel and time slot Since data operates in a polite manner the radio avoids transmitting text messages while any voice service is active If operating with only field radios text messages are limited to radio to radio communications Text messages can also be sent from radio to radio using a PC attached to the radio A software based text messaging client will be installed on the PC These configurations are commonly used in vehicles or on desktops that do not have LAN connections Since they can run on AC power or April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 171 off the in vehicle battery mobile radios are usually used for these applications though a portable can also be used Note that the radio can be configured to route incoming text messa
493. than in Example 1 Unconfirmed Data Considerations The Revert Control Stations only receive and never transmit Therefore there are no isolation requirements between these stations The installation could be as simple as using an individual antenna for each control station The Primary or Trunked Control Stations only transmit and never receive Therefore there are no isolation requirements between these stations The installation could be as simple as using an individual antenna for each control station Control Station Installation A 4 However the Revert and either the Primary or Trunked Control Stations may be in close proximity with each other and there are isolation requirements between these different types of control stations Assuming an IM free frequency plan was selected the interference to account for is blocking If the different types of control stations must be in close proximity consider adding an RX bandpass filter to attenuate the TX signals If an IM free frequency plan is not possible it is recommended to place circulators on the transmitting control stations in order to minimize TX IM An example of this type of installation is illustrated below Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Data Revert Control Station Trunking Control Station Trunking C
494. that a firewall NAT may translate the address in customer network into another address in the backend network An IP Site Connect device registers its IPv4 UDP address during power on and upon a change in its IPv4 UDP address with the Master The Master notifies to all the IP Site Connect devices whenever the IPv4 address of an IP Site Connect device changes An IP Site Connect device maintains a table of the latest IPv4 addresses of other IP Site Connect devices and it uses the table to send an IPv4 UDP message to another IP Site Connect device The IP Site Connect devices may be behind firewalls For successful communication between two IP Site Connect devices say R1 and R2 the firewall of R1 must be open for messages from R2 and vice versa Since the IPv4 UDP address of an IP Site Connect device is dynamic it is not possible to manually configure the firewalls The Link Management procedure overcomes this problem by periodically for example setting the Keep FW Open Time to every 6 seconds sending a dummy message from R1 to R2 and vice versa On a receipt of an outbound message say from R1 to R2 the R1 s firewall keeps itself open for a short duration of approximately 20 seconds for an inbound message from R2 An IP Site Connect device say R1 sends the dummy message to another IP Site Connect device say R2 only if R1 has not sent any message to R2 in last Keep FW Open Time The value of Keep FW Open Time is customer programmable and s
495. that can be connected to the PC is four 3 2 1 1 6 Summary of Features in Digital Direct Mode The following features are supported in digital direct mode Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Direct Mode Voice Signaling Emergency Other Data Calls Features Features Handling Features Group Call PTT ID and Emergency Alarm Text Scan Aliasing Messaging Private Call Radio Inhibit Emergency Alarm with Location Priority Scan Call Tracking All Call Remote Monitor Emergency Alarm with Telemetry Time out Timer Voice to Follow Voice Radio Check Emergency Revert Third Party Polite to All Interrupt ADP channel access Applications Call Alert Emergency Voice GPS Revert Polite to Own Interrupt System channel access Remote Voice Data Over Impolite Dekey Voice channel access Interrupt See Scan Considerations on page 65 for more information on the different scan modes supported by different topologies 68007024085 April 2011 166 System Components and Topologies 3 2 1 2 Interoperability between Analog MOTOTRBO Radios and Analog Radios in Direct Mode fi TX fi analog TX fi RX fi RX fi 1 Legacy MOTOTRBO SU Analog SU analog mode Figure 3 17 Legacy Analog Radios and MOTOTRBO Radios in analog mode in Direct Mode MOTOTRBO radios support analog mode as well In order for the MOTOTRBO radio to communicate with an analog radio it must be programmed
496. that is being played through the radio s speaker Thus the intervals during which the radio samples the higher priority members essentially becomes the audio holes that are introduced into the currently monitored voice If there are two priority channels configured this time is how often a sample is taken of either one Therefore one particular channel is sampled at a rate of double the priority sampling duration A balance between how often an audio hole is introduced and how often a channel is sampled needs to be achieved to ensure that transmissions are not missed and to prevent introducing too many audio holes This interval is CPS configurable via the Priority Sample Time interval parameter Since the radio only samples at the rate of the Priority Sample Time it is important to understand that if sampling for data the Scan Preamble must be set to double the Priority Sample Time The user experiences few to no audio holes if he is currently unmuted to a lower priority voice while the priority member is in the other timeslot of the same repeater In this situation the radio uses the embedded signaling in the repeater to monitor activity in the other timeslot This should be taken into consideration when deciding which identifiers are assigned to which channels and slots Not all identifiers are uniquely identified in the embedded signaling because they are compressed into smaller identifiers If the system contains two or more identifier
497. the Drafts folder If a high priority event causes the radio to exit the text message editing screen the current text message is automatically saved into the Drafts folder A draft that is sent is deleted from the Drafts folder and stored to the Sent folder The user can scroll through messages and select any message to read reply to forward save or delete 2 4 2 2 Services Provided to a Third Party Text Message Application Motorola provides an Application Development Kit ADK which documents how a text message application interfaces with the text message protocol used for MOTOTRBO A list of available ADKs is available on page 134 of this manual 68007024085 April 2011 46 System Feature Overview 2 4 3 Location Services Az ez GPS Radios a RA Application Server IN ePresence Notifier Location Server y b eLocation Dispatch id Pans Control Stations GPS Radios LAN _ Fixed Clients Dispatcher MOTOTRBO Location Client Figure 2 9 Location Services The MOTOTRBO location feature allows a dispatcher to determine the current location of a radio on a display map The dispatcher can obtain the radio s location alone latitude longitude or the location combined with other information about the environment horizontal speed direction etc that allows value added services such as tracking of resources MOTOTRBO systems enable location services via two complementary functions First the MOTOTRBO
498. the assigned IP of the LAN network interface must not conflict with those assigned to the Network Interfaces of the Control Stations Additionally the Application Dispatchers such as Location Dispatch or Text Message Dispatch must be connected through the customer CEN to the Application Server In order for the Text Message Server to forward e mail text messages the Application Server must be connected to the Internet If the network is configured to operate with a firewall the programmed ports for the applications should be opened and allowed Details of this configuration can be found in the Text Message and Location Application install guides April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 269 4 10 1 7 MOTOTRBO Subject Line Usage A MOTOTRBO Text Message is comprised of three parts A subject line subject line delimiter and body The subject line delimiter is a carriage return Unicode code point U 000D and line feed Unicode code point U 000A character pair CRLF Therefore anything up to the first CRLF within the Message is interpreted as the subject line and anything after the first CRLF is interpreted as the body The subject line is left blank if there are no characters before the first CRLF or if no CRLF pairs are contained in the Message When e mail text messages are received by the Application Server the e mail subject line and body are converted into the MOTOTRBO Text Message subject line and body respectively The m
499. the mobile is long enough to be comfortably used by either a right handed or left handed user The button is raised from the side and has a raised pattern so that it is easily found in the low light conditions Pressing the PTT starts a voice transmission on the selected channel This enables the user to simply Push and Talk The MOTOTRBO mobile can also interface to other accessories such as a Visor Microphone a Foot Switch and an enhanced full keypad microphone Motorola Original accessories provide an easy way to turn the MOTOTRBO mobile radio into a custom communication solution to fit your business requirements Channel Rocker The MOTOTRBO Mobile user chooses his communication environment by selecting a channel using the Channel Rocker on the control head The Channel Rocker has a raised pattern that is backlit so it is easy to find in low light conditions Although easy to find it requires some force to push it so as not to change channels through accidentally pressing Each press can be programmed to access a different channel within the radio s programming This allows the user to quickly switch between analog and digital channels and even different groups The user can quickly switch to different channels by pushing the up or down sections of the rocker This greatly increases the number of available channels to the user Programmable Buttons There are programmable buttons on the MOTOTRBO mobile The full display mobile has four prog
500. the site s analog coverage footprint is already known it is easier to plan the site s digital coverage footprint This approach allows the system designer to use their existing analog site coverage prediction techniques whether simple or complex and then translate the results of the analog coverage prediction to predict digital coverage Delivered Audio Quality DAQ is a method to quantify audio quality It is a measure of the intelligibility and quality of voice transported through a communications system as defined in TIA TSB 88 DAQ reports audio quality on a 5 point scale with a DAQ rating of 3 considered as the minimal acceptable level of audio quality for public safety applications The definition of DAQ 3 is Speech understandable with slight effort and occasional repetition required due to Noise Distortion When comparing an analog site and a MOTOTRBO site the relative regions of coverage offering comparable audio quality are illustrated in the figure below Analog Digital Improving Audio Quality _ Figure 2 6 Differences in Analog Coverage For a DAQ 3 audio quality MOTOTRBO provides a greater usable range than analog when all other factors are considered equal e g transmit power level antenna height receiver noise figures IF filter bandwidths no audio processing such as Hear Clear on the analog radios terrain antenna combining equipment etc 68007024085 April
501. then a window size greater than 7 is recommended for system reliability even if the amount of data requires a smaller window size NOTE Increasing the window size decreases the system throughput The user may also configure both slots of the wide area system for enhanced GPS revert In this scenario the user will need to configure both voice and other data on a different IP Site Connect system MOTOTRBO Y Control Station Location Request S1 MCDD Location Response i Presence Notifier Volos Text Voice Text amp ARS S1 Y Y amp ARS Channel Location 3 P Server Y Wide Area Location Response 4 Scheduled GPS amp GPS Data S2 Y SA Y Voice Text amp ARS S1 Application KT Revert Slot Server A on MOTOTRBO ti Control Station 7 Location Request S1 VY lt Y Voice Text amp ARS S1 Y Location Response amp GPS Data S2 Voice Text amp ARS Channel Voice Text amp ARS Channel Enhanced GPS Revert Slot Rept Enhanced GPS Revert Slot Rep 15 WV __ Location Request S1 Y p gt Voice Text amp ARS S1 Y Y Location Request S1 t Voice Text amp ARS Channel Voice Text amp ARS Channel Y
502. they do in direct mode The customer will only notice the increased performance and coverage April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 169 3 2 2 1 Digital MOTOTRBO Radios in Repeater Mode TX f1 TX f1 RX f2 RX f2 Slot 4s go Slot Oe lt a Mey Rs Rs K S MOTOTRBO SU PERA EN MOTOTRBO SU digital mode Dy 7 digital mode esr Slot 1 hg KA i sS Vig ae Bsz TX f1 Pel TX f1 RX f2 MOTOTRBO RX f2 Slot 2 Digital Repeater Slot 2 MOTOTRBO SU MOTOTRBO SU digital mode digital mode Figure 3 19 MOTOTRBO Digital Radios on MOTOTRBO Two Siot Digital Repeater In digital mode a repeater uses one frequency pair 1 transmit 1 receive to support the two logical channels As mentioned before this is done by using TDMA technology to divide the physical channel into two time slots In order to access the repeater the radio user selects the physical and logical channel using the channel selector Hence when operating in repeater mode the field radios cannot dynamically choose a time slot Each of the channel selector positions is programmed for a particular digital frequency and time slot The end user sees in effect each time slot as a different conventional channel Radio groups can be further segmented within the time slot by assigning different group IDs to each group Groups on different time slots cannot communicate with each other Synchronization is the key to a MOTOT
503. tiator needs to be on a channel that is configured with a Digital Emergency System and has its Emergency Revert Channel set to Selected in the CPS Since this is set on a per channel basis a radio could be configured to operate differently based on the selected channel A Centralized emergency strategy is when the Emergency Initiators transmit their emergency alarm and call on a dedicated channel group or slot This strategy is often referred to as a revert strategy This strategy assumes that there is one dedicated Acknowledging Supervisor whose job is to handle the emergencies of all users in the system and that the Emergency Initiators automatically change or revert to the channel the Acknowledging Supervisor is operating on to process their emergency Because this Acknowledging Supervisor s role is only to monitor for emergencies it becomes easier to manage his availability Further steps can be taken to guarantee the availability of the Acknowledging Supervisor It is a good idea to locate the Acknowledging Supervisor s radio in a good RF coverage area of the system so not to go out of range Having a designated RF channel and slot that is specifically used for managing emergencies lowers the possibility of encountering a busy system when there is heavy emergency traffic In larger systems the Acknowledging Supervisor s role in a centralized configuration is often referred to a Dispatcher It is not expected that this A
504. ting in repeater mode In this example channels fis1 and f2s1 compose the Selected Channel frequency pair and channels f1s2 and f2s2 compose the GPS Revert Channel frequency pair Communications such a presence location requests Application Server to radio text and voice occur on the Selected Channel while all location responses radio to Application Server including location updates occur on the GPS Revert Channel Therefore a minimum of 2 control stations are required to support GPS Revert SELETED Dei RX f Slot 1 GPS REVERT TX f RX f2 oN Slot 2 MCDD MOTOTRBO TX f S MOTOTRBO SU i Control Station digital mode Presence Notifier digital mode SELETED TX f RX f MOTOTRBO Slot 1 Application Server Digital Repeater GPS REVERT TX f RX f2 be Slot 2 MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode digital mode Figure 3 26 MOTOTRBO Radios in Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with GPS Revert Configuration Under a typical scenario the radio is powered on and then registers on the Selected Channel with the Presence Notifier and the Location Server The radio receives a Periodic Location Request and an Emergency Location Request from the Location Server on the Selected Channel This Periodic Location Request instructs the radio to send location updates at a specific rate while the Emergency Location Request instructs the radio to send a single Emergency Location Update when an emergency is initiated The radio
505. tion and over the air frequency 68007024085 April 2011 174 System Components and Topologies and time slot This allows data applications to simply transmit a data message to the radio and the MCDD takes care of the routing to the correct frequency and time slot Any channel that supports data and needs to communicate to the Application Server needs a dedicated control station Below is a diagram of this configuration TX f TX f RX fe RX fe Slot 1 ua ge Slot 1 A CA Wizy EA Rg oe TM USB GPS TX f2 RX fi MOTOTRBO a Control Station NZ Z MOTOTRBO SU Presence Notifier 5 digital mode digital mode gt Text Message a Server g REN a Slot 1 5 Text Message Q a gt SA Yop S Dispatch oO SS P ay g ae S2 Location Server 5 p TX fi 5 MOTOTRBO RX f2 Location Ss Digital Repeater Slot 2 Dispatch TM TM Application Server crs MOTOTRBO MOTOTRBO SU Control Station digital mode digital mode Figure 3 23 MOTOTRBO Radios in Digital Two Slot Digital Repeater Mode with a Server Based Configuration Typically location applications require a server based configuration and the Presence Notifier to operate The Location Server application can be installed on the Application Server machine with the Presence Notifier When a radio registers with the Presence Notifier it
506. tion of the voice transmission fails the radio then uses the established procedures for either Emergency Alarm or Emergency Alarm with Call depending upon the CPS configuration However the probability of success diminishes because the original voice transmission had not been successfully cleared from the channel If the voice call on the channel is not transmitting an interruptible voice signal the radio uses the established procedures for either Emergency Alarm or Emergency Alarm with Call depending upon the CPS configuration again with a lower probability of success April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 41 2 3 4 5 Emergency Voice Interrupt for Emergency Voice The Emergency Voice Interrupt feature when enabled in a radio is used during the initiation of an emergency voice transmission primarily when an interruptible voice transmission takes place on the channel and the radio does not belong to that voice transmission The radio attempts to interrupt the voice transmission and then uses the established procedures for Emergency Voice Transmissions when all of the following conditions are met e Emergency Voice Interrupt is enabled e The radio is in an emergency condition e g the designated Emergency button was pressed previously e Another radio s interruptible voice transmission is taking place on the channel e The radio in the emergency condition does not belong to the other radio s voice transmission
507. tion on the system the radio may encounter a situation where its message transmit buffer becomes full This is due to the radio queuing up messages because it cannot find an available slot to transmit data The radio will not be able to process new messages from the application once its buffer becomes full 68007024085 April 2011 218 System Design Considerations 4 4 5 5 GPS Revert and Loading The GPS Revert feature supports the transmission of voice control and non location update data transmissions on the Selected Channel while off loading Location updates onto one or more GPS Revert Channels A primary goal of the feature is to support location updates without degrading features on the Selected Channel The ultimate performance of the system will depend upon at least two loading factors 1 and 2 while a third loading factor 3 needs to be considered if most radios are powered on in a relatively short period of time These factors are listed below 1 The average number of transmissions on the Selected Channel Voice Text Messaging etc 2 The average number of transmissions on a GPS Revert Channel 3 The peak number of transmissions on the Selected Channel to account for registration and periodic re registration messaging The chart in Figure 4 6 illustrates the Good to Fair user experience area similar to that in Figure 4 1 for voice traffic loading on the selected channel and GPS traffic loading on one or more GPS Revert Ch
508. tions that may need to be addressed during the design phase Please note that all data application modules contained in this system planner are depictions of typical third party data application modules and have been included simply to illustrate certain MOTOTRBO application enabling features Migration Plans System Migration is the process of moving from one operating platform to another The following sections elaborate system migration from an analog two way radio platform to a digital two way radio platform Pre Deployment System Integration Where applicable the dealer should perform system assembly configuration adjustment and brief testing of the MOTOTRBO system Each component contains documentation necessary for system installation and optimization The benefits of staging a system in a controlled environment include e Equipment accountability in preparation for system assembly e System assembly and programming in a controlled test environment e Documentation of programming information e Fabrication of cables and connectors e Test of complete functionality and initial level setting for system optimization 68007024085 April 2011 204 System Design Considerations 4 2 2 Analog to Digital Preparation and Migration A Dynamic Mixed Mode repeater does not enable communication between legacy analog and MOTOTRBO digital radios operating in digital mode When the repeater receives an analog call it retransmits in analog mode
509. tner Licensed Developer Provided access to non proprietary documents and additional access to Application Development Kits ADKs technical support user forums and use of the Motorola Licensed Developer logo Requires License Agreement and accreditation by regional Third Party Application Partner Program manager Level 1 Vendor capability assessment For new developers or developers with one time applications planned 68007024085 April 2011 136 System Feature Overview Level of Partnership Description Provided access to non proprietary documents Application Development Kits ADKs and additional access to Motorola s Marketing Support and User Forums access to use the Motorola Application Partner logo and listed as a Motorola Application Partner on the EMEA Motorola Online Application Partner and the MOTODEV website Requires License Agreement and accreditation by regional Third Party Application Partner Program manager Level 2 Vendor capability assessment For developers with proven applications For further information to access the ADKs or to sign up for the ADP please visit the MOTODEV Application Developers website at http developer motorola com April 2011 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 137 SECTION 3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND TOPOLOGIES 3 1 System Components MOTOTRBO consists of numerous components and applicat
510. to configure this to Non Priority channel so that PL decoding is performed on non priority Scan List member channels Channel Marker in Scan List Disable channel marker Talkback Check this box to allow the radio to talk back on the channel it unmuted during the scan Tx Designated Choose Selected or one of the configured scan members as needed Channel However it is not recommended to configure the Last Active Channel Analog Hang Configure this value to as small as possible so that the radios can start Time scanning immediately In a DMM system the repeater reserves the channel for digital calls till the end of SIT 1 second Since no analog calls are allowed until then it is recommended to configure this to SIT 1 second Digital Hang Time Adjust this value based on the RF interference level Refer to section 2 2 3 for RSs Threshold a more detailed description of this field 4 17 2 Loading Considerations in a Dynamic Mixed Mode System A digital transmission may occupy a repeater s physical channel for twice as long as an analog transmission since there are 2 logical digital channels on each physical channel and transmissions may occur on each logical channel one after another With a relatively small number of digital radios in Dynamic Mixed Mode system it is recommended to configure digital radios to operate on only one logical channel during migration to provide fair chan
511. to radio and from the Application Server to radios are always sent over the Trunked Channels The Data Revert Channel feature is optional In the absence of this feature data messages are sent over the Trunked Channels This feature should be used when there is a need to reduce data traffic from the Trunked Channels Data Revert Channels will free up the Trunked Channels and the Trunked Channels can accommodate increased voice loads This also enhances the user experience by reducing the number of busy channels during voice calls April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 59 Data Revert Channels are exclusively used by the system for transporting data packets They are not used for voice communication As Data Revert Channels offload most of the data communication from the Trunked Channels they facilitate more voice communication over these channels Data Revert Channels are especially useful for transporting location responses Each channel programmed into a radio has a configurable CPS option to designate the GPS transmission channel on which the radio transmits Location Update messages The CPS options for the GPS transmission channel are Trunked Revert and None Choosing Trunked means that the data messages to the Server are transmitted on the Rest Channel In the case of Revert data messages to the Server are transmitted over one of the revert channels that are programmed into the subscriber There may be instances when the radio is
512. tor and all users on a logical channel The transmitting radio utilizes a special All Call group that every radio on the same system and logical channel regardless of group will receive In a Capacity Plus system all the radios including radios on busy channels except the transmitting radio s and radios listening to Emergency Calls listen to an All Call The listening radios on a busy channel may take up to 350 ms to leave their channels and enter the All Call late The transmitting radio on a busy channel only enters the All Call late after finishing the ongoing transmission If a radio initiates emergency while participating in an All Call then the emergency transmissions are made on the Rest Channel and the radios interested to participate in the Emergency Call leave the All Call to join the Emergency Call Example An All Call is occurring on Channel 1 and Channel 2 is the Rest Channel The radio initiating an Emergency Call leaves Channel 1 moves to Channel 2 and starts the Emergency Call The start of the Emergency Call is announced on Channel 1 This triggers the radios that want to participate in the Emergency Call to leave Channel 1 and move to Channel 2 As an All Call is considered a one way transmission users cannot talk back to an All Call If the user transmits after receiving an All Call he transmits using his currently selected group An All Call follows the Admit Criteria of the selected channel More information on the A
513. trative ctb Administrative Administrative Transport Frank Mike jati 78378 Administrative Security Administrative Security Transport Construction Security transport ctb Transport 68007024085 Kenny Carl Transport Construction Security April 2011 280 System Design Considerations 4 11 3 1 Configuration of Groups In MOTOTRBO systems capabilities for Group Calls are configured via the subscriber portable and mobile CPS The repeater does not require any specific configuration with respect to groups There are three interrelated steps in configuring your radios to participate in Group Calls it is configured through the Contacts RX Group Lists and Channels menu folders in CPS While the MOTOTRBO CPS enables great flexibility in configuring your system for Group Calling one basic procedure is as follows 1 Inthe Contacts folder go to the Digital folder and add a call of type Group Call The CPS will provide a default name and ID you will need to assign a unique ID between 1 and 16776415 and should also rename the Group Call to an intuitive alphanumeric name representative of the user workgroup that will ultimately be using this group e g Maintenance All Calls created in the Contacts folder appear in the Contacts menu of the subscriber by name and the Group name also appears on the radio display whe
514. trol stations The Application Server can be connected to up to 16 control stations Each control station is configured to communicate on the specified frequency and time slot and acts as the data gateway for that channel Therefore a MOTOTRBO system can support server based data on up to two repeaters each with two time slots When a radio powers up or changes channels it sends in a registration to the Presence Notifier via the control station on its frequency and time slot which in turn informs the applications of the radio s presence Each control station has the same radio ID therefore the field radios transmit their messages to the same radio ID regardless of which frequency and time slot they are on Because the field radios are located on different time slots there needs to be a method to track the location of each radio so that outbound data from the Application Server can be routed to the appropriate time slot This is the purpose of the Multi Channel Device Driver or MCDD The MCDD is a small piece of software installed on the Application Server Its purpose is to keep track of which interface each radio is currently located on Each control station is handled like a different network interface to the Application Server When the MCDD sees a registration from a radio it updates the PC s routing table so that any data traffic targeted towards that radio will be routed out the correct network interface therefore out the correct control sta
515. ttings of the target radio April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 285 Since the ability to remotely monitor a user could be misused it is suggested that only supervisors be granted the ability to initiate a Remote Monitor 4 11 6 6 Radio Check In MOTOTRBO systems Radio Check is configured in the portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio the ability to initiate this function this option must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings All MOTOTRBO radios decode and respond to a Radio Check 4 11 6 7 Call Alert In MOTOTRBO systems Call Alert is configured in the portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio the ability to initiate this function this option must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings All MOTOTRBO radios decode and respond to a Call Alert 4 11 6 8 RX Only In MOTOTRBO a radio can be configured as a receive only RX Only device and does not transmit The RX Only mode of operation is useful when a radio user monitors the radio communication or in hospitals where RF transmission is harmful In Capacity Plus Revert Control Stations should be configured as RX Only radios only if the data messages are transported over the air as unconfirmed data messages For confirmed data messages a RX Only Revert Control Station will not send acknowledgement and a radio will send the same data message multiple times Multiple transmissions waste the air bandwidth and cause the server to receive duplic
516. ture is enabled The table below summarizes the recommended ARS initialization delay value when ARS is sent on the Enhanced GPS channels in conventional systems Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect modes The value varies with the window size and periodic loading percentage for the system Total Number of Radios Sending ARS based on ARS Initial Delay Value Window alia 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 Size g mins mins mins mins mins mins mins mins 90 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 75 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 gt 60 240 480 720 960 1200 1440 1680 1920 45 330 660 990 1320 1650 1980 2310 2640 90 48 96 144 192 240 288 336 384 75 123 246 369 492 615 738 861 984 60 198 396 594 792 990 1188 1386 1584 45 273 546 819 1092 1365 1638 1911 2184 90 42 84 126 168 210 252 294 336 75 105 210 315 420 525 630 735 840 f 60 168 336 504 672 840 1008 1176 1344 45 234 468 702 936 1170 1404 1638 1872 90 36 72 108 144 180 216 252 288 75 93 186 279 372 465 558 651 744 8 60 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 45 204 408 612 816 1020 1224 1428 1632 68007024085 April 2011 58 System Feature Overview Total Number of Radios Sending ARS based on ARS Initial Delay Value Window pects 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 Size mins mins mins mins mins mins mins mins 90 33 66 99 132 165 198 231 264 75 81 162 243 324 405 486 567 648 3 60 132 264 396 528 6
517. tures Feature Name Description This feature allows announcement type messages to take place during a call to an individual or group of radios This feature is used in systems whereby the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a Voice Selective Call single radio Voice Selective Call can be used to eliminate the need to listen to traffic that is irrelevant to the users There are two distinct types of voice selective call basic voice selective call and automatic voice selective call Call Alert notifies the radio user of incoming calls This feature also Call Alert informs the radio users when another radio user is trying to reach them No voice communication is involved in this feature This feature is a combination of the Call Alert and Voice Selective Call features Call Alert with Voice allows a receiving radio to receive voice Call Alert with Voice messages and call alert signals This feature is useful when a dispatcher needs to transmit a voice message and leave a Call Alert to the targeted radio April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 117 2 15 4 Analog Scan Features Feature Name Description Nuisance Channel Delete A channel with unwanted activity is called a Nuisance Channel The user can remove a Nuisance Channel from the Scan List temporarily by using the Nuisance Channel Delete feature Priority Dual Priority Scan Priority Scan allows a user to
518. tween repeaters This section describes the changes On receipt of a start up of a voice data control call from a radio over a slot a repeater sends it over the backend network to all the repeaters that are enabled operating in digital mode and the corresponding slot is configured for multiple site operation This implies that at any time at most two calls are active in an IP Site Connect system if both slots are configured for multiple site operation In an IP Site Connect configuration calls can start concurrently at more than one repeater and due to different messaging delay between repeaters it is possible that different repeaters select different calls for repeating over the air To overcome this problem on receipt of a start up of a voice data control call either over the air from a radio or over the backend network from other repeaters a repeater starts an arbitration window for a duration of twice the Inter Repeater Messaging Delay At the end of the arbitration window the repeater selects one of the calls received during this window using a procedure that ensures that all the repeaters select the same call After selection a repeater starts repeating the bursts of the selected call A disadvantage of the arbitration procedure is that it increases the System Access Time The voice data control messages are sent burst by burst between repeaters Like a single site system a repeater does no data link layer processing e g acknowledg
519. twork interfaces The USB is used for 68007024085 System Components and Topologies 187 connecting a local PC and Ethernet is used for connecting to the backend network of an IP Site Connect system RX fs TX f4 uh KE oe MOTOTRBO SU digital mode TX fa RX fa Slot 2 MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater Q K 2 Site 1 MOTOTRBO SU digital mode Presence Notifier Hi Text Message f Server f MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Text Message Dispatch Location Server y TX fs RX fe Slot 1 i i MOTOTRBO Multi Channel Device Driver TM I Location E Digital Repeater f Dispatch MASTER ae ee TX fe RX fs ee J Application Server MOTOTRBO SE Control Station R digital mode MOTOTRBO SU digital mode WAC1 ee WAC Wide Area Channel y TX fs TM Text Messaging RX fe fs Slot 2 amp MOTOTRBO m Digital Repeater gt MOTOTRBO SU digital mode Figure 3 33 Wide Area System with Centralized Data Application Server There may be an application known as RDAC IP running on a host PC connected to the backend network of an IP Site Connect system The application displays the status of repeaters and allows its user to control some of the parameters of a repeater The host PC maintains its link with the Master and other repeaters using the same protocols as other repeaters in an IP Site Connect system Note
520. uire the appropriate authentication be entered that is being utilized by the repeaters in the IP Site Connect system or Capacity Plus system When connecting to multiple IP Site Connect or Capacity Plus systems RDAC must be configured with a different UDP port for each Master Although the network connection is designed for connecting remotely a local network connection in close proximity to the repeater is supported The RDAC IP application can communicate with enabled and disabled repeaters knockdowned repeaters digital and analog repeaters and wide and local area repeaters As long as they are on the network and communicating with the same Master repeater that the RDAC application is communicating with they will be controllable via the application It is important to note that over use or misuse of RDAC diagnostics could cause strain to the network link and therefore cause voice degradation For example numerous requests for status or error logs could cause excess traffic on a network link which could delay voice through the network Please review the network bandwidth considerations in later chapters 2 8 2 Connecting Locally via the USB Connecting RDAC locally via the USB provides the user with all the services of RDAC but only allows access to the local repeater This connection is very useful if the repeater is in close proximity to the dispatch center or while performing service or trouble shooting locally April 2011 6800
521. ultiple zones in the CPS so that they can be accessed as zones in the radio menu From the radio menu the user can navigate to the zones icon select it and switch to a different zone When in the different zone the 16 position selector knob switch is now programmed with that zone s channels and call types It is recommended that the Zone should be given aliases that can be understood by the end user 68007024085 April 2011 296 System Design Considerations 4 12 Base Station Identifications BSI Setting Considerations Base Station Identification BSI sometimes referred to as CWID is used to identify the licensee operating a repeater or base station Some form of station identification is usually necessary to comply with the requirements of the local radio regulatory authority The transmission time of the Base Station ID BSI is proportional to the number of characters in the BSI To improve channel efficiency it is recommended to keep the BSI length short The content of the BSI needs approval from regulatory bodies e g FCC in USA Regulatory bodies and their regulations may vary from nation to nation thus customers are required to understand their own national laws and regulations while selecting BSI characters and its length BSI is available on the MOTOTRBO repeater when configured for analog or digital mode In both modes BSI is generated using a sinusoidal tone modulated on an analog FM carrier The station tran
522. unkin faba Tone Local Base yP g Patch Panel Deskset z Station RX Audio Y Y Y Y Y TX Audio MTR3000 N Y N Y Y TX Audio DR 3000 Y Y Y Y Y TX Audio with Pre Y N Y N N Emphasis MTR3000 TX Data MTR3000 Y N Y N N Ext PTT Y Y Disable Repeat Path N N Repeater Knockdown NA Y NA Y NA Monitor Y N Y Y PL Detect O O CSQ Detect O O O O April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 123 Console Acc Type Trunkin Prone Tone tee Base yP g Patch Panel Deskset Station Audio Type FLAT FILTERED FLAT FILTERED FILTERED Analog Accessory NA O NA O O Emphasis Antenna Relay NA NA NA O O Y This feature is necessary for the application N This feature is not necessary for the application O This is an optional parameter for the application NA Not Applicable 2 15 5 3 Configuration Considerations 2 15 5 3 1 Analog Trunking Controllers amp Community Repeaters Most analog trunking controllers and community repeaters will have two outputs that are to be modulated by the repeater voice audio signaling data The MOTOTRBO DR 3000 repeater only accepts one audio input Thus the two outputs must first be mixed into a single input and dropped down to the audio level the MOTOTRBO repeater expects on the microphone port The microphone port is designed to transmit audio at 80mV RMS 220 mVp p through a 560 ohm load Care must be taken when choosing an audio source as the output i
523. unmute to the actual digital channel activity Repeater Knockdown Asserting this input pin triggers the repeater to temporarily enter Repeat Path Disable Mode In this mode the repeater s transmitter will only be enabled by the external PTT and the audio source will be the Tx Audio Input pin Releasing this input pin will revert the repeater back to Normal Mode where the repeaters transmitter can be activated by a qualified RF signal on the receive frequency In Dynamic Mixed Mode this feature is not supported during an ongoing digital transmission Antenna Relay This output pin is used to drive an antenna relay switch for applications where the repeater acts as a dispatch station that will only receive or transmit at a time This allows the use of a single antenna without the need of expensive combining equipment The pin toggles active when the repeater enters a transmit state and reverts to inactive when the repeater drops back to idle receive This feature is not supported in Digital and Dynamic Mixed modes April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 121 2 15 5 1 3 Rear Accessory Port Fixed Audio Pins The following table provides a description of the fixed audio pins on the rear accessory connector for the DR 3000 Fixed Pins Description Spkr Spkr Act as a differential pair and should be connected at opposite ends of an audio speaker or equivalent load Under rated conditions th
524. uration selected depends on actual customer requirements 4 11 8 Channel Access Configuration Channel access methods must be specified in the radio s codeplug for each channel via the CPS that is the TX Transmit parameters for each defined channel contains an Admit Criteria option that must be set to one of the 3 possible values described below e Always e Channel Free or e Color Code Free An Admit Criteria of Always is sometimes referred to as impolite channel access An Admit Criteria of Channel Free is referred to as polite to all Finally an Admit Criteria of Color Code Free is referred to as Polite to own color code In polite mode the radio will not transmit on a channel if there is any activity detected on that channel In impolite mode the radio will transmit on a channel regardless of any activity on that channel When operating in impolite mode a radio user will cause RF contention if there is another call on the same slot currently in progress See MOTOTRBO Channel Access on page 20 Radio users provisioned for polite operation need only press their PTT to determine if they can transmit or not A Talk Permit Tone or Talk Denial Tone indicates if they have been granted or denied access Impolite users are allowed to transmit regardless if the channel is busy or idle although they would still need to wake the repeater It is important to note that the LED busy indication on the radios represents the
525. used for periodic updates The possible values are 90 75 60 and 45 The rest of the windows are used for one time updates and also to empty out queued data When a subscriber is participating in a voice call chances are it may miss its windows This will lead to windows getting queued up in the subscriber When this happens the subscriber can make one time requests to ask for additional windows to empty out its queue In a situation whereby a system has heavy voice loading the subscriber may start to miss their reserved windows quite frequently Hence in such a scenario it is advised to run the system at 60 or 45 capacity so the rest of the windows can be used to clear up the queued data For more details on system reliability based on voice call loading refer to Section 4 4 5 6 Enhanced GPS Revert Loading amp Reliability In an IP Site Connect system where a revert channel is a wide area channel only one repeater s slot needs to be selected with periodic window reservation 90 75 60 and 45 For all the other peers this value should be set to None 68007024085 April 2011 56 System Feature Overview For all modes it is not recommended to have any non GPS data on the GPS Revert channel The only exception is Capacity Plus mode where ARS data is also supported on the GPS Revert channel The system throughput is dependent on the window size selected for the system and the percentage of windows reserved f
526. users can place an All Call at the touch of a button However this method to initiate an All Call is only supported on the display portable radios and via a keypad microphone with the alphanumeric display mobiles Since All Calls are monitored by everyone on a slot it is suggested that only supervisors be granted the ability to transmit All Calls 4 11 6 4 Radio Disable In MOTOTRBO systems Radio Disable is configured in the portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio the ability to initiate this function this option must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings To permit or prevent a given radio from decoding and responding to this command this option must be configured in the CPS signaling systems settings Since the ability to disable a user could be misused it is suggested that only supervisors be granted the ability to initiate a Radio Disable 4 11 6 5 Remote Monitor In MOTOTRBO systems Remote Monitor is configured in the portable and mobile radio CPS To allow a radio the ability to initiate this function this option must be enabled in the CPS Menu settings To permit or prevent a given radio from decoding and responding to this command this option must be configured in the CPS signaling systems settings If a radio is configured to decode the remote monitor command the duration that the target radio will transmit after receiving a Remote Monitor command can be set in the CPS signaling systems se
527. ut operation A sudden decrease in available bandwidth may cause the previously described symptoms It is also important to note that if the wide area network connection is utilized by other services file transfer multimedia web browsing etc then the IP Site Connect devices may not have the appropriate bandwidth when required and quality of service may suffer It is suggested to remove or limit these types of activities In addition overusage of the RDAC application itself may cause increased strain on the network during times of High Voice activity It is recommended that RDAC commands be kept to a minimum unless appropriate bandwidth has been allocated 4 6 3 2 4 1 Required Bandwidth Calculations The amount of bandwidth an IP Site Connect device requires is dependent on a of variety factors The most important factor to understand is that the bandwidth required for one particular device is dependent on how many other devices or peers it has in the IP Site Connect system Equally important is the type of devices Recall that an IP Site Connect system can contain repeaters that have two channels operating in wide area one channel operating in wide area or no channels operating in wide area such as local channels only Channels or slots operating in local area mode do not send their voice traffic over the network Recall that one repeater within the IP Site Connect system acts as the Master This repeater requires some additional bandwidth T
528. vents outbound over the air transmissions received from an unauthorized radio e In software versions RO1 07 00 or later MOTOTRBO supports the IP Console Radio Enable Disable commands which can not be disabled in a radio using the CPS These commands can only be initiated by the application and can not be issued by a radio The repeater processes the IP Console Radio Enable Disable commands only if it receives over the IP interface The repeater schedules the IP Console Radio Disable command for over the air transmission to the target radio in the system A radio always processes the IP Console Radio Disable command from the repeater and disables itself similar to the Radio Disable command Similarly the application can schedule an IP Console Radio Enable command via the IP interface 2 3 3 3 Remote Monitor The Remote Monitor feature allows a remote user to activate a target radio s microphone and transmitter for a period of time A call is silently set up on the target radio and its PTT is controlled remotely without any indications given to the end user The duration that the target radio transmits after receiving a Remote Monitor command is set in the target radio through the CPS When receiving the Remote Monitor command the target radio initiates a Private Call back to the originator of the Remote Monitor command This feature is used to ascertain the situation of a target radio which is powered on but is unresponsive This is benefici
529. vert each section into decimal 76 75 96 Assemble IP address from conversion above 12 A B C where A The first 8 bit section in decimal format In this example A 76 B The second 8 bit section in decimal format In this example B 75 C The third 8 bit section in decimal format In this example C 96 The IP address for Unit ID 05000032 is 12 76 75 96 The MOTOTRBO data applications both in the radio and externally on the PC perform this conversion to an IP address when sending and transmitting Understanding this conversion is important because it is possible to send traffic directly to the IP address of the radio though in most cases this happens transparently to the user For example if a user creates a text message and selects a user from the address book with an Individual Radio ID of 12045 which can be aliased the text message is sent over the air to radio 12045 and is addressed to IP Address 12 0 47 13 When radio 12045 receives the over the air data message it opens the data message and looks at the target IP address Because the target IP address matches its own IP the message is sent to the internal radio application The target application is dependent on the UDP message and the destination address used at the source If the target of a data message is an external PC connected to the MOTOTRBO radio the sending device will use an IP address with the CAI Network address plus 1 For example if a MOTOTRBO 6800
530. voice transmission or the voice transmission is not interruptible the radio also uses the established procedures for Emergency Voice Transmissions However the probability of success diminishes because the original voice transmission had not been successfully cleared from the channel 68007024085 April 2011 42 System Feature Overview 2 4 MOTOTRBO Integrated Data 2 4 1 Overview When performing in digital mode any MOTOTRBO radio can be used as an integrated voice and data radio where the radio can send voice as well as data messages on a given logical channel This does not refer to data services like enabling users to surf the web send video images or synchronize their office desktops This is not the right technology for such bandwidth hungry applications However it is a great technology for productivity enhancing applications like messaging location based services simple database queries bar code reading and fill in the form type of applications Additionally it is built into the MOTOTRBO system so there are no monthly fees or dependencies on public carrier services and customers control what applications their users can access The MOTOTRBO system provides reliable data communications throughout the same areas where the system provides readily usable voice communications However there is a trade off between the desired RF coverage area for data and the data throughput of the system Extending the range of a system s operat
531. wards the resulting datagram to the Application Server All the data applications of the single site configuration of MOTOTRBO are compatible with IP Site Connect configuration An IP Site Connect configuration supports the revert channels where a revert channel can be a channel of another IP Site Connect system The GPS data on a GPS Revert Channel are sent unconfirmed in IP Site Connect mode This increases the throughput of April 2011 68007024085 System Design Considerations 241 the GPS data as the data link layer acknowledgement over the backend network is slower due to delays associated with the backend network 4 6 5 Security Considerations The single site configuration of MOTOTRBO offers two types of privacy mechanisms over the air Basic Privacy and Enhanced Privacy See Voice and Data Privacy on page 85 The IP Site Connect configuration not only supports both the mechanisms but also extends them over the backend network A repeater does not decrypt the encrypted packets It simply passes the packets as received over the air to other repeaters Since the two mechanisms are not compatible all the radios and repeaters of an IP Site Connect system should support the same privacy mechanism This should be ensured during configuration Note that the privacy mechanisms protects only the voice or data payloads They do not protect the voice or data headers or control messages i e CSBK or system messages between repeaters A
532. will receive and respond to a Call Alert i e you cannot disable this feature by using the CPS 2 3 3 6 Remote Voice Dekey The Remote Voice Dekey feature allows a radio user to stop any interruptible voice transmission except for All Calls This ability to remotely stop an interruptible voice transmission is provisioned into the radio via the CPS and accessed via a programmable button NOTE For the Remote Voice Dekey feature to operate consistently all radios using the channel should be provisioned with the ability to be interrupted However not all need to be provisioned with the Remote Voice Dekey capability If some radios are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g normally desirable for a supervisor s radio then those radios transmissions cannot be interrupted and the radio user receives a Remote Voice Dekey Failure Tone if Remote Voice Dekey is attempted while receiving an uninterruptible transmission The radios that are provisioned without the ability to be interrupted e g a Supervisor s radio may still be provisioned with the Remote Voice Dekey feature which gives those radios the ability to interrupt another radio s interruptible voice transmission For this feature the initiating radio is not required to be a member of the voice call that is being interrupted Therefore it is possible to interrupt a voice call and then initiate a new call to a 68007024085 April 2011 34 2 3 4 System Featu
533. ws and this time is dependent on the cadence rate of the subscriber s location request The table below summarizes the amount of time the repeater waits before de allocating windows for a subscriber Update Rate Wait Ulins EMS De allocation minutes 30 seconds 5 1 minute 5 2 minutes 10 4 minutes 20 8 minutes 30 In a subscriber it is highly recommended to keep the Enhanced GPS Revert channel in the Channel Pool in the CPS This prevents the user from accessing the Enhanced GPS Revert channel that may affect GPS reliability A channel can be configured as an Enhanced GPS Revert channel by selecting the field Enhanced GPS in the channel settings In order to send responses to the Enhanced GPS Revert channel the GPS revert channel setting of the home channel has to be set to Enhanced In a multisite system with roaming enabled all sites are recommended to use the same setting and window size as an Enhanced GPS Revert channel This can be configured through the Enhanced GPS Revert channel of the Home channel In a repeater the CPS allows either one or both slots to be configured as Enhanced GPS The window size in the repeaters Enhanced GPS slot should match the window size in the subscribers One slot can be configured for regular Data Revert and the other slot can be configured for Enhanced GPS Revert The repeater CPS also allows a user to choose the maximum percentage of windows that will be
534. y situation i e solves the problem he clears the emergency on the supervisor radio Once the initiator clears his emergency on the initiator radio the emergency is considered over NOTE A radio will not roam while reverted to a channel due to an emergency or when Active Site Search is disabled Reference the site roaming section for details on the interactions between emergency and roaming Each mobile radio can program the Emergency Alarm to any of the programmable buttons whereas for the portable radio the Emergency Alarm can only be programmed to the orange button The Emergency Alarm can also be triggered externally through a footswitch for a mobile application or any other applicable accessory Pressing the emergency button causes the radio to enter emergency mode and begin its emergency process When a user presses the Emergency button the radio gives audible and visual indications to show that it has entered emergency mode There is a CPS configurable option available referred to as Silent Emergency which suppresses all indications of the emergency status on the user s radio This feature is valuable in situations where an indication of an emergency state is not desirable Once the user breaks radio silence by pressing the PTT and speaking the Silent Emergency ends and audible and visual indications return When the user s radio is in the emergency mode various other features are blocked that may distract him from his communi
535. y useful for transporting location responses They are not used for voice communication However Trunked Channels are not exclusively used for transporting voice Data messages from one radio to another and from an Application Server to radio s are always sent via Trunked Channels As Data Revert Channels offload most of the data communication from Trunked Channels they facilitate more voice communication over these channels There must be a Revert Control Station for each Data Revert Channel If one channel of a repeater is used as a Data Revert Channel then the other channel of the repeater is also used as a Data Revert Channel Thus the Revert Control Stations are always in a pair The revert channel s Control Station receives a data message from a radio returns acknowledgement to the radio if required and forwards the message to the Application Server connected to the control station The Revert Control Station then operates in single repeater mode but does not understand the Capacity Plus messages e g System Status CSBK and does not tune to the Rest Channel The revert channel s control stations stay tuned to its assigned revert channel In the GPS Revert feature in a single repeater or an IP Site connect arrangement a radio is programmed with only one revert channel However for Data Revert in Capacity Plus a radio is programmed with a list of the revert channels This allows a radio to look for more than one channel up to 4 cha
536. y Privacy SettingS cc ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenettaaeeeeees 92 2 7 11 Protecting One Group s Message from Another ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 2 7 12 Updating from Basic Privacy to Enhanced Privacy cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeees 93 2 8 Repeater Diagnostics and Control RDAC ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 2 8 1 Connecting Remotely via the Network eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 2 8 2 Connecting Locally via the USB 22222 cs ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 96 2 8 3 Connecting Locally via GPIO Lin S eee cece teeter eeeeeeeeeettanaeeeeeees 97 2 8 3 1 RDAC Local Settings Rear Accessory Port CPS Programmable Pins rirerire epeen pa paea E ea 98 2 8 4 Redundant Repeater Setup cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaanaeeeesseeeees 99 2 8 5 Dual Control Considerations 2 c 2 1 ccceseeoeeneceneesis eee ceeectneeeeenecenegeneceneees 100 2 8 6 General Considerations When Utilizing the RDAC Application to Set Up the Network Connection cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteess 101 2 9 IP Repeater Programming IRP cnc succariessdcnee tiation citer neneeedecets 102 2 9 1 System Configuration for IRP Support eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 102 2 10 Voice Operated Transmission VOX cccceceeee cece cece eeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 2 10 1 Operational DESCHP
537. y be utilized as a signaling path The ETSI DMR Tier 2 standard refers to this capability as Reverse Channel signaling and it is envisioned to be used to deliver important future benefits to professional users such as priority call control remote control of the transmitting radio and Emergency Call pre emption This future capacity for reverse channel signaling is a unique capability of TDMA technology and if supported by your system may be deployed in both repeater and direct talkaround configurations At this time the MOTOTRBO system does NOT support Reverse Channel signaling 2 1 2 5 Two Slot TDMA System Planning Considerations System Planning considerations associated with the increased capacity and the flexibility of the MOTOTRBO two slot TDMA architecture include e Capacity planning e How many voice and data users do you have e What usage profiles are anticipated e How many channels and repeaters are needed These questions are addressed in more detail in System Design Considerations on page 203 e Fleetmapping e How to map users voice services and data services such as messaging or location tracking to channels Voice and data service capabilities are described in more detail in this module and in System Components and Topologies on page 137 Fleetmapping considerations are addressed in more detail in System Design Considerations on page 203 in the MOTOTRBO Systems Training and within the MOTOTRBO r
538. ype l and Type Il monitoring Since FCC Type I and Type II monitoring are not supported in single site analog operation in any of the earlier MOTOTRBO releases it is also not supported in Dynamic Mixed Mode single site operation e Transmit Interrupt feature The Voice Interrupt Emergency Voice Interrupt Remote Voice Dekey and Data Over Voice Interrupt features are presently not supported in Dynamic Mixed Mode systems RDAC over IP feature RDAC over local USB and connections via GPIO are supported RDAC over the network is NOT supported Repeater Knockdown In Dynamic Mixed Mode systems this feature is not supported during an ongoing digital transmission PTT on a 4 wire interface In Dynamic Mixed Mode systems this feature is not supported during a digital repeat operation When operating in IP Site Connect Mode MOTOTRBO combines the logical channels of multiple MOTOTRBO systems operating in digital repeater mode at dispersed locations into one logical channel covering all locations In this mode repeaters across dispersed locations exchange voice and data packets over an IPv4 based back end network There are three main functions of this mode e To increase the RF coverage area of aMOTOTRBO system e To provide voice and data communication between two or more MOTOTRBO single site systems located at geographically separate locations e To provide voice and data communication between two or more MOTOTRBO single site
539. ystem audio quality while comparing good to poor audio quality with strong to weak signal strength Do note that e In very strong signal areas the analog signal because there is no processing may sound slightly better than the digital audio signal e Digital signals increase the effective coverage area above the minimally acceptable audio quality level e Digital signals improve the quality and consistency of the audio throughout the effective coverage area e Digital signals do not necessarily increase the total distance that an RF signal propagates Enhanced Audio Performance Excellent F s n Area of Improved Performance AUDIO QUALITY 3l Acceptable Audio Quality Oe eee eee E UE UEC OU SUPE U CUCU COCO G Strong SIGNAL STRENGTH Weak Figure 2 5 Comparison of Audio Quality versus Signal Strength for Analog and Digital April 2011 68007024085 System Feature Overview 11 2 1 3 2 Predicting Digital Audio Coverage Predicting coverage for a radio site can be complicated There are many factors that affect RF performance prediction and generally the more factors that can be considered the more accurate the prediction of coverage Perhaps the most influential factor is the selection of the RF propagation model and or RF prediction software tools Coverage prediction techniques for analog and digital systems generally follow the same basic procedures and require similar sets of input factors Therefore if
540. zed Data Application Server If a customer requires more wide area capacity then it is possible to add another set of repeaters working in IP Site Connect mode It is possible for the repeaters to share the same Application Server This is shown in the figure below In this case the repeaters at a location may share the same link to the backend network The bandwidth required for communication through the backend network should take this into consideration See Characteristics of Backend Network on page 233 for further details Site 1 Site 2 MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater MOTOTRBO a A KS kpt Digital Repeater MASTER Presence Notifier MOTOTRBO Teter MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater s a Control Station ee ee ee ee ee ee a ee l gt I Text Message 8 digital mode a Dispatch Z Sit 3 m Ite Location Dispatch TX fs RX f Multi Channel Device Driver MOTOTRBO Control Station digital mode Application Server MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater 13 Se MOTOTRBO kE Digital Repeater MASTER MOTOTRBO Control Station WAC Wide Area Channel digital mode MOTOTRBO Digital Repeater Figure 3 35 Multiple Wide Area Systems with Centralized Data Application Server If a customer requires more wide area capacity for location data then it is possible to use one or more wide area channels as GPS Revert

MOTOTRBO System Planner

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents